Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis

Students can Download Accountancy Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis Questions and Answers, Notes Pdf, Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Book Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Financial Statement Analysis Text Book Back Questions and Answers

I. Choose the Correct Answer

12th Accountancy 8th Chapter Question 1.
Which of the following statements is not true?
(a) Notes and schedules also form part of financial statements
(b) The tools of financial statement analysis include common – size statement
(c) Trend analysis refers to the study of movement of figures for one year
(d) The common – size statements show the relationship of various items with some common base, expressed as percentage of the common base
Answer:
(c) Trend analysis refers to the study of movement of figures for one year

12th Accountancy Chapter 8 Question 2.
Balance sheet provides information about the financial position of a business concern ………………
(a) Over a period of time
(b) As on a particular date
(c) For a period of time
(d) For the accounting period
Answer:
(b) As on a particular date

12th Accountancy 8th Chapter Solutions Question 3.
Which of the following tools of financial statement analysis is suitable when data relating to several years are to be analysed?
(a) Cash flow statement
(b) Common size statement
(c) Comparative statement
(d) Trend analysis
Answer:
(d) Trend analysis

Class 12 Accountancy Chapter 8 Solutions Question 4.
The financial statements do not exhibit ………………
(a) Non – monetary data
(b) Past data
(c) Short term data
(d) Long term data
Answer:
(a) Non – monetary data

Accountancy Class 12 Chapter 8 Solutions Question 5.
Which of the following is not a tool of financial statement analysis?
(a) Trend analysis
(b) Common size statement
(c) Comparative statement
(d) Standard costing
Answer:
(d) Standard costing

Accounting Chapter 8 Answer Key Question 6.
The term ‘fund’ refers to ………………
(a) Current liabilities
(b) Working capital
(c) Fixed assets
(d) Non – current assets
Answer:
(b) Working capital

Class 12 Accountancy Chapter 8 Question 7.
Which of the following statements is not true?
(a) All the limitations of financial statements are applicable to financial statement analysis also.
(b) Financial statement analysis is only the means and not an end.
(c) Expert knowledge is not required in analysing the financial statements.
(d) Interpretation of the analysed data involves personal judgement.
Answer:
(c) Expert knowledge is not required in analysing the financial statements

Financial Statements Of A Company Class 12 Solutions Question 8.
A limited company’s sales has increased from ? 1,25,000 to? 1,50,000. How does this appear in comparative income statement?
(a) + 20%
(b) + 120%
(c) – 120 %
(d) – 20 %
Answer:
(a) + 20 %

Financial Statements Questions And Answers Pdf Question 9.
In a common-size balance sheet, if the percentage of non – current assets is 75, what would be the percentage of current assets?
(a) 175
(b) 125
(c) 25
(d) 100
Answer:
(c) 25

Financial Statement Analysis Solutions Pdf Question 10.
Expenses of a business for the first year were ₹ 80,000. In the second year, it was increased to ₹ 88,000. What is the trend percentage in the second year?
(a) 10%
(b) 110%
(c) 90%
(d) 11%
Answer:
(b) 110 %

II. Very Short Answer Questions

Financial Statements Solutions Question 1.
What are financial statements?
Answer:
Financial statements are the statements prepared by the business concerns at the end of the accounting period to ascertain the operating results and the financial position.

Financial Statement Analysis Chapter 8 Solutions Question 2.
List the tools of financial statement analysis.
Answer:

  1. Comparative Statement.
  2. Common Size Statement.
  3. Trend Analysis.
  4. Funds Flow Analysis.
  5. Cash Flow Analysis.

Financial Statement Analysis Solutions Question 3.
What is working capital?
Answer:
Working capital statement or schedule of changes in working is prepared to disclose net changes in working capitals on two specific dates (generally two balance sheet dates). It is prepared from current assets and current liabilities.
Working Capital = Current Assets – Current Liabilities

Financial Statement Analysis Problems And Solutions Pdf Question 4.
When is trend analysis preferred to other tools?
Answer:
Trend analysis discloses the changes in financial and operating data between specific periods when data for more than two years are to be analyzed. It may be difficult to use comparative statement.

III. Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
‘Financial statements are prepared based on the past data’. Explain how this is a limitation?
Answer:
The nature of financial statement is historical. Past cannot be the index of future and cannot be cent percent basis for future estimation, forecasting, budgeting and planning.

Question 2.
Write a short note on cash flow analysis.
Answer:
Cash flow analysis concerned with preparation of cash flow statement which shows the inflow and outflow of cash and cash equivalents in a given period of time. Cash includes cash in hand and demand deposit with banks. Cash equivalents denotes short term investments which can be realised easily within a short period of time without much loss in value. Cash flow analysis helps in assessing the liquidity and solvency of a business concern.

Question 3.
Briefly explain any three limitations of financial statements.
Answer:
1. Lack of qualitative information:
Qualitative information, that is non – monetary information is also important for business decisions. For examole Efficiency of the employees and efficiency of the management. But this is ignored in financial statements.

2. Record of historical data:
Financial statement are prepared based on historical data. They may not reflect the current position.

3. Ignores price level changes:
Adjustments for price level changes are not made in the financial statements. Hence financial statements may not reveal the current position.

Question 4.
Explain the steps involved in preparing comparative statements.
Answer:
Following are the steps to be followed in preparation of comparative statement.

  1. Column 1 : In this column, particulars of items of income statements or balance sheet are written.
  2. Column 2 : Enter absolute amount of year 1.
  3. Column 3 : Enter absolute amount of year 2.
  4. Column 4 : Show the difference in amounts between year 1 and year 2. If there is an increase in year 2, put plus sign and there is a decrease put minus sign.
  5. Column 5 : Show percentage increase or decrease of the difference amount shown in column 4 by dividing the amount shown in column 4 (absolute amount of increase or decrease) by column 2 (year 1 amount)

Percentage increase (or) decrease = 12th Accountancy 8th Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis Samacheer Kalvi

Question 5.
Explain the procedure for preparing common – size statement.
Answer:
Common – size statements can be prepared with three columns. Following are the steps to be followed in preparation of common – size statement.

  1. Column 1. In this column, particulars of items of income statement or balance sheet are written.
  2. Column 2. Enter absolute amount.
  3. Column 3. Choose a common base as 100.

For example Revenue from operations can be taken as the base for income statement and total of balance sheet can be taken as the base for balance sheet. Work out the percentage for all the items of column 2 in terms of the common base and enter them in column 3.

IV Exercises

Question 1.
From the following particulars, prepare comparative income statement of Arul Ltd.
12th Accountancy Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis Samacheer Kalvi
Answer:
Comparative Income Statement Analysis of Arul Ltd.
for the year ended 31.3.2016 to 31.3.2017
12th Accountancy 8th Chapter Solutions Financial Statement Analysis Samacheer Kalvi

Question 2.
From the following particulars, prepare comparative income statement of Barani Ltd.
Class 12 Accountancy Chapter 8 Solutions Financial Statement Analysis Samacheer Kalvi
Answer:
Comparative Income Statement of Barani Ltd. for the year ended 31st March 2017 to 31st March 2018
Accountancy Class 12 Chapter 8 Solutions Financial Statement Analysis Samacheer Kalvi

Question 3.
From the following particulars, prepare comparative income statement of Daniel Ltd.
Accounting Chapter 8 Answer Key Financial Statement Analysis Samacheer Kalvi 12th
Answer:
Comparative Income Statement of Daniel Ltd. for the year ended 31st March 2016 to 31st March 2017
Class 12 Accountancy Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis Samacheer Kalvi

Question 4.
From the following particulars, prepare comparative statement of financial position of Muthu Ltd.
Financial Statements Of A Company Class 12 Solutions Chapter 8 Samacheer Kalvi
Answer:
Comparative Balance Sheet of Muthu Ltd. as on 31st March 2017 to 31st March 2018
Financial Statements Questions And Answers Pdf Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8

Question 5.
From the following particulars, prepare comparative statement of financial position of Kala Ltd.
Financial Statement Analysis Solutions Pdf Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8
Comparative Balance Sheet of Kala Ltd. as on 31st March 2017 and 31st March 2018
Financial Statements Solutions Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8

Question 6.
Prepare common – size income statement for the following particulars of Raja Ltd. for the year ended 31st March, 2017.
Financial Statement Analysis Chapter 8 Solutions Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy
Answer:
Financial Statement Analysis Solutions Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Chapter 8

Question 7.
From the following particulars of Maria Ltd. and Kala Ltd. prepare a common – size income statement for the year ended 31st March, 2019.
Financial Statement Analysis Problems And Solutions Pdf Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8
Answer:
Common Size Income statement for the year ended 31st March 2019
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 14

Question 8.
Prepare common – size income statement for the following particulars of Sam Ltd.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 16
Answer:
Common Size Income statement of Sam Ltd.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 17

Question 9.
Prepare Common – size balance sheet of Meena Ltd. as on 31st March, 2018.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 18
Answer:
Common Size Balance sheet of Meena Ltd. on 31st March 18
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 19

Question 10.
Prepare common – size statement of financial position for the following particulars of Rani Ltd.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 20
Answer:
Common Size Balance sheet of Rani Ltd. as on 31st March 2016 to 31st March 2017
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 21

Question 11.
Prepare common – size statement of financial position for the following particulars of Yasmin Ltd. and Sakthi Ltd.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 22
Common Size statement of Balance sheet
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 23

Question 12.
From the following particulars, calculate the trend percentages of Kala Ltd.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 42
Answer:
Trend Analysis of Kala Ltd Trend Percentage
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 25

Question 13.
From the following particulars, calculate the Trend percentages of Kavitha Ltd.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 26
Answer:
Trend Percentage of Kavitha Ltd (in thousands)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 27

Question 14.
From the following particulars, calculate the trend percentages of Kumar Ltd.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 28
Answer:
Trend Percentage of Kumar Ltd (in thousands ₹)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 29

Question 15.
From the following particulars, calculate the trend percentages of Anu Ltd.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 30
Answer:
Trend Percentage of Anu Ltd (In Thousands)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 31

Question 16.
From the following particulars, calculate the trend percentages of Babu Ltd.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 32
Answer:
Trend Percentage of Babu Ltd (In Thousands)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 33

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Financial Statement Analysis Additional Questions and Answers

I. Choose the correct answer

Question 1.
Financial statements are meaningful and useful only when they are ……………..
(a) verified
(b) presented to owners
(c) Analysed and Interpreted
(d) Published
Answer:
(c) Analysed and Interpreted

Question 2.
Interpretation of Financial statements includes processes like ……………..
(a) Journalising
(b) Ledger writing
(c) Establishing relationship between the account data
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Establishing relationship between the account data

Question 3.
Trend analysis is significant for ……………..
(a) Profit planning
(b) Working capital management
(c) Capital rationing
(d) Forecasting and Budgeting
Answer:
(d) Forecasting and Budgeting

Question 4.
The three most useful general purpose financial statements for management are ……………..
(a) Income statement, Statement of Retained Earning and Balance Sheet
(b) Income statement, Balance sheet, and statement of changes in financial position
(c) Income statemen, Statement of Retained Earnings, and Funds flow statement
(d) Statement of Retained Earnings, Balance sheet and Funds flow statement
Answer:
(b) Income statement, Balance sheet, and statement of changes in financial position

Question 5.
In the case of limited company, the term financial statement includes ……………..
(a) Profit and Loss Account and Balance Sheet
(b) Profit and Loss Account, Profit and loss Appropriation Account and Balance Sheet
(c) Balance Sheet
Answer:
(b) Profit and Loss Account, Profit and loss Appropriation Account and Balance Sheet

Question 6.
The term Current Assets does not include ……………..
(a) Payments in Advance
(b) Bills Receivable
(c) Long – Term Deferred Changes
Answer:
(c) Long – Term Deferred Changes

Question 7.
The following is a recorded fact ……………..
(a) Market value of Investment
(b) Debtors
(c) Replacement cost of machinery
Answer:
(b) Debtors

Question 8.
The term Fixed Assets includes ……………..
(a) Stock – in – Trade
(b) Furniture
(c) Payments in Advance
Answer:
(b) Furniture

II. Fill in the blanks

Question 9.
The two statements which are generally included in the definition of financial statements are ……………..
Answer:
Income statement and Balance sheet.

Question 10.
Income statement …………….. the revenues and costs incurred in the process of earning revenues.
Answer:
Matches.

Question 11.
Balance Sheet is a statement of …………….. of a business at a specific moment of time.
Answer:
Financial position.

Question 12.
Assets and liabilities in a Balance sheet may be arranged either according …………….. order or …………….. order.
Answer:
Liquidity, permanency.

Question 13.
Financial statements disclose only …………….. facts.
Answer:
Monetary.

Question 14.
Profit and loss account also called as …………….. statement.
Answer:
Income.

Question 15.
Rearrangement of figures is necessary for …………….. and ………………
Answer:
Analysis, Interpretation.

Question 16.
Analysis of Financial Statements is meant for deriving additional information for various …………….. parties.
Answer:
interested.

III. True or False

Question 17.
Financial statement analysis is carried out as per Government regulation.
Answer:
False.

Question 18.
Financial statement analysis is performed with the help of various techniques and tools.
Answer:
True.

Question 19.
Common – size statements is a technique used in Financial statement analysis.
Answer:
True.

IV. Short answer questions

Question 1.
What are the features of financial statements?
Answer:

  1. Financial statements are generally prepared at the end of an accouning period based on transactions recorded in the books of accounts.
  2. These statements are prepared for the organisation as a whole.
  3. Information is presented in a meaningful way by grouping items of similar nature such as fixed assets and current assets.
  4. Financial statements are prepared based on historical cost.
  5. Financial statements are prepared based on accounting principles and Accounting standards, which make financial statements comparable and realistic.
  6. Financial statements involve personal judgement in certain cases. For example, selection of method of depreciation and percentage of reserves, etc.

Question 2.
Explain the significance of financial statements.
Answer:

  1. To Management: Financial statements provide information to the management to take decision and to have control over business activities, in various areas.
  2. To Shareholders: Financial statements help the shareholders to know whether the business has potential for growth and to decide to continue their share holding.
  3. To potential investors: Financial statements help to value the securities and compare it with those of other business concerns before making their investment decisions.
  4. To Creditors: Creditors can get information about the ability of the business to repay the debts from financial statements.
  5. To Bankers: Information given in the financial statements is significant to the bankers to assess whether there is a adequate security to cover the amount of the loan or overdraft.
  6. To Government: Financial statements are significant to government to assess the tax liability of business concerns and to frame and amend industrial policies.
  7. To Employees: Through the financial statements, the employees can assess the ability of the business to pay salaries and whether they have future growth in the concern.

Question 3.
Explain the objectives of financial statement analysis.
Answer:

  1. To analyse the profitability and earing capacity.
  2. To study the long term and short term solvency of the business.
  3. To determine the efficiency in operations and use of assets.
  4. To determine the efficiency of the management and employees.
  5. To determine the trend in sales and production, etc.
  6. To forecast for future and prepare budgets.
  7. To make inter – firm and intra – firm comparisons.

V. Exercise

Question 1.
From the following prepare “Comparative Statement of Proft and Loss” of Good Service Ltd.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 34
Answer:
Comparative Statement of Profit and Loss for the years ended 31st March 2012 and 2013
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 35

Question 2.
Prepare Common – size statement of Genius Paper work Ltd.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 36
Answer:
Common – size Income Statement for the year ended 31st March 2016 and 2017
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 37

Question 3.
From the following figures compute trend percentage using 2005 as the base year.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 38
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 39

Question 4.
From the following balance sheet extracts, compute trend percentage and comment on the liquidity positon of X ltd. You may take 1990 as base year.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 40
Answer:
Statement showing Trend Percentages
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 8 Financial Statement Analysis 41

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements – I

Are you searching for the Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chapter Wise Solutions PDF? Then, get your Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chapter Wise Solutions PDF for free on our website. Students can Download Chemistry Chapter 2 p-Block Elements – I Questions and Answers, Notes Pdf, Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements – I

All concepts are explained in an easy way on our website. So, students can easily learn and practice Tamilnadu State Board 12th Chemistry Chapter 2 p-Block Elements – I Question and Answers. You can enjoy the digitized learning with the help of the Tamilnadu State Board Chemistry Online Material.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry p-Block Elements – I TextBook Evalution

I. Choose the correct answer:

12th Chemistry Chapter 2 Book Back Answers Question 1.
An aqueous solution of borax is …………
(a) neutral
(b) acidic
(c) basic
(d) amphoteric
Answer:
(c) basic.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-1

12th Chemistry Lesson 2 Book Back Answers Question 2.
Boric acid is an acid because its molecule …………
(a) contains replaceable H+ ion
(b) gives up a proton
(c) combines with proton to form water molecule
(d) accepts OH from water, releasing proton.
Answer:
(d) accepts OH from water, releasing proton

Hint: B(OH)3 + H2O \(\rightleftharpoons\) [B(OH)4]+ H+

12th Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Question 3.
Which among the following is not a borane?
(a) B2H6
(b) B3H6
(C) B4H10
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) B2H6
Hint:

  • Nido borane – BnH4+n
  • aracno borane – BnH6+n , B3H6 is not a borane

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Question 4.
Which of the following metals has the largest abundance in the earth’s crust?
(a) Aluminium
(b) calcium
(c) Magnesium
(d) Sodium
Answer:
(a) Aluminium

Samacheer Kalvi Guru 12th Chemistry Question 5.
In diborane, the number of electrons that accounts for banana bonds is …………
(a) six
(b) two
(c) four
(d) three
Answer:
(c) four

Hint: There are two 3c – 2e bonds i.e., the bonding in the bridges account for 4 electrons.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Question 6.
The element that does not show catenation among the following p-block elements is …………
(a) Carbon
(b) silicon
(c) Lead
(d) germanium
Answer:
(c) Lead

12th Chemistry Solutions Samacheer Kalvi Question 7.
Carbon atoms in fullerene with formula C60 have …………
(a) sp3 hybridised
(b) sp hybridised
(c) sp2 hybridised
(d) partially sp2 and partially sp3 hybridised
Answer:
(c) sp2 hybridised

12 Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Question 8.
Oxidation state of carbon in its hydrides …………
(a) +4
(b) -4
(c) +3
(d) +2
Answer:
(a) +4
Hint: CH4+in which the oxidation state of carbon is 4.

Samacheer 12 Chemistry Solutions Question 9.
The basic structural unit of silicates is …………
(a) (SiO3)2-
(b) (SiO4)2-
(c) (SiO)
(d) (SiO4)4-
Answer:
(d) (SiO4)4-

Chemistry Class 12 Samacheer Kalvi Question 10.
The repeating unit in silicone is …………
12th Chemistry Chapter 2 Book Back Answers P-Block Elements - I Samacheer Kalvi
Answer:
12th Chemistry Lesson 2 Book Back Answers P-Block Elements - I Samacheer Kalvi

Class 12 Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Question 11.
Which of these is not a monomer for a high molecular mass silicone polymer?
(a) Me3SiCl
(b) PhSiCl3
(c) MeSiCl3
(d) Me3SiCl3
Answer:
(a) Me3SiCl

Samacheerkalvi.Guru 12th Chemistry Question 12.
Which of the following is not sp2 hybridised?
(a) Graphite
(b) graphene
(c) Fullerene
(d) dry ice
Answer:
(a) dry ice
Hint: dry ice – solid CO2 in which carbon is in sp hybridized state

Question 13.
The geometry at which carbon atom in diamond are bonded to each other is …………
(a) Tetrahedral
(b) hexagonal
(c) Octahedral
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) Tetrahedral

Question 14.
Which of the following statements is not correct?
(a) Beryl is a cyclic silicate
(b) Mg2SiO4 is an orthosilicate
(c) SiO44- is the basic structural unit of silicates
(d) Feldspar is not aluminosilicate
Answer:
(d) Feldspar is a three dimensional silicate

Question 15.
AlF3 is soluble in HF only in the presence of KF. It is due to the formation of ………… [NEET]
(a) K3[AlF3H3]
(b) K3[AlF6]
(C) AlH3
(d) K[AlF3H]
Answer:
(6)K3[AlF6]
Hint: AlF3 + 3KF → K3[AlF6]

Question 16.
Match items in column – I with the items of column – II ans assign the correct code
12th Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Solutions Chapter 2 P-Block Elements - I
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 P-Block Elements - I
Answer:
(a) A – 2, B – 1, C – 4, D – 3

Question 17.
Duralumin is an alloy of …………
(a) Cu, Mn
(b) Cu, Al, Mg
(c) Al, Mn
(d) Al, Cu, Mn, Mg
Answer:
(d) Al, Cu, Mn, Mg
Hint: Al – 95% , Cu – 4% , Mn – 0.5% , Mg – 1.1 %

Question 18.
Thermodynamically the most stable form of carbon is …………
(a) Diamond
(b) graphite
(c) Fullerene
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) graphite

Question 19.
The compound that is used in nuclear reactors as protective shields and control rods is …………
(a) Metal borides
(b) metal oxides
(c) Metal carbonates
(d) metal carbide
Answer:
(a) Metal borides

Question 20.
The stability of +1 oxidation state increases in the sequence …………
(a) Al < Ga < In < Tl
(b) Tl < In < Ga < Al
(c) In < Tl < Ga < Al
(d) Ga< In < Al < Tl
Answer:
(a) Al < Ga < In < Tl

II. Answer the following questions:

Question 1.
Write a short note on anamolous properties of the first element of p-block.
Answer:
In p-block elements the first member of each group differs from the other elements of the corresponding group. The following factors are responsible for this anomalous behaviour.

  1. Small size of the first member.
  2. High ionisation enthalpy and high electronegativity.
  3. Absence of d-orbitals in their valance shell.

The first member of the group-13, boron is a metalloid while others are reactive metals. Moreover, boron shows diagonal relationship with silicon of group -14. The oxides of boron and silicon are similar in their acidic nature.

Question 2.
Describe briefly allotropism in p- block elements with specific reference to carbon.
Answer:
Some elements exist in more than one crystalline or molecular forms in the same physical state. This phenomenon is called allotropism. Most common allotropes of carbon are,

  1. Graphite
  2. Diamond
  3. Fullerenes
  4. Carbon nanotubes
  5. Graphene.

1. Graphite:

  • It is the most stable allotropic form of carbon at normal temperature and pressure.
  • It is soft and conducts electricity.
  • It is composed of flat two dimensional sheets of carbon atoms.
  • Each sheet is a hexagonal net of sp2 hybridised carbon atoms with a C – C bond length of 1.41 A.
  • Structure of graphite,

Samacheer Kalvi Guru 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 P-Block Elements - I

2. Diamond:

  • It is very hard.
  • The carbon atoms in diamond are sp1 hybridised, with a C – C bond length of 1.54 A.
  • In the diamond, carbon atoms are arranged in tetrahedral manner.
  • Structure of Diamond,

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 P-Block Elements - I

3. Fullerenes:

  • It is newly synthesised allotropes of carbon.
  • The C60 molecules have a soccer ball like structure and is called buckminster fullerene or buckyballs.
  • It has a fused ring structure consists of 20 six membered rings and 12 five membered rings.
  • Each carbon atom is sp2 hybridised.
  • The C – C bond distance is 1.44 A and C = C distance is 1.38 A.
  • Structure of fullerene,

12th Chemistry Solutions Samacheer Kalvi Chapter 2 P-Block Elements - I

4. Carbon nanotubes:

  1. It is recently discovered allotropes, have graphite like tubes with fullerene ends.
  2. These nanotubes are stronger than steel and conduct electricity.
  3. Structure of Carbon nanotubes.

12 Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Solutions Chapter 2 P-Block Elements - I

5. Graphene:

  • It has a single planar sheet of sp2 hybridised carbon atoms that are densely packed in a honeycomb crystals lattice.
  • Structure of Graphene,

Samacheer 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 P-Block Elements - I

Question 3.
Boron does not react directly with hydrogen. Suggest one method to prepare diborane from BF3.
Answer:
Boron does not react directly with hydrogen. However it forms a variety of hydrides called boranes. Treatment of gaseous boron trifluoride with sodium hydride around 450 K gives diborane.
Chemistry Class 12 Samacheer Kalvi Chapter 2 P-Block Elements - I

Question 4.
Give the uses of Borax.
Answer:
Uses of borax:

  • Borax is used for the identification of coloured metal ions.
  • In the manufacture optical and borosilicate glass, enamels and glazes for pottery.
  • It is also used as a flux in metallurgy and also acts as a good preservative.

Question 5.
What is catenation ? describe briefly the catenation property of carbon.
Answer:
Catenation:
It is the phenomenon of an atom to form a strong covalent bond with the atoms of itself. Carbon shares the property of catenation to maximum extent because it is small in size and can form pn-pn multiple bonds to itself. The following conditions are necessary for catenation.

  1. The valency of element is greater than or equal to two.
  2. Element should have an ability to bond with itself.
  3. The self bond must be as strong as its bond with other elements.
  4. Kinetic inertness of catenated compound towards other molecules. Carbon possesses all the above properties and forms a wide range of compounds with itself.

Question 6.
Write a note on Fisher tropsch synthesis.
Answer:
The reaction of carbon monoxide with hydrogen at a pressure of less than 50 atm using metal catalysts at 500-700 K yields saturated and unsaturated hydrocarbons.
Class 12 Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Chapter 2 P-Block Elements - I

Question 7.
Give the structure of CO and CO2.
Answer:
Structure of CO:
Samacheerkalvi.Guru 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 P-Block Elements - I
Structure of CO2:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-14

Question 8.
Give the uses of silicones.
Answer:
Uses of silicones:

  1. Silicones are used for low temperature lubrication and in vacuum pumps, high temperature oil baths etc.
  2. They are used for making water proofing clothes.
  3. They are used as insulting material in electrical motor and other appliances
  4. They are mixed with paints and enamels to make them resistant towards high temperature, sunlight, dampness and chemicals.

Question 9.
AlCl3 behaves like a lewis acid. Substantiate this statement.
Answer:
In AlCl3, Al in electron deficient it needs two electrons to complete octet so it act as lewis acid. AlCl3 usually exist as a dimer to achieve octet by bridged Cl atom electron deficient compounds are lewis acids.

Question 10.
Describe the structure of diborane.
Answer:
In diborane two BH2 units are linked by two bridged hydrogens. Therefore, it has eight B-H bonds. However, diborane has only 12 valance electrons and are not sufficient to form normal covalent bonds. The four terminal B-H bonds are normal covalent bonds (two centre – two electron bond or 2c-2e bond). The remaining four electrons have to used for the bridged bonds, i.e. two three centred B-H-B bonds utilise two electrons each.

Hence, these bonds are three centre – two electron bonds. The bridging hydrogen atoms are in a plane as shown in the figure. In dibome, the boron is sp3 hybridised. Three of the four sp3 hybridised orbitals contains single electron and the fourth orbital is empty.

Two of the half filled hybridised orbitals of each boron overlap with the two hydrogens to form four terminal 2c-2e bonds, leaving one empty and one half filled hybridised orbitals on each boron. The Three centre – two electron bonds, B-H-B bond formation involves overlapping the half filled hybridised orbital of one boron, the empty hybridised orbital of the other boron and the half filled 1s orbital of hydrogen.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-15

Question 11.
Write a short note on hydroboration.
Answer:
Diborane adds on to alkenes and alkynes in ether solvent at room temperature. This reaction is called as hydroboration and is highly used in synthetic organic chemistry especially for anti-Markovnikov addition.
B2H6 + 3RCH = CHR → B( CH2 – CH2R )3+ 6H2

Question 12.
Give one example for each of the following:

  1. icosogens
  2. tetragen
  3. prictogen
  4. chalcogen

Answer:
1. Icosogens:

  • Boron
  • Aluminium
  • Gallium

2. Tetragen:

  • Carbon
  • Silicon
  • Germanium

3. Prictogen:

  • Oxygen
  • Sulfur
  • Selenium

4. Chalcogen:

  • Fluorine
  • Chlorine
  • Bromine

Question 13.
Write a note on metallic nature of p-block elements.
Answer:

  1. The tendency of an element to form a cation by loosing electrons is known as electro¬positive or metallic character.
  2. This character depends on the ionisation energy.
  3. Generally on descending a group the ionisation energy decreases and hence the metallic character increases.

In p-block, the elements present in lower left part are metals while the elements in the upper right part are non metals. Elements of group 13 have metallic character except the first element boron which is a metalloid, having properties intermediate between the metal and nonmetals. The atomic radius of boron is very small and it has relatively high nuclear charge and these properties are responsible for its nonmetallic character.

In the subsequent groups the non-metallic character increases. In group 14 elements, carbon is a nonmetal while silicon and germanium are metalloids. In group 15, nitrogen and phosphorus are non metals and arsenic & antimony are metalloids. In group 16, oxygen, sulphur and selenium are non metals and tellurium is a metalloid. All the elements of group 17 and 18 are non metals.

Question 14.
Complete the following reactions:
(a) B(OH)3 + NH3
(b) Na2B4O7 + H2SO4+ H2O →
(c) B2H6 + 2NaOH + 2H2O →
(d) B2H6 + CH3OH →
(e) BF3 + 9H2O →
(f) HCOOH + H2SO4
(g) SiCl4 + NH3
(h) SiCl4 + C2H5OH →
(i) B + NaOH →
(j) H2B4O7 \(\underrightarrow { Red\quad hot }\)

Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-16

Question 15.
How will you identify borate radical?
Answer:
When boric acid or borate salt is heated with ethyl alcohol in presence of concentrated H2SO4, an ester triethyl borate is formed. The Vapour of this ester burns with a green edged flame and this reaction is used to identify the presence of borate.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-17

Question 16.
Write a note on zeolites.
Answer:
Zeolites:

  1. Zeolites are three dimensional crystalline solids containing aluminium, silicon and oxygen in their regular three dimensional framework.
  2. They are hydrated sodium alumino silicates with general formula, Na2O. (Al2O3). x(SiO2)y(H2O) (x = 2 to 10; y = 2 to 6)
  3. Zeolites have porous structure in which the monovalent sodium ions and water molecules are loosely held.
  4. The Si and Al atoms are tetrahederally coordinated with each other through shared oxygen atoms.
  5. Zeolites structure looks like a honeycomb consisting of a network of interconnected tunnels and cages.
  6. Zeolite crystal to act as a molecular sieve. They helps to remove permanent hardness of water.

Question 17.
How will you convert boric acid to boron nitride?
Answer:
Fusion of urea with boric acid B(OH)3, in an atmosphere of ammonia at 800 – 1200 K gives
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-18

Question 18.
A hydride of 2nd period alkali metal
(A) on reaction with compound of Boron
(B) to give a reducing agent
(C) identify A, B and C.
Answer:

  1. A hydride of 2nd period alkali metal (A) is lithium hydride (LiH).
  2. Lithium hydride (A) reacts with diborane (B) to give lithiumborohydride (C) which is act as reducing agent.
    Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-19

(A) Lithium hydride – LiH
(B) Diborane – B2H6
(C) Lithium borohydride – LiBH4

Question 19.
A double salt which contains fourth period alkali metal
(A) on heating at 500K gives
(B). Aqueous solution of (B) gives white precipitate with BaCl2 and gives a red colour compound with alizarin. Identify A and B.
Answer:
1. A double salt which contains fourth period alkali metal (A) is potash alum
K2SO4. Al2(SO4)3. 24H2O

2. On heating potash alum (A) 500 k give anhydrous potash alum (or) burnt alum (B).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-20

3. Aqueous solution of burnt alum, has sulphates ion, potassium ion and aluminium ion. Sulphate ion reacts with BaCl2 to form white precipitate of Barium Sulphate
(SO4)2 + BaCl2 → BaSO4 + 2Cl
Aluminium ion reacts with alizarin solution to give a red colour compound.

Question 20.
CO is a reducing agent. Justify with an example.
Answer:
Both thermodynamic and kinetic factors make carbon monoxide (CO) a better reducing agent. When CO is used to reduce a metal oxide, it gets oxidized to CO2 Thermodynamically, CO2 is much more stable than CO. For example,
CO + Fe2O3 → 2Fe + 3CO2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry p-Block Elements – I Evaluate yourself

Question 1.
Why group 18 elements are called inert gases? Write the general electronic configuration of group 18 elements.
Answer:
The elements of group-18 have completely filled s and p orbitals, hence they are more stable and have least reactivity. Therefore group-18 elements are called inert gases. ns2np6 is the general electronic configuration of group elements.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry p-Block Elements – I Additional Questions

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry p-Block Elements – I 1 Mark Questions and Answers

I. Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
More common oxidation state for halogens is …………
(a) +1
(b) +2
(c) -1
(d) -2
Answer:
(c) -1

Question 2.
Electronic configuration of noble gases is …………
(a) ns2
(b) ns2np5
(c) ns1np6
(d) ns2np6
Answer:
(d) ns2np6

Question 3.
Noble gases are chemically inert. This is due to …………
(a) unstable electronic configuration
(b) stable electronic configuration
(c) only filled p-orbital
(d) only filled 5-orbital
Answer:
(b) stable electronic configuration

Question 4.
Consider the following statements.
(i) The first member of the group-13, boron is a metalloid while others are reactive metals.
(ii) The oxides of boron and silicon are similar in their acidic nature.
(iii) Both boron and silicon form metallic hydrides.

Which of the above statement(s) is/are not correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (ii) only
(c) (ii) and (iii)
(d) (iii) only
Answer:
(d) (iii) only

Question 5.
Which element has a greater tendency to form a chain of bonds with itself?
(a) Boron
(b) Silicon
(c) Tin
(d) Carbon
Answer:
(d) Carbon

Question 6.
Which one of the following is the strongest oxidising agent?
(a) Fluorine
(b) Chlorine
(c) Bromine
(d) Iodine
Answer:
(a) Fluorine

Question 7.
Some elements exist in more than one crystalline or molecular forms in the same physical state is called …………
(a) isomerism
(b) allotropism
(c) isomorphism
(d) isoelectronics
Answer:
(b) allotropism

Question 8.
How many allotropes possible for boron?
(a) 1
(b) 4
(c) 6
(d) 7
Answer:
(c) 6

Question 9.
Important ore of boron is …………
(a) bauxite
(b) borosilicate
(c) borax
(d) P-tetragonal boron
Answer:
(c) borax

Question 10.
Less reactive elements in boron family is …………
(a) Boron
(b) Aluminium
(c) Gallium
(d) Thallium
Answer:
(b) Aluminium

Question 11.
More toxic element in boron family is …………
(a) Boron
(b) Aluminium
(c) Gallium
(d) Thallium
Answer:
(d) Thallium

Question 12.
Boron does not …………
(a) Oxygen
(b) Hydrogen
(c) Acids
(d) Alkali
Answer:
(b) Hydrogen

Question 13.
Borontrifluoride reacts with sodium hydride at 450 K gives …………
(a) diborane
(b) tetraborane
(c) pentaborane
(d) decaborane
Answer:
(a) diborane

Question 14.
2B + N2 \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) A . Identify A
(a) BN3
(b) B3N
(c) (BN)3
(d) BN
Answer:
(d) BN

Question 15.
Boron reacts with fused sodium hydroxide to forms …………
(a) Borax
(b) Boric acid
(c) Sodium borate
(d) Sodium tetraborate
Answer:
(c) Sodium borate

Question 16.
Which isotope is used as moderator in nuclear reactors?
(a) 10B5
(b) nC6
(c) 4He2
(d) 40Ca2
Answer:
(a) 10B5

Question 17.
Borax is ………… in nature.
(a) basic
(b) acidic
(c) amphoteric
(d) chemically inert
Answer:
(a) basic

Question 18.
The compound used as a flux in metallurgy?
(a) Boron nitride
(b) Boron oxide
(c) Boron fluoride
(d) Borax
Answer:
(d) Borax

Question 19.
The trialkylborate on reaction with sodiumhydride in tetrahydrofuran to form …………
(a) NaBH4
(b) Na[BH(OR)3]
(c) Na[B(OR)3]
(d) Na[BH(OR)3]
Answer:
(b) Na[BH(OR)3]

Question 20.
Compounds used as an eye lotion …………
(a) H3BO3
(b) HBO2
(c) H2B4O7
(d) B2O3
Answer:
(a) H3BO3

Question 21.
Which one of the following is highly reactive compound?
(a) B2OH3
(b) H2BO3
(c) HBO2
(d) B2H6
Answer:
(d) B2H6

Question 22.
B2H6 + 6CH3OH → A Identify A
(a) B2O3
(b) CH3OB
(c) CH3OH
(d) B(OCH3)3
Answer:
(d) B(OCH3)3

Question 23.
Which one of the following is called as inorganic benzene?
(a) B2H6
(b) BN
(c) H2B4O7
(d) B3N3H6
Answer:
(d) B3N3H6

Question 24.
Compound contains two centred – two electron bond (2c-2e) is …………
(a) B6H11
(b) B5H9
(c) B2H6
(d) B10H11
Answer:
(c) B2H6

Question 25.
Diborane reacts with excess ammonia at high temperature to give …………
(a) Boron nitride
(b) Boron oxide
(c) Borazole
(d) Diborane diammonate
Answer:
(c) Borazole

Question 26.
Consider the following statements.
(i) Diborane contains two centre-two electron bond.
(ii) In diborane, the boron has sp3 hybridis ed.
(iii) Diborane has two terminal B – H bonds and four B – H – B bonds.

Which of the above statement(s) is/are correct.
(a) (i) and (iii)
(b) (ii) and (iii)
(c) (i) only
(d) (i) and (ii)
Answer:
(d) (i) and (ii)

Question 27.
Compound used for propellant is …………
(a) BN
(b) H2B4O7
(c) B2H2
(d) Borax
Answer:
(c) B2H2

Question 28.
Which one of the following is double salt?
(a) Potash alum
(b) Potassium sulphate
(c) Aluminium Sulphate
(d) Ammonium sulphate
Answer:
(a) Potash alum

Question 29.
Consider the following statements.
(i) Alums are more soluble in hot water than in cold water.
(ii) Alums are more soluble in cold water than in hot water.
(iii) Potash alum is employed a styptic agent to arrest bleeding.

Which of the above statement(s) is/are not correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (ii) only
(c) (iii) only
(d) (i), (ii) and (iii)
Answer:
(b) (ii) only

Question 30.
The structure of graphite is …………
(a) planner
(b) hexagonal
(c) octahedral
(d) bucky balls
Answer:
(b) hexagonal

Question 31.
Which one of the following is used as a lubricant?
(a) Graphite
(b) Diamond
(c) Fullerene
(d) Graphene
Answer:
(a) Graphite

Question 32.
Which one of the following carbon allotrope is very hard?
(a) Graphite
(b) Diamond
(c) Fullerene
(d) Graphene
Answer:
(b) Diamond

Question 33.
Recently discovered allotropes of carbon is …………
(a) Graphite
(b) Diamond
(c) Carbon nanotubes
(d) Fullerenes
Answer:
(c) Carbon nanotubes

Question 34.
CO and N2 mixture is …………
(a) natural gas
(b) producer gas
(c) water gas
(d) LPG
Answer:
(b) producer gas

Question 35.
Syn gas is …………
(a) CO + N2
(b) CO + H2
(c) CO2 + H2
(d) CO2 + N2
Answer:
(b) CO + H2

Question 36.
Ethene is mixed with carbon monoxide and hydrogen gas to produce propanal is known as …………
(a) Oxo process
(b) McAfee process
(c) Wacker process
(d) Haber process
Answer:
(a) Oxo process

Question 37.
………… is a good reducing agent.
(a) CO
(b) CO2
(c) [Cr(CO)6]
(d) [Ni(CO)4]
Answer:
(a) CO

Question 38.
Critical temperature of CO2 is ………..
(a) -31°C
(b) -13°C
(c) 31°C
(d) 13°C
Answer:
(c)31°C

Question 39.
Which one of the following compound is important for photosynthesis?
(a) CO
(b) CO2
(c) COCl2
(d) C
Anwer:
(b) CO

Question 40.
General empirical formula of silicone is ………..
(a) (R2SiO)
(b) (RSiO)
(c) (R2CO)
(d) (RSiH)
Answer:
(a) (R2SiO)

Question 41.
Consider the following statements.
(i) All Silicones are hydrophilic in nature.
(ii) Silicones are thermal and electrical insulators.
(iii) Chemically silicones are highly reactive.

Which of the above statement(s) is/are not correct?
(a) (i) and (ii)
(b) (i) and (iii)
(c) (ii) and (iii)
(d) (ii) only
Answer:
(b) (i) and (iii)

Question 42.
Silicate contains ……….. silicon and oxygen in units.
(a) [SiO2]4-
(b) [SiO2]
(c) [SiO2]2-
(d) [SiO2]
Answer:
(a) [SiO2]4-

Question 43.
Ortho silicates are also called as ………..
(a) Ino silicates
(b) Soro silicates
(c) Neso silicates
(d) Cyclic silicates
Answer:
(c) Neso silicates

Question 44.
Example of Ring silicate is ………..
(a) Olivine
(b) Beryl
(c) Spodumene
(d) Asbestos
Answer:
(b) Beryl

Question 45.
Pick out the three dimensional silicates?
(a) Talc
(b) Mica
(c) Quartz
(d) Asbestos
Answer:
(c) Quartz

Question 46.
Compound used to remove the permanent hardness of water is ………..
(a) Zeolite
(b) Feldspar
(c) Talc
(d) Mica
Answer:
(a) Zeolite

II. Fill in the blanks:

  1. …………… is the general electronic configuration of tetragen elements.
  2. Boron and silicon form …………… hydrides.
  3. …………… is most reactive element among the halogens.
  4. Most stable oxidation state of aluminium is ……………
  5. General formula of metal boride is ……………
  6. Boron has the capacity to absorb ……………
  7.  …………… is used as a rocket fuel igniter.
  8. …………… is essential for the cell walls of plants.
  9. …………… is a chemical formula of boron.
  10. …………… is used for the identification of coloured metal ions.
  11. …………… is a colourless transparent crystal.
  12. Boric acid has a …………… structure.
  13. Boric acid consists of …………… unit.
  14. On heating magnesium boride with HCl a mixture of volatile …………… are obtained.
  15. Diborane reacts with methylalcohol to give ……………
  16. Diborane has …………… B – H bonds.
  17. In diborane, the boron is …………… hybridised.
  18.  …………… is inorganic benzene.
  19. Boron trifluoride has a …………… geometry.
  20. Anhydrous aluminium chloride is a …………… substance.
  21. With excess of NaOH, aluminium chloride produces ……………
  22. …………… is used for the manufacture of petrol by cracking the mineral oils.
  23. …………… is used for water proofing and textiles.
  24. ……………is the most stable allotropic form of carbon at normal temperature and pressure.
  25. …………… is allotropic form of carbon has aromatic character.
  26. Graphene has …………… lattice.
  27. Carbonyl chloride is a …………… gas.
  28. Equimolar mixture of hydrogen and carbonmonoxide is called as ……………
  29. Producer gas is a mixture of …………… and ……………
  30. Aqueous solution of carbon dioxide forms ……………
  31. …………… are high temperature polymers.
  32. The viscosity of silicon oil remains ……………
  33.  …………… are used as insulating material.
  34. In beryl, each aluminium is surrounded by ……………
  35. …………… is carcinogenic silicates.
  36. Three dimensional by replacing units by ……………
  37. …………… crystal to act as a molecular sieve.
  38. Borax is a sodium salt of ……………

Answers:

  1. ns2np2
  2. covalent
  3. Fluorine
  4. +3
  5. MxBy
  6. neutrons
  7. Amorphous boron
  8. Boron
  9. Na2B4O7. 10H2O
  10. Borax
  11. Boric acid
  12. two dimensional layered
  13. [BO3]3-
  14. borones
  15. trimethylborate
  16. eight
  17. sp3
  18. Borazine
  19. planar
  20. hygroscopic
  21. Sodium meta aluminate
  22. AlCF
  23. Potash alum
  24. Graphite
  25. Fullerene
  26. honey comb nitrogen
  27. poisonous
  28. water gas
  29. carbonmonoxide, nitrogen
  30. carbonic acid
  31. silicones
  32. constant
  33. Silicones
  34. six oxygen
  35. Asbestos
  36. [SiO4]4-; [AlO4]5-
  37. Zeolite
  38. tetraboric acid

III. Match the following:

Question 1.
(i) Tetragens – (a) Oxygen
(ii) Icosagens – (b) Carbon
(iii) Chalcogens – (c) Nitrogen
(iv) Pnictogens – (d) Boron
Answer:
(i) – (b)
(ii) – (d)
(iii) – (a)
(iv) – (c)

Question 2.
(i) Borax – (a) Na2B4O7
(ii) Prismatic form – (b) Na2B4O7. 5H2O
(iii) Jeweller borax – (c) Na2B4O7. 10H2O
(iv) Borax glass – (d) [B4O5(OH)4]2
Answer:
(i) – (c)
(ii) – (d)
(iii) – (b)
(iv) – (a)

Question 3.
(i) Boron – (a) Optical
(ii) Borax – (b) Neutron absorber
(iii) Boric acid – (c) Welding torches
(iv) Diborane – (d) Eye lotion
Answer:
(i) – (b)
(ii) – (a)
(iii) – (d)
(iv) – (c)

Question 4.
(i) Graphene – (a) Honeycomb crystal
(ii) Diamond – (b) Aromatic character
(iii) Fullerene – (c) Lubricant
(iv) Graphite – (d) Very hard
Answer:
(i) – (c)
(ii) – (d)
(iii) – (b)
(iv) – (a)

Question 5.
(i) Ortho silicate
(ii) Pyro silicate
(iii) Cyclic silicate
(iv) Tecto silicate
Answer:
(i) – (d)
(ii) – (a)
(iii) – (b)
(iv) – (c)

IV. Assertion and reason:

Note:
In the following questions a statement of assertion followed by a statement of reason is given. Choose the correct answer out of the following choices.
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A.
(b) A and R are correct and R not explains A.
(c) A is correct but R is wrong.
(d) A is wrong but R is correct.

Question 1.
Assertion (A) – Noble gases are least reactivity.
Reason (R) – Noble gases have completely filled s and p-orbital and attain stable electronic configuration.
Answer:
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A.

Question 2.
Assertion (A) – Both boron and silicon form covalent hydrides.
Reason (R) – Boron does not shows diagonal relationship with silicon of group 14.
Answer:
(c) A is correct but R is wrong.

Question 3.
Assertion (A) – Fluorine is most reactive element among the halogens.
Reason (R) – Fluorine has minimum bond dissociation energy.
Answer:
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A.

Question 4.
Assertion (A) – Boron combines with halogen to form trihalides at high temperatures.
Reason (R) – Boron does not reacts directly with hydrogen.
(b) A and R are correct and R not explains A.

Question 5.
Assertion (A) – Boron-10 isotope is used as moderator in nuclear reactors.
Reason (R) – Boron has the capacity to absorb neutrons.
Answer:
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A.

Question 6.
Assertion (A) – Diborane is highly reactive.
Reason (R) – At high temperatures, diborane forms higher boranes.
Answer:
(b) A and R are correct and R not explains A.

Question 7.
Assertion (A) – BF3 reacts with ammonia to form complex.
Reason (R) – BF3 is a electron deficient compound and accepts electron pairs to form coordinate covalent bonds.
Answer:
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A.

Question 8.
Assertion (A) – Fullerene has aromatic character.
Reason (R) – Some of the fullerenes have e-bonds and delocalised n-bonds.
Answer:
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A.

Question 9.
Assertion (A) – Carbon dioxide is non flammable gas.
Reason (R) – CO2 critical temperature is 31°C and can be readily liquefied.
Answer:
(b) A and R are correct and R not explains A.

Question 10.
Assertion (A) – Zeolites act as a molecular sieve.
Reason (R) – Zeolite structure is pore/ channel sizes are nearly uniform.
Answer:
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A.

V. Find the odd one out and given the reason:

Question 1.
(a) Icosagens
(b) Tetragens
(c) Alkali metals
(d) Chalcogens
Answer:
(c) Alkali metals
Reason: Alkali metals are s-block elements but other are p-block elements.

Question 2.
(a) Al
(b)B
(c) O
(d) Na
Answer:
(d) Na
Reason: Na is s-block element but others are p-block elements.

Question 3.
(a) Diborane
(b) Borax
(c) Carbonmonoxide
(d) Boric acid
Answer:
(c) Carbonmonoxide
Reason: Carbonmonoxide is not a compound of boron.

Question 4.
(a) B3N3H6
(b) B4H10
(c) B5H9
(d) B5H11
Answer:
(a) B3N3H6
Reason: B3N3H6 not a higher borane

Question 5.
(a) Potash alum
(b) Sodium alum
(c) Burnt alum
(d) Ammonium alum
Answer:
(c) Burnt alum
Reason: Burnt alum does not having water molecule.

Question 6.
(a) Graphite
(b) Borax
(c) Fullerene
(d) Diamond
Answer:
(b) Borax
Reason: Borax is not a allotropic form of carbon.

Question 7.
(a)B
(b) Ga
(c) In
(d) N
Answer:
(d) N
Reason: N is not a icosagens.

VI. Find out the correct pair:

Question 1.
(a) Ortho sililcate – Soro silicate
(b) Pyro silicate – Neso silicate
(c) Chain silicate – Pyroxenes
(d) Double chain silicate – Ring silicate
Answer:
(c) Chain silicate – Pyroxenes

Question 2.
(a) Graphene – 1.54 A
(b) Diamond – 1.40 A
(c) Fullerene – 1.38 A
(d) Graphite – 1.40 A
Answer:
(d) Graphite – 1.40 A

Question 3.
(a) Diborane – welding torches
(b) AlCl3 – Eye lotion
(c) Borax – pigments
(d) Boric acid – optical
Answer:
(a) Diborane – welding torches

Question 4.
(a) Inert gas – ns2np2
(b) Chalcogens – ns2np1
(c) Pnictogens – ns2np4
(d) Tetragens – ns2np4
Answer:
(c) Pnictogens – ns2np3

Question 5.
(a) Icosagen – Oxygen
(b) Tetragen – Carbon
(c) Chalcogen – Fluorine
(d) Halogen – Boron
Answer:
(b) Tetragen – Carbon

VII. Find out the incorrect pair:

Question 1.
(a) Tetragens – ns2np2
(b) Icosagens – ns2np1
(c) Chalcogens – ns2np4
(d) Halogens – ns2np6
Answer:
(d) Halogens – ns2np6

Question 2.
(a) Boron is BF3 – +3
(b) Carbon in CO2 – +4
(c) Nitrogen in N2O5 – +5
(d) Fluorine in OF2 – +4
Answer:
(d) Fluorine in OF2 – +4

Question 3.
(a) Nitrogen – Tetragens
(b) Oxygen – Chalcogens
(c) Tin – Tetragens
(d) Gallium – Icosagens
Answer:
(a) Nitrogen – Tetragens

Question 4.
(a) Boron – Moderator
(b) Borax – Eye lotion
(c) Boric acid – Antiseptic
(d) Diborane – Propellant
Answer:
(b) Borax – Eye lotion

Question 5.
(a) McAfee process – AlCl3
(b) Burnt alum – K2SO4-Al2(SO4)3
(c) Oxo process – Propanal
(d) Fischer tropsch Synthesis – HCOOH
Answer:
(d) Fischer tropsch Synthesis – HCOOH

Question 6.
(a) Soro silicate – Thortveitite
(b) Ring silicate – Beryl
(c) Sheet silicate – Asbestos
(d) Neso silicate – Olivine
Answer:
(c) Sheet silicate – Asbestos

Question 7.
(a) Pyroxenes – Phenacite
(b) Amphiboles – Asbestos
(c) Phyllo silicate – Mica
(d) Tecto silicate – Quartz
Answer:
(a) Pyroxenes – Phenacite

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry p-Block Elements – I 2 Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What are Wade’s Rule?
Answer:
Wade’s rules are used to rationalize the shape of borane clusters by calculating the total number of skeletal electron pairs (SEP) available for cluster bonding.

Question 2.
Why-1 oxidation state is more common in halogens. Explain.
Answer:
The halogens have a strong tendency to gain an electron to give a stable halide ion with completely filled electronic configuration (ns2sp6) and hence-1 oxidation state is more common in halogens.

Question 3.
Why boron has non-metallic character?
Answer:
The atomic radius of boron is very small and it has relatively high nuclear charge and these properties are responsible for its non-metallic character.

Question 4.
Define inert pair effect.
Answer:
In heavier post-transition metals, the outer s-electron(m) have a tendency to remain inert and show reluctance to take part in the bonding (only p-orbital involved in chemical bonding), which is known as inert pair effect.

Question 5.
Mention the allotropes of boron.
Answer:

  1. Amorphous boron
  2. a-rhombohedral boron
  3. p-rhombohedral boron
  4. γ – rhombohedral boron
  5. α – tetragonal boron
  6. β – tetragonal boron

Question 6.
List out the allotropes of tin.
Answer:

  1. Grey tin
  2. White tin
  3. Rhombic tin
  4. Sigma tin

Question 7.
Mention the allotropes of phosphorous?
Answer:

  1. White phosphorous
  2. Red phosphorous (v)
  3. Scarlet phosphorous
  4. Violet phosphorous
  5. Black phosphorous

Question 8.
Give the two allotropes of sulphur.
Answer:

  1. Rhombus
  2. Monoclinic

Question 9.
Why boron compounds are covalent in nature?
Answer:
Many of boron compounds are electron deficient and has unusual type of covalent bonding, which is due to its small size, high ionisation energy and similarity in electronegativity with carbon and hydrogen.

Question 10.
Define Borax is basic in nature.
Answer:
Borax is basic in nature and its solution in hot-water is alkaline as it dissociates into boric acid and sodium hydroxide,
Na2B4O7 + 7H2O → 4H3BO3 + 2NaOH

Question 11.
Explain action of heat on borax.
Answer:
On heating borax, it forms a transparent borax beads.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-21

Question 12.
What happen when borax treated with ammonium chloride?
Answer:
When borax treated with ammonium chloride, it forms boron nitride.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-22

Question 13.
What happen when boric acids reacts with sodium hydroxide?
Answer:
Boric acid reacts with sodium hydroxide to form sodium metaborate and sodium tetraborate.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-23

Question 14.
Identify A and B from the following reaction,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-24
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-25

Question 15.
Explain the action of air on diborane.
Answer:
At room temperature pure diborane does not react with air or oxygen but in impure form it gives [B2O3]3- along with large amount of heat.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-26

Question 16
Explain the action of air on diborane.
Answer:
At room temperature pure diborane does not react with air or oxygen but in impure form it gives B2O3 along with large amount of heat.
B2H6+ 3O2 → B2O3 + 3H2O

Question 17.
How will you convert diborane into sodium borohydride?
Answer:
Diborane reacts with sodium hydride in the presence of diglyme to give sodim borohydride.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-27

Question 18.
Mention the uses o boron trifluoride.
Answer:

  1. Boron trifluoride is used for preparing HBF4, a catalyst in organic chemistry
  2. It is also used as a fluorinating reagent.

Question 19.
What is MCA fee process?
Answer:
Aluminium chloride is obtained by heating a mixture of alumina and coke in a current of chloride.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-28

Question 20.
What happen when potash alum is treated with ammonium hydroxide?
Answer:
Potash alum forms aluminium hydroxide, when, treated with ammonium hydroxide
K2SO4. A12(SO4)3. 24H2O + 6NH4OH → K2SO4 + 3(NH4)2SO4 + 24H2O + 3Al(OH)3

Question 21.
What is producer gas? How will you prepare producer gas?
Answer:
On industrial scale carbon monoxide is produced by the reaction of carbon with air. The carbon monoxide formed will contain nitrogen gas also and the mixture of nitrogen and carbon monoxide is called producer gas.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-29

Question 22.
What is synthetic gas?
Answer:
A mixture of carbonmonoxide and hydrogen is called synthetic gas.

Question 23.
What is phosgene?
Answer:
When carbon monoxide is treated with chlorine in presence of light or charcoal, it forms a poisonous gas carbonyl chloride, when is also known as phosgene.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-30

Question 24.
How will you prepare propanal by oxoprocess?
Answer:
In oxoprocess, ethene is mixed with carbon monoxide and hydrogen gas to produce propanal.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-31

Question 25.
What are water gas equilibrium?
Answer:
The equilibrium involved in the reaction between carbon dioxide and hydrogen, has many industrial applications and is called water gas equilibrium.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-32

Question 26.
Mention the uses of silicon tetrachloride.
Answer:

  1. Silicon tetrachloride is used in the production of semiconducting silicon.
  2. It is used as a starting material in the synthesis of silica gel, silicic esters, a binder for ceramic materials.

Question 27.
What are silicones?
Answer:
Silicones or poly siloxanes are organo silicon polymers with general empirical formula (R2SiO). Since their empirical formula is similar to that of ketone (R2CO), they were named silicones.

Question 28.
What are high-temperature polymers?
Answer:
Silicones are high-temperature polymers, because they have high thermal stability.

Question 29.
Why silicones are water repellent?
Answer:
All silicones are water repellent, this is due to the presence of organic side groups that surrounds the silicon which makes the molecule looks like an alkane. Therefore silicones are water repellent.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry p-Block Elements – I 3 Marks Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write a notes on ionisation enthalpy in p-block elements?
Answer:
1. As we move down a group, generally there is a steady decrease in ionisation enthalpy of elements due to increase in their atomic radius.

2. In p-block elements there are some minor deviations to this general trend. In group 13, from B to Al the ionisation enthalpy decreases as expected. But from Al to Tl there is only a marginal difference. This is due to the presence of inner d- and f-elements which has poor shielding effect compared to s and p electrons. As a result, the effective nuclear charge on the valance electrons increase.

3. A similar trend is also observed in group 14. The remaining groups (15-18) follows the general trend, in these groups the ionisation enthalpy decreases as we move down the group. Here poor shielding effect of d- and f-electrons are overcome by the increased shielding effect of the additional p-electrons.

4. The ionisation enthalpy of elements in successive groups is higher than the corresponding elements of the previous group as expected.

Question 2.
Give the uses of boron.
Answer:

  1. Boron has the capacity to absorb neutrons. Hence, its isotope 10B5 is used as moderator in nuclear reactors.
  2. Amorphous boron is used as a rocket fuel igniter.
  3. Boron is essential for the cell walls of plants.
  4. Compounds of boron have many applications. For example eye drops, antiseptics, washing powders etc..contains boric acid and borax. In the manufacture of Pyrex glass , boric oxide is used.

Question 3.
How will be prepare borax from colemanite?
Answer:
Borax is a sodium salt of tetraboric acid. It is obtained from colemanite ore by boiling its solution with sodium carbonate.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-33

Question 4.
Explain the extraction of boric acid from,

    1. Borax
    2. Colemanite

Answer:
1. Borax – Borax is treated with hydrochloric acid or sulphuric acid or nitric acid to give boric acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-34

2. Colemanite – Colemanite is boiling with water, to give boric acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-35

Question 5.
Explain the action of heat on boric acid.
Answer:
Boric acid when heated at 373 K gives metaboric acid and at 413 K, it gives tetraboric acid. When heated at red hot, it gives boric anhydride which is a glassy mass.

  • 4 H3BO3 \(\underrightarrow { 373k }\) 4HBOz + H2O
  • 4HBO2 \(\underrightarrow { 413k }\) H2B4O7 + H2O
  • H2B4O7 \(\underrightarrow { Red hot }\) 2B2O3 + H2O

Question 6.
How will you convert, boric acid into,

  1. Boron trifluoride
  2. Borax

Answer:
1. Boron trifluoride:
Boric acid reacts with calcium fluoride in presence of cone. Sulphuric acid and gives boron trifluoride.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-36

2. Borax:
Boric acid, when heated with soda ash it gives borax.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-37

Question 7.
Mention the use of boric acid.
Answer:

  1. Boric acid is used in the manufacture of pottery glazes, glass, enamels and pigments.
  2. It is used as an antiseptic and as an eye lotion.
  3. It is also used as a food preservative.

Question 8.
Explain the preparation of diborane.
Answer:
1. Diborane can also be obtained in small quantities by the reaction of iodine with sodium borohydride in diglyme.
2NaBH4 + I2 → B2H6 + 2NaI + H2

2. On heating magnesium boride with HCl a mixture of volatile boranes are obtained.

  • 2Mg3B2+ 12HCl → 6MgCl2 + B4H10 + H2
  • B4H10+ H2 → 2B2Hg (Diborane)

Question 9.
What happen when diborane heated at various temperature?
Answer:
Diboranc is a gas at room temperature with sweet smell and it is extremely toxic. It is also highly reactive. At high temperatures it forms higher boranes liberating hydrogen.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-38

Question 10.
Explain the reaction between diborane and ammonia?
Answer:
When treated with excess ammonia at low temperatures diborane gives diborane – diammonate on heating at higher temperature diborane gives borazole.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-39
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-40

Question 11.
Why borontrifluoride is act as lewis acid? Explain the react between BF3 and ammonia?
Answer:
BF3 is an electron deficient compound and accepts electron pairs to form coordinate covalent bonds. Therefore, borontrifluoride is act as lewis acid. When BF3 reacts with ammonia to form complex.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-41

Question 12.
How does AlCl3 reacts with following reagents?

  1. H2O
  2. NH4OH
  3. NaOH

Answer:
1. When aluminium chloride reacts with water to form aluminium hydroxide.
AlCl3 + 3H2O → Al(OH)3 + 3HCl

2. With ammonium hydroxide, aluminium chloride forms aluminium hydroxide.
AlCl3 + 3NH7OH → Al(OH)3 + 3NH4C1

3. With excess of sodium hydroxide AlCl3 produces sodium meta aluminate.
AlCl3 + 4NaOH → NaAlO2 + 2H2O + 3NaCl

Question 13.
Give the uses of aluminium chloride.
Answer:

  1. Anhydrous aluminium chloride is used as a catalyst in Friedels Crafts reactions.
  2. It is used for the manufacture of petrol by cracking the mineral oils.
  3. It is used as a catalyst in the manufacture on dyes, drugs and perfumes.

Question 14.
How will you prepare potash alum?
Answer:
The alunite the alum stone is the naturally occurring form and it is K2SO4. A12(SO4)3. 4Al(OH)3. When alum stone is treated with excess of sulphuric acid, the aluminium hydroxide is converted to aluminium sulphate. A calculated quality of potassium sulphate is added and the solution is crystallised to generate potash alum. It is purified by recrystallisation.

K2SO4. A12(SO4)3. 4Al(OH)3 + 6H2SO4 → K2SO4 + Al2(SO 4)3 + 12H2O
K2SO4 + A12(SO4)2 + 24H2O → K2SO4. A12(SO4)3. 24H2O

Question 15.
Mention the uses of the potash alum.
Answer:

  1. It is used for purification of water
  2. It is also used for water proofing and textiles
  3. It is used in dyeing, paper and leather tanning industries
  4. It is employed as a styptic agent to arrest bleeding.

Question 16.
What is burnt alum?
Answer:
When potash alum is heated at 365 K. It melts and form molten state. Again heated at 475 K they lose water of hydration and swells up. Thee swollen mass is known as burnt alum.

Question 17.
What are all the conditions are necessary for catenation?
Answer:
Essential condition for catenation:

  1. The valency of elements is greater than or equal to two.
  2. Element should have an ability to bond with itself.
  3. The self bond must be as strong as its bond with other elements.
  4. Kinetic inertness of catenated compound towards other molecules.

Question 18.
Give any three methods to prepare carbon monoxide.
Answer:
1. Carbon monoxide can be prepared by the reaction of carbon with limited amount of oxygen.
2C + O2 → 2CO

2. On industrial scale carbon monoxide is produced by the reaction of carbon with air.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-42

3. Pure carbon monoxide is prepared by warming methanoic acid with concentrated sulphuric acid which act as a dehydrating agent.
HCOOH + H2SO4 → CO + H2O + H2SO4

Question 19.
Mention the uses the carbon monoxide.
Answer:

  1. Equimolar mixture of hydrogen and carbon monoxide – water gas and the mixture of carbon monoxide and nitrogen – producer gas are important industrial fuels
  2. Carbon monoxide is a good reducing agent and can reduce many metal oxides to metals.
  3. Carbon monoxide is an important ligand and forms carbonyl compound with transition metals

Question 20.
Explain the methods to prepare carbon dioxide.
Answer:
1. On industrial scale it is produced by burning coke in excess of air.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-43

2. Calcination of lime produces carbon dioxide as by product.
CaCO3 \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) CaO + CO2

3. Carbon dioxide is prepared in laboratory by the action of dilute hydrochloric acid on metal carbonates.
CaCO2 + 2HCl → CaCl2 + H2O + CO2

Question 21.
Give the uses of carbon dioxide.
Answer:

  1. Carbon dioxide is used to produce an inert atomosphere for chemical processing.
  2. Biologically, it is important for photosynthesis.
  3. It is also used as fire extinguisher and as a propellent gas.
  4. It is used in the production of carbonated beverages and in the production of foam.

Question 22.
Explain the preparation of silicon tetrachloride.
Answer:
1. Silicon tetrachloride can be prepared by passing dry chlorine over an intimate mixture of silica and carbon by heating to 1675 K in a porcelain tube.
SiO2 + 2C + 2Cl2 → SiCl2 + 2CO

2. On commercial scale, reaction of silicon with hydrogen chloride gas occurs above 600 K.
Si + 4HCl → SiCl4 + 2H2

Question 23.
Complete the following reaction,

  1. SiCl4 + H2O → ?
  2. SiCl4 + C2HSOH → ?
  3. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-44

Answer:

  1. SiCl4 + 4H2O → Si(OH)4 + 4HCl
  2. SiCl4 + C2H5OH → Si(OC2H5)4+ 2C12
  3. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-45

Question 24.
Explain the types of silicones.
Answer:

  1. Linear silicones – They are obtained by the hydrolysis and subsequent condensation of dialkyl or diaryl silicon chlorides.
    • Silicone rubbers – These silicones are bridged together by methylene or similar groups.
    • Silicone resins – They are obtained by blending silicones with organic resins such as acrylic esters.
  2. Cyclic silicones – These are obtained by the hydrolysis of R2SiCl2.
  3. Cross linked silicones – They are obtained by hydrolysis of RSiClr

Question 25.
Mention the properties of silicones.
Answer:

  1. All silicones are water repellent.
  2. They are thermal and electrical insulators.
  3. Chemically they are inert.
  4. Lower silicones are oily liquids whereas higher silicones with long chain structure are waxy solids.
  5. The viscosity of silicon oil remains constant and doesn’t change with temperature and they don’t thicken during winter.

SamacheerKalvi.Guru

Question 26.
What are silicates and mention the types of silicates?
Answer:
Silicates:
The mineral which contains silicon and oxygen in tetrahedral [\({ { [S{ i }{ O }_{ 4 }] } }^{ 4- }\) units linked together in different patterns are called silicates.
types of Silicates:

  1. Ortho silicates
  2. Pyro silicates
  3. Cyclic silicates
  4. Ino silicates
  5. Phyllo silicates
  6. Tecto silicates

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry p-Block Elements – I 5 Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
An element (A) extracted from kernite. A reacts with nitrogen at high temperature gives B. A reacts with alkali to form C. Find out A, B and C. Give the chemical equations.
Answer:
1. An element (A) extracted form kemite is boron.

2. Boron reacts with nitrogen at high temperature gives Boron nitride (B)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-46

3. Boron reacts with alkali (NaOH) to gives sodium borate (C).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-47

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-48

Question 2.
Compound A is used in the manufacture of opticals. A on heating gives B. B further heating to form C. A reacts with hydrochloric acid to give D. Identify A, B and C. Explain the reaction.
Answer:
1. Compound (A) is borax, which is used in the manufacture of opticals.

2. Borax (A) on heating to give borax glass (B). Borax glass on further heating to give sodium metaborate (C).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-48

3. Borax (A) reacts with hydrochloride acid to give boric acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-49

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-50

Question 3.
Complete the reaction.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-51
Answer:
Boric acid when heated at 373 K gives metaboric acid (A) and A heated at 413 K it gives tetraboric acid (B). B heated at red hot it gives boric anhydride (C).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-52
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-53

Question 4.
Sodium borohydride reacts with iodine in the presence of diglyme to give A. A heated at 388 K give B. A heated at 373 K in sealed tube to form C. A further heated at red hot condition to give element D. Find out A, B, C and D. Give the reactions.
Answer:
1. Sodium borohydride reacts with iodine in the presence of diglyme to give diborane (A).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-54

2. Diborane (A) heated at 388 K gives pentaborane (11) (B).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-55

3. Diborane (A) heated at 373 K in the sealed tube to form decaborane
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-56

(14) (C).Diborane (A) heated at red hot conditions to give element boron (D) Diborane B2H6
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-57
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-58

Question 5.
How does carbonmonoxide reacts with following reagents,
(i) O2
(ii) Cl2
(iii) F2O3
(iv) H2
(v) ethene
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-59

Question 6.
Explain the preparation of silicones.
Answer:
Generally silicones are prepared by the hydrolysis of dialkyldichiorosilanes (R2SiCl2) or diaryldichlorosilanes Ar2SiCl2, which are prepared by passing vapours of RCl or ArCl over siliconat 570 K with copper as a catalyst.
2RCl + Si \(\underrightarrow { Cu/570k }\) R2SiCl2

The hydrolysis of dialkvlchloro silanes R2SiCl2 yields to a straight chain polymer which grown from both the sides
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-60

The hydrolysis of monoalkylchloro silanes RSiCl3, yields to a very complex cross linked polymer Linear silicones can be converted into cyclic or ring silicones when water molecules is removed
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-61

Question 7.
Discuss the ortho and pyro silicates.
Answer:
Ortho silicates:
The simplest silicates which contain discrete [SiO4]4- tetrahedral units are called ortho silicates or neso silicates.
Examples:
Phenacite – Be2SiO4(Be2+) ions are tetrahedrally surrounded by O2- ions). Olivine – (Fe/Mg)2SiO4( Fe2+ and Mg2+ cations are octahedrally surrounded by O2-ions).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-62
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-63

Pyro silicates:
Silicates which contain [Si2O7]6- ions are called pyro silicates (or) Soro silicates They are formed by joining two [SiO4]4- tetrahedral units by sharing one oxygen atom at one comer, (one oxygen is removed while, joining).
Example:
Thortveitite – SC2Si2O7.

Question 8.
Explain:

  1. Cyclic silicates
  2. Ino silicates

Answer:
1. Cyclic silicates:
Silicates which contain \(({ Si{ O }_{ 3 }) }_{ n }^{ 2n- }\) ions which are formed by linking three or more tetrahedral \(({ Si{ O }_{ 3 }) }_{ n }^{ 4- }\) units cyclically are called cyclic silicates. Each silicate unit shares two of its oxygen atoms with other units.
Example:
Beryl [Be3Al2(SiO3)6] (an aluminosilicate with each aluminium is surrounded by 6 Structure of Cyclic silicates
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-64

2. Ino silicones:
Silicates which contain V number of silicate units liked by sharing two or more oxygen atoms are called inosilicates. They are further classified as chain silicates and double chain silicates. Chain silicates (or pyroxenes) – These silicates contain \(({ Si{ O }_{ 3 }) }_{ n }^{ 2n- }\) ions formed by linking ‘n’ number of tetrahedral \(({ Si{ O }_{ 3 }) }_{ n }^{ 4- }\) units linearly. Each silicate unit shares two of its oxygen atoms with other Structure of Chain silicates units.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-65
Example:
Spodumene – LiAl(SiO3)2 Double chain silicates (or amphiboles) – These silicates contains \([{ S{ i }_{ 4 }{ O }_{ 11 }] }_{ n }^{ 6n- }\) ions. In these silicates there are two different types of

3. Tetrahedra:

  1. Those sharing 3 vertices
  2. Those sharing only 2 vertices.

Examples.
Asbestos – These are fibrous and noncombustible silicates. Therefore they are used for thermal insulation material, brake linings, construction material and filters. Asbestos being carcinogenic silicates, their applications are restricted.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-66

Question 9.
Write a notes on

  1. Sheet silicates
  2. Three dimensional silicate

Answer:
1. Sheet silicates:
Silicates which contain \(({ S{ i }_{ 2 }{ O }_{ 5 }) }_{ n }^{ 2n- }\) are called sheet or phyllo silicates. In these, Each \({ { [S{ i }{ O }_{ 4 }] } }^{ 4- }\) tetrahedron unit shares three oxygen atoms with others and thus by forming twodimensional sheets. These sheets, silicates form layered structures in which silicate sheets are stacked over each other. The attractive forces between these layers are very week, hence they can be cleaved easily just like graphite.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 p-Block Elements - I img-67
Example: Talc, Mica etc…

2. Three dimensional silicate:
Silicates in which all the oxygen atoms of \({ { [S{ i }{ O }_{ 4 }] } }^{ 4- }\) tetrahedra are shared with other tetrahedra to form three-dimensional network are called three dimensional or tecto silicates. They have general formula (SiO2)n.
Examples:
Quartz. These tecto silicates can be converted into Three dimentional aluminosilicates by replacing [\({ { [S{ i }{ O }_{ 4 }] } }^{ 4- }\) – units by [AlO4]5- units. E.g. Feldspar, Zeolites etc.,

Question 10.
Explain – Boron neutron capture therapy.
Answer:
1. The affinity of boron-10 for neutrons is the basis of a technique known as born neutron capture therapy (BNCT) for treating patients suffering from brain tumours.

2. It is based on the nuclear reaction that occurs when boron-10 is irradiated with low- energy thermal neutoms to give high linear energy a-particles and a Li-particles.

3. Boron compounds are injected into a patient with a brain tumour and the compounds collect preferentially in the tumour. The tumour area is then irradiated with thermal neutom and results in the release of an alpha-particle that damages the tissue in the tumour each time a boron-10 nucleus captures a neutron.

3. In this way damages can be limited preferentially to the tumour, leaving the normal brain tissue less affected.

4. BNCT has also been studied as a treatment for several other tumours of the head and neck, The breast, the prostate, the bladder and the liver.

Commn Errors and its Rectifications
Common Errors:

  1. Ores formula may be difficult to remember.
  2. Allotropes of elements may confuse the students in writing equation.

Rectifications:

  1. Only chief ore from which the element is extracted can be easy to remember.
  2. Crystalline forms are more chemically reactive.

Hope you love the Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chapter Wise Material. Clearly understand the deep concept of Chemistry learning with the help of Tamilnadu State Board 12th Chemistry Chapter 2 p-Block Elements – I Questions and AnswersPDF. Refer your friends to and bookmark our website for instant updates. Also, keep in touch with us using the comment section.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th English Solutions Poem Chapter 4 Ulysses

Students can Download English Poem 4 Ulysses Questions and Answers, Summary, Activity, Notes, Samacheer Kalvi 12th English Book Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th English Solutions Poem Chapter 4 Ulysses

12th English Poem Ulysses Warm Up

Introduction:
The poem ‘Ulysses’ is a dramatic monologue that contains 70 lines of blank verse. Ulysses, the king of Ithaca, gathers his men together to prepare for the journey and exhorts them not to waste their time left on earth. Ulysses has grown old, having experienced many adventures at the battle of Troy and in the seas. After returning to Ithaca, he desires to embark upon his next voyage. His inquisitive spirit is always looking forward to more and more of such adventures.

12th English Poem Ulysses Chapter 4 Samacheer Kalvi

The poem can be divided into three parts:

  1. the thirst for adventure, which does not allow Ulysses to remain in his kingdom as a mere ruler
  2. Ulysses handing over the responsibility to his son Telemachus, with total confidence in his abilities
  3. Ulysses’ clarion call to his sailors, urging them to venture into unknown lands.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Ulysses English Textual Questions

1. Complete the summary of the poem, choosing words from the list given below. Lines 1 to 32

It little profits that an idle king,
By this still hearth, among these barren crags,
Match’d with an aged wife, I mete and dole
Unequal laws unto a savage race,

That hoard, and sleep, and feed, and know not me.
I cannot rest from travel: I will drink
Life to the lees: All times I have enjoy’d
Greatly, have suffer’d greatly, both with those

That loved me, and alone, on shore, and when
Thro’ scudding drifts the rainy Hyades
Vext the dim sea: I am become a name;
For always roaming with a hungry heart

Much have I seen and known; cities of men
And manners, climates, councils, governments,
Myself not least, but honour’d of them all;
And drunk delight of battle with my peers,

Far on the ringing plains of windy Troy.
I am a part of all that I have met;
Yet all experience is an arch wherethro’
Gleams that untravell’d world whose margin fades

For ever and forever when I move.
How dull it is to pause, to make an end,
To rust unburnish’d, not to shine in use!
As tho’ to breathe were life! Life piled on life

Were all too little, and of one to me
Little remains: but every hour is saved
From that eternal silence, something more,
A bringer of new things; and vile it were

For some three suns to store and hoard myself,
And this gray spirit yearning in desire
To follow knowledge like a sinking star,
Beyond the utmost bound of human thought.

This is my son, mine own Telemachus,
To whom I leave the sceptre and the isle, –
Well-loved of me, discerning to fulfil
This labour, by slow prudence to make mild

A rugged people, and thro’ soft degrees
Subdue them to the useful and the good.
Most blameless is he, centred in the sphere
Of common duties, decent not to fail

offices of tenderness, and pay
Meet adoration to my household gods,
When I am gone. He works his work, I mine.
There lies the port; the vessel puffs her sail:

Ulysses Poem Questions And Answers Samacheer Kalvi 12th English Solutions Chapter 4

There gloom the dark, broad seas. My mariners,
Souls that have toil’d, and wrought, and thought with
me That ever with a frolic welcome took
The thunder and the sunshine, and opposed
Free hearts, free foreheads – you and I are old;

Old age hath yet his honour and his toil;
Death closes all: but something ere the end,
Some work of noble note, may yet be done,
Not unbecoming men that strove with Gods.

The lights begin to twinkle from the rocks:
The long day wanes: the slow moon climbs: the deep
Moans round with many voices. Come, my friends,
‘T is not too late to seek a newer world.

Push off, and sitting well in order smite
The sounding furrows; for my purpose holds
To sail beyond the sunset, and the baths
Of all the western stars, until I die.

It may be that the gulfs will wash us down:
It may be we shall touch the Happy Isles,
And see the great Achilles, whom we knew.
Tho’ much is taken, much abides; and tho’

We are not now that strength which in old days
Moved earth and heaven, that which we are, we are;
One equal temper of heroic hearts,
Made weak by time and fate, but strong in will
To strive, to seek, to find, and not to yield.

Ulysses Questions And Answers Samacheer Kalvi 12th English Solutions Poem Chapter 4

fullest unquenchable unattainable
experience knowledge king
matters rust adventure
unwilling travel breathing

Ulysses is (1) ______ to discharge his duties as a (2) ______ , as he longs for (3) ______ He is filled with an (4) ______ thirst for (5) ______ and wishes to live life to the (6) ______ He has travelled far and wide gaining (7) ______ of various places, cultures, men and (8) ______ He recalls with delight his experience at the battle of Troy. Enriched by his (9) ______ he longs for more and his quest seems endless. Like metal which would (10) ______ if unused, life without adventure is meaningless. According to him living is not merely (11) ______ to stay alive. Though old but zestful, Ulysses looks at every hour as a bringer of new things and yearns to follow knowledge even if it is (12) ______
Answers:

  1. unwilling
  2. king
  3. adventure
  4. unquenchable
  5. travel
  6. fullest
  7. experience
  8. matters
  9. knowledge
  10. rust
  11. breathing
  12. unattainable

Lines 33 to 42

prudence kingdom quest tender

Ulysses desires to hand over his (1) _____ to his son Telemachus, who would fulfil his duties towards his subjects with care and (2) _____ Telemachus possesses patience and has the will to civilise the citizens of Ithaca in a (3) _____ way. Ulysses is happy that his son would do his work blamelessly and he would pursue his (4) _____ for travel and knowledge.
Answer:

  1. kingdom
  2. prudence
  3. tender
  4. quest

Lines 44 to 70

world thunder meaningful
gather undaunted heaven

Ulysses beckons his sailors to (1) _____ at the port where the ship is ready to sail. His companions who have faced both (2) _____ and sunshine with a smile, are united by their undying spirit of adventure. Though death would end everything, Ulysses urges his companions to join him and sail beyond the sunset and seek a newer (3) _____ , regardless of consequences. These brave hearts who had once moved (4) _____ and earth, may have grown old and weak . physically but their spirit is young and (5) _____ His call is an inspiration for all those who seek true knowledge and strive to lead (6) _____ lives.
Answers:

  1. gather
  2. thunder
  3. world
  4. heaven
  5. undaunted
  6. meaningful

2. Answer the following questions in one or two sentences each.

Ulysses Poem Questions And Answers Question (а)
‘Ulysses is not happy to perform his duties as a king.’ Why?
Answer:
Ulysses is not happy to perform the ordinary duties of a king mainly because his heart is in voyages beyond horizon. He is bored with the task of enforcing law and order and giving reward and punishment to a savage race.

Ulysses Questions And Answers Question (b)
What does he think of the people of his kingdom?
Answer:
The citizen of Ithaca hoard, sleep and feed. They don’t understand the aspirations of the dreamer Ulysses.

12th English Poem Ulysses Paragraph Question (c)
What has Ulysses gained from his travel experiences?
Answer:
Ulysses has met people hailing from different cultural backgrounds. He has learnt much from their manners, climates, councils and governments. He learnt strategies of warfare in battles.

Ulysses Poem Erc Question (d)
Pick out the lines which convey that his quest for travel is unending.
Answer:
“How dull it is to pause, to make an end,
To rust unburnished, not to shine in use!
The lines quoted above convey his quest for travel is unending.

12th English Ulysses Paragraph Question (e)
‘As tho’ to breathe were life!’ – From the given line what do you understand of Ulysses’ attitude to life?
Answer:
Ulysses strongly believes that just breathing is not life. Life has to be adventurous and full of action.

Ulysses Poem Questions And Answers Pdf Question (J)
What does Ulysses yearn for?
Answer:
Ulysses yearns for following knowledge like a sinking star beyond the utmost bound of human thought.

Ulysses Question Answer Question (g)
Who does the speaker address in the second part?
Answer:
The speaker addresses the readers in the second part explaining the difference between his roles and that of Telemachus.

Ulysses Poem Short Questions And Answers Question (h)
Why did Ulysses want to hand over the kingdom to his son?
Answer:
Ulysses finds Telemachus discerning and prudent. Besides, Ulysses is wearing the crown uneasily as the call for adventure and desire to sail beyond sunset is obsessing his mind. So, he wants to hand over the kingdom to Telemachus.

Ulysses Short Questions And Answers Question (i)
How would Telemachus transform the subjects?
Answer:
Ulysses believes that his son Telemachus is wise and kind enough to transform rugged citizens into mild and civilized subjects by his tenderness and love.

Question (j)
‘He works his work, I mine’ – How is the work distinguished?
Answer:
Telemachus would do the work of ruling Ithaca with prudence and tenderness. Ulysses will pursue his dream of adventure and try to meet great Achilles in the other world.

Question (i)
In what ways were Ulysses and his mariners alike?
Answer:
Both Ulysses and his fellow sailors are now old. They no more have the strength they possessed in olden days moving earth and heaven. They are made weak by time and fate but strong in will “to strive, to seek, to find and not to yield.” They share the heroic temper and undying quest for knowledge and adventure.

Question (j)
What could be the possible outcomes of their travel?
Answer:
The sailors and Ulysses may be washed down by the gulfs or they could touch Greek paradise and meet their hero Achilles. They may die happily braving the elements of nature.

3. Identify the figures of speech employed in the following lines.

Question (a)
“Thro” scudding drifts the rainy Hyades
Vext the dim sea…”
Answer:
The figure of speech Personification is employed in the above lines.

Question (b)
“For always roaming with a hungry heart”
Answer:
Metaphor

Question (c)
“And drunk delight of battle with my peers;”
Answer:
Metaphor

Question (d)
“…..the deep
Moans round with many voices.”
Answer:
Personification

Question (e)
“To follow knowledge like a sinking star.”
Answer:
Simile

Question (f)
“ There lies the port the vessel puffs her sai”
Answer:
Personification

Additional Questions

Question (a)
“I will drink life to the lees'”
Answer:
Metaphor

Question (b)
“Vext the dim sea:”
Answer:
Personification

Question (c)
“Yet all experience is an arch wherethro”
Answer:
Metaphor

Question (d)
“Gleams that untravell’d world whose margin fades”
Answer:
Metaphor

Question (e)
“To rust unburnish’d, not to shine in use!”
Answer:
Metaphor

Question (f)
“There gloom the dark, broad seas. My mariners,”
Answer:
Metaphor

Question (g)
“Souls that have toil’d, and wrought, and thought with me”
Answer:
Synecdoche (part of the whole)

Question (h)
“The thunder and the sunshine, and opposed”
Answer:
Metaphor

Question (i)
“T is not too late to seek a newer world.”
Answer:
Synecdoche

Question (j)
“…in order smite The sounding furrows;”
Answer:
Metaphor

Question (k)
“To sail beyond the sunset, and the baths”
Answer:
Metaphor

Question (l)
“It may be we shall touch the Happy Isles,”
Answer:
Allusion (in Greek mythology the place is known as Greek paradise)

Question (m)
“And see the great Achilles, whom we knew.”
Answer:
Allusion (Greek mythology)

Appreciate The Poem

4. Read the sets of lines from the poem and answer the questions that follow.

(a) “…I mete and dole
Unequal laws unto a savage race,
That hoard, and sleep, and feed, and know not me.”

Question (i)
What does Ulysses do?
Answer:
Ulysses, like a grocery shop owner, measures and delivers rewards and punishments unto a large number of uncivilized citizens.

Question (ii)
Did he enjoy what he was doing? Give reasons.
Answer:
No, he did not enjoy is work. He does not like the idea of ministering variable justice to people who like “drones” or animals just eat, sleep and multiply their kind. He wants to leave such work to his son.

Question (b)
“Yet all experience is an arch wherethrough
Gleams that untravelled world, whose margin fades
For ever and for ever when I move. ”

Question (i)
What is experience compared to?
Answer:
Experience is compared to an arch.

Question (ii)
How do the lines convey that the experience is endless?
Answer:
Through the arch of experience one can see the untravelled world. But the experience in the untravelled has a margin whose border fades as one moves forward. Thus experience is endless.

Question (c)
“Little remains: but every hour is saved
From that eternal silence, something more,
A bringer of new things; and vile it were”

Question (i)
How is every hour important to Ulysses?
Answer:
One lives in this world for a limited time. Every hour can provide new knowledge. So, every hour is very important.

Question (ii)
What does the term ‘Little remains’ convey?
Answer:
Ulysses realizes that he has become old. He has not much time left. He doesn’t want to die resting in his kingdom. He states that his remaining lifetime is very limited.

Question (d)
“This is my son, mine own Telemachus,
To whom I leave the sceptre and the isle
Well-loved of me,”

Question (i)
Who does Ulysses entrust his kingdom to, in his absence?
Answer:
Ulysses entrusts his kingdom to his beloved son Telemachus in his absence.

Question (ii)
Bring out the significance of the ‘sceptre’.
Answer:
Sceptre is an ornamental staff carried by a King on ceremonial occasions as a symbol of sovereignity. It symbolizes the power of a king.

(e) ‘‘That ever with a frolic welcome took
The thunder and the sunshine, and opposed”

Question (i)
What do ‘thunder’ and ‘sunshine’ refer to?
Answer:
Thunder and sunshine refers to misfortunes and happy days. Ulysses and his comrades had undergone both kinds of experiences.

Question (ii)
What do we infer about the attitude of the sailors?
Answer:
The sailors shared the undying quest for exploration, adventure and for seeking newer knowledge in the untravelled world. They even welcomed dangers in fighting with Gods. They enjoyed the thrill of action and never worried about the outcome of battles or quests. They have equal temper of heroic hearts.

(f) ‘‘Death closes all: but something ere the end,
Some work of noble note, may yet be done,
Not unbecoming men that strove with Gods.”

Question (i)
The above lines convey the undying spirit of Ulysses. Explain.
Answer:
Ulysses is aware of ageing and substantial decrease in his physical strength. He knows that will close in on him sooner or later. But before that happens, he wants to sail beyond the sunset/horizon and if possible meet warriors like Achilles. He wants to achieve something worthy of those who challenged and fought with Gods. Thus these lines show the undying spirit of Ulysses.

Question (ii)
Pick out the words in alliteration in the above lines,
Answer:
ere, end, noble, note are the words that alliterate.

(g) “……… for my purpose holds
To sail beyond the sunset, and the baths Of all the western stars, until I die.”

Question (i)
What was Ulysses’ purpose in life?
Answer:
Ulysses proposes to sail beyond sunset and baths. His goal is not death but is in death. He seeks life in death. Ordinary mortals can’t reach ‘Happy isles’ or baths while they are alive.Ulysses wants to find direct evidence of spiritual reality after death. He wants to venture into the unknown.

Question (ii)
How long would his venture last?
Answer:
His venture would last until he confronts his death.

Question (h)
“One equal temper of heroic hearts,
Made weak by time and fate, but strong in will
To strive, to seek, to find, and not to yield. ”

Question (i)
Though made weak by time and fate, the hearts are heroic. Explain.
Answer:
Ulysses and his compatriots have visited many strange places in their previous voyages and enjoyed misfortunes and glorious triumphs with the same heroic temperament. They might have become old and may not have the same strength they had in youth. But they still share the thirst for travel and pursuit of knowledge in the unexplored world. Their bravery and spiritual strength are intact.

Question (ii)
Pick out the words in alliteration in the above lines.
Answer:
Strive, seek, heroic, hearts are the words that alliterate.

5. Explain with reference to the context the following lines.

Question (a)
“I cannot rest from travel: I will drink
Life to the lees:”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘Ulysses” written by Alfred Tennyson.
Context and Explanation: Ulysses, after spending many years in the seas returns to Ithaca and starts ruling his country. But his heart is not in the administration of his kingdom. He wants to sail again. At this context he says these words. He wishes to enjoy life to the fullest and so he can’t afford to idle away his remaining life as a king.

Question (b)
“I am become a name;
For always roaming with a hungry heart”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘Ulysses” written by Alfred Tennyson.
Context and Explanation: Ulysses says these words while discussing the reputation he has earned among the common multitude due to his daring adventures. He has roamed the world like a hungry lion. This line has a biblical alusion as well “Blessed are they which do hunger and thirst after righteousness” – Matthew V. 6.

Though Ulysses is aware of his fame, it doesn’t motivate him to stay or settle down in the kingdom of Ithaca. His inquisitive spirit is always looking for newer knowledge through ‘the arch’ to the untravelled world.

Question (c)
“How dull it is to pause, to make an end,
To rust unburnished, not to shine in use!”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘Ulysses” written by Alfred Tennyson.
Context and Explanation: The poet says these words while discussing the mental agony of Ulysses who is unable to settle down with his ageing wife Penelope and son Telemachus. Ulysses finds doling out justice to a savage people as ‘boring’. He does not want to settle down and die in Ithaca. He compares himself to a sword which may rust if left unused. He wants to lead an active and adventurous life till his death.

Question (d)
“To follow knowledge like a sinking star,
Beyond the utmost bound of human thought”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘Ulysses” written by Alfred Tennyson.
Context and Explanation: The poet says these words while describing the quest Ulysses has for adventure and fulfillment. Similar to a sinking star, Ulysses wants to pursue in his failing old age to pursue knowledge like the goal of Goethe’s Faust, his quest is defined by the pursuit of new and unique knowledge “beyond the utmost bound of human thought”.

Question (e)
“He works his work, I mine.’’’’
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘Ulysses” written by Alfred Tennyson.
Context and Explanation: The poet says these words while justifying the decision of Ulysses to pass on his kingdom to Telemachus. Ulysses explains the polar difference between himself and his son Telemachus. His son will be a ‘fair’ and ‘decent’ ruler. Unlike Ulysses, Telemachus is rooted in regular political life. He enjoys leading “savage” population and the responsibility of showing the subject better moral codes of conduct and upholding justice. Whereas Ulysses finds this “slow” and intolerable. So, he wishes his son to rule Ithaca and for himself he wishes to set sail to the unknown.

Question (f)
“….you and I are old;
Old age hath yet his honour and his toil;”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘Ulysses” written by Alfred Tennyson.
Context and Explanation: Poet, in this part of the monologue describes the address made by Ulysses to his compatriots who were with him during “thunders and sunshine”. He admits the fact that they are growing old. But he does not want to retire like ordinary mortals. He accepts gracefully the honour befitting old age as a result of varied cultural experiences. Yet, he does not want old people to bow out of the field of action. He sincerely believes there is more work to be done, lands to be explored and newer knowledge to be acquired in old age before death.

Question (g)
“The long day wanes: the slow moon climbs: the deep
Moans round with many voices.”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘Ulysses” written by Alfred Tennyson.
Context and Explanation: The poet poet continues to discuss old age and the tantalising call of the oceans to conquer. Ulysses hints at the probable end of the cycle of life in the words “The long clay wanes”. The symbol of darkness or night is mostly associated with death. The lure of ocean to resume his voyages beyond the point of sunset is too tempting to resist. The dark unfathomable sea beckons him and his compatriots with mysterious voices.

Question (h)
“It may be we shall touch the Happy Isles,
And see the great Achilles, whom we knew.”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘Ulysses” written by Alfred Tennyson.
Context and Explanation: The poet says these words through Ulysses as to the probable outcome of the daring voyage at the fag end of his life. Ulysses is uncertain about the probable outcome of his last voyage. But he infers that he might reach ‘Happy Isles’ and see the ‘great Achilles’ who was dipped in the river of life.

Question (i)
“We are not now that strength which in old days
Moved earth and heaven;”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘Ulysses” written by Alfred Tennyson.
Context and Explanation: The poet says these words through Ulysses when he wants to justify the reasons for resuming the daring voyage. He admits the decline in the compatriots’ physical strength with which they were able to move heaven and earth in their youth. He asks his compatriots to ignore the infinity of age and draw on their inner spiritual strength to resume their voyage beyond sunset.

Question (j)
“To strive, to seek, to find, and not to yield.”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘Ulysses” written by Alfred Tennyson.
Context and Explanation: Tennyson says these words through Ulysses who makes his motto loud and clear in these words. The final line of the poem is Ulysses’ enduring challenge to readers as well. The challenge if the aged ones could push ahead with vigour and strength of will no matter how fragile their bodies are. To yield to age or weakness is to be less than fully human. It might be honourable to live a peaceful settled life in the old age. But one would naturally miss out most exciting moments of life if one does not venture out, at least a little towards the unknown.

6. Answer the following questions in a paragraph of about 100 words each.

Question (a)
What makes Ulysses seek newer adventures?
Answer:
In the context of the poem, Ulysses has grown old. He has experienced all daring adventures. He has won the hearts of people during the battle at Troy. Back home, as per the prophecy of Tiresias, he rules Ithaca for a brief time. But he is fed up with a conventional duties of a king. He laments his own uselessness as a ruler of idle people who lead life like savages, just eating and sleeping. They don’t understand the over vaulting ambition of their adventurous king Ulysses who had moved earth and heavens in the past. He wishes to embark upon his next voyage. It might be his last. He is quite sensitive to the moans of the seas tantalising him and his compatriots to set sail quickly. He wants “to drink life to the lees”. Ulysses doesn’t want to bask on the glory he has earned in the past.

His inquisitive spirit is restless. He has seen much’ and acquired knowledge of various cultures of the world. But he considers all such experiences like an “arch” leading him to the unexplored or “untravelled world”. He wants to sail towards the area ‘beyond sunset’. He must shine in use like a sword but not “rust unbumished”. Yet at home, in the kingdom of Ithaca, he feels bored and yearns to truly engage with what is left of life. He is impatient for “new” experiences lamenting everyday and every hour to seek “something more”. His quest for adventure and fulfillment, like the goal of Goethe’s Faust is defined by the pursuit of new knowledge “beyond the utmost bound of human thought”.

Question (b)
List the roles and responsibilities Ulysses assigns to his son Telemachus, while he is away.
Answer:
The entire poem is a monologue. Yet the second part of the poem is an address to the readers justifying his decision to transfer the rule to his son Telemachus. The cloak of a king seems to be unfit for the temperament of Uly sses. He finds ruling Ithaca a boring thing. He finds Telemachus rooted to the political life of Ithaca. His role is merely to lead a ‘savage race’ to accept standard norms of behaviour in the society. He believes Telemachus fits well with the role of the ruler of “uninspired and imprudent citizens” and may discharge his duties with honour and grace. When he is away, he wants his son Telemachus to dispense variable justice to the subjects of Ithaca and guide them in the path of virtues and morals.

Question (c)
What is Ulysses’ clarion call to his sailors? How does he inspire them?
Answer:
In the third part of the poem, Ulysses makes a clarion call to his hearty compatriots (i.e.) mariners. They have been with him both during ‘thick and thin’ or thunders or sunshine. Similar to Ulysses they possess “free hearts and free foreheads” (i.e.) their hearts and brains are unburdened by domestic cares and resposibilities. They had frolicsome time fighting along with Ulysses against great warriors and Gods in the past. Ulysses does not want to live in memory of glory. He believes they need not waste away their precious time in nostalgic memories just recounting their escapades to younger generation. They can really do ‘ something of noble note’ before the end. He is conscious of the impending death in old age. But he tells it is not “too late to seek a newer world”.

The many “voices of the ocean” call out to the mariners to resume voyage. Ulysses is not content with having earned a name for himself. He has seen many countries and acquired knowledge of various cultures. Those experiences are not to be taken as accomplishments. They are just an ‘arch’leading them to “untravelled world” and constantly sailing to the ever expanding horizon. He does not want his compatriots to miss even an hour which could prrovide them novel experiences in their voyage. He persuades his compatriots to gather at the port as the sails are already puffing up welcoming them all. Their life would be one of fulfillment only when they venture out into the unkown on the seas. He uses an emotional bait to his mariners. He highlights the probable outcome of their voyage. They might reach the “Happy Isles” (i.e.) great paradise and meet Achilles, their war hero. No matter how much strength they have, they still have some “strength of will” left to strive, to seek, to find, and not to yield.

Listening Activity

Listen to the poem and fill in the blanks with appropriate words and phrases. If required listen to the poem again.

Wander-thirst

BEYOND the East the sunrise, beyond the West the sea, And East and West the wander-thirst that will not let me be; It works in me like madness, dear, to bid me say good-bye; For the seas call, and the stars call, and oh! the call of the sky!

I know not where the white road runs, nor what the blue hills are; But a man can have the sun for a friend, and for his guide a star; And there’s no end of voyaging when once the voice is heard, For the rivers call, and the roads call, and oh! the call of the bird!

Yonder the long horizon lies, and there by night and day The old ships draw to home again, the young ships sail away; And come I may, but go I must, and, if men ask you why, You may put the blame on the stars and the sun and the white road and the sky.

Choose the best option and complete the sentences:

Question 1
works like madness in the poet.
(a) Wander – Thirst
(b) Bidding Farewell
(c) Eastern Sunrise
(d) Western Seas
Answer:
(a) Wander – Thirst

Question 2.
A man could choose as his guide.
(a) the sun
(b) the hills
(c) a star
(d) a bird
Answer:
(c) a star

Question 3.
There is no end of once the voice is heard.
(a) walking
(b) roaming
(c) talking
(d) voyaging
Answer:
(d) voyaging

Question 4.
The old ships return, while the young ships
(a) drift
(b) move
(c) sail
(d) wander
Answer:
(c) sail

Question 5.
The blame is on the sun, stars, the road and the
(a) hills
(b) trees
(c) seas
(d) sky
Answer:
(d) sky

Ulysses About The Poet

Samacheer Kalvi 12th English Solutions Poem Chapter 4 Ulysses img-4

Alfred Tennyson was the poet laureate of England and Ireland during Queen Victoria ‘s reign. Tennyson excelled in writing short lyrics such as “Break, Break, Break“, “ Tears Idle Tears“, “The Charge of the Light Brigade” and.‘Crossing the Bar’. Tennyson’s use of the musical qualities of words to emphasise his rhythms and meanings is sensitive.

Ulysses Summary in English

Introduction
‘Ulysses’ is a dramatic monologue in which Ulysses, the king of Ithaca expresses his undying thirst of adventure overseas. Tennyson has written this poem in memory of Arthur Henry Hallam who died young. Death is not the end for both Arthur and Ulysses.

Thirst for adventure
Ulysses addresses mariners in the third part. Ulysses does not see any worth in staying in the comfort of family life with his wife. As a king, he listens to the complaints of people and gives rewards and punishments for the citizens of his country. He discloses his inner nature, “cannot rest from travel!” He has become a living icon of travel overseas. He wants “to drink life to the lees”. He confesses that he has both enjoyed and suffered a lot during his travels. He has gained profound wisdom during his travels and battles. Enriched by his new gained cultural knowledge, he longs to resume his voyages. He believes that to rest is rust. Every hour has the •potential to bring new knowledge. So, it is meaningless to stay.

Passing on the inheritance
In the second part addresses the reader explaining why Ulysses doesn’t want to continue to rule. Ulysses wishes to hand over his kingdom to his son Telemachus. He believes he would rule the kingdom and render appropriate justice to his subjects. Telemachus, unlike Ulysses, is rooted to the soil. He is kind to the subjects and addresses their needs. Besides, Ulysses hopes that Penelope, his aging wife would be happy to spend her last years with her son and grandchildren. So, Ulysses can resume his voyage along with his old friends.

Call to set sail
Ulysses called his old companions to the port where the ship awaits them all. His old companions have fought many battles alongside him and share the undying quest for adventure. Ulysses persuades his friends to join him on his voyage to the edge of the world and beyond to find a new world. He knows the limitations of his companions. They may have grown old and weak due to age. Their physical powers may not be the same as when they had once moved heaven and earth. But he is confident that their spirit is young and undaunted. His clarion call would inspire invariably all those who seek knowledge and strive to lead meaningful lives.

Conclusion
People who are endowed with an unquenchable thirst for ever-expanding knowledge and incurable love for long distances Ulysses continues to be a source of inspiration.

Ulysses Summary in Tamil

முடிவுரை:
தன் அறிவு வேட்கையை அதிகப்படுத்துவதில் | ஆர்வம் கொண்டவர்களுக்கும் மற்றும் மாறாத தொலைதூரப் பயணத்தில் காதல் கொண்டவர்களுக்கும் | யுலிசஸ் எப்போதும் தூண்டுதலாக இருக்கிறார்.

சாகசத்தின் மேல் ஆவல்
யுலிசஸ் மூன்றாம் பாகத்தில் கப்பலோட்டிகளிடத்தில் சொற்பொழிவாற்றுகிறார். தன் குடும்பத்தாருடன் சொகுசு வாழ்க்கை வாழ்வதில் எந்தப் பயனும் இல்லை என எண்ணுகிறார். ஒரு அரசனாக குடிமக்களின் கூற்றுகளைக் கேட்டு அதற்கு ஏற்ற பரிசையும் மற்றும் தண்டனையும் வழங்குகிறார். கடற் பயணம் செய்யாமல் இருக்க முடியாது என்ற தன்னுடைய உள்ளுணர்வை வெளிப்படுத்துகிறார். கடல் கடந்த பயணங்களை மேற்கொள்ளும் உயிரோவியமாகத் திகழ்ந்தார். வாழ்க்கை முழுவதும் பயணிக்க விரும்புகிறார். அவர் பயணத்தில் மேற்கொண்ட இன்ப துன்பங்களை ஒப்புக் கொள்கிறார். அவர் பயணத்தின் போது ஏற்பட்ட அனுபவங்களாலும் மற்றும் எதிர்கொண்ட போர்களினாலும் ஆழ்ந்த ஞானத்தை அடைந்திருந்தார். புதிதாக பெறப்பெற்ற பண்புகளின் புலமையால், அவர் பயணங்களை மேற்கொள்வதில் ஆர்வத்தைக் காட்டினார். சோம்பலாக கிடந்தால் உடல் துருப்பிடித்து விடும் என எண்ணினார். ஒவ்வொரு கணமும் புதுப் பொலிவைக் கொண்டு வரும் ஆற்றல் மிக்கது. ஆதலால், ஓரிடத்தில் ஒண்டிக் கிடப்பதில் பயனில்லை என எண்ணினார்.

பரம்பரை சொத்துக்களை கைமாற்றம் செய்தல்:
இரண்டாம் பாக சொற்பொழிவில் அவருக்கு அரசாள்வதில் ஏன் விருப்பம் இல்லை என்பதைக் குறித்துக் கூறுகிறார். யுலிசஸ் தன் இராஜ்ஜியத்தை தன் புதல்வன் டெலிமேக்கஸ் (Tele Macus) இடம் கைமாற்றுகிறார். அவர் தன் புதல்வன் நல்ல முறையில் அரசாண்டு தன் குடிமக்களுக்கு தக்க நீதி வழங்குவான் என எண்ணினார். டெலிமாக்கஸ், யுலிசஸ் போல் அல்லாமல் ஒரே இடத்தில் ஊன்றி நிற்பவராய் இருந்தார். அவர்தம் குடிமக்களுக்கு அன்பார்ந்தவராகவும் அவர்கள் குறைகளைக் கேட்டறிபவராகவும் இருந்தார். அது தவிர யுலிசஸ் தன் வயது முதிர்ந்த மனைவி பெனைலோப்பிம், மகனுடனும் பேரப் பிள்ளைகளுடனும் மகிழ்ச்சியோடு இருப்பார் என நம்பினார். ஏனெனில், அது அவர் தன் தோழர்களுடன் கடல் பயணம் மேற்கொள்ளத் தக்கவாறு அமையும்.

கடல் பயணம் மேற்கொள்ளல்:
யுலிசஸ் தன் நண்பர்களைத் தமக்காக காத்துக் கொண்டிருக்கும் துறைமுகத்திற்கு வருமாறு அழைப்பு விடுகிறார். அவர் தோழர்களும் கடல் பயணத்தின் போது பல கடற்போர்களில் ஈடுபட்டு தனக்கு உள்ள கடல் பயணத்தின் மேல் உள்ள ஆவலைப் பகிர்ந்து கொண்டனர். உலகின் விளிம்பை அடைந்து அதற்கு அப்பாலும் செல்வதற்கு தன்னுடன் கடல் பயணம் மேற்கொள்ள நண்பர்களைத் தூண்டுகிறார். அவர் தம் நண்பர்களின் குறைகளை அறிந்திருந்தார். அவர்கள் வயது முதிர்ச்சியால் பலவீனமாகக் காணப்பட்டனர். அவர்கள், முன்னர் வானத்தையும், பூமியையும் அளந்தது போல் அவர்கள் உடல் வலிமை தற்போது இல்லை. ஆனால், அவர்கள் ஊக்கம் குன்றாமல், சளைக்கா வண்ணம் தொடரவேண்டும் என்பதில் உறுதியாக இருந்தார். அவரின் வீர முழக்கம் புதிய அனுபவத்தை நாடி மற்றும் அர்த்தமுள்ள வாழ்க்கையை வாழ முயற்சிக்கும் அனைவருக்கும் தூண்டுதலாக இருக்கும்.

முன்னுரை:
யூலிஸ் என்பது வியத்தகு மோனோலாலஜி ஆகும். இதில் இதாகா மன்னனான யுலிசஸ் வெளிநாடுகளில் சாகசத் தன்மையற்ற தாகத்தை வெளிப்படுத்துகிறார். டென்னிசன் இளம் கவிஞரான ஆர்தர் ஹென்றி ஹாலமின் நினைவாக இந்தக் கவிதை எழுதினார். ஆர்தர் மற்றும் யுலிசஸ் இருவருக்கும் முடிவே இல்லை.

Ulysses Glossary

Textual:

12th English Poem Ulysses Paragraph Chapter 4 Samacheer Kalvi

Additional:

Ulysses Poem Erc Samacheer Kalvi 12th English Solutions Poem Chapter 4

Samacheer Kalvi 12th English Solutions Poem Chapter 3 All the World’s a Stage

Students can Download English Poem 3 All the World’s a Stage Questions and Answers, Summary, Activity, Notes, Samacheer Kalvi 12th English Book Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th English Solutions Poem Chapter 3 All the World’s a Stage

Warm Up

This is Life Cycle of butterfly.

All The World's A Stage Poem Questions And Answers Samacheer Kalvi 12th English Solutions Poem Chapter 3

All The World’s A Stage Poem Questions And Answers Question 1.
Discuss with your partner the different stages in the grow th of man from a new born to an adult.
Answer:
An infant pukes on the mother’s arms. As he is unable to articulate his needs, he keeps on crying like a kitten. Then he goes to school giving up his freedom. He is made to learn things he doesn’t want to learn. Then he becomes an adult hopelessly in love. He wastes his purple youth writing love letters or songs admiring the beauty of his love. Some join army or police force to serve the nation. At the peak of adulthood, they are quite touchy about honour and believe it to be more important than life itself.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th English All the World’s a Stage Textual Questions

1. Fill in the blanks using the words given in the box to complete the summary of the poem.

attention treble reluctantly
actors maturity reputation
serious faculties composing
enter promises dependent

Shakespeare considers the whole world a stage where men and women are only (1) _____ They (2) _____ the stage when they are borm and exit when they die. Every man, during his life time; plays seven roles based on age. In the first act, as an infant, he is wholly (3) _____ on the mother or a nurse. Later, emerging as a school child, he slings his bag over his shoulder and creeps most (4) _____ to school. His next act is that of a lover, busy (5) _____ ballads for his beloved and yearns for her (6) _____ In the fourth stage, he is aggressive and ambitious and seeks (7) _____ in all that he does. He (8) _____ solemnly to guard his country and becomes a soldier. As he grows older, with (9) _____ and wisdom, he becomes a fair judge. During this stage, he is firm and (10) _____ In the sixth act, he is seen with loose pantaloons and spectacles. His manly voice changes into a childish (11) _____ The last scene of all is his second childhood. Slowly, he loses his (12) _____ of sight, hearing, smell and taste and exits from the roles of his life.
Answer:

  1. actors
  2. enter
  3. dependent
  4. reluctantly
  5. composing
  6. attention
  7. reputation
  8. promises
  9. maturity
  10. serious
  11. treble
  12. faculties

2. From your understanding of the poem, answer the following questions briefly in a sentence or two.

12th English All The World’s A Stage Paragraph Question (a)
What is the world compared to?
Answer:
The world is compared to a stage.

12th English Poem All The World’s A Stage Question (b)
“And they have their exits and their entrances” – What do the words ‘exits’ and ‘entrances’ mean?
Answer:
‘Entrances’ means life. ‘Exits means death.

All The World’s A Stage Poem Appreciation Questions And Answers Question (c)
What is the first stage of a human’s life?
Answer:
The first stage of human life is “infant”. The babe on nurse’s arms pukes and mewls.

All The World’s A Stage Questions And Answers Question (d)
Describe the second stage of life as depicted by Shakespeare.
Answer:
The second stage is school boy. The boy goes to school with a heavy heart like a snail.

12th English Unit 3 Poem Question (e)
How does a man play a lover’s role?
Answer:
As a lover, man sings serenades seeking the attention of his lady love.

12th English All The World’s A Stage Question (f)
Bring out the features of the fourth stage of a man as described by the poet.
Answer:
In the fourth stage, man becomes aggressive and ambitious and seeks glory in all his pursuits. He is ready to enter the mouth of cannon for a moment of glory.

All The World’s A Stage Question And Answers Question (g)
When does a man become a judge? How?
Answer:
In the fifth stage, man grows mature and wise. He becomes an impartial judge. He is firm and serious about his opinions.

All The World’s A Stage Poem Questions And Answers Pdf Question (h)
Which stage of man’s life is associated with the ‘shrunk shank’?
Answer:
In the sixth stage, man becomes thin and weak. His fashionable dresses of youthful days have now become too lose to use for his shrunk shank (i.e.) legs that have become very lean with age.

All The World’s A Stage Question Answer Question (i)
Why is the last stage called second childhood?
Answer:
The last stage is called the second childhood. The old man slowly loses all his senses. He requirs the support of a nurse or wife to do anything. In this stage, he departs from the world.

3. Explain the following lines briefly with reference to the context.

All The World’s A Stage Question And Answer Question (a)
“They have their exits and their entrances;
And one man in his time plays many parts”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘All the world’s a stage’ written by William Shakespeare.
Context and Explanation: The poet says this while hinting at the beginning and the end of life. The poet divides man’s life into seven stages. The first stage symbolises birth and the last stage death. So, he uses the words “entrances and exits”.

Question Answer Of All The World’s A Stage Question (b)
‘‘Jealous in honour, sudden and quick in quarrel,
Seeking the bubble reputation”.
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘All the world’s a stage’ written by William Shakespeare.
Context and Explanation: The poet says these words while describing the fourth stage when the young man becomes a soldier and runs after short-lived glory. He has inflated sense of honour and ready to insist on duels to settle matters touching his honour. He does not realise that the reputation he seeks is short-lived like a bubble.

All The World’s A Stage Summary Question (c)
“Is second childishness and mere oblivion;
Sans teeth, sans eyes, sans taste, sans everything.”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘All the world’s a stage’ written by William Shakespeare.
Context and Explanation: The poet says this while man gets ready to leave this world (i.e.) the last stage of his life on this lonely planet. In this stage, man becomes totally forgetful. He loses his teeth, eyesight and taste. He loses all his senses of perception. Like a baby, he can’t do anything on his own. So, the poet calls this stage “second childhood” when the old man behaves in a childish manner.

All The World’s A Stage Poem Paragraph Additional Questions

Explain the following lines briefly with reference to the context.

All The World’s A Stage English Workshop Answers Question (a)
“His acts being seven ages. At first the infant,
Mewling and puking in the nurse’s arms;”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘All the world’s a stage’ written by William . Shakespeare.
Context and Explanation: The poet says these words while describing the first seven stages of life on the stage (i.e.) earth. The first stage/Act is infancy. The babe vomits on the arms of the nurse and cries like a kitten.

All The World’s A Stage Reference To Context Question (b)
“All the world’s a stage,
And all the men and women merely players;”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘All the world’s a stage’ written by William Shakespeare.
Context and Explanation: The poet says these words while philosophising and classifying stages of life. The poet compares the world to a stage. All men and women are simply actors playing different roles on the different stages of life.

All The World’s A Stage Poem Questions Question (c)
“Then the whining school-boy, with his satchel
And shining morning face, creeping like snail’
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘All the world’s a stage’ written by William Shakespeare.
Context’and Explanation: The poet says these words while describing the second stage of life. During boyhood, the school boy goes to school reluctantly in snail speed with a heavy heart. In ‘Romeo and Juliet’, Shakespeare compares a school boy going to school like a lover going away from his lady love with a heavy heart.

All The World’s A Stage Pictures Question (d)
“Sighing like furnace, with a woeful ballad
Made to his mistress’ eyebrow.”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘All the world’s a stage’ written by William Shakespeare.
Context and Explanation: The poet says these words while describing the third stage of life when he becomes a lover. At this stage, he yearns for the attention of his lady love. He composes ballads expressing his agony caused by unrequitted love. He sings songs praising the beauty of his mistress trying to win her heart.

All The World’s A Stage Poem In Tamil Question (e)
“Seeking the bubble reputation
Even in the cannon’s mouth.”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘All the world’s a stage” written by William Shakespeare.
Context and Explanation: The poet says these words while describing the fourth stage of life. In this stage, youngman becomes a soldier. He is quick to anger and attaches great importance to honour. He is ready to lay down his life for the fleeting bubble of reputation.

All The World’s A Stage Poem Reference To Context Question (f)
“…And then the justice,
In fair round belly with good capon lin’d,
With eyes severe and beard of formal cut,
Full of wise saws and modern instances;”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘All the world’s a stage” written by William ‘ Shakespeare.
Context and Explanation: The poet says these words while describing the fifth stage of life. At this stage, he behaves like a judge pronouncing his decisive opinions with the modem instances. He quotes wise maxims from his own life experiences to influence other people. He is fond of eating delicacies unmindful of the protruding belly size.

Question (g)
“And so he plays his part The sixth age shifts
Into the lean and slipper ’dpantaloon,”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘All the world’s a stage” written by William Shakespeare.
Context and Explanation: The poet says these words while describing the impact of ageing on the physical appearance. In the sixth stage, he becomes old, thin and unsteady.

Question (h)
“Hisyouthful hose, well said, a world too wide
For his shrunk shank; and his big manly voice,”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘All the world’s a stage” written by William Shakespeare.
Context and Explanation: The poet says these words to describe the unsuitability of one’s own dress as one advances in years. As the young man turns old, his legs become thin and his trousers become very loose giving easy access to legs but tough to wear as the waistline has also thinned. His manly voice has become feeble. When he speaks, it looks like a child piping up his dreams.

Question (i)
“…Last scene of all,
That ends this strange eventful history,”
Answer:
Reference: These lines are from the poem ‘All the world’s a stage” written by William Shakespeare.
Context and Explanation: The poet says these words while describing the preparedness of the old man in the last stage of life to exit from this lonely planet. The poet beautifully says the “eventful history” (i.e.) life which was spiced up with many interesting things is now coming to a dramatic close. The eternal jewel of life, ‘the soul’, is going to depart the body which had kept it imprisoned for long. The soul celebrates the joy of freedom in death.

Appreciate The Poem

4. Read the poem once again carefully and identify the figure of speech that has been used in each of the following lines from the poem.

“All the world’s a stage,
And all the men and women merely players;
They have their exits and their entrances;
And one man in his time plays many parts,
His acts being seven ages. At first the infant,

Mewling and puking in the nurse’s arms;
Then the whining school-boy, with his satchel
And shining morning face, creeping like snail
Unwillingly to school. And then the lover,
Sighing like furnace, with a woeful ballad
Made to his mistress’ eyebrow. Then a soldier,
Full of strange oaths, and bearded like the pard,
Jealous in honour, sudden and quick in quarrel,

Seeking the bubble reputation
Even in the cannon’s mouth. And then the justice,
In fair round belly with good capon lin’d,
With eyes severe and beard of formal cut,
Full of wise saws and modern instances;
And so he plays his part. The sixth age shifts
Into the lean and slipper’d pantaloon,
12th English All The World's A Stage Paragraph Solutions Poem Chapter 3 Samacheer Kalvi
With spectacles on nose and pouch on side;
His youthful hose, well sav’d, a world too wide
For his shrunk shank; and his big manly voice,
Turning again toward childish treble, pipes
And whistles in his sound. Last scene of all,
That ends this strange eventful history,
Is second childishness and mere oblivion;
Sans teeth, sans eyes, sans taste, sans everything.”

Question (a)
“All the world’s a stage”
Answer:
Metaphor

Question (b)
“And all the men and women merely players”
Metaphor

Question (c)
“And shining morning face, creeping like snail’
Simile

Question (d)
“Full of strange oaths, and bearded like the pard,”
Answer:
Simile

Question (e)
“Seeking the bubble reputation”
Answer:
Metaphor

Question (f)
“Hisyouthful hose, well sav’d, a world too wide”
Answer:
Alliteration

Question (g)
“and his big manly voice, turning again toward childish treble”
Answer:
Metaphor

5.Pick out the words in ‘alliteration’ in the following lines,

Question (a)
“and all the men and women merely players”
Answer:
and all the men and women merely players

Question (b)
“And one man in his time plays many parts”
Answer:
And one man in his time plays many parts

Question (c)
“Jealous in honour, sudden and quick in quarrel ”
Answer:
Jealous in honour, sudden and quick in quarrel.

6. Read the given lines and answer the questions that follow.

(a) “Then the whining school-boy, with his satchel
And shining morning face, creeping like snail
Unwillingly to school ”

Question (i)
Which stage of life is being referred to here by the poet?
Answer:
Boyhood is referred to here.

Question (ii)
What are the characteristics of this stage?
Answer:
Innocence, joy and care-free life are the characteristics of this stage in life.

Question (iii)
How does the boy go to school?
Answer:
The boy goes to school unwillingly. He is slow like a snail.

Question (iv)
Which figure of speech has been employed in the second line?
Answer:
Simile is employed in the second line.

(b) “Then a soldier,
full of strange oaths, and bearded like the pard,
Jealous in honour, sudden and quick in quarrel,
Seeking the bubble reputation Even in the cannon’s mouth.

Question (i)
What is the soldier ready to do?
Answer:
The soldier is ready to lay down his life.

Question (ii)
Explain ‘bubble reputation’.
Answer:
Reputation is a transitory thing. It doesn’t even last a minute like the life of a bubble.

Question (iii)
What are the distinguishing features of this stage?
In this stage, the youthful soldier attaches great value to honour. He is quick to temper and challenges people for fight for the sake of honour. He often swears to assert his valour.

(c) “And then the justice,
In fair round belly with good capon lin’d,
With eyes severe and beard of formal cut,
Full of wise saws and modern instances;’’’’

Question (i)
Whom does justice refer to?
Answer:
Justice refers to man in his fifth stage when he becomes critical of everyone else’s opinion in life.

Question (ii)
Describe his appearance.
Answer:
He has a pot belly and is fond of eating delicacies.

Question (iii)
How does he behave with the people around him?
Answer:
His eyes are severe. He often gives advice to people.

Question (iv)
What does he do to show his wisdom?
Answer:
To show of his wisdom, he often quotes modem examples and words of wisdom.

Additional Questions

Read the given lines and answer the questions that follow.

(a) “All the world’s a stage
And all the men and women merely players:
They have their exits and their entrances;
And one man in his time plays many parts,
His acts being seven ages.”

Question (i)
What are all the men and women of this world?
Answer:
The men and women of the world are just like players on the stage of life.

Question (ii)
Explain: ‘They have their exits and their entrances’.
Answer:
They take birth and enter the world. They die and depart from the world.

Question (iii)
How many parts does every man enact and play?
Answer:
Every man enacts and plays seven different roles in life.

Question (iv)
Why is this world compared to a stage?
Answer:
This world is like a big stage where men and women are ever busy in playing their respective roles.

(b) “At first the infant,
Mewling and puking in the nurse’s arms.
Then the whining schoolboy, with his satchel
And shining morning face, creeping like snail
Unwillingly to school.”

Question (i)
What does man do in the first stage of life?
Answer:
In the first stage of life man plays the role of an infant. He is always crying and vomiting in the nurse’s arms.

Question (ii)
Does the schoolboy show eagerness to go to school?
Answer:
No, the schoolboy doesn’t show any interest in going to school. Rather he is unwilling to go there.

Question (iii)
How does the schoolboy walk up to his school?
Answer:
He is inching slowly and unwillingly like a snail towards his school.

Question (iv)
Explain, ‘Mewling and pucking’.
Answer:
It means crying and vomiting.

(c) “And then the lover,
Sighing like furnace, with a woeful ballad
Made to his mistress’ eyebrow.”

Question (i)
What is the third stage of life?
The third stage of man’s life is that of a lover.

Question (ii)
What is the poetic device used in the second line?
Answer:
‘Simile’ is used as a poetic device in the second line.

Question (iii)
What does the lover do for his mistress?
Answer:
The lover is ahvays sighing and longing for his beloved. He writes a sad ballad describing the eyebrow of his mistress.

Question (iv)
Explain, ‘sighing like furnace’.
Answer:
It means moaning, breathing deeply and sadly like a fire place.

(d) “Then a soldier.
Full of strange oaths, and bearded like the pard,
Jealous in honour, sudden and quick in quarrel,
Seeking the bubble reputation.
Even in the cannon’s mouth.”

Question (i)
Describe the two traits of a soldier.
Answer:
A soldier is always ready to swear and is full of oaths. He is ever ready to compete for honour and glory.

Question (ii)
What is the poetic device used in : ‘bearded like a pard’?
Answer:
The poet uses a simile for comparison.

Question (iii)
Why does the soldier risk his life and what for?
Answer:
The soldier risks his life a momentary reputation and is ready even to enter the cannon’s mouth.

Question (iv)
How is the soldier bearded?
Answer:
He is bearded like a pard or a leopard.

(e) “The sixth age shifts
Into the lean and slippered pantaloon,
With spectacles on nose and pouch on side,
His youthful hose, well saved, a world too wide For his shrunk shank; and his big manly voice,
Turning again toward childish treble, pipes
And whistles in his sound.’’

Question (i)
What is a ‘lean and slippered pantaloon’?
Answer:
It means a thin old man wearing slippers and loose trousers.

Question (ii)
What does the phrase ‘a world too wide’ here mean?
Answer:
The stockings he bought in his youth have become too loose for his shrunk and thin legs.

Question (iii)
How does the ‘mainly voice’ turn into ‘childish’ in the sixth stage of life?
Answer:
His manly voice turns into childish trebles and whistles when he speaks as he has no teeth in his mouth.

Question (iv)
What is the sixth stage of man’s life?
Answer:
In the sixth stage of life man plays the role of a ‘lean and slippered pantaloon’.

(f) “Last scene of all,
That ends this strange eventful history,
Is second childishness and mere oblivion,
Sans teeth, sans eyes, sans taste, sans everything.”

Question (i)
What is the last scene of man’s life?
Answer:
The last scene that ends man’s eventual life is a ‘second-childishness’. In this stage he appears and behaves like a child.

Question (ii)
Why is the last stage of man has been called a ‘second childishness’?
Answer:
The last stage of man’s life has been called a ‘second childishness’ as man’s appearance and activities in this stage are quite similar to those of a child.

Question (iii)
How is the last stage of man’s life a ‘mere oblivion’?
Answer:
The last stage of life is a ‘mere oblivion’ as old age is another stage of forgetfulness.

Question (iv)
Explain ‘eventful history’.
Answer:
It means the life-long history of man full of interesting incidents and experiences.

7. Complete the table based on your understanding of the poem.

Stage Characteristic
crying
judge
soldier
unhappy
second childhood
whining
old man

Answer:

Stage Characteristic
Baby (first stage) crying
judge Firm and serious
soldier Aggressive and Ambitious
Lover unhappy
second childhood Loses senses
Boyhood (school) whining
old man Wise and judges others

8. Based on your understanding of the poem, answer the following questions in about 100 – 150 words each. You may add your own ideas if required, to present and justify your point of view.

Question (а)
Describe the various stages of a man’s life picturised in the poem “All the World’s a stage.”
Answer:
Shakespeare has beautifully portrayed this world as a huge open theatre where in all humans play seven acts/ages. In the first act, he is a helpless infant puking on the nurse’s arms mewling like a kitten. In the second stage, he is the grumbling/whining school student. He moves to school like a snal/unwllingly with his slate and bag. In the third Act, he is a lover sighing and yearning for the attention of his lady love.

He composes romantic ballads complaining his love that he needs a better deal. In the fourth Act, he becomes a quick-tempered soldier, aggressive and ambitious, ready to stake his life for the sake of bubble reputation. As he matures, he becomes a wise judge of contemporary life quoting wise maxims to endorse his opinion. He is firm and serious. In the sixth act, his stout legs become thin making his trousers of youth unsuitable. Thin and lean legs easily travel through them but are unable to stay due to a slimmed waist. His bass voice has become treble like that of a child. In the last act, he is sans teeth, sanys eyes, sans taste and sans everything (i.e.) loses all senses. He departs the world.

Question (b)
Shakespeare has skill fully brought out the parallels between the life of man and actors on stage. Elaborate this statement with reference to the poem.
Answer:
Shakespeare has beautifully compared the growth of humans by stages with his emergent role during that stage. In the first stage man plays the role of an infant. As an infant, he does represent characterisation of mewling and puking. In the second Act, he does the role of a school boy with the characteristics of unwillingness to go to schools and innocence shining in his face. In the third Act, he performs the role of a lover head over heels in love with a beautiful lady. He composes woeful romantic ballads and sings serenades to impress his love. In the fourth act, he plays the impressive role of a short-tempered, honour pursuing soldier.

He is ready to put his mouth in the Cannon’s mouth for conquering the bubble like honour in order to defend the territory of his country. In the fifth Act, he performs the role of a mature and fair judge criticising the ways of the world often spicing up his conversations with wise remarks and wit. His pot belly and well-cut beard shows the social status he enjoys in life. In the sixth act, he is old. He performs the role of a thin old man wearing ill-fitting loose garments with a changed treble in his voice. He is bespectacled and slow in walking. In the final act, he becomes a total invalid losing all senses of hearing, taste and sight. Then the performer leaves the stage (i.e.) the lonely planet.

Speaking Activity

Shakespeare describes the characteristics of the various stages of man. You are in the second stage of life. What do you think of your roles and responsibilities at this stage? Discuss with your partner and share your ideas with the class.
Answer:
At school age, imagination takes wings. Inquisitiveness is common among my peers. Parents, society and teachers want us only to study. But we need to explore the world around us. At home, it is our responsibility to keep our things in order. We need to assist the perennial worker, we mean, our moms in completing their domestic chores. Occasionally, we shall take care of siblings too not as a work but as a duty towards a family member who will be a life long companion to us.

Listening Activity

Listen to the poem and fill in the blanks with appropriate words and phrases. If required listen to the poem again.

The World Is Too Much with Us
The world is too much with us; late and soon, Getting and spending, we lay waste our powers; Little we see in Nature that is ours;We have given our hearts away, a sordid boon! This Sea that bares her bosom to the moon, The winds that will be howling at all hours,And are up- gathered now like sleeping flowers,

For this, for everything, we are out of tune; It moves us not. – Great God! I’d rather be A Pagan suckled in a creed outworn; So might I, standing on this pleasant lea, Have glimpses that would make me less forlorn; Have sight of Proteus rising from the sea; Or hear old Triton blow his wreathed horn.

The World Is Too Much with Us:
The world is too much with us; late and soon
Getting and spending, we lay waste our powers
Little we see in (1) ______ that is ours;
We have given (2) ______ away, a sordid boon!
This Sea that bares her bosom (3) ______
(4) ______ that will be howling at all hours,
And are up-gathered now like (5) ______
,For this, for everything, we are (6) ______ ;
It (7) ______ . us not. Great God! I’d rather be
A Pagan suckled in a creed outworn;
So might I, standing on this pleasant lea
Have glimpses that would make me less forlorn;
Have sight of Proteus rising (8) ______
Or hear old Triton blow his wreathed horn.
Answers:

  1. Nature
  2. our hearts
  3. to the moon
  4. The winds
  5. sleeping flowers
  6. out of tune
  7. moves
  8. from the sea

All the World’s a Stage About The Poet

12th English Poem All The World's A Stage Solutions Poem Chapter 3 Samacheer Kalvi

William Shakespeare (1564-1616) was a prolific writer during the Elizabethan and Jacobean ages of British theatre (sometimes called the English Renaissance). Shakespeare’s plays are perhaps his most enduring legacy. Shakespeare’s poems remain popular to this day. Shakespeare’s rich and diverse works have spawned countless adaptations across multiple genres and cultures. His writings have been compiled in various iterations of The Complete Works of William Shakespeare. William Shakespeare continues to be one of the most important literary7 figures of the English language.

All the World’s a Stage Summary in english

Introduction
‘All the world’s a stage’ is an extract from the play ‘As you like it’, a romantic comedy by Shakespeare.

A metaphor defining world
Shakespeare claims this world as a stage in a theatre. All men and women are only actors. The stage has both exits and entrances. Similarly, men and women take birth and enter the world. They live their lives and go out of it when they die. Every man plays seven emergent roles and lives through seven stages of life.

Infancy and boyhood
With the birth of an infant begins the first stage of man’s life. The infant cries and vomits on the arms of his nurse. Then he grows into a school-going boy. He is unwilling to go to the school. He moves towards school at a snail’s speed.

Thirst for love and glory
In the third stage, man plays the role of a lover. He sighs like a fumace.He keeps on writing ballads praising the beauty of the eyes of his beloved. The fourth stage is that of a soldier. He keeps a beard like that of a leopard. He always runs after honour and fame. He is ready even to enter a cannon’s mouth just for momentary glory and bubble of reputation.

Wisdom and failing health
In the fifth stage, man plays the role of a justice. He is fond of eating chicken and develops a fat round belly. He is full of wise sayings and modem instances. He is a man of wisdom and knowledge. In the sixth stage, man becomes weak and thin in body. He wears slippers, spectacles and clothes that he bought when he was young. These pants and stockings have become loose for his shrunk and thin legs.

Second childhood
The seventh stage is the ‘second childhood’. In this stage, man becomes very old and starts behaving like a child. He is left with no teeth and becomes weak in eyesight. Actually, he loses taste and becomes a victim of forgetfulness. The poet describes this helpless state as “Sans teeth, sans eyes, sans taste and sans everything” nicely. Then the man departs from this world.

Conclusion
Shakespeare condenses the life of man beautifully and portrays it well. The revisit of childhood in old age proves his profound understanding of human life.

All the World’s a Stage Summary in Tamil

முன்னுரை
‘All the World’s a stage’ (‘உலகம் ஒரு நாடக மேடை’) என்ற கவிதை சேக்ஸ்பியரின் ‘As you like it’, என்ற | நகைச்சுவை கலந்த கற்பனை கதையின் ஒரு சாரம் ஆகும்.

உலகம் ஒரு நாடக மேடை:
சேக்ஸ்பியர் உலகத்தை ஒருநாடக மேடையாகக் கருதுகிறார். அதில் அனைத்து ஆணும், பெண்ணும் நடிகர்களே. இந்த நாடக மேடையின் உள்ளே வரவும் வெளியே செல்லவும் வழிகள் உள்ளன. அதே போல தான் மனிதன் பிறந்து இந்த உலகத்துக்கு வருகிறான். அவனது வாழ்நாளை வாழ்ந்துவிட்டு வெளியே போய்விடுகிறான். ஒவ்வொரு மனிதனும் ஏழு கதாபாத்திரங்களாக வாழ்க்கை மேடையில் நடிக்கிறான்.

குழந்தை பருவமும், விடலைப் பருவமும்:
குழந்தை பருவமே மனிதனின் முதல் பாகம் ஆகும். வாந்தியும், அழுகையுமாக முதல் பாகம் செவிலிப் பெண் தோளில் இருக்கிறான். பிறகு பள்ளிப் பருவம் அடைகிறான். பள்ளிக்கூடம் போக மனமில்லாது இருக்கிறான். பள்ளிக்கூடத்தை நோக்கி நத்தை போல் நகர்கிறான்.

காதல், புகழ் என ஈர்ப்புக்குள்ளாகிறான்:
மூன்றாம் பாகத்தில் காதலனாக கதாபாத்திரம் ஏற்கிறான். எரியும் அடுப்பைப் போன்று குமுறுகிறான். தன் காதலியின் கண்களைக் குறித்து கவிதை மழை பொழிகிறான். நான்காம் பாகத்தில் சிப்பாய் வேடம் ஏற்கிறான். சிறுத்தை போன்று மீசையை வளர்த்துக் கொள்கிறான். பேர் மற்றும் புகழின் பின்னால் ஓடுகிறான். தற்காலிக பேருக்கும், புகழுக்கும் ஆசைப்பட்டு பீரங்கி | வாயினுள் நுழையவும் தயாராக இருக்கிறான்.

அறிவு முதிர்ச்சியும், குன்றும் ஆரோக்கியமும்:
ஐந்தாம் பாகத்தில் தானே ஒரு நீதிபதி ஆகிறான். கோழி மாமிசத்தின் பால் ஆவல் கொண்டு அதை உண்டு பெரிய தொப்பையுடன் தோன்றுகிறான். அறிவு முதிர்ச்சியுடனும், புதுப் பொலிவுடனும் தோன்றுகிறான். அறிவும் ஆற்றலுமுடையவனாய்த் திகழ்கிறான். ஆறாம் பாகத்தில் உடல் வலுவிழந்து சோர்வடைகிறான், ஒல்லி வடிவமாய், காலில் செருப்புமாய் ஒரு சிரிப்பு நடிகனைப் போல் தோற்றமளிக்கிறான். இளம் வயதில் அணிந்த கண்ணாடியும், துணிகளும், செருப்பும் அணிந்து கொள்கிறான். சுருங்கிய தோல்களுக்கும், ஒல்லியான கால்களுக்கும் இந்த உடையும், செருப்பும் தொள தொளவென காணப்படுகின்றன.

இரண்டாம் குழந்தை பருவம்:
ஏழாம் பருவம் இரண்டாவது குழந்தை பருவம் எனலாம். இந்த பாகத்தில் மிகவும் வயது முதிர்ந்த ஒரு குழந்தையின் இயலாமைத் தனத்தை செயல்பாட்டில் காட்டுகிறான். பற்களை இழந்து, கண் பார்வைக் குன்றிப் போகிறான். குழந்தையின் குரல் போல் மாறி, குரல் ஒரு விசில் சத்தமாய் மாறுகிறது. இது கடைசி அத்தியாயம் எனலாம். அவனின் அதிசயமான பரப்பரப்பூட்டும் நிகழ்வுகள் நிறைந்த வரலாறானது ஒரு முடிவுக்கு வருகிறது. தன் இரண்டாம் குழந்தைப் பருவத்தில் பிறரைச் சார்ந்து வாழும் நிலையை அடைகிறான். பற்களை இழந்து, கண் பார்வையை இழந்து, நாவின் | சுவை இழந்து, பின் அனைத்தையும் இழக்கிறான். உலகத்தை விட்டு வெளியேறுகிறான்.

முடிவுரை:
சேக்ஸ்பியர் மனித வாழ்க்கையை சுருக்கி அழகாக அதை வர்ணித்து இருக்கிறார். வயோதிகத்தில் திரும்பும் குழந்தைத் தனம் என்பது அவர் மனித வாழ்க்கையை அவர் ஆழ்ந்து அறிந்து கொண்டதை உணர்த்துகிறது.

All the World’s a Stage Glossary

Textual:

All The World's A Stage Poem Appreciation Questions And Answers Samacheer Kalvi 12th English Solutions Poem Chapter 3

Additional:

All The World's A Stage Questions And Answers Samacheer Kalvi 12th English Solutions Poem Chapter 3

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity

Students those who are preparing for the 12th Physics exam can download this Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Book Solutions Questions and Answers for Chapter 2 Current Electricity from here free of cost. These Tamilnadu State Board Solutions for Class 12th Physics PDF cover all Chapter 2 Current Electricity Questions and Answers. All these concepts of Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Book Solutions Questions and Answers are explained very conceptually as per the board prescribed Syllabus & guidelines.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity

Kickstart your preparation by using this Tamilnadu State Board Solutions for 12th Physics Chapter 2 Current Electricity Questions and Answers and get the max score in the exams. You can cover all the topics of Chapter 2 Current Electricity Questions and Answers pdf. Download the Tamilnadu State Board Solutions by accessing the links provided here and ace up your preparation.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Current Electricity Textual Evaluation Solved

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Current Electricity Multiple Choice Questions   

Current Electricity Class 12 Problems With Solutions State Board Question 1.
The following graph shows current versus voltage values of some unknown conductor. What is the resistance of this conductor?
Current Electricity Class 12 Problems With Solutions State Board Chapter 2 Samacheer Kalvi
(a) 2 ohm
(b) 4 ohm
(c) 8 ohm
(d) 1 ohm
Answer:
(a) 2 ohm

Current Electricity Class 12 State Board Question 2.
A wire of resistance 2 ohms per meter is bent to form a circle of radius 1 m. The equivalent resistance between its two diametrically opposite points, A and B as shown in the figure is-
Current Electricity Class 12 State Board Solutions Chapter 2 Samacheer Kalvi
(a) π Ω
(b) \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\) Ω
(c) 2π Ω
(d) \(\frac { π }{ 4 }\) Ω
Answer:
(b) \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\) Ω

12th Physics Chapter 2 Book Back Answers Question 3.
A toaster operating at 240 V has a resistance of 120 Ω. The power is
(a) 400 W
(b) 2 W
(c) 480 W
(d) 240 W
Answer:
(c) 480 W

12th Physics Samacheer Kalvi Question 4.
A carbon resistor of (47 ± 4.7) k Ω to be marked with rings of different colours for its identification. The colour code sequence will be
(a) Yellow – Green – Violet – Gold
(b) Yellow – Violet – Orange – Silver
(c) Violet – Yellow – Orange – Silver
(d) Green – Orange – Violet – Gold
Answer:
(b) Yellow – Violet – Orange – Silver

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Question 5.
What is the value of resistance of the following resistor?
12th Physics Chapter 2 Book Back Answers Current Electricity Samacheer Kalvi
(a) 100 k Ω
(b) 10 k Ω M
(c) 1 k Ω
(d) 1000 k Ω
Answer:
(a) 100 k Ω

Class 12 Physics Samacheer Kalvi Question 6.
Two wires of A and B with circular cross section made up of the same material with equal lengths. Suppose RA = 3 RB, then what is the ratio of radius of wire A to that of B?
(a) 3
(b) √3
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ √3 }\)
(d) \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 }\)
Answer:
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ √3 }\)

Current Electricity Short Notes Question 7.
A wire connected to a power supply of 230 V has power dissipation P1 Suppose the wire is cut into two equal pieces and connected parallel to the same power supply. In this case power dissipation is P2. The ratio \(\frac {{ p }_{2}}{{ p }_{1}}\) is.
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(d) 4

Samacheer Kalvi Guru 12th Physics Question 8.
In India electricity is supplied for domestic use at 220 V. It is supplied at 110 V in USA. If the resistance of a 60W bulb for use in India is R, the resistance of a 60W bulb for use in USA will be
(a) R
(b) 2R
(c) \(\frac { R }{ 4 }\)
(d) \(\frac { R }{ 2 }\)
Answer:
(c) \(\frac { R }{ 4 }\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Question 9.
In a large building, there are 15 bulbs of 40 W, 5 bulbs of 100 W, 5 fans of 80 W and 1 heater of 1kW are connected. The voltage of electric mains is 220 V. The minimum capacity of the main fuse of the building will be (IIT-JEE 2014)
(a) 14 A
(b) 8 A
(c) 10 A
(d) 12 A
Answer:
(d) 12 A

Samacheerkalvi.Guru 12th Physics Question 10.
There is a current of 1.0 A in the circuit shown below. What is the resistance of P ?
12th Physics Samacheer Kalvi Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity
(a) 1.5 Ω
(b) 2.5 Ω
(c) 3.5 Ω
(d) 4.5 Ω
Answer:
(c) 3.5 Ω

Samacheer Kalvi Physics Question 11.
What is the current out of the battery?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity
(а) 1 A
(b) 2 A
(c) 3 A
(d) 4 A
Answer:
(а) 1 A

12th Physics Solutions Samacheer Kalvi Question 12.
The temperature coefficient of resistance of a wire is 0.00125 per °C. At 300 K, its resistance is 1 Ω. The resistance of the wire will be 2 Ω. at
(a) 1154 K
(ft) 1100 K
(c) 1400 K
(d) 1127 K
Answer:
(d) 1127 K

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solution Book Question 13.
The internal resistance of a 2.1 V cell which gives a current of 0.2 A through a resistance of 10Ω is
(a) 0.2 Ω
(b) 0.5 Ω
(c) 0.8 Ω
(d) 1.0 Ω
Answer:
(b) 0.5 Ω

Samacheer Kalvi Guru Physics Question 14.
A piece of copper and another of germanium are cooled from room temperature to 80 K. The resistance of
(a) each of them increases
(b) each of them decreases
(c) copper increases and germanium decreases
(d) copper decreases and germanium increases
Answer:
(d) copper decreases and germanium increases

Physics Class 12 Samacheer Kalvi Question 15.
In Joule’s heating law, when I and t are constant, if the H is taken along the y axis and I2 along the x axis, the graph is
(a) straight line
(b) parabola
(c) circle
(d) ellipse
Answer:
(a) straight line

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Current Electricity Short Answer Questions

Samacheer Kalvi.Guru 12th Physics Question 1.
Why current is a scalar?
Answer:
The current I is defined as the scalar product of current density and area vector in which the charges cross.
I = \(\vec { j } \) . \(\vec { A } \)
The dot product of two vector quantity is a scalar form. Hence, current is called as a scalar quantity.

12th Samacheer Physics Solutions Question 2.
Distinguish between drift velocity and mobility.
Answer:
Class 12 Physics Samacheer Kalvi Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity

Physics Solution Class 12 Samacheer Kalvi Question 3.
State microscopic form of Ohm’s law.
Answer:
Current density J at a point in a conductor is the amount of current flowing per unit area of the conductor around that point provided the area is held in a direction normal to the current.
Current Electricity Short Notes Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2

Current Electricity Pdf Question 4.
State macroscopic form of Ohm’s law.
Answer:
The macroscopic form of Ohm’s Law relates voltage, current and resistance. Ohm’s Law states that the current through an object is proportional to the voltage across it and inversely proportional to the object’s resistance.
V = IR.

Current Electricity Class 12 Question 5.
What are ohmic and non-ohmic devices?
Answer:
Materials for which the current against voltage graph is a straight line through the origin, are said to obey Ohm’s law and their behaviour is said to be ohmic. Materials or devices that do not follow Ohm’s law are said to be non-ohmic.

Samacheer Kalvi Class 12 Physics Solutions Question 6.
Define electrical resistivity.
Answer:
Electrical resistivity of a material is defined as the resistance offered to current flow by a conductor of unit length having unit area of cross section.

Question 7.
Define temperature coefficient of resistance.
Answer:
It is defined as the ratio of increase in resistivity per degree rise in temperature to its resistivity at T0
Samacheer Kalvi Guru 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity

Question 8.
What is superconductivity?
Answer:
The ability of certain metals, their compounds and alloys to conduct electricity with zero resistance at very low temperatures is called superconductivity.

Question 9.
What is electric power and electric energy?
Answer:
1. Electric power:
It is the rate at which an electric appliance converts electric energy into other forms of energy. Or, it is the rate at which work is done by a source of emf in maintaining an electric current through a circuit.
P = \(\frac { W }{ t }\) = VI = I2R = \(\frac {{ V }_{2}}{ R }\)

2. Electric energy:
It is the total workdone in maintaining an electric current in an electric circuit for a given time.
W = Pt = VIt joule = I2Rt joule.

Question 10.
Define current density.
Answer:
The current density (J) is defined as the current per unit area of cross section of the conductor
J = \(\frac { 1 }{ A }\)
The S.I unit of current density.
\(\frac { A }{{ m }^{2}}\)
Or
Am2

Question 11.
Derive the expression for power P = VI in electrical circuit.
Answer:
The electrical power P is the rate at which the electrical potential energy is delivered,
P = \(\frac { dU }{ dt }\) = \(\frac { d }{ dt }\) (V.dQ) = V\(\frac { dQ }{ dt }\)
Since the electric current I = \(\frac { dQ }{ dt }\)
So the equation can be rewritten as P = VI.

Question 12.
Write down the various forms of expression for power in electrical circuit.
Answer:
The electric power P is the rate at which the electrical potential energy is delivered,
P = \(\frac { dU }{ dt }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ dt }\) (V.dQ) = V.\(\frac { dQ }{ dt }\)
[dU = V.dQ]
The electric power delivered by the battery to any electrical system.
P = VI
The electric power delivered to the resistance R is expressed in other forms.
P = VI = I(IR) = I2R
P = IV = \((\frac { V }{ R })\) V = \(\frac {{ V }^{2}}{ R }\).

Question 13.
State Kirchhoff’s current rule.
Answer:
It states that the algebraic sum of the currents at any junction of a circuit is zero. It is a statement of conservation of electric charge.

Question 14.
State Kirchhoff’s voltage rule.
Answer:
It states that in a closed circuit the algebraic sum of the products of the current and resistance of each part of the circuit is equal to the total emf included in the circuit. This rule follows from the law of conservation of energy for an isolated system.

Question 15.
State the principle of potentiometer.
Answer:
The basic principle of a potentiometer is that when a constant current flows through a wire of uniform cross-sectional area and composition, the potential drop across any length of the wire is directly proportional to that length.

Question 16.
What do you mean by internal resistance of a cell?
Answer:
The resistance offered by the electrolyte of a cell to the flow of current between its electrodes is called internal resistance of the cell. An ideal battery has zero internal resistance and the potential difference across the battery equals to its emf. But a real battery is made of electrodes and electrolyte, there is resistance to the flow of charges within the battery. A freshly prepared cell has low internal resistance and it increases with ageing.

Question 17.
State Joule’s law of heating.
Answer:
It states that the heat developed in an electrical circuit due to the flow of current varies directly as:

  1. the square of the current
  2. the resistance of the circuit and
  3. the time of flow.
    H = I2R?

Question 18.
What is Seebeck effect?
Answer:
Seebeck discovered that in a closed circuit consisting of two dissimilar metals, when the junctions are maintained at different temperatures, an emf (potential difference) is developed.

Question 19.
What is Thomson effect?
Answer:
Thomson showed that if two points in a conductor are at different temperatures, the density of electrons at these points will differ and as a result the potential difference is created between these points. Thomson effect is also reversible.

Question 20.
What is Peltier effect?
Answer:
When an electric current is passed through a circuit of a thermocouple, heat is evolved at one junction and absorbed at the other junction. This is known as Peltier effect.

Question 21.
State the applications of Seebeck effect.
Answer:
Applications of Seebeck effect:

  1. Seebeck effect is used in thermoelectric generators (Seebeck generators). These thermoelectric generators are used in power plants to convert waste heat into electricity.
  2. This effect is utilised in automobiles as automotive thermoelectric generators for increasing fuel efficiency.
  3. Seebeck effect is used in thermocouples and thermopiles to measure the temperature difference between the two objects.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Current Electricity Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Describe the microscopic model of current and obtain genera! form of Ohm’s Law.
Answer:
Microscopic model of current: Consider a conductor with area of cross-section A and an electric field E applied from right to left. Suppose there are n electrons per unit volume in the conductor and assume that all the electrons move with the same drift velocity \(\vec { v } \)d.
The drift velocity of the electrons = vd
The electrons move through a distance dx within a small interval of dt
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity
vd = \(\frac { dx }{ dt }\); dx = vddt ….. (1)
Since A is the area of cross section of the conductor, the electrons available in the volume or length dx is
= volume x number per unit volume
= A dx × n …… (2)
Substituting for dx from equation (1) in (2)
= (A vd dt)n
Total charge in volume element dQ = (charge) x (number of electrons in the volume element)
dQ= (e)(A vd dt)n
Hence the current, I = \(\frac { dQ }{ dt }\) = \(\frac{n e A v_{d} d t}{d t}\)
I = ne A vd …….. (3)
Current denshy (J):
The current density (J) is defined as the current per unit area of cross section of the conductor
J = \(\frac { I }{ A }\)
The S.I. unit of current density,\(\frac { A }{{ m }^{2}}\) (or) Am-2
J = \(\frac {{ neA v }_{d}}{ A }\) (from equation 3)
J = nevd …….. (4)
The above expression is valid only when the direction of the current is perpendicular to the area A. In general, the current density is a vector quantity and it is given by
\(\vec { J } \) = ne\(\vec { v } \)d
Substituting i from equation \(\vec { v } \)d = \(\frac { -eτ }{ m }\) \(\vec { E } \)
\(\vec { J } \) = –\(\frac{n \cdot e^{2} \tau}{m}\)\(\vec { E } \) …… (5)
\(\vec { J } \) = -σ\(\vec { E } \)
But conventionally, we take the direction of (conventional) current density as the direction of electric field. So the above equation becomes
\(\vec { J } \) = σ\(\vec { E } \) …….. (6)
where σ = \(\frac{n \cdot e^{2} \tau}{m}\) is called conductivity.
The equation 6 is called microscopic form of ohm’s law.

Question 2.
Obtain the macroscopic form of Ohm’s law from its microscopic form and discuss its limitation.
Answer:
Ohm’s law: The Ohm’s law can be derived from the equation J = σE. Consider a segment of wire of length l and cross sectional area A.
Samacheerkalvi.Guru 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity
When a potential difference V is applied across the wire, a net electric field is created in the wire which constitutes the current. For simplicity, we assume that the electric field is uniform in the entire length of the wire, the potential difference (voltage V) can be written as V = El
As we know, the magnitude of current density
J = σE = σ\(\frac { V }{ l }\) ……. (1)
But J = \(\frac { I }{ A }\), so we write the equation as
\(\frac { I }{ A }\) σ\(\frac { V }{ l }\)
By rearranging the above equation, we get
V = I \(\left( \frac { l }{ \sigma A } \right) \) ……… (2)
The quantity \(\frac { l }{ \sigma A } \)is called resistance of the conductor and it is denoted as R. Note that the oA resistance is directly proportional to the length of the conductor and inversely proportional to area of cross section.
Therefore, the macroscopic form of Ohm’s law can be stated as
V = IR.

Question 3.
Explain the equivalent resistance of a series and parallel resistor network.
Answer:
1. Resistors in series:
When two or more resistors are connected end to end, they are said to be in series. The resistors could be simple resistors or bulbs or heating elements or other devices. Fig. (a) shows three resistors R1, R2 and R3 connected in series.
Samacheer Kalvi Physics 12th Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity
The amount of charge passing through resistor R1 must also pass through resistors R2 and R3 since the charges cannot accumulate anywhere in the circuit. Due to this reason, the current I passing through all the three resistors is the same. According to Ohm’s law, if same current pass through different resistors of different values, then the potential difference across each resistor must be different. Let V1, V2 and V3 be the potential difference (voltage) across each of the resistors R1, R2 and R3 respectively, then we can write V1 = IR1, V2 = IR2 and V3= IR3. But the total voltage V is equal to the sum of voltages across each resistor.
V = V1 + V2 + V3
= IR1 + IR2 + IR3 ….. (1)
V = I(R1 + R2 +R3)
V = I.RS …… (2)
where Rs = R1 + R2 R3 ……. (3)
When several resistances are connected in series, the total or equivalent resistance is the sum of the individual resistances as shown in fig. (b).
12th Physics Solutions Samacheer Kalvi Chapter 2 Current Electricity
Note:
The value of equivalent resistance in series connection will be greater than each individual resistance.

2. Resistors in parallel:
Resistors are in parallel when they are connected across the same potential difference as shown in figer.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solution Book Chapter 2 Current Electricity
In this case, the total current I that leaves the battery in split into three separate paths. Let I1, I2 and I3 be the current through the resistors R1, R2 and R3 respectively. Due to the conservation of charge, total current in the circuit I is equal to sum of the currents through each of the three resistors.
I = I1 + I2 + I3 ……. (1)
Since the voltage across each resistor is the same, applying Ohm’s law to each resistor, we have
I1 = \(\frac { V }{{ R }_{1}}\) I2 = \(\frac { V }{{ R }_{2}}\),I1 = \(\frac { V }{{ R }_{3}}\)
Substituting these values in equation (1), we get
I = \(\frac { V }{{ R }_{1}}\) + \(\frac { V }{{ R }_{2}}\) +\(\frac { V }{{ R }_{3}}\) = V\(\left[ \frac { 1 }{ { R }_{ 1 } } +\frac { 1 }{ { R }_{ 2 } } +\frac { 1 }{ { R }_{ 3 } } \right] \)
I = \(\frac { V }{{ R }_{p}}\)
\(\frac { 1 }{{ R }_{p}}\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ { R }_{ 1 } } +\frac { 1 }{ { R }_{ 2 } } +\frac { 1 }{ { R }_{ 3 } } \)
Here RP is the equivalent resistance of the parallel combination of the resistors. Thus, when a number of resistors are connected in parallel, the sum of the reciprocal of the values of resistance of the individual resistor is equal to the reciprocal of the effective resistance of the combination as shown in the fig. (b).
Samacheer Kalvi Guru Physics 12th Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity
Note:
The value of equivalent resistance in parallel connection will be lesser than each individual resistance.

Question 4.
Explain the determination of the internal resistance of a cell using voltmeter.
Answer:
Determination of internal resistance:
The emf of cell ξ is measured by connecting a high resistance voltmeter across it without connecting the external resistance R. Since the voltmeter draws very little current for deflection, the circuit may be considered as open. Hence, the voltmeter reading gives the emf of the cell. Then, external resistance R is included in the circuit and current I is established in the circuit. The potential difference across R is equal to the potential difference across the cell (V).
Physics Class 12 Samacheer Kalvi Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity
The potential drop across the resistor R is
V= IR …… (1)
Due to internal resistance r of the cell, the voltmeter reads a value V, which is less than the emf of cell ξ. It is because, certain amount of voltage (Ir) has dropped across the internal resistance r.
Samacheer Kalvi.Guru 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity
V = ξ – Ir
Ir = ξ – V …… (2)
Dividing equation (2) by equation (1), we get
\(\frac { Ir }{IR}\) = \(\frac { ξ – V }{V}\)
r = |\(\frac { ξ – V }{V}\)| R …… (3)
Since ξ, V and R are known, internal resistance r can be determined.

Question 5.
State and explain Kirchhoff’s rules.
Answer:
Kirchhoff’s first rule (current rule or junction rule):
Statement: It states that the algebraic sum of the currents at any junction of a circuit is zero. It is a statement of conservation of electric charge.
12th Samacheer Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity

Explanation:
All charges that enter a given junction in a circuit must leave that junction since charge cannot build up or disappear at a junction. Current entering the junction is taken as positive and current leaving the junction is taken as negative.
Applying this law to the junction A,
I1 + I2 – I3 – I4 – I5 = o
Or
I1 + I2 = + I3 I4 + I5
Kirchhoff’s second rule (voltage rule or loop rule):
Statement: It states that in a closed circuit the algebraic sum of the products of the current and resistance of each part of the circuit is equal to the total emf included in the circuit. This rule follows from the law of conservation of energy for an isolated system. (The energy supplied by the emf sources is equal to the sum of the energy delivered to all resistors).

Explanation:
The product of current and resistance is taken as positive when the direction of the current is followed. Suppose if the direction of current is opposite to the direction of the loop, then product of current and voltage across the resistor is negative. It is shown in Fig. (a) and (b). The emf is considered positive when proceeding from the negative to the positive terminal of the cell. It is shown in Fig. (c) and (d).
Physics Solution Class 12 Samacheer Kalvi Chapter 2 Current Electricity
Kirchhoff voltage rule has to be applied only when all currents in the circuit reach a steady state condition (the current in various branches are constant).

Question 6.
Obtain the condition for bridge balance in Wheatstone’s bridge.
Answer:
An important application of Kirchhoff’s rules is the Wheatstone’s bridge. It is used to compare resistances and also helps in determining the unknown resistance in electrical network. The – bridge consists of four resistances P, Q, R and S connected. A galvanometer G is connected between the points B and D. The battery is connected between the points A and C. The current through the galvanometer is IG and its resistance is G.
Current Electricity Pdf Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2
Applying KirchhofFs current rule to junction B,
I1 – IG – I3 = 0 …….. (1)
Applying Kirchhoff’s current rule to junction D,
I2 – IG – I4 = 0 …….. (2)
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage rule to loop ABDA,
I1P + IGG – I2R = 0 …….. (3)
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage rule to loop ABCDA,
I1P + I3Q – I4S – I2R = 0 …….. (4)
When the points B and D are at the same potential, the bridge is said to be balanced. As there is no potential difference between B and D, no current flows through galvanometer (IG = 0). Substituting IG = 0 in equation, (1), (2) and (3), we get
I1 = I3 …….. (5)
I2 = I4 …….. (6)
I1P = I2R …….. (7)
Substituting the equation (5) and (6) in equation (4)
I1P + I1Q – I2R = 0
I1(P + Q) = I2 (R + S) …….. (8)
Dividing equation (8) by equation (7), we get
\(\frac { P + Q }{ P }\) = \(\frac { R + S }{ R }\)
1 + \(\frac { Q }{ P }\) = 1 + \(\frac { S }{ R }\)
⇒ \(\frac { Q }{ P }\) = \(\frac { S }{ R }\)
\(\frac { P }{ Q }\) = \(\frac { R }{ S }\) …….. (9)
This is the bridge balance condition. Only under this condition, galvanometer shows null deflection. Suppose we know the values of two adjacent resistances, the other two resistances can be compared. If three of the resistances are known, the value of unknown resistance (fourth one) can be determined.

Question 7.
Explain the determination of unknown resistance using meter bridge.
Answer:
The meter bridge is another form of Wheatstone’s bridge. It consists of a uniform manganin wire AB of one meter length. This wire is stretched along a meter scale on a wooden board between two copper strips C and D. Between these two copper strips another copper strip E is mounted to enclose two gaps G1 and G2 An unknown resistance P is connected in G1 and a standard resistance Q is connected in G2.

A jockey (conducting wire) is connected to the terminal E on the central copper strip through a galvanometer (G) and a high resistance (HR). The exact position of jockey on the wire can be read on the scale. A Lechlanche cell and a key (K) are connected across the ends of the bridge wire.
Current Electricity Class 12 Samacheer Kalvi Physics Solutions Chapter 2
The position of the jockey on the wire is adjusted so that the galvanometer shows zero deflection. Let the point be J. The lengths AJ and JB of the bridge wire now replace the resistance R and S of the Wheatstone’s bridge. Then
\(\frac { P }{ Q }\) = \(\frac { R }{ S }\) = \(\frac { R’.AJ }{ R’.JB }\) …….. (1)
where R’ is the resistance per unit length of wire
\(\frac { P }{ Q }\) = \(\frac { AJ }{ JB }\) = \(\frac {{ l }_{1}}{ { l }_{2} }\) …….. (2)
P = Q \(\frac {{ l }_{1}}{ { l }_{2} }\) ……… (3)
The bridge wire is soldered at the ends of the copper strips. Due to imperfect contact, some resistance might be introduced at the contact. These are called end resistances. This error can be eliminated, if another set of readings are taken with P and Q interchanged and the average value of P is found.
To find the specific resistance of the material of the wire in the coil P, the radius r and length l of the wire is measured. The specific resistance or resistivity r can be calculated using the relation
Resistance = ρ-\(\frac { l }{ A }\)
By rearranging the above equation, we get
ρ = Resistance x \(\frac { A }{ l }\) …….. (4)
If P is the unknown resistance, equation (4) becomes
ρ = P\(\frac {{ πr }^{2}}{ l }\).

Question 8.
How the emf of two cells are compared using potentiometer?
Answer:
Comparison of emf of two cells with a potentiometer:
To compare the emf of two cells, the circuit connections are made as shown in figure. Potentiometer wire CD is connected to a battery Bt and a key K in series. This is the primary circuit. The end C of the wire is connected to the terminal M of a DPDT (Double Pole Double Throw) switch and the other terminal N is connected to a jockey through a galvanometer G and a high resistance HR. The cells whose emf ξ1 and ξ2 to be compared are connected to the terminals M1, N1 and M2, N2 of the DPDT switch.
Samacheer Kalvi Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity
The positive terminals of Bt, ξ1 and ξ2 should be connected to the same end C. The DPDT switch is pressed towards M1, N1 so that cell ξ1 is included in the secondary circuit and the balancing length l1 is found by adjusting the jockey for zero deflection, Then the second cells ξ2 is included in the circuit and the balancing length l2 is determined. Let r be the resistance per unit length of the potentiometer wire and I be the current flowing through the wire.
we have.
ξ1 = Irl1 …… (1)
ξ2 = Irl2 ……. (2)
By dividing (1) by (2)
\(\frac {{ ξ }^{1}}{ { ξ }^{2} }\) = \(\frac {{ l }^{1}}{ { l }^{2} }\) ……. (3)
By including a rheostat (Rh) in the primary circuit, the experiment can be repeated several times by changing the current flowing through it.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Current Electricity Numerical Problems

Question 1.
The following graphs represent the current versus voltage and voltage versus current for the six conductors A,B,C,D,E and F. Which conductor has least resistance and which has maximum resistance?
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-21
According to ohm’s law, V = IR
Resistance of conductor, R = \(\frac { V }{ I }\)

Graph-I:
Conductor A, I = 4 A and V = 2 V
R = \(\frac { V }{ I }\) = \(\frac { 2 }{ 4 }\) = 0.5 Ω
Conductor B, I = 3 A and V = 4 V
R = \(\frac { V }{ I }\) = \(\frac { 4 }{ 3 }\) = 1.33 Ω
Conductor C, I = 2 A and V = 5 V
R= \(\frac { V }{ I }\) = \(\frac { 5 }{ 2 }\) = 2.5 Q Ω.

Graph-II:
Conductor D, I = 2 A and V = 4 V
R = \(\frac { V }{ I }\) = \(\frac { 4 }{ 2 }\) = 2 Ω d
Conductor E, I = 4A and V = 3 V
R = \(\frac { V }{ I }\) = \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 }\) = 1.75 Ω
Conductor F, I = 5A and V = 2 V
R = \(\frac { V }{ I }\) = \(\frac { 2 }{ 5 }\) = 0.4 Ω
Conductor F has least resistance, RF = 0.4 Ω,
Conductor C has maximum resistance, RC = 2.5 G.

Question 2.
Lightning is very good example of natural current. In typical lightning, there is 109 J energy transfer across the potential difference of 5 x 107 V during a time interval of 0.2 s.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-22
Using this information, estimate the following quantities (a) total amount of charge transferred between cloud and ground (b) the current in the lightning bolt (c) the power delivered in 0.2 s.
Solution:
During the lightning energy, E = 109 J
Potential energy, V = 5 x 107 V
Time interval, t = 0.2 s
(a) Amount of charge transferred between cloud and ground,
q = It

(b) Current in the lighting bolt, E = VIt
I = \(\frac { E }{ Vt }\) = \(\frac{10^{9}}{5 \times 10^{7} \times 0.2}\) = 1 × 109 × 1-7
I = 1 × 102
I = 100 A
∴ q = It = 100 × 0.2
q = 20 C.

(c) Power delivered, E = VIt
P = VI = 5 × 107 × 100 = 500 × 107
I = 5 × 109 W
P = 5 GW.

Question 3.
A copper wire of 106 m2 area of cross section, carries a current of 2 A. If the number of electrons per cubic meter is 8 x 1028, calculate the current density and average drift velocity.
Solution:
Cross-sections area of copper wire, A = 106 m2
I = 2 A
Number of electron, n = 8 x 1028
Current density, J = \(\frac { 1 }{ A }\) = \(\frac { 2 }{{ 10 }^{-6}}\)
J = 2 × 106 Am-2
Average drift velocity, Vd = \(\frac { 1 }{ neA }\)
e is the charge of electron = 1.6 × 10-9 C
Vd = \(\frac{2}{8 \times 10^{28} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 10^{-6}}\) = \(\frac { 1 }{{ 64. × 10 }{3}}\)
Vd = 0.15625 × 10-3
Vd = 15.6 × 10-5 ms-1

Question 4.
The resistance of a nichrome wire at 0 °C is 10 Ω. If its temperature coefficient of resistance is 0.004/°C, find its resistance at boiling point of water. Comment on the result.
Solution:
Resistance of a nichrome wire at 0°C, R0 = 10 Ω
Temperature co-efficient of resistance, α = 0.004/°C
Resistance at boiling point of water, RT = ?
Temperature of boiling point of water, T = 100 °C
RT=R0 ( 1 + αT) = 10[1 + (0.004 x 100)]
RT= 10(1 +0.4) = 10 x 1.4
RT = 14 Ω
As the temperature increases the resistance of the wire also increases.

Question 5.
The rod given in the figure is made up of two different materials.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-23
Both have square cross sections of 3 mm side. The resistivity of the first material is 4 x 10-3 Ω.m and it is 25 cm long while second material has resistivity of 5 x 10-3 Ω.m and is of 70 cm long. What is the resistivity of rod between its ends?
Solution:
Square cross section of side, a = 3 mm = 3 x 10-3 m
Cross section of side, A = a2 = 9 x 106 m
First material:
Resistivity of the material, ρ1 = 4 x 10-3 Ωm
length, l1 = 25 cm = 25 x 10-2 m
Resistance of the lord, R1 = \(\frac{\rho_{l} l_{l}}{A}\) = \(\frac{4 \times 10^{-3} \times 25 \times 10^{-2}}{9 \times 10^{-6}}\) = \(\frac{100 \times 10^{-5} \times 10^{6}}{9}\)
R1 = 11.11 x 101

Second material:
Resistivity of the material, ρ2 = 5 x 10-3 Ωm
length, l2 = 70 cm = 70 x 10-2 m
Resistance of the rod, R2 = \(\frac{\rho_{2} l_{2}}{A}\) = \(\frac{5 \times 10^{-3} \times 70 \times 10^{-2}}{9 \times 10^{-6}}\) = \(\frac{350 \times 10^{-5} \times 10^{6}}{9}\)
R2 = 38.88 x 101
R2 = 389 Ω
Total resistance between the ends f the rods
R = R1 + R2 = 111 + 389
= 500 Ω

Question 6.
Three identical lamps each having a resistance R are connected to the battery of emf as shown in the figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-24
Suddenly the switch S is closed, (a) Calculate the current in the circuit when S is open and closed (b)
What happens to the intensities of the bulbs A,B and C. (c) Calculate the voltage across the three bulbs when S is open and closed (d) Calculate the power delivered to the circuit when S is opened and closed (e) Does the power delivered to the circuit decreases, increases or remain same?
Solution:
Resistance of the identical lamp = R
Emf of the battery = ξ
According to Ohm’s Law, ξ = IR
(a) Current:
When Switch is open— The current in the circuit. Total resistance of the bulb,
Rs = R1 + R2 + R3
R1 = R2 = R3 = R
Rs = R + R + R = 3R
∴ Current, I = \(\frac { ξ }{{ R }_{s}}\)
⇒ I0 = \(\frac { ξ }{ 3R }\)
Switch is closed— The current in the circuit. Total resistance of the bulb,
Rs = R + R = 2R
Current I = \(\frac { ξ }{{ R }_{s}}\)
Ic = \(\frac { ξ }{ 2R }\).

(b) Intensity:
When switch is open — All the bulbs glow with equal intensity.
When switch is closed — The intensities of the bulbs A and B equally increase. Bulb C will not glow since no current pass through it.

(c) Voltage across three bulbs:
When switch is open — Voltage across bulb A, VA = I0 R = \(\frac { ξ }{ 3R }\) x R = \(\frac { ξ }{ 3 }\)
similarly:
Voltage across bulb B, VB = \(\frac { ξ }{ 3 }\)
Voltage across bulb C, VC = \(\frac { ξ }{ 3 }\)
When switch is closed— Voltage across bulb A, VA = IcR = \(\frac { ξ }{ 2R }\) x \(\frac { ξ }{ 2 }\)
similarly:
Voltage across bulb B, VB = IcR \(\frac { ξ }{ 2 }\)
Voltage across bulb C, VC = 0

(d) Power delivered to the circuit,
When switch is opened — Power P, = VI
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-25
When switch is closed — Power P, = VI
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-26

(e) Total power delivered to circuit increases.

Question 7.
The current through an element is shown in the figure. Determine the total charge that pass through the element at
(a) t = 0 s
(b) t = 2 s
(c) t = 5 s
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-27
Solution :
Rate of flow of charge is called current, I = \(\frac { dq }{ dt }\)
Total charge pass through element, dq = Idt
(a) At t= 0 s, I = 10 A
dq = Idt= 10 x 0 = 0 C.

(b) At t = 2 s, I = 5 A
dq = Idt = 5 x 2 = 10 C.

(c) At t = 5 s, I = 0
dq = Idt = 0 x 5 = 0 C.

Question 8.
An electronics hobbyist is building a radio which requires 150 Ω in her circuit, but she has only 220 Ω, 79 Ω and 92 Ω resistors available. How can she connect the available resistors to get desired value of resistance?
Solution:
Required effective resistance = 150 Ω
Given resistors of resistance, R1 = 220 Ω, R2 = 79 Ω, R3 = 92 Ω
Parallel combination R1 and R2
\(\frac { 1 }{{ R }_{p}}\) = \(\frac { 1 }{{ R }_{1}}\) + \(\frac { 1 }{{ R }_{2}}\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 220 }\) + \(\frac { 1 }{ 79 }\) = \(\frac { 79 + 220 }{ 220 × 79 }\)
Rp = 58 Ω
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-28
Parallel combination Rp and R3
Rs = Rp + R3 = 58 + 92
Rs = 150 Ω
Parallel combination of 220 Ω and 79 Ω in series with 92 Ω.

Question 9.
A cell supplies a current of 0.9 A through a 2 Ω resistor and a current of 0.3 A through a 7 Ω resistor. Calculate the internal resistance of the cell.
Solution:
Current from the cell, I1 = 0.9 A
Resistor, R1 = 2 Ω
Current from the cell, I2 = 0.3 A
Resistor, R2 7 Ω
Internal resistance of the cell, r = ?
Current in the circuit I1 = \(\frac { ξ }{{ r + R }_{1}}\)
ξ = I1 (r + R1) …… (1)
Current in the circuit, I2 = \(\frac { ξ }{{ r + R }_{2}}\) …… (2)
Equating equation (1) and (2),
I1r + I1R1 = I2R2 + I2r
(I1 – I2)r = I2R2 – I1R1
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-29
r = 0.5 Ω.

Question 10.
Calculate the currents in the following circuit.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-30
Solution:
Applying Kirchoff’s 1st Law at junction B
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-31
I1 – I1 – I3 = 0
I3 = I1 – I2 …… (1)
Applying Kirchoff’s IInd Law at junction in ABEFA
100 I3 + 100 I1 = 15
100 (I3 + I1) = 15
100 I1 – 100 I2 + 100 I1 =15
200 I1 – 100 I2 = 15 …… (2)
Applying Kirchoff’s IInd Law at junction in BCDED
-100I2 + 100 I3 = 9
-100 I2+ 100(I1 – I2) = 9
100I1 – 200 I2 = 9
Solving equating (2) and (3)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-32
Substitute I1 values in equ (2)
200(0.07) – 100 I2 = 15
14 – 100 I2 = 15
– 100 I2 = 15 – 14
I2 = \(\frac { -1 }{ 100 }\)
I2 = -0.01A
Substitute I1 and I2 value in equ (1), we get
I3 = I1 – I2 = 0.07 – (-0.01)
I3 = 0.08 A.

Question 11
A potentiometer wire has a length of 4 m and resistance of 20 Ω. It is connected in series with resistance of 2980 Ω and a cell of emf 4 V. Calculate the potential along the wire.
Solution:
Length of the potential wire, l = 4 m
Resistance of the wire, r = 20 Ω
Resistance connected series with potentiometer wire, R = 2980 Ω
Emf of the cell, ξ = 4 V
Effective resistance, Rs = r + R = 20 + 2980 = 3000 Ω
Current flowing through the wire, I = \(\frac { ξ }{{ r + R }_{s}}\) = \(\frac { 4 }{ 3000 }\)
I = 1.33 x 10-3 A
Potential drop across the wire, V = Ir
= 1.33 x 10-33 x 20
V = 26.6 x 10-3 V
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-33
= 6.65 x 10-3
Potential garadient = 0.66 x 10-2 Vm-1

Question 12.
Determine the current flowing through the galvanometer (G) as shown in the figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-34
Solution:
Current flowing through the circuit, I = 2A
Applying Kirchoff’s Ist law at junction P, I = I1 + I2
I2 = I – I1 …(1)
Applying Kirchoff’s Ind law at junction PQSP
5 I1 + 10 Ig – 15 I2 = 0
5 I1 + 10 Ig -15(I – I1) = 0
20 I1 + 10 Ig = 15 I
20 I1 + 10 Ig = 15 x 2
÷ by 10 21 I1 + Ig = 3 … (2)
Applying Kirchoff’s IInd law at junction QRSQ
10(I1 – Ig) – 20(I – I1 – Ig) – 10 Ig = 0
10 I1 – 10g – 20(I – I1 – Ig) – 10 Ig = 0
10 I1 – 10g – 20 I + 20 I1 -20Ig – 10 Ig = 0
30 I 1 – 40 Ig = 20 I
÷ by 10 ⇒ 3 I1 – 4 Ig = 20 I
3 I1 – 4 Ig = 2 I
3 I1 – 4 Ig = 2 x 2 = 4
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-35

Question 13.
Two cells each of 5 V are connected in series across a 8 Ω resistor and three parallel resistors of 4 Ω, 6 SI and 12 Ω. Draw a circuit diagram for the above arrangement. Calculate (i) the current drawn from the cell (ii) current through each resistor.
Solution:
V1 = 5 V; V2 = 5 V
R1 = 8 Ω; R2 = 4 Ω; R3 = 6 Ω; R4 = 12 Ω
Three resistors R2, R3 and R4 are connected parallel combination
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-36
Resistors R1 and Rp are connected in series combination
Rs = R1 +Rp = 8 + 2 = 10
Rs = 10Ω
Total voltage connected series to the circuit
V = V1 + V2
= 5 + 5 = 10
V = 10 V.
(i) Current through the circuit, I = \(\frac { V }{{ R }_{s}}\) = \(\frac { 10 }{ 10 }\)
I = 1 A
Potential drop across the parallel combination,
V’ = IRp = 1 x 2
V’ 2 V

(ii) Current in 4 Ω resistor, I = \(\frac { V’ }{{ R }_{2}}\) = \(\frac { 2 }{ 4 }\) = 0.5 A
Current in 6 Ω resistor, I = \(\frac { V’ }{{ R }_{3}}\) = \(\frac { 2 }{ 6 }\) = 0.33 A
Current in 12 Ω resistor, I = \(\frac { V’ }{{ R }_{4}}\) = \(\frac { 2 }{ 12 }\) = 0.17 A

Question 14.
Four light bulbs P, Q, R, S are connected in a circuit of unknown arrangement. When each bulb is removed one at a time and replaced, the following behavior is observed.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-37
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-38

Question 15.
In a potentiometer arrangement, a cell of emf 1.25 V gives a balance point at 35 cm length of the wire. If the cell is replaced by another cell and the balance point shifts to 63 cm, what is the emf of the second cell?
Solution:
Emf of the cell1, ξ1 = 1.25 V
Balancing length of the cell, l1 = 35 cm = 35 x 10-2 m
Balancing length after interchanged, l2 = 63 cm = 63 x 10-2 m
Emf of the cell1, ξ2 = ?
The ration of emf’s, \(\frac {{ ξ }_{1}}{{ ξ }_{2}}\) = \(\frac {{ l }_{1}}{{ l }_{2}}\)
The ration of emf’s, ξ2 = ξ1 = \(\left( \frac { { l }_{ 2 } }{ { l }_{ 1 } } \right) \)
= 1. 25 x \(\left( \frac { { 63×10 }^{ -2 } }{ { 35×10 }^{ -2 } } \right) \) = 12.5 x 1.8
ξ2 = 2.25 V.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Current Electricity Additional Questions Solved

I. Choose the Correct Answer

Question 1.
When current I flows through a wire, the drift velocity of the electrons is v. When current 21 flows through another wire of the same material having double the length and area of cross-section, the drift velocity of the electrons will be-
(a) \(\frac { v }{ 4 }\)
(b) \(\frac { v }{ 2 }\)
(c) v
(d) 2 v
Answer:
(c) v
Hint:
Vd = \(\frac { 1 }{ nAe }\); v’d = \(\frac { 2I }{ (2A)ne }\) = vd

Question 2.
A copper wire of length 2 m and area of cross-section 1.7 x 10-6 m2 has a resistance of 2 x 10-2 Ω. The resistivity of copper is
(a) 1.7 x 10-8 Ωm
(b) 1.9 x -8 Ωm
(c) 2.1 x 10-7 Ωm
(d) 2.3 x 10-7 Ωm
Answer:
(a) 1.7 x 10-8 Ωm
Hint:
Resistivity, ρ = \(\frac { RA }{ l }\) = \(\frac{2 \times 10^{-2} \times 1.7 \times 10^{-6}}{2}\) = 1.7 x 10-8 Ωm.

Question 3.
If the length of a wire is doubled and its cross-section is also doubled, then its resistance will
(a) become 4 times
(b) become 1 / 4
(c) becomes 2 times
(d) remain unchanged
Answer:
(d) remain unchanged

Question 4.
A 10 m long wire of resistance 20 Ω is connected in series with a battery of emf 3 V and a resistance of 10 Ω. The potential gradient along the wire in volt per meter is
(a) 6.02
(b) 0.1
(c) 0.2
(d) 1.2
Answer:
(c) 0.2
Hint:
Potential difference across the wire = \(\frac { 20 }{ 3 }\) x 3 = 2 V
Potential gradient = \(\frac { v }{ l }\) = \(\frac { 2 }{ 10 }\) = 0.2 V/m

Question 5.
The resistivity of a wire
(a) varies with its length
(b) varies with its mass
(c) varies with its cross-section
(d) does not depend on its length, cross-section and mass.
Answer:
(d) does not depend on its length, cross-section and mass.

Question 6.
The electric intensity E, current density and conductivity a are related as
(a) j = σE
(b) j = \(\frac { E }{ σ }\)
(c) JE = s
(d) j = σ2E
Answer:
(a) j = σE

Question 7.
For which of the following dependences of drift velocity Vd on electric field E, is Ohm’s law obeyed?
(a) vd ∝ E
(b) vd ∝ E2
(c) vd ∝ √E
(d) vd = constant
Answer:
(a) vd ∝ E
Hint:
vd = \(\frac { 1 }{ nAe }\) = \(\frac { j }{ ne }\) = \(\left( \frac { σ }{ ne } \right) \)E ⇒ vd ∝ E.

Question 8.
A cell has an emf of 1.5 V. When short circuited, it gives a current of 3A. The internal resistance of the cell is .
(a) 0.5 Ω
(b) 2.0 Ω
(c) 4.5 Ω
(d) \(\frac { 1 }{ 4.5 }\) Ω
Answer:
(a) 0.5 Ω
Hint:
r = \(\frac { ξ }{ I }\) = \(\frac { 1.5 }{ 3 }\) = 0.5 Ω.

Question 9.
The resistance, each of 1 Ω, are joined in parallel. Three such combinations are put in series. The resultant resistance is
(a) 9 Ω
(b) 3 Ω
(c) 1 Ω
(d) \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 }\) Ω
Answer:
(c) 1 Ω
Hint:
Rp = 1 + 1 + 1 = 3 Ω;
\(\frac { 1 }{{ R }_{s}}\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 }\) + \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 }\) + \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 }\) = \(\frac { 3 }{ 3 }\) = 1
⇒ Rs = 1 Ω.

Question 10.
Constantan is used for making standard resistance because it has
(a) high resistivity
(b) low resistivity
(c) negligible temperature coefficient of resistance
(d) high melting point
Answer:
(c) negligible temperature coefficient of resistance

Question 11.
Kirchhoff’s two laws for electrical circuits are magnifestations of the conservation of
(a) charge only
(b) both energy and momentum
(c) energy only
(d) both charge and energy
Answer:
(d) both charge and energy

Question 12.
The resistance R0 and Rt of a metallic wire at temperature 0° C and t° C are related as (a is the temperature co-efficient of resistance).
(a) Rt = R0(1 + αt)
(b) Rt = R0(1 – αt)
(c) Rt = R0(1 + αt)2
(d) Rt = R0(1 – αt) 2
Answer:
(a) Rt = R0(1 + αt)

Question 13.
A cell of emf 2 V and internal resistance 0.1 Ω is connected with a resistance of 3.9 Ω. The voltage across the cell terminals will be
(a) 0.5 V
(b) 1.9 V
(c) 1.95 V
(d) 2 V
Answer:
(c) 1.95 V
Hint:
V = \(\frac { ER }{ R + r }\) = \(\frac { 2 x 3.9 }{ 3.9 + 0.1 }\) = 1.95 V.

Question 14.
A flow of 107 electrons per second in a conduction wire constitutes a current of
(a) 1.6 x 10-26 A
(b) 1.6 x 1012 A
(c) 1.6 x 10-12 A
(d) 1.6 x 1026 A
Answer:
(c) 1.6 x 10-12 A
Hint:
I = \(\frac { Q }{ t }\) = \(\frac{10^{7} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{1}\) = 1.6 x 1012 A.

Question 15.
Sensitivity of a potentiometer can be increased by
(a) increasing the emf of the cell
(b) increasing the length of the wire
(c) decreasing the length of the wire
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) increasing the length of the wire

Question 16.
Potential gradient is defined as
(a) fall of potential per unit length of the wire.
(b) fall of potential per unit area of the wire.
(c) fall of potential between two ends of the wire.
(d) none of the above.
Answer:
(a) fall of potential per unit length of the wire.

Question 17.
n equal resistors are first connected in series and then in parallel. The ratio of the equivalent resistance in two cases is
(a) n
(b) \(\frac { 1 }{{ n }^{2}}\)
(c) n2
(d) \(\frac { 1 }{ n }\)
Answer:
(c) n2
Hint:
Required ratio = \(\frac{n \mathrm{R}}{\left(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{n}\right)}\) = n(c) n2

Question 18.
A galvanometer is converted into an ammeter when we connect a
(a) high resistance in series
(b) high resistance in parallel
(c) low resistance in series
(d) low resistance in parallel
Answer:
(d) low resistance in parallel

Question 19.
The reciprocal of resistance is
(a) conductance
(b) resistivity
(c) conductivity
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(a) conductance

Question 20.
A student has 10 resistors, each of resistance r. The minimum resistance that can be obtained by him using these resistors is
(a) 10r
(b) \(\frac { r }{ 10 }\)
(c) \(\frac { r }{ 100 }\)
(d) \(\frac { r }{ 5 }\)
Answer:
(b) \(\frac { r }{ 10 }\)

Question 21.
The drift velocity of electrons in a wire of radius r is proportional to
(a) r
(b) r2
(c) r3
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(d) none of the above

Question 22.
Kirchhoff’s first law, i.e. ∑I = 0 at a junction deals with conservation of
(a) charge
(b) energy
(c) momentum
Answer:
(a) charge

Question 23.
The resistance of a material increases with temperature. It is a
(a) metal
(b) insulator
(c) semiconductor
(d) semi-metal
Answer:
(a) metal

Question 24.
Five cells, each of emf E, are joined in parallel. The total emf of the combination is
(a) 5E
(b) \(\frac { E }{ 5 }\)
(c) E
(d) \(\frac { 5E }{ 2 }\)
Answer:
(c) E

Question 25.
A carbon resistance has colour bands in order yellow, brown, red. Its resistance is
(a) 41 Ω
(b) 41 x 102
(c) 41 x 103
(d) 4.2 Ω
Answer:
(b) 41 x 102

Question 26.
The conductivity of a superconductor is
(a) infinite
(b) very large
(c) very small
(d) zero
Answer:
(a) infinite

Question 27.
The resistance of an ideal voltmeter is
(a) zero
(b) very high
(c) very low
(d) infinite
Answer:
(d) infinite

Question 28.
Carriers of electric current in superconductors are
(a) electrons
(b) photons
(c) holes
Answer:
(c) holes

Question 29.
Potentiometer measures potential more accurately because
(a) It measure potential in the open circuit.
(b) It uses sensitive galvanometer for null detection.
(c) It uses high resistance potentiometer wire.
(d) It measures potential in the closed circuit.
Answer:
(a) It measure potential in the open circuit.

Question 30.
Electromotive force is most closely related to
(a) electric field
(b) magnetic field
(c) potential difference
(d) mechanical force
Answer:
(c) potential difference

Question 31.
The capacitance of a pure capacitor is 1 farad. In DC circuit, the effective resistance will be
(a) zero
(b) infinite
(c) 1 Ω
(d) 0.5 Ω
Answer:
(b) infinite

Question 32.
The resistance of an ideal ammeter is
(a) zero
(b) small
(c) high
(d) infinite
Answer:
(a) zero

Question 33.
A milliammeter of range 10 mA has a coil of resistance 1 Ω. To use it as a voltmeter of range 10 V, the resistance that must be connected in series with it is
(a) 999 Ω
(b) 1000 Ω
(c) 9 Ω
(d) 99 Ω
Answer:
(a) 999 Ω
Hint:
R = \(\frac { V }{{ I }_{g}}\)-Rg = \(\frac { 10 }{{ 10 × 10 }^{-3}}\)-1 = 999 Ω.

Question 34.
A battery of emf 10 V and internal resistance 3 Ω is connected to a resistor. The current in the circuit is. 0.5 A. The terminal voltage of the battery when the circuit is closed is
(a) 10 V
(b) zero
(c) 8.5 V
(d) 1.5 V
Answer:
(c) 8.5 V
Hint:
V = ξ – Ir = 10 – (0.5 x 3) = 8.5 V.

Question 35.
Good resistance coils are made of
(a) copper
(b) manganin
(c) iron
(d) aluminium
Answer:
(b) manganin

Question 36.
A wire of resistance R is stretched to three times its original length. The new resistance is
(a) 3R
(b) 9R
(c) R/3
(d) R/9
Answer:
(b) 9R

Question 37.
n resistances, each of r Ω, when connected in parallel give an equivalent resistance of R Ω. If these resistances were connected in series, the combination would have a resistance in horns equal to
(a) n2R
(b) \(\frac { R }{{n}^{ 2 }}\)
(c) \(\frac { R }{ n }\)
(d) nR
Answer:
(a) n2R
Hint:
Resistance in parallel combination, R = \(\frac { r }{ n }\) ⇒ r = Rn
Resistance in series combination, R’ = nr = n2R

Question 38.
When a wire of uniform cross-section, having resistance R, is bent into a complete circle, the resistance between any two of diametrically opposite points will be
(a) \(\frac { R }{ 8 }\)
(b) \(\frac { R }{ 2 }\)
(c) 4R
(d) \(\frac { R }{ 4 }\)
Answer:
(d) \(\frac { R }{ 4 }\)
Hint:
It becomes two resistors each of (d) \(\frac { R }{ 2 }\), connected in parallel.

Question 39.
A steady current is set up in a metallic wire of non uniform cross-section. How is the rate of flow K of electrons related to the area of cross-section A?
(a) K is independent of A
(b) K ∝ A
(c) K ∝ A-1
(d) K ∝ A2
Answer:
(c) K ∝ A-1

Question 40.
Ohm’s Law is not obeyed by
(a) electrolytes
(b) discharge tubes
(c) vacuum tubes
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

Question 41.
Which of the following has negative temperature coefficient of resistance?
(a) Copper
(b) Aluminium
(c) Germanium
(d) Iron
Answer:
(c) Germanium

II. Fill in the blanks

Question 1.
The material through which electric charge can flow easily is ……………….
Answer:
Copper.

Question 2.
A toaster operating at 240 V has a resistance of 120 Ω. The power is ……………….
Answer:
480 W.

Question 3.
In the case of insulators, as the temperature decreases, resistivity ……………….
Answer:
Increases.

Question 4.
When n resistors of equal resistance (R) are connected in series, the effective resistance is ……………….
Answer:
nR.

Question 5.
The net flow of charge at any point in the conductor is ……………….
Answer:
Zero.

Question 6.
The flow of free electrons in a conductor constitutes ……………….
Answer:
Electric current.

Question 7.
The rate of flow of charge through any wire is called ……………….
Answer:
Current.

Question 8.
The drift velocity acquired per unit electric field is the ……………….
Answer:
Mobility.

Question 9.
The reciprocal of resistance is ……………….
Answer:
Conductance.

Question 10.
The unit of specific resistance is ……………….
Answer:
Ohm meter.

Question 11.
The reciprocal of electrical resistivity is called ……………….
Answer:
Electrical conductivity.

Question 12.
With increase in temperature the resistivity of metals ……………….
Answer:
Increases.

Question 13.
The resistivity of insulators is of the order of ……………….
Answer:
108 1014 Ωm.

Question 14.
The resistivity of semiconductors is of the order of ……………….
Answer:
10-2 -102 Ωm.

Question 15.
The materials which conduct electricity at zero resistance are called ……………….
Answer:
Superconductors.

Question 16.
Conductors turn into superconductors at ……………….
Answer:
Low temperatures.

Question 17.
The resistance of superconductors is ……………….
Answer:
Zero.

Question 18.
The phenomenon of superconductivity was discovered by ……………….
Answer:
Kammerlingh onnes.

Question 19.
Mercury becomes a superconductor at ……………….
Answer:
4.2 K.

Question 20.
With increase of temperature, resistance of conductors ……………….
Answer:
increases

Question 21.
In insulators and semiconductors, as temperature increases, resistance ……………….
Answer:
Decreases.

Question 22.
A material with a negative temperature coefficient is called a ……………….
Answer:
Thermistor.

Question 23.
The temperature coefficient for alloys is ……………….
Answer:
Low.

Question 24.
The electric current in an external circuit flows from the ……………….
Answer:
Positive to negative terminal.

Question 25.
In the electrolyte of the cell, current flows from ……………….
Answer:
Negative to positive terminal.

Question 26.
A freshly prepared cell has ………………. internal resistance.
Answer:
Low.

Question 27.
Kirchhoff’s first law is ……………….
Answer:
Current law.

Question 28.
The current law states that the algebraic sum of the currents meeting at any junction in a circuit is ……………….
Answer:
Zero.

Question 29.
Current law is a consequence of conservation of ……………….
Answer:
Charges.

Question 30.
Kirchhoff’s second law is ……………….
Answer:
Voltage law.

Question 31.
Kirchhoff’s second law is a consequence of conservation of ……………….
Answer:
Energy.

Question 32.
Wheatstone bridge is an application of ……………….
Answer:
Kirchhoff’s Law.

Question 33
………………. is a form of Wheatstone’s bridge.
Answer:
Metre bridge.

Question 34.
The temperature coefficient of manganin wire is ……………….
Answer:
Low.

Question 35
………………. is an instrument to measure potential difference.
Answer:
Potentiometer.

Question 36.
Unit of electrical energy is ……………….
Answer:
Joule.

Question 37.
An instrument to measure electrical power consumed is ……………….
Answer:
Watt meter.

Question 38.
………………. first introduced the electrochemical battery
Answer:
Volta.

Question 39.
Charging is a process of reproducing ……………….
Answer:
Active materials.

III. Match the following

Question 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-39
Answer:
(i) → (b)
(ii) → (a)
(iii) → (d)
(iv) →(c)

Question 2.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-40
Answer:
(i) → (b)
(ii) → (c)
(iii) → (d)
(iv) → (a)

Question 3.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-41
Answer:
(i) → (d)
(ii) → (c)
(iii) → (b)
(iv) → (a)

Question 4.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-42
Answer:
(i) → (b)
(ii)→ (d)
(iii) → (a)
(iv) → (c)

IV.Assertion and reason type

(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason in the correct explanation of the assertion.
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but the reason is not correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
(e) If assertion is false but reason is true.

Question 1.
Assertion: Fuse wire must have high resistance and low melting point.
Reason: Fuse is used for small current flow only
Answer:
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false.

Question 2.
Assertion: In practical application, power rating of resistance is not important.
Reason: Property of resistance remains same even at high temperature
Answer:
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.

Question 3.
Assertion: Electric appliances with metallic body e.g. heaters, presses, etc, have three pin connections, whereas an electric bulb has two pins.
Reason: Three pin connection reduce heating of connecting cables.
Answer:
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Current Electricity Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define current?
Answer:
Current is defined as a net charge Q passes through any cross section of a conductor in time t
then, I = \(\frac { Q }{ t }\).

Question 2.
Define instantaneous current?
Answer:
The instantaneous current I is defined as the limit of the average current, as ∆t → 0.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-43

Question 3.
What is resistance? Give its unit?
Answer:
The resistance is the ratio of potential difference across the given conductor to the current passing through the conductor V.
R = \(\frac { V }{ I }\).

Question 4.
What is meant by transition temperature?
Answer:
The resistance of certain materials become zero below certain temperature Tc. This temperature is known as critical temperature or transition temperature.

Question 5.
What is Joule’s heating effect?
Answer:
When current flows through a resistor, some of the electrical energy delivered to the resistor is converted into heat energy and it is dissipated. This heating effect of current is known as Joule’s heating effect.

Question 6.
What is meant by thermoelectric effect?
Answer:
Conversion of temperature differences into electrical voltage and vice versa is known as thermoelectric effect.

Question 7.
What is a thermopile? On what principle does it work?
Answer:
Thermopile is a device used to detect thermal radiation. It works on the principle of seebeck effect.

Question 8.
What is a thermistor?
Answer:
A material with a negative temperature coefficient is called a thermistor.
Eg:

  1. Insulator
  2. Semiconductor.

Question 9.
State principle of potentiometer?
Answer:
The principle of potentiometer states that the emf of the cell is directly proportional to its balancing length.
ξ ∝ l
ξ = Irl.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Current Electricity Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain the concept of colour code for carbon resistors.
Answer:
Color code for Carbon resistors:
Carbon resistors consists of a ceramic core, on which a thin layer of crystalline carbon is deposited. These resistors are inexpensive, stable and compact in size. Color rings are used to indicate the value of the resistance according to the rules.

Three coloured rings are used to indicate the values of a resistor: the first two rings are significant figures of resistances, the third ring indicates the decimal multiplier after them. The fourth color, silver or gold, shows the tolerance of the resistor at 10% or 5%. If there is no fourth ring, the tolerance is 20%. For the resistor, the first digit = 5 (green), the second digit = 6 (blue), decimal multiplier = 103 (orange) and tolerance = 5% (gold). The value of resistance = 56 x 103 Q or 56 kΩ with the tolerance value 5%.

Question 2.
Explain in details of temperature dependence of resistivity.
Answer:
Temperature dependence of resistivity:
The resistivity of a material is dependent on temperature. It is experimentally found that for a wide range of temperatures, the resistivity of a conductor increases with increase in temperature according to the expression,
ρT = ρ0 [1 + α(T -T0)] ……. (1)
where ρT is the resistivity of a conductor at T0C, ρ0 is the resistivity of the conductor at some reference temperature To (usually at 20°C) and a is the temperature coefficient of resistivity. It is defined as the ratio of increase in resistivity per degree rise in temperature to its resistivity atT0.
From the equation (1), we can write
ρT – ρ0 = αρ0 (T -T0)
∴ α = \(\frac{\rho_{\mathrm{T}}-\rho_{0}}{\rho_{0}\left(\mathrm{T}-\mathrm{T}_{0}\right)}\) = \(\frac{\Delta p}{\rho_{0} \Delta T}\)
where ∆ρ = ρT – ρ0 is change in resistivity for a change in temperature ∆T = T – T0. Its unit is per °C.

1. α of conductors:
For conductors a is positive. If the temperature of a conductor increases, the average kinetic energy of electrons in the conductor increases. This results in more frequent collisions and hence the resistivity increases. Even though, the resistivity of conductors like metals varies linearly for wide range of temperatures, there also exists a nonlinear region at very low temperatures. The resistivity approaches some finite value as the temperature approaches absolute zero. As the resistance is directly proportional to resistivity of the material, we can also write the resistance of a conductor at temperature T °C as
RT -R0 = [1 + α(T -T0)] ……. (2)
The temperature coefficient can be also be obtained from the equation (2), +
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-44
where ∆R = RT -R0 is change in resistance during the change in temperature ∆T = T – T0

2. α of semiconductors:
For semiconductors, the resistivity decreases with increase in temperature. As the temperature increases, more electrons will be liberated from their atoms (Refer unit 9 for conduction in semi conductors). Hence the current increases and therefore the resistivity decreases. A semiconductor with a negative temperature coefficient of resistance is called a thermistor.
We can understand the temperature dependence of resistivity in the following way. The electrical conductivity, σ = \(\frac{n e^{2} \tau}{m}\) \(\frac{m}{n e^{2} \tau}\). As the resistivity is inverse of σ, it can be written as,
σ = \(\frac{n e^{2} \tau}{m}\) \(\frac{m}{n e^{2} \tau}\) …… (4)
The resistivity of materials is

  1. inversely proportional to the number density (n) of the electrons
  2. inversely proportional to the average time between the collisions (τ).

In metals, if the temperature increases, the average time between the collision (τ) decreases and n is independent of temperature. In semiconductors when temperature increases, n increases and τ decreases, but increase in n is dominant than decreasing x, so that overall resistivity decreases.

Question 3.
Explain the effective internal resistance of cells connected in series combination. Compare the results to the external resistance.
Answer:
Cells in series Several cells can be connected to form a battery. In series connection, the negative terminal of one cell is connected to the positive terminal of the second cell, the negative terminal of second cell is connected to the positive terminal of the third cell and so on. The free positive terminal of the first cell and the free negative terminal of the last cell become the terminals of the battery.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-45
Suppose n cells, each of emf ξ volts and internal resistance r ohms are connected in series with an external resistance R.
The total emf of the battery = nξ
The total resistance in the circuit = nr + R
By Ohm’s law, the current in the circuit is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-46
Case (a) If r << R, then,
I = \(\frac { nξ }{ R }\)nI1 ≈ nI1 ……. (2)
where, I, is the current due to a single cell \(\left(\mathrm{I}_{1}=\frac{\xi}{\mathrm{R}}\right)\)
Thus, if r is negligible when compared to R the current supplied by the battery is n times that supplied by a single cell.
Case (b) If r >> R, I = \(\frac { nξ }{ nr }\) ≈ \(\frac { ξ }{ R }\) …….. (3)
It is the current due to a single cell. That is, current due to the whole battery is the same as that due to a single cell and hence there is no advantage in connecting several cells. Thus series connection of cells is advantageous only when the effective internal resistance of the cells is negligibly small compared with R.

Question 4.
Explain the effective internal resistance of cells connected in parallel combination. Compare the results to the external resistance.
Answer:
Cells in parallel: In parallel connection all the positive terminals of the cells are connected to one point and all the negative terminals to a second point. These two points form the positive and negative terminals of the battery.
Let n cells be connected in parallel between the points A and B and a resistance R is connected between the points A and B. Let ξ, be the emf and r the internal resistance of each cell.

The equivalent internal resistance of the battery is \(\frac { 1 }{{ r }_{eq}}\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ r }\) + \(\frac { 1 }{ r }\) + ….. \(\frac { 1 }{ r }\) (n terms) = \(\frac { n }{ r }\).
So reg = \(\frac { r }{ n }\) and the total resistance in the circuit = R + \(\frac { r }{ n }\). The total emf is the potential difference between the points A and B, which is equal to ξ. The current in the circuit is given by
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-47
Case (a) If r << R, then,
I = \(\frac { nξ }{ R }\) = nI1 …….. (2)
where II is the current due to a single cell and is equal to \(\frac { ξ }{ R }\) when R is negligible. Thus, the
current through the external resistance due to the whole battery is n times the current due to a single cell.

Case (b) If r << R. I = \(\frac { ξ }{ R }\) …… (3)
The above equation implies that current due to the whole battery is the same as that due to a single cell. Hence it is advantageous to connect cells in parallel when the external resistance is very small compared to the internal resistance of the cells.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Current Electricity Numerical Problems

Question 1.
Show that one ampere is equivalent to a flow of 6.25 x 1018 elementary charges per second.
Solution:
Here I = 1 A, t= 1s, e = 1.6 x 10-19 C
As I = \(\frac { q }{ t }\) = \(\frac { ne }{ t }\)
Number of electrons, n = \(\frac { It }{ e }\) = \(\frac { 1 × 1 }{{ 1.6 × 10 }^{19}}\) = 6.25 × 1018

Question 2.
Calculate the resistivity of a material of a wire 10 m long. 0.4 mm in diameter and having a resistance of 2.0 Ω.
Solution:
Here l = 10 cm, r = 0.2 mm = 0.2 x 10-3 m, R = 2 Ω
\(\left[ r\quad =\quad \frac { d }{ 2 } \right] \)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-48
= 2.513 x 10-8 Ω.

Question 3.
A wire of 10 ohm resistance is stretched to thrice its original length. What will be its (i) new resistivity and (ii) new resistance?
Solution:
(i) Resistivity p remains unchanged because it is the property of the material of the wire.
(ii) In both cases, volume of wire is same, so
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-49

Question 4.
A copper wire has a resistance of 10 Ω. and an area of cross-section 1 mm2. A potential difference of 10 V exists across the wire. Calculate the drift speed of electrons if the number of electrons per cubic metre in copper is 8 x 1028 electrons.
Solution:
Here, R = 10 Ω, A = 1 mm2 = 10-6 m2, V = 10 V, n = 8 x 1028 electrons/m3
Now,
I = enAvd
∴ \(\frac { V }{ R }\) = enAvd (or) vd = \(\frac { V }{ enAR }\)
= \(\frac{10}{1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 8 \times 10^{28} \times 10^{-6} \times 10}\) = 0.078 x 10-3 ms-1
= 0.078 x ms-1

Question 5.
(i) At what temperature would the resistance of a copper conductor be double its resistance at 0°C.
(ii) Does this temperature hold for all copper conductors regardless of shape and size? Given a for Cu = 3.9 x 10-3 °C-1.
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-50
Thus the resistance of copper conductor becomes double at 256 °C.
(ii) Since a does not depend on size and shape of the conductor. So the above result holds for all copper conductors.

Question 6.
Find the value of current I in the circuit shown in figure.
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Current Electricity-51
In the circuit, the resistance of arm ACB (30 + 30 = 60 Ω) is the parallel with the resistance of arm AB (= 30 Ω).
Hence, the effective resistance of the circuit is
R = \(\frac { 30 × 60 }{ 30 + 60 }\) = 20 Ω
Current, I = \(\frac { V }{ R }\) = \(\frac { 2 }{ 20 }\) = 0.1 A.

Common Errors and Its Rectifications:

Common Errors:

  1. Sometimes students think that charge and current are same.
  2. In doing calculation part students can’t give the importance to mention the units.
  3. They may confuse the parallel and series network of the resistance.

Rectifications:

  1. Charge q = ne Current I = q/t
  2. Unit is very importance to the every physical quantities.
  3. If the resistors are series, their resultant is sum of the all the reciprocal of individual resistance. If the resistors are parallel their resultant is sum of the individual resistance.

We believe that the shared knowledge about Tamilnadu State Board Solutions for 12th Physics Chapter 2 Current Electricity Questions and Answers learning resource will definitely guide you at the time of preparation. For more details visit Tamilnadu State Board Solutions for 12th Physics Solutions and for more information ask us in the below comments and we’ll revert back to you asap.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements – II

Are you searching for the Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chapter Wise Solutions PDF? Then, get your Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chapter Wise Solutions PDF for free on our website. Students can Download Chemistry Chapter 3 p-Block Elements – II Questions and Answers, Notes Pdf, Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements – II

All concepts are explained in an easy way on our website. So, students can easily learn and practice Tamilnadu State Board 12th Chemistry Chapter 3 p-Block Elements – II Question and Answers. You can enjoy the digitized learning with the help of the Tamilnadu State Board Chemistry Online Material.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry p-Block Elements – II TextBook Evalution

I. Choose the correct answer.

12th Chemistry Chapter 3 Book Back Answers Question 1.
In which of the following, NH3 is not used?
(a) Nessler’s reagent
(b) Reagent for the analysis of IV group basic radical
(c) Reagent for the analysis of III group basic radical
(d) Tollen’s reagent
Answer:
(a) Nessler’s reagent

Samacheer Kalvi Guru 12th Chemistry Question 2.
Which is time regarding nitrogen?
(a) least electronegative element
(b) has low ionisation enthalpy than oxygen
(c) d-orbitals available
(d) ability to form pπ – pπ bonds with itself
Answer:
(d) ability to form pπ – pπ bonds with itself

12th Chemistry 3rd Lesson Book Back Answers Question 3.
An element belongs to group 15 and 3 rd period of the periodic table, its electronic configuration would be …………
(a) 1s22s22p4
(b) 1s22s22p3
(c) 1s22s22p63s23p2
(d) 1s22s22p63s23p3
Answer:
(d) 1s22s22p63s23p3

Samacheerkalvi.Guru 12th Chemistry Question 4.
Solid (A) reacts with strong aqueous NaOH liberating a foul smelling gas(B) which spontaneously bum in air giving smoky rings. A and B are respectively …………
(a) P4(red) and PH3
(b) P4(white) and PH3
(c) S8 and H2S
(d) P4(white) and H2S
Answer:
(b) P4(white) and PH3

Samacheer Kalvi Guru Class 12 Chemistry Question 5.
In the brown ring test, brown colour of the ring is due to …………
(a) a mixture of NO and NO2
(b) Nitroso ferrous sulphate
(c) Ferrous nitrate
(d) Ferric nitrate
Answer:
(b) Nitroso ferrous sulphate

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Question 6.
On hydrolysis, PCl3 gives …………
(a) H3PO3
(b) PH3
(c) H3PO4
(d) POOL
Answer:
(a) H3PO3

Chemistry Class 12 Samacheer Kalvi Question 7.
P4O6 reacts with cold water to give …………
(a) H3PO3
(b) H4P2O7
(c) HPO3
(d) H3PO4
Answer:
(a) H3PO3

Samacheer Kalvi Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Question 8.
The basicity of pyrophosphorous acid ( H4P2O5) is …………
(a) 4
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 2

Samacheer Kalvi Guru Chemistry Question 9.
The molarity of given orthophosphoric acid solution is 2M. its normality is …………
(a) 6N
(b) 4N
(c) 2N
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) 6N

Chapter 3 Chemistry Class 12 Notes Question 10.
Assertion – bond dissociation energy of fluorine is greater than chlorine gas
Reason – chlorine has more electronic repulsion than fluorine
(a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.
(b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
(c) Assertion is true but reason is false.
(d) Both assertion and reason are false.
Answer:
(d) Both assertion and reason are false. The converse is true.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Question 11.
Among the following, which is the strongest oxidizing agent?
(a) Cl2
(b) F2
(c) Br2
(d) I2
Answer:
(b) F2

Class 12 Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Question 12.
The correct order of the thermal stability of hydrogen halide is …………
(a) HI > HBr > HCl > HF
(b) HF > HCl > HBr > HI
(c) HCl > HF > HBr > HI
(d) HI > HCl > HF > HBr
Answer:
(b) HF > HCl > HBr > HI

Samacheer Kalvi 12 Chemistry Solutions Question 13.
Which one of the following compounds is not formed?
(a) XeOF4
(b) XeO3
(c) XeF2
(d) NeF2
Answer:
(d) NeF2

Class 12 Chemistry Chapter 3 Notes Pdf Download Question 14.
Most easily liquefiable gas is …………
(a) Ar
(b) Ne
(c) He
(d) Kr
Answer:
(c) He

12th Chemistry Chapter 7 Book Back Answers Question 15.
XeF6 on complete hydrolysis produces …………
(a) XeOF4
(b) XeO2F4
(c) XeO3
(d) XeO2
Answer:
(c) XeO3

Question 16.
On oxidation with iodine, sulphite ion is transformed to …………
(a) S4\({ O }_{ 6 }^{ 2- }\)
(b) S2\({ O }_{ 6 }^{ 2- }\)
(c) S\({ O }_{ 4 }^{ 2- }\)
(d) S\({ O }_{ 3 }^{ 2- }\)
Answer:
(c) S\({ O }_{ 4 }^{ 2- }\)

Question 17.
Which of the following is strongest acid among all?
(a) HI
(b) HF
(c) HBr
(d) HCl
Answer:
(a) HI

Question 18.
Which one of the following orders is correct for the bond dissociation enthalpy of halogen molecules?
(a) Br2 > I2 > F2 > Cl2
(b) F2 > Cl2 > Br2 > I2
(c) I2 > Br2 > Cl2 > F2
(d) Cl2 > Br2 > F2 > I2
Answer:
(d) Cl2 > Br2 > F2 > I2

Question 19.
Among the following the correct order of acidity is …………
(a) HClO2 < HCIO < HClO3 < HClO4
(b) HClO4 < HClO2 < HCIO < HClO3
(c) HClO3 < HClO4 < HClO2 < HCIO
(d) HCIO < HClO2 < HClO3 < HClO4
Answer:
(d) HCIO < HClO2 < HClO3 < HClO4

Question 20.
When copper is heated with cone HNO3 it produces …………
(a) CU(NO3)2 , NO and NO2
(b) Cu(NO3)2 and N2O
(c) CU(NO3)2 and NO2
(d) Cu(NO3)2 and NO
Answer:
(c) CU(NO3)2 and NO2

II. Answer the following questions:

Question 1.
What is inert pair effect?
Answer:
In p-block elements, as we go down the group, two electrons present in the valence s-orbital become inert and are not available for bonding (only p-orbital involves chemical bonding). This is called inert pair effect.

Question 2.
Chalcogens belongs to p-block. Give reason.
Answer:
Chalcogens are ore forming elements. Most of the ores are oxides and sulphides, therefore oxygen, sulphur and other group 16 elements are called Chalcogens. In O, S, Se, Te and Po last electron enters to p-orbital. Therefore Chalcogens belongs to p-block.

Question 3.
Explain why fluorine always exhibit an oxidation state of -1?
Answer:
Fluorine the most electronegative element than other halogens and cannot exhibit any positive oxidation state. Fluorine does not have d-orbital while other halogens have d-orbitals. Therefore fluorine always exhibit an oxidation state of-1 and others in halogen family shows +1, +3, +5 and +7 oxidation states.

Question 4.
Give the oxidation state of halogen in the following.

  1. OF2
  2. O2F2
  3. Cl2O3
  4. I2O4

Answer:
1. OF2
+2 + 2(x) = 0
+2 = -2x
2x = -2
x =-1

2. O2F2
2(+1) + 2x = 0
2x = – 2
x = – 1

3. Cl2O3
2(x) + 3(-2) =0
2x = +6
x = +3

4. I2O4
2(x) + 4(-2) =0
2x = +8
x = +4

Question 5.
What are interhalogen compounds? Give examples.
Answer:
Each halogen combines with other halogens to form a series of compounds called interhalogen compounds. For example, Fluorine reacts readily with oxygen and forms difluorine oxide (F2O) and difluorine dioxide (F2O2).

Question 6.
Why fluorine is more reactive than other halogens?
Answer:
Fluorine is the most reactive element among halogen. This is due to the minimum value of F – F bond dissociation energy. Hence fluorine is more reactive than other halogens.

Question 7.
Give the uses of helium.
Answer:

  1. Helium and oxygen mixture is used by divers in place of air oxygen mixture. This prevents the painful dangerous condition called bends.
  2. Helium is used to provide inert atmosphere in electric arc welding of metals
  3. Helium has lowest boiling point hence used in cryogenics (low temperature science).
  4. It is much less denser than air and hence used for filling air balloons

Question 8.
What is the hybridisation of iodine in IF7? Give its structure.
Answer:
Hybridisation of iodine in IF7 is sp3d3 Structure of IF7 is pentagonal bipyramidal.
12th Chemistry Chapter 3 Book Back Answers P-Block Elements - II Samacheer Kalvi

Question 9.
Give the balanced equation for the reaction between chlorine with cold NaOH and hot NaOH.
Answer:
1. Reaction between chlorine with cold NaOH:
Cl2+ H2O → HCl + HOCl
HCl + NaOH → NaCl + H2O
HOCl + NaOH → NaOCl + H2O
Overall reaction
Samacheer Kalvi Guru 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 P-Block Elements - II
Chlorine reacts with cold NaOH to give sodium chloride and sodium hypochlorite.

2. Reaction between chlorine with hot NaOH:
Cl2 + H2O → HCl + HOCl
HCl + NaOH → NaCl + H2O
HOCl + NaOH → NaOCl + H2O
3NaOCl → NaClO3+ 2NaCl
Overall reaction
12th Chemistry 3rd Lesson Book Back Answers P-Block Elements - II Samacheer Kalvi
Chlorine reacts with hot NaOH to give sodium chlorate and sodium chloride.

Question 10.
How will you prepare chlorine in the laboratory?
Answer:
1. Chlorine is prepared by the action of cone, sulphuric acid on chlorides in presence of manganese dioxide.
4NaCl + MnO2 + 4H2SO4 → Cl2 + MnCl2 + 4NaHSO4 + 2H2O

2. It can also be prepared by oxidising hydrochloric acid using various oxidising agents such as manganese dioxide, lead dioxide, potassium permanganate or dichromate.
PbO2 + 4HCl → PbCl2 + 2H2O + Cl2
MnO2 + 4HCl → MnCl2 + 2H2O + Cl2
2KMnO4 + 16HCl → 2KCl + 2MnCl + 8H2O + 5Cl2
K2Cr2O7 + 14HCl → 2KCl + 2CrCl3 + 7H2O + 3Cl2

3. When bleaching powder is treated with mineral acids chlorine is liberated
CaOCl2 + 2HCl → CaCl2 + H2O + Cl2
CaOCl2 + H2SO4 → CaSO4 + H2O + Cl2

Question 11.
Give the uses of sulphuric acid.
Answer:

  1. Sulphuric acid is used in the manufacture of fertilisers, ammonium sulphate and super phosphates and other chemicals such as hydrochloric acid, nitric acid etc.
  2. It is used as a drying agent and also used in the preparation of pigments, explosives etc.

Question 12.
Give a reason to support that sulphuric acid is a dehydrating agent.
Answer:
Sulphuric acid is highly soluble in water and has strong affinity towards water and hence it can be used as a dehydrating agent. When dissolved in water it forms mono ( H2SO4. H2O ) and di ( H2SO4. 2H2O ) hydrates and the reaction is exothermic. The dehydration property can also be illustrated by its reaction with organic compounds such as sugar, oxalic acid and formic acid.
Samacheerkalvi.Guru 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 P-Block Elements - II

Question 13.
Write the reason for the anamolous behaviour of Nitrogen.
Answer:
1. Due to its small size, high electro negativity, high ionisation enthalpy and absence of d-orbitals.

2. N, has a unique ability to form pπ – pπ multiple bond whereas the heavier members of this group (15) do not form pπ – pπ bond, because their atomic orbitals are so large and diffused that they cannot have effective overlapping.

3. Nitrogen exists a diatomic molecule with triple bond between the two atoms whereas other elements form single bond in the elemental state.

4. N cannot form dπ – pπ bond due to the absence of d – orbitals whereas other elements can.

Question 14.
Write the molecular formula and structural formula for the following molecules.
(a) Nitric acid
(b) dinitrogen pentoxide
(c) phosphoric acid
(d) phosphine
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi Guru Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 P-Block Elements - II

Question 15.
Give the uses of argon.
Answer:
Argon prevents the oxidation of hot filament and prolongs the life in filament bulbs.

Question 16.
Write the valence shell electronic configuration of group-15 elements.
Answer:
General electronic configuration of group 15 elements are ns2np3.

  1. Nitrogen – [He] 2s2 2p3
  2. Phosphorous – [Ne] 3s2 3p3
  3. Arsenic – [Ar] 3d10 4s2 4p3
  4. Antimony – [Kr] 4d10 5s2 5p3
  5. Bismuth – [Ne] 4f14 5s10 6s2 6p3

Question 17.
Give two equations to illustrate the chemical behaviour of phosphine.
Answer:
1. Phosphine reacts with halogens to give phosphorous penta halides.
PH3 + 4Cl2 → PCl5 + 3HCl

2. Phosphine forms coordination compound with lewis acids such as boron trichloride.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 P-Block Elements - II

3. Phosphine precipitates some metal from their salt solutions.
3AgNO3 + PH3 → Ag3P + 3HNO3

Question 18.
Give a reaction between nitric acid and a basic oxide.
Answer:
Nitric acid reacts with bases and basic oxides to form salts and water.

  1. ZnO + 2HNO3 → Zn(NO3)2 + H2O
  2. 3FeO + 10HNO3 → 3Fe(NO3)3 + NO + 5H2O

Question 19.
What happens when PCl5 is heated?
Answer:
On heating phosphorous pentachloride, it decomposes into phosphorus trichloride and chlorine.
PCl5 \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) PCl3 + Cl2

Question 20.
Suggest a reason why HF is a weak acid, whereas binary acids of the all other halogens are strong acids.
Answer:
The hydrogen halides are extremely soluble in water due to the ionisation.
X + H2O → H3O+ + X
( X = F, Cl, Br or I )

Solutions of hydrogen halides are therefore acidic and known as hydrohalic acids. Hydrochloric, hydrobromic and hydroiodic acids are almost completely ionised and are therefore strong acids but HF is a weak acid. For HF,

  • HF + H2O \(\rightleftharpoons\) H3O+ + F
  • HF + F → \({ HF }_{ 2 }^{ – }\)

At high concentration, the equilibrium involves the removal of fluoride ions is important. Since it affects the dissociation of hydrogen fluoride, therefore it is a weak acid.

Question 21.
Deduce the oxidation number of oxygen in hypofluorous acid – HOF.
Answer:
In case of O – F bond is HOF, fluorine is most electronegative element. So its oxidation number is -1. Thereby oxidation number of O is +1. Similarly in case of O – H bond is HOF. O is highly electronegative than H. So its oxidation number is -1 and oxidation number of H is +1. So, Net oxidation of oxygen is – 1 + 1 = 0.
Chemistry Class 12 Samacheer Kalvi Solutions Chapter 3 P-Block Elements - II

Question 22.
What type of hybridisation occur in

  1. BrF5
  2. BrF3

Answer:
1. BrF5
BrF5 is a AX5 type. Therefore is has sp3d2 hybridisation. Hence, BrF5 molecule has square pyramidal shape.

2. BrF3
BrF3 is a AX3 type. Therefore it has sp3d hybridisation. Hence, BrF3 molecule has T-shape.

Question 23.
Complete the following reactions.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 P-Block Elements - II

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry p-Block Elements – II Evaluate yourself

Question 1.
Write the products formed in the reaction of nitric acid (both dilute and concentrated) with zinc.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi Guru Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 P-Block Elements - II

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry p-Block Elements – II Additional Questions

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry p-Block Elements – II 1 Mark Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best answer.

Question 1.
About 78% of earth atmosphere contains,…………
(a) P
(b) As
(c) N
(d) Bi
Answer:
(c) N

Question 2.
Which one of the following is not a pnictogens?
(a) Nitrogen
(b) Oxygen
(c) Phosphorous
(d) Antimony
Answer:
(b) Oxygen

Question 3.
Which one of the following shows isotopes?
(a) Nitrogen
(b) Arsenic
(c) Antimony
(d) Bismuth
Answer:
(a) Nitrogen

Question 4.
Nitrogen gas in atmosphere is separated industrially from liquid air by …………
(a) simple distillation
(b) Fractional distillation
(c) Sublimation
(d) Distillation under reduced pressure
Answer:
(b) Fractional distillation

Question 5.
Bond order for nitrogen molecule is …………
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 0
Answer:
(c) 3

Question 6.
Nitrogen gas is …………
(a) Inert
(b) Noble
(c) More reactive
(d) Less reactive
Answer:
(a) Inert

Question 7.
Which one of the following is used in cryosurgery?
(a) Liq N2
(b) Liq NH3
(c) Liq Na
(d) Liq H2
Answer:
(a) Liq N2

Question 8.
The dielectric constant of ammonia is (K) …………
(a) 10-30
(b) 10-14
(c) 1030
(d) 1014
Answer:
(a) 10-30

Question 9.
When ammonia reacts with copper sulphate solution to give complex, the colour of complex is …………
(a) violet
(b) deep blue
(c) blue
(d) Red
Answer:
(b) deep blue

Question 10.
H – N – H bond angle in NH3 is …………
(a) 109° 28’
(b) 107° 28’
(c) 104°
(d) 107°
Answer:
(d) 107°

Question 11.
Shape of ammonia is …………
(a) Planar
(b) Square planar
(c) Pyramidal
(d) Square pyramidal
Answer:
(c) Pyramidal

Question 12.
Nitric acid prepared in large scales using …………
(a) Ostwald’s process
(b) Haber’s process
(c) Contact process
(d) Deacon’s process
Answer:
(a) Ostwald’s process

Question 13.
Benzene undergoes nitration reaction to form nitrobenzene in this reaction takes place due to the formation of …………
(a) Hydronium ion
(b) Hydride ion
(c) Nitronium ion
(d) Nitrasonium ion
Answer:
(c) Nitronium ion

Question 14.
Oxidation state of N m FINO3 is…………
(a) ±2
(b) +3
(c) +4
(d) +5
Answer:
(d) +5

Question 15.
Compound used in photography is …………
(a) AgNO3
(b) AgBr
(c) AgCl
(d) AgI
Answer:
(a) AgNO3

Question 16.
Sodium nitrate
(a) Photography
(b) Firearms
(c) Royal water Sosurgerv …………
(d) Cryosurgery
Answer:
(b) Firearms

Question 17.
Nitrogen sesquoxide colour is …………
(a) colourless
(b) Brown
(c) Blue
(d) Red
Answer:
(c) Blue

Question 18.
White phosphorous is also called as …………
(a) Red phosphorous
(b) Black phosphorous
(c) Scarlet phosphorous
(d) Yellow phosphorous
Answer:
(d) Yellow phosphorous

Question 19.
White (Yellow) phosphorous glows in the dark due to oxidation which is called …………
(a) phosphorescence
(b) phosphorus
(c) Fluorescence
(d) Liminoscence
Answer:
(a) phosphorescence

Question 20.
Yellow phosphorous reacts with alkali on boiling in an inert atmosphere liberates …………
(a) Phosphorous acid
(b) Phosphoric acid
(c) Phosphine
(d) Pyrophosphoric acid
Answer:
(c) Phosphine

Question 21.
Consider the following statements.
(i) phosphine is the most important hydride of phosphorous
(ii) phosphine is a poisonous gas with rotten egg smell.
(iii) phosphine is a powerful reducing agent

Which of the above statement(s) is / are correct?
(a) (i) and (ii)
(b) (ii) and (iii)
(c) (i) and (iii)
(d) (ii) only
Ansswer:
(c) (i) and (iii)

Question 22.
When phosphine is heated with air it bums to gives …………
(a) Orthophosphoric acid
(b) Metaphosphoric acid
(c) Pyrophosphoric acid
(d) Phosphoroustrioxide
Answer:
(b) Metaphosphoric acid

Question 23.
Hybridisation of P in phosphine is …………
(a) sp3d
(b) sp3d2
(c) sp3d3
(d) sp3
Answer:
(d) sp3

Question 24.
Compounds used in Holme’s signal are …………
(a) Phosphine + Acetylene
(b) H3PO3+H3PO3
(c) Calcium carbide + calcium phosphide
(d) Calcium carbonate + calcium phosphate
Answer:
(c) Calcium carbide + calcium phosphide

Question 25.
Chalgogens are also called as …………
(a) Ore forming elements
(b) Group-16 elements
(c) group 17 elements
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(d) Both (a) and (b)

Question 26.
Element present in the volcanic ashes is …………
(a) Oxygen
(b) Sulphur
(c) Selenium
(d) Tellurium
Answer:
(b) Sulphur

Question 27.
The decomposition of potassium chlorate speed up in the presence of …………
(a) MnO2
(h) Mn3O4
(c) MnSO4
(d) KMnO4
Answer:
(a) MnO2

Question 28.
Pure ozone is …………
(a) yellow gas
(b) blue gas
(c) Pale blue gas
(d) bright blue gas
Answer:
(c) Pale blue gas

Question 29.
Shape of ozone …………
(a) V-shape
(b) Linear shape
(c) bent shape
(d) spherical shape
Answer:
(c) bent shape

Question 30.
The rate of decompositon of ozone drops sharply in …………
(a) acidic medium
(b) alkaline medium
(c) neutral medium
(d) Ether medium
Answer:
(b) alkaline medium

Question 31.
Which one of the following used as fuel in rockets?
(a) Liq O2
(b) Liq CO2
(c) Liq N2
(d) Liq He – O2
Answer:
(a) Liq O2

Question 32.
Find out crystalline allotrophic form of sulphur?
(a) γ – sulphur
(b) λ – sulphur
(c) α – sulphur
(d) milk of sulphur
Answer:
(c) α – sulphur

Question 33.
Consider the following statements
(i) α – sulphur is the only thermodynamically stable allotrophic form.
(ii) At 140 ° C the mono clinic sulphur melts to form mobile pale yellow liquid called γ – sulphur
(iii) Monoclinic sulphur is stable between 96°C-119°C and slowly changes into λ- sulphur

Which of the above statement(s) is / are not correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (ii) only
(c) (iii) only
(d) (ii) and (iii)
Answer:
(d) (ii) and (iii)

Question 34.
Sulphur di oxide, how many times heavier than air?
(a) 2 times
(b) 2.5 times
(c) 2.2 times
(d) 2.3 times
Answer:
(c) 2.2 times

Question 35.
Which one of following has temporary bleaching action?
(a) Chlorine
(b) SO3
(c) H3SO4
(d) SO2
Answer:
(d) SO2

Question 36.
Sulphuric acid can be manufactured by …………
(a) Ostwald’s process
(b) Lead chamber process
(c) Deacon’s process
(d) Haber’s process
Answer:
(b) Lead chamber process

Question 37.
Sulphuric acid is manufactured by contact process, catalyst used in contact process is …………
(a) V2O5
(b) TiCl4
(c) Fe
(d) Mo
Answer:
(c) V2O5

Question 38.
Benzene reacts with sulphuric acid to gives …………
(a) sulphate
(b) sulphide
(c) sulphonic acid
(d) sulphite
Answer:
(c) sulphonic acid

Question 39.
Reagent used to detect sulphate ion is …………
(a) BaCl2
(b) BaSO3
(c) (CH,COO),Pb
(d) both (a) and (c)
Answwer:
(d) both (a) and (c)

Question 40.
Deacon’s process is used to manufacture …………
(a) Cl2
(b) F2
(C) Br
(d) I2
Answer:
(a) Cl2

Question 41.
Catalyst used in Deacon’s process is …………
(a) CuCl2
(b) Cu2Cl2
(c) CuBr
(d) Cu2Br2
Answer:
(b) Cu2Cl2

Question 42.
C10H16 + 8C12 \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) A. Identify A?
(a) Methane
(b) Ethane
(c) Carbon
(d) Propane
Answer:
(c) Carbon

Question 43.
Passing chlorine gas through dry slaked lime to produce …………
(a) CaOCl
(b) CaOCl2
(c) CaO
(d) CaCl2
Answer:
(b) CaOCl2

Question 44.
Which one of the following is used for purification of drinking water?
(a) SO3
(b) SO2
(c) Br2 / H2O
(d) Cl2
Answer:
(d) Cl2

Question 45.
Which one of the following is a weak acid?
(a) HF
(b) HCl
(c) HBr
(d) HI
Answer:
(a) HF

Question 46.
Reagent not stored in glass bottles?
(a) HCI
(b) HBr
(c) HF
(d) HI
Answer:
(c) HF

Question 47.
More reactive element is
(a) Fluorine
(b) Chlorine
(c) Bromine
(d) Iodine
Answer:
(a) Fluorine

Question 48.
The correct order of the acidity of hydrohalic acids?
(a) HF > HCI > HBr > HI
(b) HCI >HF >HBr >HI
(c) HBr > HCI >HF > HI
(d) HI > HBr > HCI > HF
Answer:
(d) HI > HBr > HCI > HF

Question 49.
Consider the following statements
(i) In interhalogen compounds, the central atom will be the smaller one.
(ii) It can be formed only between two halogen and not more than two halogens.
(iii) They are strong reducing agents.

Which of the above statement(s) is / are not correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (ii) and (iii)
(c) (i) and (iii)
(d) (iii) only
Answer:
(c) (i) and (iii)

Question 50.
Shape of ClF3 is …………
(a) Linear
(b) T-shape
(c) Pyrimidal
(d) Square planar
Answer:
(b) T-shape

Question 51.
Which one of the following is more acidic?
(a) HOCl
(b) HCIO2
(c) HClO3
(d) HClO4
Answer:
(d) HClO4

Question 52.
When XeF6 reacts with 2.5 M NaOH gives …………
(a) Na4XeO6
(b) Na2XeO3
(c) XeO2F2
(d) XeO3
Answer:
(a) Na4XeO6

Question 53.
Shape of XeF6 is …………
(a) Octahedron
(b) Distorted octahedron
(c) Pyramidal
(d) Tetrahedron
Answer:
(b) Distorted octahedron

Question 54.
Which one of the following can penetrate through dense fog?
(a) He
(b) Ne
(c) Kr
(d) Rn
Answer:
(c) Kr

Question 55.
Find out radioactive element?
(a) He
(b) Rn
(c) Xe
(d) Ar
Answer:
(b) Rn

II. Fill in the blanks:

  1. The 11th most abundant element is ………….
  2. …………. is the principle gas of atmosphere.
  3. Nitrogen is chemically ………….
  4. …………. process for the synthesis of ammonia.
  5. …………. is used for the manufacture of calcium cyanamide
  6. …………. is a pungent smelling gas.
  7. Ammonia acts as a …………. agent.
  8. With excess of chlorine, ammonia reacts to give …………. an explosive substance.
  9. When excess ammonia is added to aqueous solution of copper sulphate …………. colour compound is formed.
  10. Pure nitric acid becomes …………. on standing.
  11. …………. is used in gunpower for firearms.
  12. The decomposition of ammonium nitrate gives ………….
  13. White phosphorous is colourless but becomes pale yellow due to formation of a …………. upon standing.
  14. The white phosphorous can be changed into …………. by heated it to 420°C in the absence of air and light.
  15. …………. reacts with alkali on boiling in an inert atmosphere liberating phosphine.
  16. …………. is used in the match boxes.
  17. Phosphine is …………. smelling gas.
  18. Phosphine has a …………. shape.
  19. …………. is used for producing smoke screen.
  20. When phosphorous trichloridie is hydrolysed with cold water it gives ………….
  21. Elements belonging group 16 are called ………….
  22. Under ordinary condition oxygen exists as a …………. gas.
  23. Allotrophic form of oxygen is …………. and ………….
  24. Pure ozone is …………. gas.
  25. …………. is used in welding purpose.
  26. Monoclinic sulphur is stable between 96° and 119°C and slowly changes into ………….
  27. …………. gas is found in volcanic eruptions.
  28. A large amount of …………. gas is released into atmosphere from plants using coal and oil and copper melting plants.
  29. Sulphurdioxide gas has …………. odour.
  30. Sulphurdioxide can be used for …………. and …………. in agriculture.
  31. In SO3 S-atom undergoes …………. hybridisation.
  32. In SO3 a double bond arises between S and O is due to …………. overlapping.
  33. High boiling point and viscosity of sulphuric acid is due to ………….
  34. …………. is used as a drying agent.
  35. The main source of fluorine is ………….
  36. The main source of chlorine is ………….
  37. Chlorine is a …………. gas.
  38. Chlorine is soluble in water and its solution is referred as ………….
  39. …………. is produced by passing chlorine gas through dry slaked lime.
  40. …………. is used in extraction of gold and platinum.
  41. …………. is used for extraction of glue from bone.
  42. At room temperature, hydrogen halides are gases but …………. can be readily liquefied.
  43. Liberation of iodine which gives a …………. colouration with starch.
  44. Each halogen combines with other halogens to form a series of compounds called ………….
  45. Structure of AX7 type is ………….
  46. Oxidation state of Cl in HClO4 is ………….
  47. Noble gases have the …………. ionisation energy.
  48. Xenon reacts with PtF6 and gave an ………….
  49. Kr and fluorine gases are irradiated with SbF it forms ………….
  50. Shape of XeOF4 is ………….
  51. Helium used for filling air ………….
  52. …………. is used in fluorescent bulbs.
  53. …………. is used in high speed electronic flash bulbs.
  54. Radon is a source of …………. rays.
  55. …………. is formed by the hydrolysis of urea.
  56. …………. element subtimes at 889 K.
  57. Yellow phosphorus has a characteristics …………. smell.

Answers:

  1. phosporous
  2. Nitrogen
  3. Inert
  4. Haber’s
  5. Nitrogen
  6. Ammonia
  7. Reducing
  8. Nitrogen trichloride
  9. Deep blue
  10. Yellow
  11. Nitric acid / NaNO
  12. Nitrous oxide
  13. Layer of red phosphorous
  14. Red phosphorous
  15. White phosphorous
  16. Red phosporous
  17. Rotten fish
  18. Pyramidal
  19. Phosphine
  20. phosporous acid
  21. Chalgogens
  22. diatomic
  23. dioxygen and ozone
  24. pale blue
  25. Oxyacetylene
  26. Rhombic sulphur
  27. Sulphurdioxide
  28. SO2
  29. Suffocating
  30. disinfecting crops and plants
  31. sp2
  32. pπ – dπ
  33. Hydrogen bonding
  34. Sulphuric acid
  35. Fluorite
  36. Sodium chloride
  37. Green yellow
  38. Chlorine water
  39. Bleaching powder
  40. Chlorine
  41. Hydrochloric acid
  42. hydrogen fluroide
  43. blue-black
  44. Inter-halogen compounds
  45. pentagonal bipyramidal
  46. +7
  47. largest
  48. orange yellow solid [XePtF6]
  49. KrF2. 2SbF3
  50. Square pyramidal
  51. Balloons
  52. Krypton
  53. Xenon
  54. Gamma
  55. Ammonia
  56. Arsenic
  57. Garlic

II. Match the following:

Question 1.
(i) Haber’s process – (a) HNO3
(ii) Deacon’s process – (b) Ammonia
(iii) Contact process – (c) Chlorine
(iv) Ostwald’s process – (d) H2SO4
Answer:
(i) b
(ii) c
(iii) d
(iv) a

Question 2.
(i) Nitric acid – (a) Purification of bone black
(ii) HCl – (b) Photography
(iii) White (yellow) phosphorous – (c) Rotten fish smell
(iv) Phosphine – (d) Phosphorescence
Answer:
(i) b
(ii) a
(iii) d
(iv) c

Question 3.
(i) Nitrogen sesquoxide – (a) H2N2O2
(ii) Nitrous oxide – (b) H4N2O4
(iii) Hyponitrous acid – (c) N2O
(iv) Hydronitrous acid – (d) N2O3
Answer:
(i) d
(ii) c
(iii) a
(iv) b

Question 4.
(i) N2O – (a) +5
(ii) N2O4 – (b) +3
(iii) N2O5 – (c) +1
(iv) N2O3 – (d) +4
Answer:
(i) c
(ii) d
(iii) a
(iv) b

Question 5.
(i) White phosphorous – (a) Volcanic eruptions
(ii) Red phosphorous – (b) Yellow phosphorous
(iii) Phosphine – (c) Match boxes
(iv) SO2 – (d) smoke screen
Answer:
(i) b
(ii) c
(iii) d
(iv) a

Question 6.
(i) ammonia – (a) suffocating odour
(ii) SO2 – (b) Rotten fish smell
(iii) PH3 – (c) Greenish yellow gas
(iv) Cl2 – (d) pungent smelling gas
Answer:
(i) d
(ii) a
(iii) b
(iv) c

Question 7.
(i) XeF4 – (a) sp3
(ii) XeOF2 – (b) sp3d2
(iii) XeO3 – (c) sp3d3
(iv) XeF – (d) sp3d
Answer:
(i) b
(ii) d
(iii) a
(iv) c

Question 8.
(i) Helium – (a) flash bulbs
(ii) Neon – (b) radioactive
(iii) Krypion – (c) air balloons
(iv) Radon – (d) Brilliant red
Answer:
(i) c
(ii) d
(iii) a
(iv) b

IV. Assertion and Reason

Question 1.
Assertion (A) – Xenon is used in high speed electronic flash bulbs used by photographers.
Reason (R) – Xenon emits an intense light in discharge tubes instantly.
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A
(b) A and R are correct but doesn’t explains A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A

Question 2.
Assertion (A) – Noble gases have the largest ionisation energy compared to any other elements.
Reason (R) – Noble gases have incomplete filled orbital.
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A
(b) A and R are correct but doesn’t explains A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(c) A is correct but R is wrong

Question 3.
Assertion (A) – Hydrogen iodide decomposes at 400<sup>0</sup>C while hydrogen fluoride and hydrogen chloride are stable at this temperature.
Reason (R) – Thermal stability of hydrogen halides decreases from fluoride to iodide.
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A
(b) A and R are correct but doesn’t explains A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A

Question 4.
Assertion (A) – The bleaching of chlorine is temporary.
Reason (R) – Chlorine oxidises ferrous salts to ferric salts.
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A
(b) A and R are correct but doesn’t explains A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(d) A is wrong but R is correct

Question 5.
Assertion (A) – Sulphuric acid is highly reactive.
Reason (R) – Sulphuric acid can act as strong acid and an oxidising agent.
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A
(b) A and R are correct but doesn’t explains A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) A and R are correct but doesn’t explains A

Question 6.
Assertion (A) – Sulphuric acid is a high boiling point and viscous liquid.
Reason (R) – This is due to the association of molecules together through hydrogen bonding.
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A
(b) A and R are correct but doesn’t explains A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A

Question 7.
Assertion (A) – Monoclinic sulphur is less stable than rhomobic sulphur.
Reason (R) – Monoclinic sulphur is stable between 96°C – 119°C and slowly changes into rhombic sulphur.
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A
(b) A and R are correct but doesn’t explains A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A

Question 8.
Assertion (A) – Nitrogen gas is chemically inert.
Reason (R) – Nitrogen has low bonding energy.
(a) A and R are correct and R explains A
(b) A and R are correct but doesn’t explains A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(c) A is correct but R is wrong

V. Find the odd one out
Question 1.
(a) NO
(b) HNO3
(C) NO2
(d) N2O
Answer:
(b) HNO3
Hint: HNO3 is acid and other are oxides.

Question 2.
(a) Nitrous acid
(b) Nitric acid
(c) Hyponitrous acid
(d) Pemitrous acid
Answer:
(d) Pemitrous acid
Hint: Pemitrous acid contains peroxide linkage others doesn’t have peroxide linkage.

Question 3.
(a) White phosphorous
(b) Red phosphorous
(c) phosphorous pentaoxide
(d) black phosphorous
Answer:
(c) phosphorous pentaoxide
Hint: P2O5 is a compound of phosphorous and others are allotropic form of phosphorous.

Question 4.
(a) PH3
(b) HPO3
(c) H3PO3
(d) H3PO4
Answer:
(a) PH3
Hint: PH3 is hydrides of phosphorous and others are oxo acids of phosphorous.

Question 5.
(a) He
(b) Ne
(c) Ar
(d) Xe
Answer:
(d) Xe
Hint: Xe forms several chemical compounds than others.

VI. Find out the correct pair.

Question 1.
(a) Helium – filament bulbs
(b) Krypton – prevent bonds
(c) Xenon – Lasers
(d) Radon – flash bulbs
Answer:
(c) Xenon – Lasers

Question 2.
(a) Ra – gamma rays
(b) Xe – cancer growth
(c) Ne – balloons
(d) Kr – advertisement bulb
Answer:
(a) Ra – gamma rays

Question 3.
(a) ClF3 – Linear
(b) BrF5 – T Shaped
(c) IF4 – square pyrimidal
(d) BrF5 – square pyrimidal
Answer:
(d) BrF5 – square pyrimidal

Question 4.
(a) XeOF2 – sp3
(b) XeF6 – sp3d3
(c) XeF4 – sp3
(d) XeOF4 – sp3d
Answer:
(b) XeF6 – sp3d3

Question 5.
(a) OF2 = -1
(b) Cl4O4 = -1
(c) I2O4 = -1
(d) I2O9 = -1
Answer:
(a) OF2 = -1

Question 6.
(a) Royal water – Dissolving gold
(b) Chlorine – Entraction of glue from bone
(c) HCl- Extraction of gold
(d) Chlorine – Temporary bleaching
Answer:
(a) Royal water – Dissolving gold

Question 7.
(a) O – 2s22p3
(b) S – 3s23p4
(c) Se – 4d105s25p4
(d) Te – 3d104s24p4
Answer:
(b) S – 3s23p4

VI.Find out the incorrect pair.

Question 1.
(a) Nitrogen gas – inert
(b) Ammonia – pungent smelling gas
(c) Nitric acid – oxidizing agent
(d) Phosphine – rotten egg smell
Answer:
(d) Phosphine – rotten egg smell

Question 2.
(a) Liquid nitrogen – biological preservation
(b) Nitric acid – photography
(c) white phosphorous – yellow phosphorous
(d) phosphorous – welding
Answer:
(d) phosphorous – welding

Question 3.
(a) N2O = +1
(b) N2O = +2
(c) N2O3 = +5
(d) NO2 = +4
Answer:
(c) N2O3 = +5

Question 4.
(a) Hvponitrous acid – N2O
(b) Nitrous acid – HNO2
(c) pernitric acid – HNO4
(d) pernitrous acid – HOONO
Answer:
(a) Hvponitrous acid – N2O

Question 5.
(a) PH3 – Holme’s signal
(b) O2 – welding
(c) H2SO4 – Disinfecting crops
(d) SO3 – Bleaching hair
Answer:
(c) H2SO4 – Disinfecting crops

Question 6.
(a) H2SO4 drying agent
(b) Chlorine – Deacon’s process
(c) HCI – purification of bone black
(d) Helium – flash bulbs
Answer:
(d) Helium – flash bulbs

Question 7.
(a) ICl – Linear
(b) CIF3 – T shape
(c) IF5 – pentagonal bipyramidal
(d) IF7 – pentagonal bipyramidal
Answer:
(c) IF5 – pentagonal bipyramidal

Question 8.
(a) HOCl = +2
(b) HOCl = +3
(e) HOCI = +5
(d) HOCl4 = +7
Answer:
(a) HOCl = +2

Question 9.
(a) XeF4 – sp3d3
(b) XeF6 – sp3d3
(e) XeOF4 – sp3d2
(d) XeO3 – sp3d
Answer:
(d) XeO3 – sp3d

Question 10.
(a) He – cryogenics
(b) Ne – advertisement
(c) Kr – flurescent bulbs
(d) Ra – Lasers.
Answer:
(d) Ra – Lasers.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry p-Block Elements – II 2 Mark Questions and Answers

Question  1.
What are pnictogens?
Answer:
The group – 15 elements like nitrogen, phosphorous Arsenic, Antimony and Bismuth are collectively called as pnictogens. Their general outer electronic configuration is ns2np3.

Question 2.
What happen when sodium azide undergoes thermal decomposition?
Answer:
Pure nitrogen gas can be obtained by the thermal decomposition of sodium azide about 575K
2NaN3 \(\underrightarrow { 575K }\) 2Na + 3N2

Question 3.
How will you prepare ammonia from nitrogen? and mention the name of process?
Answer:
Nitrogen directly reacts with hydrogen gives ammonia. This reaction is favoured by high pressures and at optimum temperature in the presence of iron catalyst,
N2 + 3H3 \(\rightleftharpoons\) 2NH3
This process is called as Haber’s process.

Question 4.
Why nitrogen gas is chemically inert?
Answer:
The chemically inert character of nitrogen is largely due to high bonding energy of the molecules 225 cal mol-1 .Interestingly the triply bonded species is notable for its less reactivity in comparison with other iso-electronic triply bonded systems such as -C \(\equiv\) C – C \(\equiv\) Q, X- C \(\equiv\) N, etc.

Question 5.
Mention the uses of nitrogen?
Answer:

  1. Nitrogen is used for the manufacture of ammonia, nitric acid and calcium cyanamide etc.
  2. Liquid nitrogen is used for producing low temperature required in cryosurgery, and so in biological preservation

Question 6.
Explain the action of heat on ammonia.
Answer:
Above 500°C ammonia decomposes into its elements. The decomposition may be accelerated by metallic catalysts like Nickel, Iron. Almost complete dissociation occurs on continuous sparking.
2NH3 \(\underrightarrow { { 500 }^{ 0 }C } \) N2 + 3H2

Question 7.
Prove ammonia act as a reducing agent?
Answer:
Ammonia reduces the metal oxides to metal when passed over heated metallic oxide.
3PbO + 2NH3 → 3Pb + N2 + 3H2O

Question 8.
What happen when copper sulphate reacts with ammonia?
Answer:
When excess ammonia is added to aqueous solution copper sulphate a deep blue colour Complex [Cu(NH3)4 ]2+ is formed.
Chapter 3 Chemistry Class 12 Notes P-Block Elements - II Samacheer Kalvi

Question 9.
Pure nitric acid is colourless, on standing it becomes yellow. Justify your answer.
Answer:
Nitric acid decomposes on exposure to sunlight or on being heated, into nitrogen dioxide, water and oxygen.
4HNO4 → 4NO2 + 2H2O + O2
Due to this reaction pure acid or its concentrated solution becomes yellow on standing.

Question 10.
Write the products formed in the reaction of nitric acid with dilute and concentrated with magnesium.
Answer:
1. Magnesium with cone. HNO3:
4Mg + 10HNO3 → 4Mg(NO3)2 + NH4NO3 + 3H2O
Magnesium reacts with concentraated nitric acid to gives both magnesium nitrate and ammonium nitrate.

2. Magnesium with dil HNO3:
Magnesium reacts with dilute nitric acid to gives both magnesium nitrate and nitrous oxide.
4Mg + 10HNO3 → 4 Mg(NO3)2 + N2O + 5H2O

Question 11.
Give the uses of nitric acid.
Answer:

  1. Nitric acid is used as a oxidising agent and in the preparation of aquaregia.
  2. 4. Salts of nitric acid are used in photography (AgNO3) and gunpowder for firearms. (NaNO3) .

Question 12.
How will you prepare nitric oxide from sodium nitrite?
Answer:
When sodium nitrite reacts with ferrous sulphate in the presence of sulphuric acid to gives nitric oxide.
2NaNO2 + 2FeSO4 + 3H2S → Fe2(SO4)3 + 2NaHSO4 + 2H2O + 2NO

Question 13.
How will you prepare nitrogen pentoxide?
Answer:
Nitric acid reacts with phosphorous pentaoxide to give nitrogen pentoxide.
2HNO3 + P2O5 → N2O5 + 2HPO3

Question 14.
Draw the structure of

  1. N2O
  2. N2O3

Answer:
1. N2O (Nitrous oxide)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 P-Block Elements - II

2. N2O3 (Nitrogen sesquoxide)
Class 12 Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Chapter 3 P-Block Elements - II

Question 15.
Draw- the structure of

  1. N2O4
  2. N2O3

Answer:
1. N2O4 (Nitrogen tetraoxide)
Samacheer Kalvi 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 P-Block Elements - II
2. N2O5
Class 12 Chemistry Chapter 3 Notes Pdf Download P-Block Elements - II Samacheer Kalvi

Question 16.
Draw the structure of

  1. Hyponitrous acid
  2. Hydronitrous acid.

Answer:
(a) Hypon trous acid – H2N2O2
HO – N = H – OH

(b) Hydronitrous acid:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-16

Question 17.
Mention the allotropic forms of phosphorous?
Answer:
The most common allotropic forms of phosphorous

  1. white phosphorous
  2. Red phosphorous
  3. Black phosphorous

Question 18.
Why white phosphorous is also known as yellow phosphorous?
Answer:
The freshly prepared white phosphorus is colourless but becomes pale yellow due to formation of a layer of red phosphorus upon standing. Hence it is also known as yellow phosphorus.

Question 19.
What is phosphorescence?
Answer:
White (yellow) phosphorous glows in the dark due to oxidation which is called phosphorescence.

Question 20.
Why white phosphorous undergoes spontaneous combustion in air?
Answer:
White phosphorous ignition temperature is very low and hence it undergoes spontaneous combustion in air at room temperature and during in the combusition process, white phosphorous produces P2O5.

Question 21.
Draw the structure of

  1. white phosphorous
  2. red phosphorous

Answer:
1. White phosphorous
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-17

2. Red phosphorous
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-18

Question 22.
How will you convert red phosphorous into P2O3 and P2Q5?
Answer:
Red phosphorus reacts with oxygen on heating to give phosphorus trioxide or phosphorus pentoxide.
P4 + 3O2 \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) P4O6(phosphorous trioxide)
P4 + 5O2 \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) P4Q10 (phosphorous pentaoxide)

Question 23.
How will you prepare orthophosphoric acid from phosphorous?
Answer:
When phosphorous is treated with cone.nitric acid it is oxidised to orthophosphoric acid. This reaction is catalysed by iodine crystals.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-19

Question 24.
Mention the uses of phosphorous?
Answer:

  1. The red phosphorus is used in the match boxes.
  2. It is also used for the production of certain alloys such as phosphor bronze.

Question 25.
Show that phosphine is weakly basic?
Answer:
Phosphine is weakly basic and forms phosphonium salts with halogen acids.
PH3 +HI → PH4I
PH4I + H2O \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) PH3+ H3O + I

Question 26.
Draw the structure of PCl3
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-20

Question 27.
How will you prepare PCl3 from white phosphorous?

  1. When a slow stream of chlorine is passed over white phosphorous, PCl3 is formed
  2. It can also be obtained by treating white phosphorous with thionyl chloride.

Question 28.
What happen when PCl3 is treated with cold water?
Answer:
When PCl3 is hydrolysed with cold water it gives phosphorous acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-21

Question 29.
How will you prepare PCl3 ?
Answer:
When PCl3 is treated with excess chlorine, phosphorous pentachloride is obtained.
PCl3+ Cl2 → PCl5

Question 30.
Mention the uses of PCl3 and PCl5?
answer:

  1. Phosphorus trichloride is used as a chlorinating agent and for the preparation of H2PO3.
  2. Phosphorous pentachloride is a chlorinating agent and is useful for replacing hydroxyl groups by chlorine atom.

Question 31.
Draw the structure of H3PO2 and H3PO3?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-22

Question 32.
Draw the structure of H4P2O6 and H4P2O3?
Answwer:
(i) H4P2O6
(ii) H4P2O3

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-23

Question 33.
Give the method to prepare hypophosphorous acid and pyrophosphoric acid?
Answer:
1. Hypophosphorous acid – Phosphorous reacts with water to give hypophosphorous acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-24

2. Pyrophosphoric acid – Phosphorous acid is heated they produce pyrophosphoric acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-25

Question 34.
Complete the reactions

  1. HgO \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) ?
  2. BaO2 \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) ?

Answer:

  1. HgO \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) 2Hg + O2
  2. 2BaO2 \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) 2BaO + O2

Question 35.
Give and explain the reaction used to estimation of ozone.
Answer:
Ozone oxidises potassium iodide to iodine.
O3 + 2KI + H2O → 2KOH + O2 + I2
This reaction is quantitative and can be used for estimation of ozone.

Question 36.
Write a short notes on Rhombic sulphur?
Answer:
Rhombic sulphur also known as a sulphur, is the only thermodynamically stable allotropic form at ordinary temperature and pressure. The crystals have a characteristic yellow colour and composed of S8 molecules. When heated slowly above 96°C, it converts into monoclinic sulphur. Upon cooling below 96°C the β form converts back to a form.

Question 37.
Write a notes on monoclinic sulphur?
Answer:
Monoclinic sulphur also contains S8 molecules in addition to small amount of S6 molecules. It exists as a long needle like prism and is also called as prismatic sulphur. It is stable between 96° – 119°C and slowly changes into rhombic sulphur.

Question 38.
What are λ – sulphur?
Answer:
Sulphur also exists in liquid and gaseous states. At around 140° C the monoclinic sulphur melts to form mobile pale yellow liquid called λ sulphur.

Question 39.
How will you prepare sulphurdioxide by laboratory method?
Answer:
Sulphur dioxide is prepared in the laboratory treating a metal or metal sulphite with sulphuric acid.
Cu + 2H2SO4 → CuSO4 + SO2 + 2H2O
\({ SO }_{ 3 }^{ – }\) + 2H+ → H2O + SO2

Question 40.
Complete the reactions,
Answer:

  1. Zns + O2 \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) ?
  2. FeS2 + O2 \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) ?

Answer:

  1. 2Zns + 3O2 \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) 2ZnO + 2SO2
  2. 4FeS2 + 11O2 \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) 2Fe2O3 + 8SO2

Question 41.
What happen when sulphurdioxdie reacts with sodium hydroxide and sodium carbonate?
Answer:
Sulphur dioxide reacts with sodium hydroxide and sodium carbonate to form sodium bisulphite and sodium sulphite respectively.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-26

Question 42.
Mention the uses of sulphurdioxide?
Answer:

  1. Sulphur dioxide is used in bleaching hair, silk, wool etc…
  2. It can be used for disinfecting crops and plants in agriculture.

Question 43.
Why sulphuric acid is high boiling and viscous liquid ?
Answer:
Sulphuric acid is high boiling and viscous liquid this is due to the association of molecules together through hydrogen bonding.

Question 44.
Explain the reaction between benzene and sulphuric acid.
Answer:
Sulphuric acid reacts with benzene to give benzene sulphuric acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-27

Question 45.
Give the uses of sulphuric acid?
Answer:

  1. Sulphuric acid is used in the manufacture of fertilisers, ammonium sulphate and super phosphates and other chemicals such as hydrochloric acid, nitric acid etc…
  2. It is used as a drying agent and also used in the preparation of pigments, explosives etc..

Question 46.
Draw the structure of H2SO3 and H2SO4 ?
Answer:
1. H2SO3
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-28

2. H2SO4
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-29

Question 48.
Draw the structure of

  1. Pyrosulphuric acid
  2. Peroromonosulphuric acid?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-30
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements – II

Answer:
1. Pyrosulphuric acid H2S2O7

2. Peroromonosulphuric acid H2SO5
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-31

Question 49.
What happen when chlorine reacts with trupentine?
Answer:
When chlorine burnt with turpentine it forms carbon and hydrochloric acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-32

Question 50.
How will you prepare hydrochloric acid by laboratory method?
Answer:
It is prepared by the action of sodium chloride and concentrated sulphuric acid

  • NaCl + H2SO4 → NaHSO4 + HCl
  • NaHSO4 + NaCl → Na2SO4 + HCl

Dry hydrochloric acid is obtained by passing the gas through conc. sulphuric acid

Question 51.
Mention the uses of hydrochloric acid?
Answer:

  1. Hydrochloric acid is used for the manufacture of chlorine, ammonium chloride, glucose from com starch etc.,
  2. It is used in the extraction of glue from bone and also for purification of bone black.

Question 52.
Complet the following reaction?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-33

Question 53.
Why noble gases have the largest ionisation energy?
Answer:
Noble gases have the largest ionisation energy compared to any other elements in a given row as they have completely filled orbital (ns2np6) in their outer most shell. They are extremely stable and have a small tendency to gain or lose electrons. Hence noble gases have the largest ionisation energy.

Question 54.
Mention the uses of Neon?
Answer:
Neon is used in advertisement as neon sign and the brilliant red glow is caused by passing electric current through neon gas under low
pressure.

Question 55.
Give the uses of Krypton?
Answer:

  1. Krypton is used in fluorescent bulbs, flash bulbs etc…
  2. Lamps filed with krypton are used in airports as approaching lights as they can penetrate through dense fog.

Question 56.
Mention the application of Xenon?
Answer:

  1. Xenon is used in fluorescent bulbs, flash bulbs and lasers.
  2. Xenon emits an intense light in discharge tubes instantly. Due to this it is used in high speed electronic flash bulbs used by photographers.

Question 57.
Give the uses of Radon?
Answer:

  1. Radon is radioactive and used as a source of gamma rays
  2. Radon gas is sealed as small capsules and implanted in the body to destroy malignant i.e. cancer growth.

Question 58.
Why are pentahalides more covalent than trihalides?
Answer:
Since elements in the +5 oxidation state have less tendency to lose electrons than in the +3 oxidation state, therefore elements in the +5 oxidation state are more covalent than in the +3 oxidation state. In other words, pentahalides are more covalent than trihalides.

59. Why is N2 less reactive at room temperature?
Answer:
Due to the presence of triple bond between the two nitrogen atoms, the bond dissociation energy of N2 (941.4 kJ mol) is very high. Therefore, N2 is less reactive at room temperature.

Question 60.
Why is ICl more reactive than I2 ?
Answer:
ICl bond is weaker than I – I bond. Therefore ICl can break easily to form halogen atoms which readily brings about the reaction.

Question 61.
Why is helium used in diving apparatus?
Answer:
It is used as a diluent for oxygen in modern diving apparatus because of its very low solubility in blood.

Question 62.
Give the disproportionation reaction of H3PO3?
Answer:
H3PO3 on heating undergoes self-oxidation reduction as:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-34

Question 63.
Why is red Phosphorus less reactive than white Phosphorus?
Answer:
White Phosphorus is more reactive than red Phosphorus under normal conditions because of angular strain in the P4 molecule where the angles are only 60°.

Question 64.
Nitrogen does not form any pentahalide like Phosphorus. Why?
Answer:
Nitrogen does not form pentahalide due to non-availability of the d-orbitals in its valence shell.

Question 65.
Give reason for the following. Among the noble gases only Xenon is well known to form chemical compounds?
Answer:
Xe is largest in size and has the highest polarising power.

Question 66.
Why is hydrogen sulphide, with greater molar mass a gas, while water a liquid at room temperature?
Answer:
H2O molecules are associated with intermolecular H-bonding, H2S is not because oxygen is more electronegative and smaller in size than sulphur. That is why H2O is a liquid and H2S is a gas.

Question 67.
Noble gases are chemically inert. Give reasons.
Answer:
Noble gases are chemically inert because they have their octet complete except Helium, i.e. they have a stable electronic configurations.

Question 68.
Why do noble gases exist as monoatomic?
Answer:
Noble gases have stable electronic configuration, that is why they have no tendency to lose or gain electrons.Therefore they do not form covalent bond.

Question 69.
Nitrogen exists as diatomic molecule and Phosphrus as P4. Why?
Answer:
Nitrogen has a triple bond between its two atoms because of its small size and high electro negativity. Phosphorus P4 has single bond, that is why it is tetra-atomic.

Question 70.
Why is H2S more acidic than water?
Answer:
It is because bond dissociation energy of S – H bond is less than O – H bond due to longer bond length.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry p-Block Elements – II 3 Marks Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Complete the following reactions.
(i) 6Li + N2 → ?
(ii) 3Ca + N2 → ?
(iii) 2B + N2 → ?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-35

Qustion 2.
How is ammonia prepared?
Answer:
1. Ammonia is formed by the hydrolysis of urea.
NH2CONH2 + H2O → 2NH3 + CO2

2. Ammonia is prepared in the laboratory by heating an ammonium salt with a base.
\({ 2NH }_{ 4 }^{ + }\) + OH → 2NH3+ H2O
2NH4Cl + CaO → CaCl2 + 2NH3 + H2O

3. It can also be prepared by heating a metal nitrides such as magnesium nitride with water.
Mg3N2+ 6H2O → 3Mg(OH)2 + 2NH3

Question 3.
Explain the structure of ammonia.
Answer:
Ammonia molecule is pyramidal in shape N – H bond distance is 1.016 A and H – H bond distance is 1.645 A with a bond angle 107°. The structure of ammonia may be regarded as a tetrahedral with one lone pair of electrons in one tetrahedral position hence it has a pyramidal shape as shown in the figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-36

Question 4.
How will you prepare nitric acid?
Answer:
Nitric acid is prepared by heating equal amounts of potassium or sodium nitrate with concentrated sulphuric acid.
KNO3 + H2SO4 → KHSO4 + HNO3

The temperature is kept as low as possible to avoid decomposition of nitric acid. The acid condenses to a fuming liquids which is coloured brown by the presence of a little nitrogen dioxide which is formed due to the decomposition of nitric acid.
4HNO3 → 4NO2 + 2H2O + O2

Question 5.
Discuss the Commercial method to prepare Nitric acid.
(Or)
How will you prepare nitric acid by Ostwald’s process?
Answer:
Nitric acid prepared in large scales using Ostwald’s process. In this method ammonia from Haber’s process is mixed about 10 times of air. This mixture is preheated and passed into the catalyst chamber where they come in contact with platinum gauze. The temperature rises to about 1275 K and the metallic gauze brings about the rapid catalytic oxidation of ammonia resulting in the formation of NO, which then oxidised to nitrogen dioxide.
4NH3 + 5O2 → 4NO + 6H3O + 120kJ
2NO + O2 → 2NO3

The nitrogen dioxide produced is passed through a series of adsorption towers. It reacts with water to give nitric acid. Nitric acid formed is bleached by blowing air.
6NO2 + 3H2O → 4HNO3 + 2NO + H2O

Question 6.
Draw the structure of the following compounds.
(a) Nitrous acid
(b) Nitric acid
(c) Pernitric acid
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-37

Question 7.
Identify A, B and C from the following reactions.

  1. P4 + Mg → A
  2. P4+ Ca → B
  3. P4 + Na → C

Answer:

  1. P4 + 6Mg → 2Mg3P2 (Magnesium phosphide)
  2. P4 + 6Ca → 2Ca3P2 (Calcium phosphide)
  3. P4+ 12Na → 2Na3P (Sodium phosphide)

Question 8.
How will you prepare phosphine and explain the purification of phosphine?
Answer:
Phosphine is prepared by action of sodium hydroxide with white phosphorous in an inert atmosphere of carbon dioxide or hydrogen.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-38
Phosphine is freed from phosphine dihydride (P2H4) by passing through a freezing mixture. The dihydride condenses while phosphine does not. Phosphine can also prepared by the hydrolysis of metallic phosphides with water or dilute mineral acids.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-39
Phosphine is prepared in pure form by heating phosphorous acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-40
A pure sample of phosphine is prepared by heating phosphonium iodide with caustic soda solution.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-41

Question 9.
What happens when PH3 reacts with oxygen or air?
Answer:
When phosphine air or oxygen it bums to give meta phosphoric acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-42

Question 10.
Explain the structure of phosphine.
Answer:
In phosphine, phosphorus shows sp3 hybridisation. Three orbitals are occupied by bond pair and fourth comer is occupied by lone pair of electrons. Hence, bond angle is reduced to 94°. Phosphine has a pyramidal shape.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-43

Question 11.
Discuss the uses of phosphine.
Answer:
Phosphine is used for producing smoke screen as it gives large smoke. In a ship, a pierced container with a mixture of calcium carbide and calcium phosphide, liberates phosphine and acetylene when thrown into sea. The liberated phosphine catches fire and ignites acetylene. These burning gases serves as a signal to the approaching ships. This is known as Holmes signal.

Question 12.
How does PCl3 reacts with the following reagents?

  1. C2H5OH
  2. C2H5COOH

Answer:

  1. C2H5OH + PCl3 → C2H5Cl + H3PO3
  2. C2H5COOH + PCl3 → C2H5COCl + H3PO3

Question 13.
Explain the reaction between PCl5 and water.
Answer:
Phosphorous pentachloride reacts with water to give phosphoryl chloride and orthophosphoric acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-44

Question 14.
Explain the structure of phosphorous trioxide (P2O3).
Answer:
In phosphorous trioxide four phosphorous atoms lie at the comers of a tetrahedron and six oxygen atoms along the edges. The P – O bond distance is 165.6 pm which is shorter than the single bond distance of P – O (184 pm) due to pπ – dπ bonding and results in considerable double bond character.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-45

Question 15.
Discuss the structure of phosphorous pentaoxide (P2O3).
Answer:
In P4O10 each P atoms form three bonds to oxygen atom and also an additional coordinate bond with an oxygen atom. Terminal coordinate P – O bond length is 143 pm, which is less than the expected single bond distance. This may be due to lateral overlap of filled p orbitals of an oxygen atom with empty d-orbital on phosphorous.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-46

Question 16.
Mention the uses of oxygen.
Answer:

  1. Oxygen is one of the essential component for the survival of living organisms.
  2. It is used in welding (oxyacetylene welding)
  3. Liquid oxygen is used as fuel in rockets etc.

Question 17.
Give and explain reducing behaviour of sulphur dioxide.
Answer:
As Sulphur dioxide can readily be oxidised, it acts as a reducing agent. It reduces chlorine into hydrochloric acid.
SO2 + 2H2O + Cl2 → H2SO4 + 2HCl
It also reduces potassium permanganate and dichromate to Mn2+ and Cr3+ respectively.

  • 2KMnO4 + 5SO2 + 2H2O → K2SO4 + 2MnSO4 + 2H2SO4
  • K2Cr2O7 + 3SO2 + H2SO4 → K2SO4 + Cr2(SO4)3 + H2O

Question 18.
Why bleaching action of sulphur dioxide is temporary?
Answer:
In presence of water, sulphur dioxide bleaches coloured wool, silk, sponges and straw into colourless due to its reducing property.
SO2 + 2H2O → 2H2SO4 + 2(H)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-47

However, the bleached product (colourless) is allowed to stand in air, it is reoxidised by atmospheric oxygen to its original colour. Hence bleaching action of sulphur dioxide is temporary.

Question 19.
Explain the structure of sulphur dioxide.
Answer:
In sulphur dioxide, sulphur atom undergoes sp2 hybridisation. A double bond arises between S and O is due to pπ- dπ overlapping.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-48

Question 20.
How will you manufacture sulphuric acid by contact process?
Answer:
Manufacture of sulphuric acid by contact process involves the following steps:
1. Initially sulphur dioxide is produced by burning sulphur or iron pyrites in oxygen/air.
S + O2 → SO2
4FeS2 + 11O2 → 2Fe2O3 + 8SO2

2. Sulphur dioxide formed is oxidised to sulphur trioxide by air in the presence of a catalyst such as V2O5 or platinised asbestos.

3. The sulphur trioxide is absorbed in concentrated sulphuric acid and produces oleum (H2S2O7). The oleum is converted into sulphuric acid by diluting it with water.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-49
To maximise the yield the plant is operated at 2 bar pressure and 720 K. The sulphuric acid obtained in this process is over 96 % pure.

Question 21.
Prove that H2SO4 is a strong dibasic acid.
Answer:
Sulphuric acid forms two types of salts namely sulphates and bisulphates.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-50

Question 22.
Draw the structure of
(a) Marshall’s acid
(b) polythionic acid
(c) Dithionic acid
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-51

Question 23.
What happens when chlorine reacts with ammonia?
Answer:
1. If chlorine reacts with excess ammonia, it gives nitrogen and ammonium chloride.
8NH3 + 3Cl2 → N2 + 6NH4Cl

2. If ammonia reacts with excess chlorine, it gives nitrogen trichloride and ammonium chloride.
4NH2 + 3Cl2 → NCl2 + 3NH4Cl

Question 24.
Bleaching action of chlorine is permanent. Justify this statement.
Answer:
Chlorine is a strong oxidising and bleaching agent because of the nascent oxygen.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-52
Colouring matter + Nascent oxygen → Colourless oxidation product
Therefore, bleaching of chlorine is permanent. It oxidises ferrous salts to ferric, sulphites to sulphates and hydrogen sulphide to sulphur.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-53

Question 25.
Give the uses of chlorine.
Answer:

  1. Purification of drinking water
  2. Bleaching of cotton textiles, paper and rayon
  3. It is used in extraction of gold and platinum

Question 26.
What is Royal water?
Answer:
When three parts of concentrated hydrochloric acid and one part of concentrated nitric acid are mixed, aquaregia is obtained. This is also known as Royal water. This is used for dissolving gold, platinum etc.
Au + 4H+ + \({ 4NO }_{ 3 }^{ – }\) + 4 Cl → \({ AuCl }_{ 4 }^{ – }\) + NO + 2H2O
3Pt + 16H+ + \({ 4NO }_{ 3 }^{ – }\) + 18Cl → \({ 3PtCl }_{ 3 }^{ 2- }\) + NO + 8H2O

Question 27.
Why HF is not stored in glass bottles?
Answer:
HF rapidly reacts with silica and glass to form soluble salt and that process leads to break the glass bottles. Hence HF is not stored in glass bottles.
SiO2 + 4HF → SiF4 + 2H2O
Na2SiO3 + 6HF → Na2SiF6 + 3H2O

Question 28.
Give the properties of inter halogen compounds.
Answer:
Properties of inter halogen compounds:

  1. The central atom will be the larger one.
  2. It can be formed only between two halogen and not more than two halogens.
  3. Fluorine can’t act as a central metal atom being the smallest one.
  4. Due to high electronegativity with small size fluorine helps the central atom to attain high coordination number
  5. They can undergo the auto ionization.
  6. They are strong oxidizing agents.

Question 29.
How will you prepare Xenon fluoride?
Answer:
Xenon fluorides are prepare by direct reaction of xenon and fluorine under different conditions as shown below.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-54

Question 30.
Complete the following reaction.
(i) XeOF4 + SiO2 → A + SiF6
(ii) A + SiO2 → B + SiF6
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-55

Question 31.
What happens when XeF6 reacts 2.5 M solution of NaOH?
Answer:
When XeF6 reacts with 2.5 M of NaOH, sodium per xenate is obtained.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-56

Question 32.
Give two examples to show the anomalous behaviour of fluorine.
Answer:
The anomalous behaviour of fluorine is due to its:

  1. Small size
  2. highest electronegativity
  3. low F-F bond dissociation enethalpy
  4. non-availability of d-orbitals in its valence shell.

The two examples are:
1. Due to non-availability of d-orbitals in its valence shell, fluorine cannot expand its octet, therefore, shows only -1 oxidation state while all other halogens due to the presence of d-orbitals shows positive oxidation states of +1, +3, +5 and +7 besides oxidation state of -1.

2. Due to its small size, the three lone pair of electrons on each F atom in F – F molecule, repel the bond pair. As a result, F – F bond dissociation energy is lower than that of Cl – Cl bond.

Question 33.
Why does the reactivity of nitrogen differ from Phosphorus?
Answer:
Nitrogen exists as a diatomic molecule (N \(\equiv\) N). Due to the presence of a triple bond between the two N – atoms the bond dissociation energy is large (941.4 kJ mol-1). As a result nitrogen is said to be chemically inert in its elemental state. In contrast, P – P single bond is much weaker (213 kJ mol-1) than N \(\equiv\) N triple bond Therefore, phosphorus is much more reactive than nitrogen.

Question 34.
Why does NH3 form hydrogen bond but PH3 does not?
Answer:
The electronegativity of N (3.0) is much higher than that of FI (2.1). As a result, N – H bond is quite polar and hence NH3 undergoes intermolecular H-bonding. In contrast, both P and H have an electronegativity of 2.1. Therefore P – H bond is non-polar and hence PH3 does not undergo H – bonding.

Question 35.
Can PCl5 act as an oxidising as well as a reducing agent? Justify.
Answer:
Oxidation state of P in PCl5 is +5. Since P has five valence electrons in its valence shell, therefore it cannot increase its oxidation state beyond +5 by donating its electrons, therefore PCl5 cannot act as a reducing agent. However, it can decrease its oxidation number from +5 to +3 or some lower value, therefore PCl5 acts as an oxidising agent. For example, it oxidises Ag to AgCl.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry p-Block Elements – II 5 Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
How does ammonia react with

  1. Excess Cl2
  2. Na
  3. CuSO4
  4. O2 / ∆

Answer:
1. Reaction with Excess Cl2
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-57

2. Reaction with Na:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-58

3. Reaction with CuSO4
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-59

4. Reaction with O2
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-60

Question 2.
Explain the reaction of metals with nitric acid.
Answer:
The reactions of metals with nitric acid are explained in 3 steps as follows:
Primary reaction:
Metal nitrate is formed with the release of nascent hydrogen
M + HNO3 → MNO3 + (H)

Secondary reaction:
Nascent hydrogen produces the reduction products of nitric acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-61

Tertiary reaction:
The secondary products either decompose or react to give final products
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-62

For examples:
Copper reacts with nitric acid in the following manner
3Cu + 6HNO3 → 3Cu(NO3)2 + 6(H)
6(H) + 3HNO3 → 3HNO2 + 3H2O
3HNO2 → HNO3 + 2NO + H2O

Overall reaction
3Cu + 8HNO3 → 3CU(NO3)2 + 2NO + 4H2O

The concentrated acid has a tendency to form nitrogen dioxide
Cu + 4HNO3 → 3CU(NO3)2 + 2NO2 + 2H2O

Question 3.
How will you prepare ozone by laboratory method? Explain the structure of ozone.
Answer:
In the laboratory ozone is prepared by passing electrical discharge through oxygen. At a potential of 20,000 V about 10% of oxygen is converted into ozone it gives a mixture known as ozonised oxygen. Pure ozone is obtained as a pale blue gas by the fractional distillation of liquefied ozonised oxygen.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-63
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-64
Structure of ozone:
The ozone molecule have a bent shape and symmetrical with delocalised bonding between the oxygen atoms.

Question 4.
A is a king of acid. A reacts with HBr to give B and Bromine. A reacts with Na2CO3 to give C and carbon dioxide. Identify A, B and C. Give the reaction.
Answer:
1. King of acid is sulphuric acid (A).

2. Sulphuric acid (A) reacts with HBr to give SO2 (B) and Bromine.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-65

3. Sulphuric acid (A) reacts with Na2CO3 to give sodium sulphate (C) and CO2.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II imh-66
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-67

Question 5.
How does Sulphuric acid react with the following:
(a) Al
(b) KNO3
(c) NaBr
(d) C6H6
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II imh-68

Question 6.

  1. Explain the test for sulphate (or) sulphuric acid.
  2. What happens when sulphuric acid reacts with oxalic acid?

Answer:
1. Dilute solution of sulphuric acid or aqueous solution of sulphates gives white precipitate with barium chloride solution. It can also be detected using lead acetate solution. Here a white precipitate of lead sulphate is obtained.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-69

2. Sulphuric acid reacts with oxalic acid to give CO and CO2
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-69

Question 7.
Discuss the manufacture of chlorine.
Answer:
Electrolytic process:
When a solution of brine (NaCl) is electrolysed, Na+ and CP ions are formed. Na+ ion reacts with OH ions of water and forms sodium hydroxide. Hydrogen and chlorine are liberated as gases.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-70

Deacons process:
In this process a mixture of air and hydrochloric acid is passed up a chamber containing a number of shelves, pumice stones soaked in cuprous chloride are placed. Hot gases at about 723 K are passed through a jacket that surrounds the chamber.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II imh-71

The chlorine obtained by this method is dilute and is employed for the manufacture of bleaching powder. The catalysed reaction is given below,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-72

Question 8.

  1. How is bleaching powder prepared?
  2. What happens when benzene reacts with chlorine?

Answer:
1. Bleaching powder is prepared by passing chlorine gas through dry slaked lime (Calcium hydroxide).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-73

2. Benzene reacts with chlorine in the presence of ferric chloride to give chlorobenzene.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-74

Question 9.
Cone. H2SO4 is added followed by heating to each of the following test tubes labelled (I) to (IV). Identify in which of the above test tube the following change will be observed. Support your answer with the help of chemical equation:
(a) formation of black substance
(b) evolution of brown gas
(c) evolution of colourless gas
(d) formation of a brown substance which on dilution becomes blue.
(e) disappearance of yellow powder along with evolution of colourless gas.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-75
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-76

Question 10.
Give reasons for each of the following:

  1. Bleaching of flowers by Cl2 is permanent while by SO2 is temporary.
  2. Molten aluminium bromide is a poor conductor of electricity.
  3. Nitric oxide becomes brown when released in air.
  4. PCl5 is ionic in nature in the solid state.
  5. Ammonia is a good complexing agent.

Answer:
1. Cl2 bleaches by oxidation, while SO2 does it by reduction. The reduced product gets oxidise again and the colour is regained back.

2. Aluminium bromide exists as a dimer, Al2Br6. In this structure, each aluminium atom forms one coordinate bond by accepting a lone pair of electrons from the bromine atom of another aluminium bromide molecule and thus complete the octet of electrons. Due to lack of free electrons, molten aluminium bromide is a poor conductor of electricity.

3. Nitric oxide reacts with air and oxidised into NO2 which is brown in colour.
2NO + O2 → 2NO2

4. In solid state PCl5 exists as [PCl4]+ [PCl6] and hence it is ionic in nature. Due to its ionic nature, it conducts current on fusion.

5. N atom in ammonia has lone pair of electrons which can coordinate with other atoms or cations required for the stability of electron pair.

Question 11.
How will you prepare the following compounds.
(a) Hyponitrous acid
(b) Nitrous acid
(c) Pernitrous acid
(d) Pernitric acid
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 3 p-Block Elements - II img-77

Common Errors And Its Rectificaations:

Common Errors:

  1. Oxidation number rules may be confused.
  2. Oxidation number of oxygen may get confused.
  3. Molecular formula and compound name may get confused.

Rectifications:

  1. Oxidation number of fluorine is always -1.
  2. Always oxygen is -2 but in peroxide it is -1. When it comes as a first element its oxidation number is positive..
  3. Student should memorise the formula using short cut method, e.g. Phosphorous acid – H3PO3 Phosphoric acid – H3PO4 e.g. Phosphorous acid – H3PO3 By pronunciation, ‘O’ indicates oxygen is more.

Hope you love the Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chapter Wise Material. Clearly understand the deep concept of Chemistry learning with the help of Tamilnadu State Board 12th Chemistry Chapter 3 p-Block Elements – II Questions and AnswersPDF. Refer your friends to and bookmark our website for instant updates. Also, keep in touch with us using the comment section.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current

Students those who are preparing for the 12th Physics exam can download this Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Book Solutions Questions and Answers for Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current from here free of cost. These Tamilnadu State Board Solutions for Class 12th Physics PDF cover all Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current Questions and Answers. All these concepts of Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Book Solutions Questions and Answers are explained very conceptually as per the board prescribed Syllabus & guidelines.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current

Kickstart your preparation by using this Tamilnadu State Board Solutions for 12th Physics Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current Questions and Answers and get the max score in the exams. You can cover all the topics of Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current Questions and Answers pdf. Download the Tamilnadu State Board Solutions by accessing the links provided here and ace up your preparation.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current Textual Evaluation Solved

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current Multiple Choice Questions

12th Physics Chapter 4 Book Back Answers Question 1.
An electron moves on a straight, line path XY as shown in the figure. The coil abed is adjacent to the path of the electron. What will be the direction of current, if any, induced in the coil? (NEET – 2015)
12th Physics Chapter 4 Book Back Answers Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current Samacheer Kalvi
(а) The current will reverse its direction as the electron goes past the coil
(b) No current will be induced Electron
(c) abcd
(d) adcb
Answer:
(a) The current will reverse its direction as the electron goes past the coil

12th Physics Lesson 4 Book Back Answers Question 2.
A thin semi-circular conducting ring (PQR) of radius r is falling with its plane vertical in a horizontal magnetic field B, as shown in the figure. The potential difference developed across the ring when its speed v, is- (NEET 2014)
12th Physics Lesson 4 Book Back Answers Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current Samacheer Kalvi
(a) Zero
(b) \(\frac {{ Bvπr }^{2}}{ 2 }\)
(c) πrBv and R is at higher potential
(d) 2rBv and R is at higher potential
Answer:
(d) 2rBv and R is at higher potential

Samacheerkalvi.Guru 12th Physics Question 3.
The flux linked with a coil at any instant t is given by ΦB = 10t2 – 50t + 250. The induced emf at t = 3s is-
(a) -190 V
(b) -10 V
(c) 10 V
(d) 190 V
Answer:
(b) -10 V

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Question 4.
When the current changes from +2A to -2A in 0.05 s, an emf of 8 V is induced in a coil. The co-efficient of self-induction of the coil is-
(a) 0.2 H
(b) 0.4 H
(c) 0.8 H
(d) 0.1 H
Answer:
(d) 0.1 H

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solution Book Question 5.
The current i flowing in a coil varies with time as shown in the figure. The variation of induced emf with time would be- (NEET-2011)
Samacheerkalvi.Guru 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solution Book Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current

Tn 12th Physics Solution Question 6.
A circular coil with a cross-sectional area of 4 cm2 has 10 turns. It is placed at the centre of a long solenoid that has 15 turns/cm and a cross-sectional area of 10 cm2. The axis of the coil coincides with the axis of the solenoid. What is their mutual inductance?
(a) 7.54 μH
(b) 8.54 μH
(c) 9.54 μH
(d) 10.54 μH
Answer:
(a) 7.54 μH

Samacheer Kalvi Guru 12th Physics Question 7.
In a transformer, the number of turns in the primary and the secondary are 410 and 1230, respectively. If the current in primary is 6A, then that in the secondary coil is-
(a) 2 A
(b) 18 A
(c) 12 A
(d) 1 A
Answer:
(a) 2 A

Physics Class 12 Chapter 4 Notes Question 8.
A step-down transformer reduces the supply voltage from 220 V to 11 V and increase the current from 6 A to 100 A. Then its efficiency is-
(a) 1.2
(b) 0.83
(c) 0.12
(d) 0.9
Answer:
(b) 0.83

Alternating Current Class 12 Notes Pdf Download Question 9.
In an electrical circuit, R, L, C and AC voltage source are all connected in series. When L is removed from the circuit, the phase difference between the voltage and current in the circuit is \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\). Instead, if C is removed from the circuit, the phase difference is again \(\frac { π }{ 3 }\). The power factor of the circuit is- (NEET 2012)
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)
(b) \(\frac { 1 }{ √ 2 }\)
(c) 1
(d) \(\frac { √ 3 }{ 2 }\)
Answer:
(c) 1

Physics Solution Class 12 Samacheer Kalvi Question 10.
In a series RL circuit, the resistance and inductive reactance are the same. Then the phase difference between the voltage and current in the circuit is-
(a) \(\frac { π }{ 4 }\)
(b) \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\)
(c) \(\frac { π }{ 6 }\)
(d) zero
Answer:
(a) \(\frac { π }{ 4 }\)

Samacheer 12th Physics Solutions Question 11.
In a series resonant RLC circuit, the voltage across 100 Ω resistor is 40 V. The resonant frequency co is 250 rad/s. If the value of C is 4 μF, then the voltage across L is-
(a) 600 V
(b) 4000 V
(c) 400 V
(d) 1 V
Answer:
(c) 400 V

Question 12.
An inductor 20 mH, a capacitor 50 μF and a resistor 40 Ω are connected in series across a source of emf v = 10 sin 340 t. The power loss in AC circuit is-
(a) 0.76 W
(b) 0.89 W
(c) 0.46 W
(d) 0.67 W
Answer:
(c) 0.46 W

Questions 13.
The instantaneous values of alternating current and voltage in a circuit are i = \(\frac { 1 }{ √ 2 }\) = sin(100πt) A and v = \(\frac { 1 }{ √ 2 }\) sin \(\left(100 \pi t+\frac{\pi}{3}\right)\) V. The average power in watts consumed in the circuit is-
(IIT Main 2012)
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 }\)
(b) \(\frac { √3 }{ 4 }\)
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)
(d) \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 }\)
Answer:
(d) \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 }\)

Question 14.
In an oscillating LC circuit, the maximum charge on the capacitor is Q. The charge on the capacitor when the energy is stored equally between the electric and magnetic fields is-
(a) \(\frac { Q }{ 2 }\)
(b) \(\frac { Q }{ √3 }\)
(c) \(\frac { Q }{ √2 }\)
(d) \(\frac { Q }{ 2 }\)
Answer:
(c) \(\frac { Q }{ √2 }\)

Question 15.
\(\frac { 20 }{{ π }^{2}}\) H inductor is connected to a capacitor of capacitance C. The value of C in order to impart maximum power at 50 Hz is-
(a) 50 μF
(b) 0.5 μF
(c) 500 μF
(d) 5 μF
Answer:
(d) 5 μF

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is meant by electromagnetic induction?
Answer:
Whenever the magnetic flux linked with a closed coil changes, an emf (electromotive force) is induced and hence an electric current flows in the circuit.

Question 2.
State Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction.
Answer:
First law:
Whenever magnetic flux linked with a closed circuit changes, an emf is induced in the circuit.

Second law:
The magnitude of induced emf in a closed circuit is equal to the time rate of change of magnetic flux linked with the circuit.

Question 3.
State Lenz’s law.
Answer:
State Lenz’s law:
Lenz’s law states that the direction of the induced current is such that it always opposes the cause responsible for its production.

Question 4.
State Fleming’s right hand rule.
Answer:
The thumb, index finger and middle finger of right hand are stretched out in mutually perpendicular directions. If the index finger points the direction of the magnetic field and the Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current thumb indicates the direction of motion of the conductor, then the middle finger will indicate the direction of the induced current.

Question 5.
How is Eddy current produced? How do they flow in a conductor?
Answer:
Even for a conductor in the form of a sheet or plate, an emf is induced when magnetic flux linked with it changes. But the difference is that there is no definite loop or path for induced current to flow away. As a result, the induced currents flow in concentric circular paths. As these electric currents resemble eddies of water, these are known as Eddy currents. They are also called Foucault currents.

Question 6.
Mention the ways of producing induced emf.
Answer:
Induced emf can be produced by changing magnetic flux in any of the following ways:

  1. By changing the magnetic field B
  2. By changing the area A of the coil and
  3. By changing the relative orientation 0 of the coil with magnetic field

Question 7.
What for an inductor is used? Give some examples.
Answer:
Inductor is a device used to store energy in a magnetic field when an electric current flows through it. The typical examples are coils, solenoids and toroids.

Question 8.
What do you mean by self-induction?
Answer:
If the magnetic flux is changed by changing the current, an emf is induced in that same coil. This phenomenon is known as self-induction.

Question 9.
What is meant by mutual induction?
Answer:
When an electric current passing through a coil changes with time, an emf is induced in the neighbouring coil. This phenomenon is known as mutual induction.

Question 10.
Give the principle of AC generator.
Answer:
Alternators work on the principle of electromagnetic induction. The relative motion between a conductor and a magnetic field changes the magnetic flux linked with the conductor which in turn, induces an emf. The magnitude of the induced emf is given by Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction and its direction by Fleming’s right hand rule.

Question 11.
List out the advantages of stationary armature-rotating field system of AC generator.
Answer:

  1. The current is drawn directly from fixed terminals on the stator without the use of brush contacts.
  2. The insulation of stationary armature winding is easier.
  3. The number of sliding contacts (slip rings) is reduced. Moreover, the sliding contacts are used for low-voltage DC Source.
  4. Armature windings can be constructed more rigidly to prevent deformation due to any mechanical stress.

Question 12.
What are step-up and step-down transformers?
Answer:
If the transformer converts an alternating current with low voltage into an alternating current with high voltage, it is called step-up transformer. On the contrary, if the transformer converts alternating current with high voltage into an alternating current with low voltage, then it is called step-down transformer.

Question 13.
Define average value of an alternating current.
Answer:
The average value of alternating current is defined as the average of all values of current over a positive half-cycle or negative half-cycle.

Question 14.
How will you define RMS value of an alternating current?
Answer:
RMS value of alternating current is defined as that value of the steady current which when flowing through a given circuit for a given time produces the same amount of heat as produced by the alternating current when flowing through the same circuit for the same time.

Question 15.
What are phasors?
Answer:
A sinusoidal alternating voltage (or current) can be represented by a vector which rotates about the origin in anti-clockwise direction at a constant angular velocity ω. Such a rotating vector is called a phasor.

Question 16.
Define electric resonance.
Answer:
When the frequency of the applied alternating source is equal to the natural frequency of the RLC circuit, the current in the circuit reaches its maximum value. Then the circuit is said to be in electrical resonance.

Question 17.
What do you mean by resonant frequency?
Answer:
When the frequency of the applied alternating source (ωr) is equal to the natural frequency \(\left[\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\right]\) of the RLC circuit, the current in the circuit reaches its maximum value. Then the circuit is said to be in electrical resonance. The frequency at which resonance takes place is called resonant frequency. Resonant angular frequency, ωr = \(\frac { 1 }{ \sqrt { LC } } \)

Question 18.
How will you define Q-factor?
Answer:
It is defined as the ratio of voltage across L or C to the applied voltage.
Tn 12th Physics Solution Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current Samacheer Kalvi

Question 19.
What is meant by wattles current?
Answer:
The component of current (IRMS sin φ), which has a phase angle of \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\) with the voltage is called reactive component. The power consumed is zero. So that it is also known as ‘Wattless’ current.

Question 20.
Give any one definition of power factor.
Answer:
The power factor is defined as the ratio of true power to the apparent power of an a.c. circuit. It is equal to the cosine of the phase angle between current and voltage in the a.c. circuit.
Samacheer Kalvi Guru 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current

Question 21.
What are LC oscillations?
Answer:
Whenever energy is given to a LC circuit, the electrical oscillations of definite frequency are generated. These oscillations are called LC oscillations. During LC oscillations, the total energy remains constant. It means that LC oscillations take place in accordance with the law of conservation of energy.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Establish the fact that the relative motion between the coil and the magnet induces an emf in the coil of a closed circuit.
Answer:
Whenever the magnetic flux linked with a closed coil changes, an emf (electromotive force) is induced and hence an electric current flows in the circuit.
The relative motion between the coil and the magnet induces:
In the first experiment, when a bar magnet is placed close to a coil, some of the magnetic field lines of the bar magnet pass through the coil i.e., the magnetic flux is linked with the coil. When the bar magnet and the coil approach each other, the magnetic flux linked with the coil increases. So this increase in magnetic flux induces an emf and hence a transient electric current flows in the circuit in one direction (Figure(a)).
Physics Class 12 Chapter 4 Notes Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current Samacheer Kalvi
At the same time, when they recede away from one another, the magnetic flux linked with the coil decreases. The decrease in magnetic flux again induces an emf in opposite direction and hence an electric current flows in opposite direction (Figure (b)). So there is deflection in the galvanometer when there is a relative motion between the coil and the magnet.
Alternating Current Class 12 Notes Pdf Download Chapter 4 Samacheer Kalvi
In the second experiment, when the primary coil P carries an electric current, a magnetic field is established around it. The magnetic lines of this field pass through itself and the neighbouring secondary coil S.
Physics Solution Class 12 Samacheer Kalvi Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current
When the primary circuit is open, no electric current flows in it and hence the magnetic flux linked with the secondary coil is zero (Figure(a)).
However, when the primary circuit is closed, the increasing current builds up a magnetic field around the primary coil. Therefore, the magnetic flux linked with the secondary coil increases. This increasing flux linked induces a transient electric current in the secondary coil (Figure(b)).

When the electric current in the primary coil reaches a steady value, the magnetic flux linked with the secondary coil does not change and the electric current in the secondary coil will disappear. Similarly, when the primary circuit is broken, the decreasing primary current induces an electric current in the secondary coil, but in the opposite direction (Figure (c)). So there is deflection in the galvanometer whenever there is a change in the primary current

Question 2.
Give an illustration of determining direction of induced current by using Lenz’s law.
Answer:
Illustration 1:
Consider a uniform magnetic field, with its field lines perpendicular to the plane of the paper and pointing inwards. These field lines are represented by crosses (x) as shown in figure (a). A rectangular metallic frame ABCD is placed in this magnetic field, with its plane perpendicular to the field. The arm AB is movable so that it can slide towards right or left.
Samacheer 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current
If the arm AB slides to our right side, the number of field lines (magnetic flux) passing through the frame ABCD increases and a current is induced. As suggested by Lenz’s law, the induced current opposes this flux increase and it tries to reduce it by producing another magnetic field pointing outwards i.e., opposite to the existing magnetic field.

The magnetic lines of this induced field are represented by circles in the figure (b). From the direction of the magnetic field thus produced, the direction of the induced current is found to be anti-clockwise by using right-hand thumb rule.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-12
The leftward motion of arm AB decreases magnetic flux. The induced current, this time, produces a magnetic field in the inward direction i.e., in the direction of the existing magnetic field (figure (c)). Therefore, the flux decrease is opposed by the flow of induced current. From this, it is found that induced current flows in clockwise direction.

Illustration 2:
Let us move a bar magnet towards the solenoid, with its north pole pointing the solenoid as shown in figure (b). This motion increases the magnetic flux of the coil which in turn, induces an electric current. Due to the flow of induced current, the coil becomes a magnetic dipole whose two magnetic poles are on either end of the coil.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-13
In this case, the cause producing the induced current is the movement of the magnet. According to Lenz’s law, the induced current should flow in such a way that it opposes the movement of the north pole towards coil. It is possible if the end nearer to the magnet becomes north pole (figure (b)).

Then it repels the north pole of the bar magnet and opposes the movement of the magnet. Once pole ends are known, the direction of the induced current could be found by using right hand thumb rule. When the bar magnet is withdrawn, the nearer end becomes south pole which attracts north pole of the bar magnet, opposing the receding motion of the magnet (figure (c)). Thus the direction of the induced current can be found from Lenz’s law.

Question 3.
Show that Lenz’s law is in accordance with the law of conservation of energy.
Answer:
Conservation of energy:
The truth of Lenz’s law can be established on the basis of the law of conservation of energy. According to Lenz’s law, when a magnet is moved either towards or away from a coil, the induced current produced opposes its motion. As a result, there will always be a resisting force on the moving magnet.

Work has to be done by some external agency to move the magnet against this resisting force. Here the mechanical energy of the moving magnet is converted into the electrical energy which in turn, gets converted into Joule heat in the coil i.e., energy is converted from one form to another.

Question 4.
Obtain an expression for motional emf from Lorentz force.
Answer:
Motional emf from Lorentz force:
Consider a straight conducting rod AB of length l in a uniform magnetic field \(\vec { B } \) which is directed perpendicularly into the plane of the paper. The length of the rod is normal to the magnetic field. Let the rod move with a constant velocity \(\vec { v } \) towards right side.
When the rod moves, the free electrons present in it also move with same velocity \(\vec { v } \) in \(\vec { B } \). As a result, the Lorentz force acts on free electrons in the direction from B to A and is given by the relation
\(\vec { F } \)B = -e(\(\vec { v } \) x \(\vec { B } \) ) ……. (1)
The action of this Lorentz force is to accumulate the free electrons at the end A. This accumulation of free electrons produces a potential difference across the rod which in turn establishes an electric field E directed along BA. Due to the electric field E, the coulomb force starts acting on the free electrons along AB and is given by
\(\vec { F } \)E = -e\(\vec { E } \) ……. (2)
The magnitude of the electric field \(\vec { E } \) keeps on increasing as long as accumulation of electrons at the end A continues. The force \(\vec { F } \)E also increases until equilibrium is reached. At equilibrium, the magnetic Lorentz force \(\vec { F } \)B and the coulomb force \(\vec { F } \)E balance each other and no further accumulation of free electrons at the end A takes place, i.e.,
\(\left| \vec { { F }_{ B } } \right| \) = \(\left| \vec { { F }_{ E } } \right| \)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-14
vB sin 90° = E
vB = E ……. (3)
The potential difference between two ends of the rod is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-15
Figure: Motional emf from Lorentz force
V = El
V = vBl
Thus the Lorentz force on the free electrons is responsible to maintain this . potential difference and hence produces an emf
ε = Blv ….. (4)
As this emf is produced due to the movement of the rod, it is often called as motional emf.

Question 5.
Using Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction, derive an equation for motional emf.
Answer:
Motional emf from Faraday’s law:
Let us consider a rectangular conducting loop of width l in a uniform magnetic field \(\vec { B } \) which is perpendicular to the plane of the loop and is directed inwards. A part of the loop is in the magnetic field while the remaining part is outside the field.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-16
Figure: Motional emf from Faraday’s law

When the loop is pulled with a constant velocity \(\vec { v } \) to the right, the area of the portion of the loop within the magnetic field will decrease. Thus, the flux linked with the loop will also decrease. According to Faraday’s law, an electric current is induced in the loop which flow’s in a direction so as to oppose the pull of the loop.
Let x be the length of the loop which is still within the magnetic field, then its area is lx. The magnetic flux linked with the loop is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-17
As this magnetic flux decreases due to the movement of the loop, the magnitude of the induced emf is given by
ε = \(\frac {{ dΦ }_{B}}{ dt }\) = \(\frac { d }{ dt }\) (Blx)
Here, both B and l are constants. Therefore,
ε = Bl \(\frac { dx}{ dl }\) = Blv …… (2)
where v = \(\frac { dx}{ dt }\) is the velocity of the loop. This emf is known as motional emf since it is produced due to the movement of the loop in the magnetic field.

Question 6.
Give the uses of Foucault current.
Answer:
Though the production of eddy current is undesirable in some cases, it is useful in some other cases. A few of them are

  1. Induction stove
  2. Eddy current brake
  3. Eddy current testing
  4. Electromagnetic damping

1. Induction stove:
Induction stove is used to cook the food quickly and safely with less energy consumption. Below the cooking zone, there is a tightly wound coil of insulated wire. The cooking pan made of suitable material, is placed over the cooking zone.

When the stove is switched on, an alternating current flowing in the coil produces high frequency alternating magnetic field which induces very strong eddy currents in the cooking pan. The eddy currents in the pan produce so much of heat due to Joule heating which is used to cook the food.

2. Eddy current brake:
This eddy current braking system is generally used in high speed trains and roller coasters. Strong electromagnets are fixed just above the rails. To stop the train, electromagnets are switched on. The magnetic field of these magnets induces eddy currents in the rails which oppose or resist the movement of the train. This is Eddy current linear brake.

In some cases, the circular disc, connected to the wheel of the train through a common shaft, is made to rotate in between the poles of an electromagnet. When there is a relative motion between the disc and the magnet, eddy currents are induced in the disc which stop the train. This is Eddy current circular brake.

3. Eddy current testing:
It is one of the simple non-destructive testing methods to find defects like surface cracks and air bubbles present in a specimen. A coil of insulated wire is given an alternating electric current so that it produces an alternating magnetic field.

When this coil is brought near the test surface, eddy current is induced in the test surface. The presence of defects causes the change in phase and amplitude of the eddy current that can be detected by some other means. In this way, the defects present in the specimen are identified.

4. Electro magnetic damping:
The armature of the galvanometer coil is wound on a soft iron cylinder. Once the armature is deflected, the relative motion between the soft iron cylinder and the radial magnetic field induces eddy current in the cylinder. The damping force due to the flow of eddy current brings the armature to rest immediately and then galvanometer shows a steady deflection. This is called electromagnetic damping.

Question 7.
Define self-inductance of a coil interns of (i) magnetic flux and (ii) induced emf.
Answer:
Self-inductance or simply inductance of a coil is defined as the flux linkage of the coil when 1A current flows through it.
When the current i changes with time, an emf is induced in it. From Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction, this self-induced emf is given by
ε = –\(\frac{d\left(\mathrm{N} \Phi_{\mathrm{B}}\right)}{d t}\) = –\(\frac { d(Li)}{ dt }\)
∴ ε = -L\(\frac { di}{ dt }\) or L = \(\frac { -ε}{ di/dt }\)
The negative sign in the above equation means that the self-induced emf always opposes the change in current with respect to time. If \(\frac { di}{ dt }\) = 1 As-1, then L= -ε. Inductance of a coil is also defined as the opposing emf induced in the coil when the rate of change of current through the coil is 1 A s-1.

Question 8.
How will you define the unit of inductance?
Answer:
Unit of inductance: Inductance is a scalar and its unit is Wb A-1 or V s A-1. It is also measured in henry (H).
1 H = 1 Wb A-1 = 1 V s A-1
The dimensional formula of inductance is M L2 T-2A-2.
If i = 1 A and NΦB = 1 Wb turns, then L = 1 H.
Therefore, the inductance of the coil is said to be one henry if a current of 1 A produces unit flux linkage in the coil.
If \(\frac { di}{ dt }\) = 1 As-1 and ε = -1 V, then L = 1 H.
Therefore, the inductance of the coil is one henry if a current changing at the rate of 1 A s-1 induces an opposing emf of 1 V in it.

Question 9.
What do you understand by self-inductance of a coil? Give its physical significance.
Answer:
Self-inductance or simply inductance of a coil is defined as the flux linkage of the coil when 1A current flows through it.
When the current i changes with time, an emf is induced in it. From Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction, this self-induced emf is given by
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-18
Physical significance of inductance:
When a circuit is switched on, the increasing current induces an emf which opposes the growth of current in a circuit. Likewise, when circuit is broken, the decreasing current induces an emf in the reverse direction. This emf now opposes the decay of current.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-19
Figure: Induced emf ε opposes the changing current i

Thus, inductance of the coil opposes any change in current and tries to maintain the original state.

Question 10.
Assuming that the length of the solenoid is large when compared to its diameter, find the equation for its inductance.
Answer:
Self-inductance of a long solenoid:
Consider a long solenoid of length l and cross-sectional area A. Let n be the number of turns per unit length (or turn density) of the solenoid. When an electric current i is passed through the solenoid, a magnetic field is produced by it which is almost uniform and is directed along the axis of the solenoid. The magnetic field at any point inside the solenoid is given by
B = μ0ni
As this magnetic field passes through the solenoid, the windings of the solenoid are linked by the field lines. The magnetic flux passing through each turn is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-20
The total magnetic flux linked or flux linkage of the solenoid with N turns (the total number of turns N is given by N = nl) is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-21
B = n (nl) (μ0ni)A
B = (μ0n2Al)i ….. (1)
From the self induction
B = LI ….. (2)
Comparing equations (1) and (2), we have L = μ0n2Al
From the above equation, it is clear that inductance depends on the geometry of the solenoid (turn density n, cross-sectional area A, length l) and the medium present inside the solenoid. If the solenoid is filled with a dielectric medium of relative permeability μr, then
L = μ0
L = μn0μrn2Al

Question 11.
An inductor of inductance L carries an electric current i. How much energy is stored while establishing the current in it?
Answer:
Energy stored in an inductor:
Whenever a current is established in the circuit, the inductance opposes the growth of the current. In order to establish a current in the circuit, work is done against this opposition by some external agency. This work done is stored as magnetic potential energy.

Let us assume that electrical resistance of the inductor is negligible and inductor effect alone is considered. The induced emf e at any instant t is
ε = -L\(\frac { di}{ dt }\) …… (1)
Let dW be work done in moving a charge dq in a time dt against the opposition, then
dW = -εdq = -εidi = εidi           [∵dq = idt]
Substituting for s value from equation (1)
= – \(\left(-\mathrm{L} \frac{d i}{d t}\right)\) idt
dW = Lid …… (2)
Total work done in establishing the current i is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-22
This work done is stored as magnetic potential energy.
UB = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) Li2 …….. (4)

Question 12.
Show that the mutual inductance between a pair of coils is same (M12 = M21).
Answer:
Mutual induction:
When an electric current passing through a coil changes with time, an emf is induced in the neighbouring coil. This phenomenon is known as mutual induction and the emf is called mutually induced emf.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-23
Consider two coils which are placed close to each other. If an electric current i1 is sent through coil 1, the magnetic field produced by it is also linked with coil 2. Let Φ21 be the magnetic flux linked with each turn of the coil 2 of N2 turns due to coil 1, then the total flux linked with coil 2 (N2Φ21) is proportional to the current i1 in the coil 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-24
The constant of proportionality M21 is the mutual inductance of the coil 2 with respect to coil 1. It is also called as coefficient of mutual induction. If i1 = 1A, then M21 = N2Φ21.
Therefore, the mutual inductance M21 is defined as the flux linkage of the coil 2 when 1A current flows through coil 1. When the current changes with time, an emf ε2 is induced in coil 2. From Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction, this mutually induced emf ε2 is given by
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-25
The negative sign in the above equation shows that the mutually induced emf always opposes the change in current i, with respect to time. If \(\frac { di }{ dt }\) = 1 As-1, then M21 = -ε2. Mutual inductance M21, is also defined as the opposing emf induced in the coil 2 when the rate of change of current through the coil 1 is 1 As-1. Similarly, if an electric current i2 through coil 2 changes with time, then emf ε1 is induced in coil 1. Therefore,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-26
where M12 is the mutual inductance of the coil 1 with respect to coil 2. It can be shown that for a given pair of coils, the mutual inductance is same, i.e., M21 = M12 = M.
In general, the mutual induction between two coils depends on size, shape, the number of turns of the coils, their relative orientation and permeability of the medium.

Question 13.
How will you induce an emf by changing the area enclosed by the coil?
Answer:
Induction of emf by changing the area of the coil:
Consider a conducting rod of length 1 moving with a velocity v towards left on a rectangular metallic framework. The whole arrangement is placed in a uniform magnetic field \(\vec { B } \) whose magnetic lines are perpendicularly directed into the plane of the paper. As the rod moves from AB to DC in a time dt, the area enclosed by the loop and hence the magnetic flux through the loop decreases.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-27
The change in magnetic flux in time dt is
B = B x change in area
B x Area ABCD
= Blvdt since Area ABCD = l(vdt)
or \(\frac {{ dΦ }_{B}}{ dt }\) = Blv
As a result of change in flux, an emf is generated in the loop. The magnitude of the induced emf is
ε = \(\frac {{ dΦ }_{B}}{ dt }\) = Blv
This emf is called motional emf. The direction of induced current is found to be clockwise from Fleming’s right hand rule.

Question 14.
Show mathematically that the rotation of a coil in a magnetic field over one rotation induces an alternating emf of one cycle.
Answer:
Induction of emf by changing relative orientation of the coil with the magnetic field:
Consider a rectangular coil of N turns kept in a uniform magnetic field \(\vec { B } \) figure (a). The coil rotates in anti-clockwise direction with an angular velocity ω about an axis, perpendicular to the field. At time = 0, the plane of the coil is perpendicular to the field and the flux linked with the coil has its maximum value Φm = BA (where A is the area of the coil).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-28
In a time t seconds, the coil is rotated through an angle θ (= ωt) in anti-clockwise direction. In this position, the flux linked is Φm cos ωt, a component of Φm normal to the plane of the coil (figure (b)). The component parallel to the plane (Φm sin ωt) has no role in electromagnetic induction. Therefore, the flux linkage at this deflected position is NΦB = NΦm cos ωt. According to Faraday’s law, the emf induced at that instant is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-29
ε= \(\frac { d }{ dt }\) (NΦB ) = \(\frac { d }{ dt }\) (NΦm cos ωt)
= -NΦm (-sin ωt)ω = NΦm ω sin ωt
When the coil is rotated through 90° from initial position, sin ωt = 1, Then the maximum value of induced emf is
εm = NΦmω = NBAω since Φm = BA
Therefore, the value of induced emf at that instant is then given by
ε = εm sin ωt
It is seen that the induced emf varies as sine function of the time angle ωt. The graph between – induced emf and time angle for one rotation of coil will be a sine curve and the emf varying in this manner is called sinusoidal emf or alternating emf.

Question 15.
Elaborate the standard construction details of AC generator.
Answer:
Construction:
lternator consists of two major parts, namely stator and rotor. As their names suggest, stator is stationary while rotor rotates inside the stator. In any standard construction of commercial alternators, the armature winding is mounted on stator and the field magnet on rotor. The construction details of stator, rotor and various other components involved in them are given below.

(i) Stator:
The stationary part which has armature windings mounted in it is called stator. It has three components, namely stator frame, stator core and armature winding.

Stator frame:
This is the outer frame used for holding stator core and armature windings in proper position. Stator frame provides best ventilation with the help of holes provided in the frame itself.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-30

Stator core:
Stator core or armature core is made up of iron or steel alloy. It is a hollow cylinder and is laminated to minimize eddy current loss. The slots are cut on inner surface of the core to accommodate armature windings.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-31

Armature winding:
Armature winding is the coil, wound on slots provided in the armature core. One or more than one coil may be employed, depending on the type of alternator. Two types of windings are commonly used. They are (i) single-layer winding and (ii) double-layer winding. In single-layer winding, a slot is occupied by a coil as a single layer. But in double-layer winding, the coils are split into two layers such as top and bottom layers.

(ii) Rotor:
Rotor contains magnetic field windings. The magnetic poles are magnetized by DC source. The ends of field windings are connected to a pair of slip rings, attached to a common shaft about which rotor rotates. Slip rings rotate along with rotor. To maintain connection between the DC source and field windings, two brushes are used which . continuously slide over the slip rings.

There are 2 types of rotors used in alternators:

  1. salient pole rotor
  2. cylindrical pole rotor.

1. Salient pole rotor:
The word salient means projecting. This rotor has a number of projecting poles having their bases riveted to the rotor. It is mainly used in low-speed alternators.

2. Cylindrical pole rotor:
This rotor consists of a smooth solid cylinder. The slots are cut on the outer surface of the cylinder along its length. It is suitable for very high speed alternators.

The frequency of alternating emf induced is directly proportional to the rotor speed. In order to maintain the frequency constant, the rotor must run at a constant speed. These are standard construction details of alternators.

Question 16.
Explain the working of a single-phase AC generator with necessary diagram.
Answer:
Single phase AC generator: In a single phase AC generator, the armature conductors are connected in series so as to form a single circuit which generates a single-phase alternating emf and hence it is called single-phase alternator.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-32
The simplified version of a AC generator is discussed here. Consider a stator core consisting of 2 slots in which 2 armature conductors PQ and RS are mounted to form single-turn rectangular loop PQRS. Rotor has 2 salient poles with field windings which can be magnetized by means of DC source.

Working:
The loop PQRS is stationary and is perpendicular to the plane of the paper. When field windings are excited, magnetic field is produced around it. The direction of magnetic field passing through the armature core. Let the field magnet be rotated in clockwise direction by the prime mover. The axis of rotation is perpendicular to the plane of the paper.

Assume that initial position of the field magnet is horizontal. At that instant, the direction of magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane of the loop PQRS. The induced emf is zero. This is represented by origin O in the graph between induced emf and time angle.

When field magnet rotates through 90°, magnetic field becomes parallel to PQRS. The induced cmfs across PQ and RS would become maximum. Since they are connected in series, emfs are added up and the direction of total induced emf is given by Fleming’s right hand rule. Care has to be taken while applying this rule; the thumb indicates the direction of the motion of the conductor with respect to field.

For clockwise rotating poles, the conductor appears to be rotating anti-clockwise. Hence, thumb should point to the left. The direction of the induced emf is at right angles to the plane of the paper. For PQ, it is downwards B and for RS upwards. Therefore, the current flows along PQRS. The point A in the graph represents this maximum emf.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-33
For the rotation of 180° from the initial position, the field is again perpendicular to PQRS and the induced emf becomes zero. This is represented by point B. The field magnet becomes again parallel to PQRS for 270° rotation of field magnet. The induced emf is maximum but the direction is reversed. Thus the current flows along SRQP This is represented by point C.

On completion of 360°, the induced emf becomes zero and is represented by the point D. From the graph, it is clear that emf induced in PQRS is alternating in nature. Therefore, when field magnet completes one rotation, induced emf in PQRS finishes one cycle. For this construction, the frequency of the induced emf depends on the speed at which the field magnet rotates.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-34

Question 17.
How are the three different emfs generated in a three-phase AC generator? Show the graphical representation of these three emfs.
Answer:
Three-phase AC generator:
Some AC generators may have more than one coil in the armature core and each coil produces an alternating emf. In these generators, more than one emf is produced. Thus they are called poly-phase generators. If there are two alternating emfs produced in a generator, it is called two-phase generator. In some AC generators, there are three separate coils, which would give three separate emfs. Hence they are called three-phase AC generators.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-35
In the simplified construction of three-phase AC generator, the armature core has 6 slots, cut on its inner rim. Each slot is 60° away from one another. Six armature conductors are mounted in these slots. The conductors 1 and 4 are joined in series to form coil 1. The conductors 3 and 6 form coil 2 while the conductors 5 and 2 form coil 3. So, these coils are rectangular in shape and are 120° apart from one another.

The initial position of the field magnet is horizontal and field direction is perpendicular to the plane of the coil 1. As it is seen in single phase AC generator, when field magnet is rotated from that position in clockwise direction, alternating emf ε1 in coil 1 begins a cycle from origin O.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-36
The corresponding cycle for alternating emf ε2 in coil 2 starts at point A after field magnet has rotated through 120°. Therefore, the phase difference between ε1 and ε2 is 120°. Similarly, emf ε3 in coil 3 would begin its cycle at point B after 240° rotation of field magnet from initial position. Thus these emfs produced in the three phase AC generator have 120° phase difference between one another.

Question 18.
Explain the construction and working of transformer.
Answer:
Construction and working of transformer:
Principle:
The principle of transformer is the mutual induction between two coils. That is, when an electric current passing through a coil changes with time, an emf is induced in the neighbouring coil.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-37

Construction:
In the simple construction of transformers, there are two coils of high mutual inductance wound over the same transformer core. The core is generally laminated and is made up of a good magnetic material like silicon steel. Coils are electrically insulated but magnetically linked via transformer core.

The coil across which alternating voltage is applied is called primary coil P and the coil from which output power is drawn out is called secondary coil S. The assembled core and coils are kept in a container which is filled with suitable medium for better insulation and cooling purpose.

Working:
If the primary’ coil is connected to a source of alternating voltage, an alternating magnetic flux is set up in the laminated core. If there is no magnetic flux leakage, then whole of magnetic flux linked with primary coil is also linked with secondary coif This means that rate at which magnetic flux changes through each turn is same for both primary and secondary coils. As a result of flux change, emf is induced in both primary and secondary coils. The emf induced in the primary coil εp is almost equal and opposite to the applied voltage υp and is given by
υp = εp = -Np \(\frac {{ dΦ }_{B}}{ dt }\) …….. (1)
The frequency of alternating magnetic flux in the core is same as the frequency of the applied voltage. Therefore, induced emf in secondary will also have same frequency as that of applied voltage. The emf induced in the secondary coil eg is given by
εs = -Ns \(\frac {{ dΦ }_{B}}{ dt }\)
where Np and Ns are the number of turns in the primary and secondary coil, respectively. If the secondary circuit is open, then εs = υs where υs is the voltage across secondary coil.
υs εs = -Ns \(\frac {{ dΦ }_{B}}{ dt }\) ……… (2)
From equation (1) and (2),
\(\frac {{ υ }_{s}}{{ ε }{s}}\) = \(\frac {{ N }_{s}}{{ N }{p}}\) = K …….. (3)
This constant K is known as voltage transformation ratio. For an ideal transformer,
Input power υp ip = Output power υsis
where iυp and is are the currents in the primary and secondary coil respectively. Therefore,
\(\frac {{ υ }_{s}}{{ υ }{p}}\) = \(\frac {{ N }_{s}}{{ N }{p}}\) = \(\frac {{ i }_{p}}{{ i }{s}}\)
Equation (4) is written in terms of amplitude of corresponding quantities,
\(\frac {{ V }_{s}}{{ V }{p}}\) = \(\frac {{ N }_{s}}{{ N }{p}}\) = \(\frac {{ I }_{p}}{{ I }{s}}\) = K ……. (4)

(i) If Ns > Np ( or K > 1)
∴ Vs > Vp and Is < Ip.
This is sthe case of step-up transformer in which voltage is decreased and the corresponding current is decreased.

(ii) If Ns < Np (or K < 1)
∴ Vs < Vp and Is > Ip
This is step-down transformer where voltage is decreased and the current is increased.

Question 19.
Mention the various energy losses in a transformer.
Answer:
Energy losses in a transformer: Transformers do not have any moving parts so that its efficiency is much higher than that of rotating machines like generators and motors. But there are many factors which lead to energy loss in a transformer.

(i) Core loss or Iron loss:
This loss takes place in transformer core. Hysteresis loss and eddy current loss are known as core loss or Iron loss. When transformer core is magnetized and demagnetized repeatedly by the alternating voltage applied across primary coil, hysteresis takes place due to which some energy is lost in the form of heat.

Hysteresis loss is minimized by using steel of high silicon content in making transformer core. Alternating magnetic flux in the core induces eddy currents in it. Therefore there is energy loss due to the flow of eddy current, called eddy current loss which is minimized by using very thin laminations of transformer core.

(ii) Copper loss:
Transformer windings have electrical resistance. When an electric current flows through them, some amount of energy is dissipated due to Joule heating. This energy loss is called copper loss which is minimized by using wires of larger diameter.

(iii) Flux leakage:
Flux leakage happens when the magnetic lines of primary coil arc not completely linked with secondary coil. Energy loss due to this flux leakage is minimized by winding coils one over the other.

Question 20.
Give the advantage of AC in long distance power transmission with an example.
Answer:
Advantages of AC in long distance power transmission:
Electric power is produced in a t large scale at electric power stations with the help of AC generators. These power stations are classified based on the type of fuel used as thermal, hydro electric and nuclear power stations. Most of these stations are located at remote places.

Hence the electric power generated is transmitted over long distances through transmission lines to reach towns or cities where it is actually consumed. This process is called power transmission. But there is a difficulty during power transmission. A sizable fraction of electric power is lost due to Joule heating (i2R) in the transmission lines which are hundreds of kilometer long.

This power loss can be tackled either by reducing current i or by reducing resistance R of the transmission lines. The resistance R can be reduced with thick wires of copper or aluminium. But this increases the cost of production of transmission lines and other related expenses. So this way of reducing power loss is not economically viable.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-38
Since power produced is alternating in nature, there is a way out. The most important property of alternating voltage is that it can be stepped up and stepped down by using transformers could be exploited in reducing current and thereby reducing power losses to a greater extent.

At the transmitting point, the voltage is increased and the corresponding current is decreased by using step-up transformer. Then it is transmitted through transmission lines. This reduced current at high voltage reaches the destination without any appreciable loss.

At the receiving point, the voltage is decreased and the current is increased to appropriate values by using step-down transformer and then it is given to consumers. Thus power transmission is done efficiently and economically.

Illustration:
An electric power of 2 MW is transmitted to a place through transmission lines of total resistance, say R = 40 Ω, at two different voltages. One is lower voltage (10 kV) and the other is higher (100 kV). Let us now calculate and compare power losses in these two cases.

Case I:
P = 2 MW; R == 40 Ω; V = 10 kV Power,
Power, P = VI
∴ Current, I = \(\frac { P }{ V }\) = \(\frac {{ 2 × 10 }^{6}}{{ 10 × 10 }^{3}}\) 200 A
Power loss = Heat produced = I2R = (200)2 × 40 = 1.6 × 106 W
% of power loss =\(\frac {{ 1.6 × 10 }^{6}}{{ 2 × 10 }^{6}}\) × 100% = 0.8 × 100% = 80%

Case II:
P = 2 MW; R == 40 Ω; V = 100 kV
∴ Current, I = \(\frac { P }{ V }\) = \(\frac {{ 2 × 10 }^{6}}{{ 100 × 10 }^{3}}\) 20 A
Power loss = Heat produced = I2R = (20)2 × 40 = 0.016 × 106 W
% of power loss =\(\frac {{ 0.6 × 10 }^{6}}{{ 2 × 10 }^{6}}\) × 100% = 0.008 × 100% = 0.8%

Question 21.
Find out the phase relationship between voltage and current in a pure inductive circuit.
Answer:
AC circuit containing only an inductor:
Consider a circuit containing a pure inductor of inductance L connected across an alternating voltage source. The alternating voltage is given by the equation.
υ = Vm sin ωt …(1)
The alternating current flowing through the inductor induces a self-induced emf or back emf in the circuit. The back emf is given by
Back emf, ε -L\(\frac { di }{ dt }\)
By applying Kirchoff’s loop rule to the purely inductive circuit, we get
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-39
υ + ε = 0
Vm sin ωt = L\(\frac { di }{ dt }\)
di = L\(\frac {{ V }_{m}}{ L }\) sin ωt dt
i = \(\frac {{ V }_{m}}{ L }\) \(\int { sin } \) ωt dt = \(\frac{{ V }_{m}}{ Lω }\) (-cos ωt) + constant
The integration constant in the above equation is independent of time. Since the voltage in the circuit has only time dependent part, we can set the time independent part in the current (integration constant) into zero.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-40
where \(\frac{{ V }_{m}}{ Lω }\) = Im, the peak value of the alternating current in the circuit. From equation (1) and (2), it is evident that current lags behind the applied voltage by \(\frac{π}{ 2 }\) in an inductive circuit.
This fact is depicted in the phasor diagram. In the wave diagram also, it is seen that current lags the voltage by 90°.

Inductive reactance XL:
The peak value of current Im is given by Im = \(\frac{{ V }_{m}}{ Lω }\) . Let us compare this equation with Im = \(\frac{{ V }_{m}}{ R }\) from resistive circuit. The equantity ωL Plays the same role as the resistance in resistive circuit. This is the resistance offered by the inductor, called inductive reactance (XL). It is measured in ohm.
XL = ωL
The inductive reactance (XL) varies directly as the frequency.
XL = 2πfL …….. (3)
where ƒ is the frequency of the alternating current. For a steady current, ƒ= 0. Therefore, XL = 0. Thus an ideal inductor offers no resistance to steady DC current.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-41

Question 22.
Derive an expression for phase angle between the applied voltage and current in a series RLC circuit.
Answer:
AC circuit containing a resistor, an inductor and a capacitor in series – Series RLC
circuit:
Consider a circuit containing a resistor of resistance R, a inductor of inductance L and a capacitor of capacitance C connected across an alternating voltage source. The applied alternating voltage is given by the equation.
υ = Vm sin ωt …… (1)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-42
Let i be the resulting circuit current in the circuit at that instant. As a result, the voltage is developed across R, L and C.
We know that voltage across R (VR) is in phase with i, voltage across L (VL) leads i by π/2 and voltage across C (VC) lags i by π/2.
The phasor diagram is drawn with current as the reference phasor. The current is represented by the phasor
\(\vec { OI } \), VR by \(\vec { OA } \) ; VL by \(\vec { OB } \) and VC by \(\vec { OC } \).
The length of these phasors are
OI = Im, OA = ImR, OB = Im,XL; OC = ImXc
The circuit is cither effectively inductive or capacitive or resistive that depends on the value of V1 or Vc Let us assume that VL > VC. so that net voltage drop across L – C combination is VL < VC which is represented by a phasor \(\vec { AD } \).
By parallelogram law, the diagonal \(\vec { OE } \) gives the resultant voltage u of VR and (VL – VC ) and its length OE is equal to Vm. Therefore,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-43
Z is called impedance of the circuit which refers to the effective opposition to the circuit current by the series RLC circuit. The voltage triangle and impedance triangle are given in the graphical figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-44
From phasor diagram, the phase angle between n and i is found out from the following relation
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-45
Special cases Figure: Phasor diagram for a series
(i) If XL > XC, (XL – XC) is positive and phase angle φ
is also positive. It means that the applied voltage leads the current by φ (or current lags behind voltage by φ). The circuit is inductive.
∴ υ = Vm sin ωt; i = Im sin(ωt + φ)

(ii) If XL < XC, (XL – XC) is negative and φ is also negative. Therefore current leads voltage by φ and the circuit is capacitive.
∴ υ = Vm sin ωt; i = Im sin(ωt + φ)

(iii) If XL = XC, φ is zero. Therefore current and voltage are in the same phase and the circuit is resistive.
∴ υ = Vm sin ωt; i = Im sin ωt

Question 23.
Define inductive and capacitive reactance. Give their units.
Answer:
Inductive reactance XL:
The peak value of current Im is given by Im = \(\frac{{ V }_{m}}{ Lω }\). Let us compare
this equation with Im \(\frac{{ V }_{m}}{ R }\) from resistive circuit. The quantity ωL plays the same role as the resistance R in resistive circuit. This is the resistance offered by the capacitor, called capacitive reactance (XL). It measured in ohm.
XL = ωL

Capacitive reactance XC:
The peak value of current I is given by Im = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{m}}}{1 / \mathrm{c} \omega}\). Let us compare this equation with Im = \(\frac{{ V }_{m}}{ R }\) from resistive circuit. The quantity \(\frac { 1 }{ ωC }\) plays the same role as the resistance R in resistive circuit. This is the resistance offered by the capacitor, called capacitive reactance (XC). It measured in ohm.
XC = \(\frac{ 1 }{ ωC }\).

Question 24.
Obtain an expression for average power of AC over a cycle. Discuss its special cases. Power of a circuit is defined as the rate of consumption of electric energy in that circuit.
Answer:
It is given by the product of the voltage and current. In an AC circuit, the voltage and current vary continuously with time. Let us first calculate the power at an instant and then it is averaged over a complete cycle.
The alternating voltage and alternating current in the series RLC circuit at an instant are given by
υ = Vm sin ωt and i = Im sin (ωt + 4>)
where φ is the phase angle between υ and i. The instantaneous power is then written as
P = υi = Vm Im sin ωt sin(ωt + φ)
= Vm Im sin ωt (sin ωt cos φ – cos ωt sin φ)
P = Vm Im (cos φ sin2 ωt – sin ωt cos ωt sin φ) …… (1)
Here the average of sin2 ωt over a cycle is \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) and that of sin ωt cos ωt is zero. Substituting these values, we obtain average power over a cycle.
Pav = Vm Im cos φ x \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) = \(\frac {{ V }_{m}}{ √2 }\) \(\frac {{ I }_{m}}{ √2 }\) cos φ
Pav = VRMS IRMS cos φ …… (2)
where VRMS IRMS is called apparent power and cos φ is power factor. The average power of an AC circuit is also known as the true power of the circuit.
Special Cases:
(i) For a purely resistive circuit, the phase angle between voltage and current is zero and cos
φ = 1.
∴ Pav = VRMS IRMS
(ii) For a purely inductive or capacitive circuit, the phase angle is ± \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\) and cos \(\left(\pm \frac{\pi}{2}\right)\) = 0
∴ Pav = 0
(iii) For series RLC circuit, the phase angle φ = tan-1 \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{L}}-\mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)\)
∴ Pav = VRMS IRMS cos φ
(iv) For series RLC circuit at resonance, the phase angle is zero and cos φ = 1.
∴ Pav = VRMS IRMS

Question 25.
Show that the total energy is conserved during LC oscillations.
Answer:
Conservation of energy in LC oscillations: During LC oscillations in LC circuits, the energy of the system oscillates between the electric field of the capacitor and the magnetic field of the inductor. Although, these two forms of energy vary with time, the total energy remains constant. It means that LC oscillations take place in accordance with the law of conservation of energy.
Total energy,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-46
Let us consider 3 different stages of LC oscillations and calculate the total energy of the system.

Case I:
When the charge in the capacitor, q = Qm and the current through the inductor, i = 0, the total energy is given by
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-47
The total energy is wholly electrical.

Case II:
When charge = 0; current = Im, the total energy is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-48
The total energy is wholly electrical.

Case III:
When charge = q; current = i, the total energy is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-49
Since q = Qm cos ωt, i = \(\frac { bq }{ dt }\) = Qmω sin ωt. The negative sign in current indicates that the charge in the capacitor in the capacitor decreases with time.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-50
From above three cases, it is clear that the total energy of the system remains constant.

Question 26.
Prove that energy is conserved during electromagnetic induction.
Answer:
The mechanical energy of the spring-mass system is given by
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-51
The energy E remains constant for varying values of x and v. Differentiating E with respect to time, we get
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-52
This is the differential equation of the oscillations of the spring-mass system. The general solution of equation (2) is of the form
x(t) = Xm cos (ωt + φ) …… (3)
where Xm is the maximum value of x(t), ω, the angular frequency and φ, the phase constant. Similarly, the electromagnetic energy of the LC system is given by
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-53
Differentiating U with respect to time, we get
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-54
Equation (2) and (5) are proved the energy of electromagnetic induction is conserved.

Question 27.
Compare the electromagnetic oscillations of LC circuit with the mechanical oscillations of block spring system to find the expression for angular frequency of LC oscillators mathematically.
Answer:
The mechanical energy of the spring-mass system is given by
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-51
The energy E remains constant for varying values of x and v. Differentiating E with respect to time, we get
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-52
This is the differential equation of the oscillations of the spring-mass system. The general solution of equation (2) is of the form
x(t) = Xm cos (ωt + φ) …… (3)
where Xm is the maximum value of x(t), ω, the angular frequency and φ, the phase constant. Similarly, the electromagnetic energy of the LC system is given by
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-53
Differentiating U with respect to time, we get
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-54
Equation (2) and (5) are proved the energy of electromagnetic induction is conserved.
q(t) = Qm cos (ωt + φ) …… (6)
where Qm is the maximum value of q(t), ω, the angular frequency and φ, the phase constant.

Current in the LC circuit:
The current flowing in the LC circuit is obtained by differentiating q(t) with respect to time.
i(t) = \(\frac { dq }{ dt }\) = \(\frac { d }{ dt }\) [Qm cos (ωt + φ)] = Qm ω sin (ωt + φ) since Im = Qmω
(or)
i(t) -Im sin (ωt + φ) ……. (7)
The equation (7) clearly shows that current varies as a function of time t. In fact, it is a sinusoidally varying alternating current with angular frequency ω.

Angular frequency of LC oscillations:
By differentiating equation (6) twice, we get
\(\frac { { d }^{ 2 }q }{ dt } \) = -Qmω2 cos (ωt + φ) …….. (8)
Substituting equations (6) and (8) in equation (5),
we obtain L[-Qmω2 cos (ωt + φ)] + \(\frac { 1 }{ C }\) Qm cos (ωt + φ) = 0
Rearranging the terms, the angular frequency of LC oscillations is given by
ω = \(\frac { 1 }{ \sqrt { LC } } \) …… (9)
This equation is the same as that obtained from qualitative analogy.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current Numerical Problems

Question 1.
A square coil of side 30 cm with 500 turns is kept in a uniform magnetic field of 0.4 T. The plane of the coil is inclined at an angle of 30° to the field. Calculate the magnetic flux through the coil.
Solution:
Square coil of side (a) = 30 cm = 30 × 10-2m
Area of square coil (A) = a2 = (30 × 10-2)2 = 9 × 10-2 m2
Number of turns (N) = 500
Magnetic field (B) = 0.4 T
Angular between the field and coil (θ) = 90 – 30 = 60°
Magnetic flux (Φ) = NBA cos 0 = 500 × 0.4 × 9 × 10-2 × cos 60° = 18 × \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)
Φ = 9 W b

Question 2.
A straight metal wire crosses a magnetic field of flux 4 mWb in a time 0.4 s. Find the magnitude of the emf induced in the wire.
Solution:
Magnetic flux (Φ) = 4 m Wb = 4 × 10-3 Wb
time (t) = 0.4 s
The magnitude of induced emf (e) = \(\frac { dΦ }{ dt }\) = \(\frac {{ 4 × 10 }^{-3}}{ 0.4 }\) 10-2
e = 10 mV

Question 3.
The magnetic flux passing through a coil perpendicular to its plane is a function of time and is given by OB = (2t3 + 4t2 + 8t + 8) Wb. If the resistance of the coil is 5 Ω, determine the induced current through the coil at a time t = 3 second.
Solution:
Magnetic flux (ΦB) = (2t3 + 8t2 + 8t + 8)Wb
Resistance of the coil (R) = 5 Ω
time (t) = 3 second
Induced current through the coil, I = \(\frac { e }{ R }\)
Induced emf, e = \(\frac {{ dΦ }_{B}}{ dt }\) = \(\frac { d }{ dt }\) ((2t3 + 4t2 + 8t + 8) = 6t2 + 8t + 8
Here time (t) = 3 second
e = 6(3)2 + 8 × 3 + 8 = 54 + 24 + 8 = 86 V
∴ Induced current through the coil, I = \(\frac { e }{ R }\) = \(\frac { 86 }{ 5 }\) = 17.2 A

Question 4.
A closely wound coil of radius 0.02 m is placed perpendicular to the magnetic field. When the magnetic field is changed from 8000 T to 2000 T in 6 s, an emf of 44 V is induced. Calculate the number of turns in the coil.
Solution:
Radius of the coil (r) = 0.02 m
Area of the coil (A) = πr² = 3.14 × (0.02)²= 1.256 × 10-3
Change in magnetic field, dB = 8000 – 2000 = 6000 T
Time, dt = 6 second
Induced emf, e = 44 V
θ = 0°
Induced emf in the coil, e = NA \(\frac { d }{ dt }\) cos θ . dt
44 = N × 1.256 × 10-3 × \(\frac { 600 }{ 6 }\) × Cos 0°
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-55
Number of turns N = 35 turns

Question 5.
A rectangular coil of area 6 cm2 having 3500 turns is kept in a uniform magnetic field of 0.4 T, Initially, the plane of the coil is perpendicular to the field and is then rotated through an angle of 180°. If the resistance of the coil is 35 Ω, find the amount of charge flowing through the coil.
Solution:
Rectangular coil of their area, A = 6 cm² = 6 x 10-4
Number of turns N = 3500 turns
Magnetic field, B = 0.4 T
Resistance of the coil, R= 35 Ω
Induced emf (e) = change in flux per second = Φ2 – Φ1
e = NAB cos 180° – NBA cos 0° = -NBA – NBA = – 2 NBA
= – 2 x 3500 x 0.4 x 6 x 10-4 – 16800 x 10-4 = – 1.68 V
Current flowing the coil, I = \(\frac { e }{ R }\) = \(\frac { -1.68 }{ 35 }\) = 0.048
Magnitude of the current, I = 48 x 10-3 A
Amount of charge flowing through the coil, q = It = 48 x 10-3 x 1 = 48 x 10-3 C

Question 6.
An induced current of 2.5 mA flows through a single conductor of resistance 100 Ω. Find out the rate at which the magnetic flux is cut by the conductor.
Solution:
Induced current, I = 2.5 mA
Resistance of conductor, R = 100 Ω
∴ The rate of change of flux, \(\frac {{ dΦ }_{B}}{ dt }\) = e
\(\frac {{ dΦ }_{B}}{ dt }\) = e = IR = 2.5 x 10-3 x 100 = 250 x 10-3 dt
\(\frac {{ dΦ }_{B}}{ dt }\) = 250 mWb s-1

Question 7.
A fan of metal blades of length 0.4 m rotates normal to a magnetic field of 4 x 10-3 T. If the induced emf between the centre and edge of the blade is 0.02 V, determine the rate of rotation of the blade.
Solution:
Length of the metal blade, l = 0.4 m
Magnetic field, B = 4 x 10-3 T
Induced emf, e = 0.02 V
Rotational area of the blade, A = πr² = 3.14 x (0.4)² = 0.5024 m²
Induced emf in rotational of the coil, e = NBA ω sin θ
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-56
= 9.95222 x 10-3 x 103
= 9.95 revolutions/second
Rate of rotational of the blade, ω = 9.95 revolutions/second

Question 8.
A bicycle wheel with metal spokes of 1 m long rotates in Earth’s magnetic field. The plane of the wheel is perpendicular to the horizontal component of Earth’s field of 4 x 10-5 T. If the emf induced across the spokes is 31.4 mV, calculate the rate of revolution of the wheel.
Solution:
Length of the metal spokes, l = 1 m
Rotational area of the spokes, A = π² = 3.14 x (1)² = 3.14 m²
Horizontal component of Earth’s field, B = 4 x 10-5 T
Induced emf, e = 31.4 mV
The rate of revolution of wheel,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-57
ω = 250 revolutions / second

Question 9.
Determine the self-inductance of 4000 turn air-core solenoid of length 2m and diameter 0. 04 m.
Solution:
Length of the air core solenoid, l = 2 m
Diameter, d = 0.04 m
Radius, r = \(\frac { d }{ 2 }\) = 0.02 m
Area of the air core solenoid, A = π2 = 3.14 x (0.02)2 = 1.256 x 10-3 m2
Number of Turns, N = 4000 turns
Self inductance, L = µ0n2 Al
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-58

Question 10.
A coil of 200 turns carries a current of 4 A. If the magnetic flux through the coil is 6 x 10-5 Wb, find the magnetic energy stored in the medium surrounding the coil.
Solution:
Number of turns of the coil, N = 200
Current, I = 4 A
Magnetic flux through the coil, Φ = 6 x 10-5 Wb
Energy stored in the coil, U = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) LI² = \(\frac { 1 }{ I2}\)
Self inductance of the coil, L = \(\frac { NΦ }{ I }\)
U =\(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) \(\frac { NΦ }{ I }\) x I² = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2}\) NΦI = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2}\) x 200 x 6 x 10-5 x 4
U = 2400 x 10-5 = 0.024 J (or) joules.

Question 11.
A 50 cm long solenoid has 400 turns per cm. The diameter of the solenoid is 0.04 m. Find the magnetic flux of a turn when it carries a current of 1 A.
Solution:
Length of the solenoid, l = 50 cm = 50 x 10-2 m
Number of turns per cm, N = 400
Number of turns in 50 cm, N = 400 x 50 = 20000
Diameter of the solenoid, d = 0.04 m
Radius of the solenoid, r = \(\frac { d }{ 2}\) = 0.02 m
Area of the solenoid, A = π² = 3.14 x (0.02)² = 1.256 x 10-3
Current passing through the solenoid, I = 1 A
Magnetic fluex,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-59

Question 12.
A coil of 200 turns carries a current of 0.4 A. If the magnetic flux of 4 mWb is linked with the coil, find the inductance of the coil.
Solution:
Number of turns, N = 200; Current, I = 0.4 A
Magnetic flux linked with coil, Φ = 4 mWb = 4 x 10-3 Wb
Induction of the coil, L = \(\frac { NΦ }{ I }\) = \(\frac {{ 200 × 4 × 10 }^{-3}}{ 0.4 }\) = \(\frac {{ 800 × 10 }^{-3}}{ 0.4 }\) 2 H

Question 13.
Two air core solenoids have the same length of 80 cm and same cross-sectional area 5 cm². Find the mutual inductance between them if the number of turns in the first coil is 1200 turns and that in the second coil is 400 turns.
Solution:
Length of the solenoids, l = 80 cm = 8 x 10-2 m
Cross sectional area of the solenoid, A = 5 cm2 = 5 x 10-4 m2
Number of turns in the Ist coil, N1 = 1200
Number of turns in the IInd coil, N2 = 400
Mutual inductance between the two coils,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-60

Question 14.
A long solenoid having 400 turns per cm carries a current 2A. A 100 turn coil of cross sectional area 4 cm2 is placed co-axially inside the solenoid so that the coil is in the field produced by the solenoid. Find the emf induced in the coil if the current through the solenoid reverses its direction in 0.04 sec.
Solution:
Number of turns of long solenoid per cm =\(\frac { 400 }{{10}^{ -2 }}\); N2 = 400 x 102
Number of turns inside the solenoid, N2 = 100
Cross-sectional area of the coil, A = 4 cm2 = 4 x 10-4 m2
Current through the solenoid, I = 2A; time, t = 0.04 s
Induced emf of the coil, e = -M \(\frac { dI }{ dt }\)
Mutual inductance of the coil,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-61
Induced emf of the coil,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-61-1
The current through the solenoid reverse its direction if the induced emf, e = -0.2 V

Question 15.
A 200 turn coil of radius 2 cm is placed co-axially within a long solenoid of 3 cm radius. If the turn density of the solenoid is 90 turns per cm, then calculate mutual inductance of the coil.
Solution:
Number of turns of the solenoid, N2 = 200
Radius of the solenoid, r = 2cm = 2 x 102 m
Area of the solenoid, A = πr2= 3.14 x (2 x 10-2)2 = 1.256 x 10-3 m2
Turn density of long solenoid per cm, N1 = 90 x 102
Mutual inductance of the coil,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-62
= 283956.48 x 10-8 ⇒ M = 2.84 mH

Question 16.
The solenoids S1 and S2 are wound on an iron-core of relative permeability 900. The area of their cross-section and their length are the same and are 4 cm2 and 0.04 m, respectively. If the number of turns in S1 is 200 and that in S2 is 800, calculate the mutual inductance between the coils. The current in solenoid 1 is increased from 2A to 8A in 0.04 second. Calculate the induced emf in solenoid 2.
Solution:
Relative permeability of iron core, μr = 900
Number of turns of solenoid S1, N1 = 200
Number of turns of solenoid S2, N2 = ‘800
Area of cross section, A = 4 cm2 = 4 x 10-4 m2
Length of the solenoid S1, l1 = 0.04 m
current, I =I2 – I1 = 8 – 2 = 6A
time taken, t = 0.04 second
emf induced in solenoid S2 e = -M \(\frac { dI }{ dt }\)
Mutual inductance between the two coils, M = \(\frac{\mu_{0} \mu_{r} N_{1} N_{2} A}{l}\)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-63
M = 180864 x 10-5 = 1.81 H
Emf induced in solenoid S2, e = -M\(\frac { dI }{ dt }\) = -1.81 x \(\frac { 6 }{ 0.04 }\)
Magnitude of emf, e = 271.5 V

Question 17.
A step-down transformer connected to main supply of 220 V is made to operate 11 V, 88 W lamp. Calculate (i) Transformation ratio and (ii) Current in the primary.
Solution:
Voltage in primary coil, Vp = 220 V
Voltage in secondary coil, Vs = 11 V
Output power = 88 W
(i) To find transformation ratio, k = \(\frac {{ V }_{ s }}{{ V }_{ p }}\) = \(\frac { 11 }{ 220 }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 20 }\)
(ii) Current in primary, Ip = \(\frac {{ V }_{ s }}{{ V }_{ p }}\) x Is
So, Is = ?
Outputpower = Vs Is
⇒ 88 = 11 x Is
Is = \(\frac { 88 }{ 11 }\) = 8A
Therefore, Ip = \(\frac {{ V }_{ s }}{{ V }_{ p }}\) x Is = \(\frac { 11 }{ 220 }\) x 8 = 0.4 A

Question 18.
A 200V/120V step-down transformer of 90% efficiency is connected to an induction stove of resistance 40 Ω. Find the current drawn by the primary of the transformer.
Solution:
Primary voltage, Vp = 200 V
Secondary voltage, Vs = 120 V
Efficiency, η = 90%
Secondary resistance, Rs = 40 Ω
Current drawn by the primary of the transformc, Ip = \(\frac {{ V }_{ s }}{{ R }_{ s }}\) x Is
Output power = Vs Is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-64
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-65

Question 19.
The 300 turn primary of a transformer has resistance 0.82 Ω and the resistance of its secondary of 1200 turns is 6.2 Ω. Find the voltage across the primary if the power output from the secondary at 1600V is 32 kW. Calculate the power losses in both coils when the transformer efficiency is 80%.
Solution:
Efficiency, η = 80% = \(\frac { 80 }{ 100 }\)
Number of turns in primary, Np = 300
Number of turns in secondary, Ns = 1200
Resistance in primary, Rp = 0.82 Ω
Resistance in secondary, Rs = 6.2 Ω
Secondary voltage, Vs = 1600 V
Output power = 32 kW
Output power = Vs Is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-66
Power loss in primary = \({ { I }_{ p }^{ 2 }{ R }_{ p } }\) = (100)² x 0.82 = 8200 = 8.2 kW
Power loss in secondary = \({ { I }_{ s }^{ 2 }{ R }_{ s } }\) = (20)² x 6.2 = 2480 = 2.48 kW

Question 20.
Calculate the instantaneous value at 60°, average value and RMS value of an alternating current whose peak value is 20 A.
Solution:
Peak value of current, Im = 20 A
Angle, θ = 60° [θ = ωt]
(i) Instantaneous value of current,
i = Im sin ωt = Im sin θ
= 20 sin 60° = 20 x \(\frac { √3 }{ 2 }\) = 10√3 = 10 x 1.732
i = 17.32 A

(ii) Average value of current,
Iav = \(\frac {{ 2I }_{m}}{ π }\) = \(\frac { 2 × 20 }{ 3.14 }\)
Iav = 12.74 A

(iii) RMS value of current,
IRMS = 0.707 Im
or \(\frac{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{m}}}{\sqrt{2}}\) = 0.707 x 20
IRMS = 14. 14 A

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current Conceptual Questions

Question 1.
A graph between the magnitude of the magnetic flux linked with a closed loop and time is given in the figure. Arrange the regions of the graph in ascending order of the magnitude of induced emf in the loop.
Answer:
According to electromagnetic induction, induced emf,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-67
e = \(\frac { dΦ }{ dt }\)
Ascending order of induced emf from the graphical representation is b < c < d < a.

Question 2.
Using Lenz’s law, predict the direction of induced current in conducting rings 1 and 2 when current in the wire is steadily decreasing.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-68
According to Lenz’s law, a current will be induced in the coil which will produce a flux in the opposite direction.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-69
If the current decreases in the wire, the induced current flows in ring 1 in clockwise direction, the induced current flows in ring 2 in anti-clockwise direction.

Question 3.
A flexible metallic loop abed in the shape of a square is kept in a magnetic field with its plane perpendicular to the field. The magnetic field is directed into the paper normally. Find the direction of the induced current when the square loop is crushed into an irregular shape as shown in the figure.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-70
The magnetic flux linked with the wire decreases due to decrease in area of the loop. The induced emf will cause current to flow in the direction. So that the wire is pulled out ward direction from all sides. According to Fleming’s left hand rule, force on wire will act outward i direction from all sides.

Question 4.
Predict the polarity of the capacitor in a closed circular loop when two bar magnets are moved as shown in the figure.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-71
When magnet 1 is moved with its South pole towards to the coil, emf is induced in the coil as the magnetic flux through the coil changes. When seeing from the left hand side the direction of induced current appears to be clockwise. When seeing from the right hand side the direction of induced current appears to be anti-clockwise. In capacitor, plate A has positive polarity and plate B has negative polarity.

Question 5.
In series LC circuit, the voltages across L and C are 180° out of phase. Is it correct? Explain.
Answer:
In series LC circuit, the voltage across the capacitance lag the current by 90° while the voltage across the inductance lead the current by 90°. This makes the inductance and capacitance voltages 180° out of phase.

Question 6.
When does power factor of a series RLC circuit become maximum?
Answer:
For a series LCR circuit, power factor is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-72
For purely resistive, Φ = 0°, cos 0° = 1
Thus the power factor assumes the maximum value for a purely resistive circuit.

Question 7.
Draw graphs showing the distribution of charge in a capacitor and current through an inductor during LC oscillations with respect to time. Assume that the charge in the capacitor is maximum initially.
Answer:
For a capacitor, the graph between charge and time.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-73
The charge decays exponentially decreases with time.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current Additional Questions solved

I Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
A coil of area of cross section 0.5 m2 with 10 turns is in a plane which is perpendicular to an uniform magnetic field of 0.2 Wb/m2. The flux through the coil is –
(a) 100 Wb
(b) 10 Wb
(c) 1 Wb
(d) zero
Answer:
(c) 1 Wb
Hint:
Φ = NBA cos θ
= 10 x 0.2 x 0.5 x cos 0° = 1 Wb

Question 2.
A rectangular coil of 100 turns and size 0.1 m x 0.05 m is placed perpendicular to a magnetic field of 0.1 T. If the field drops to 0.05 T in 0.05 s, the magnitude of the emf induced in the coil is-
(a) 0.5 V
(b) 0.75 V
(c) 1.0 V
(d) 1.5 V
Answer:
(a) 0.5 V
Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-74
ε = 0.5 V

Question 3.
A wire of length 1 m moves with a speed of 10 ms-1 perpendicular to a magnetic field. If the emf induced in the wire is 1 V, the magnitude of the field is-
(a) 0.01 T
(b) 0.1 T
(c) 0.2 T
(d) 0.02 T
Answer:
(b) 0.1 T
Hint:
ε = Blv
⇒ B = \(\frac { ε }{ lv }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 1 × 10 }\) = 0.02 T

Question 4.
A coil of area 10 cm2, 10 ms-1 turns and resistance 20 Ω is placed in a magnetic field directed perpendicular to the plane of the coil and changing at the rate of 108 gauss/second. The induced current in the coil will be-
(a) 5 A
(b) 0.5 A
(c) 0.05 A
(d) 50 A
Answer:
(a) 5 A
Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-75

Question 5.
A coil of cross sectional area 400 cm2 having 30 turns is making 1800 rev/min in a magnetic field of IT. The peak value of the induced emf is-
(a) 113 V
(b) 226 V
(c) 339 V
(d) 452 V
Answer:
(b) 226 V
Hint:
εm = NBA ω = 30 x 1 x 400 x 10-4 x 30 x 2π
= 226 V

Question 6.
Eddy currents are produced in a material when it is-
(a) heated
(b) placed in a time varying magnetic field
(c) placed in an electric field
(d) placed a uniform magnetic field
Answer:
(b) placed in a time varying magnetic field

Question 7.
An emf of 5 V is induced in an inductance when the current in it changes at a steady rate from 3 A to 2 A in 1 millisecond. The value of inductance is-
(a) 5 mH
(b) 5 H
(c) 5000 H
(d) zero
Answer:
(a) 5 mH

Question 8.
Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction is related to the-
(a) Law of conservation of charge
(b) Law of conservation of energy
(c) Third law of motion
(d) Law of conservation of angular momentum
Answer:
(b) Law of conservation of energy

Question 9.
The inductance of a coil is proportional to-
(a) its length
(b) the number of turns
(c) the resistance of the coil
(d) square of the number of turns
Answer:
(d) square of the number of turns

Question 10.
When a direct current ‘i’ is passed through an inductance L, the energy stored is-
(a) Zero
(b) Li
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) Li2
(d) \(\frac {{ L }^{ 2 }}{2i}\)
Answer:
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) Li2

Question 11.
A coil of area 80 cm2 and 50 turns is rotating with 2000 revolutions per minute about an axis perpendicular to a magnetic field of 0.05 T. The maximum value of the emf developed in it is-
(a) 2000 πV
(b) \(\frac { 10π }{ 3 }\) V
(c) \(\frac { 4π }{ 3 }\)V
(d) \(\frac { 2 }{ 3 }\) V
Answer:
(c) \(\frac { 4π }{ 3 }\)V
Hint:
ε = NBA ω = 50 x 0.05 x 80 x 10-4 x \(\frac { 2π × 2000 }{ 60 }\) = \(\frac { 4π }{ 3 }\)V

Question 12.
The direction of induced current during electro magnetic induction is given by-
(a) Faraday’s law
(b) Lenz’s law
(c) Maxwell’s law
(d) Ampere’s law
Answer:
(b) Lenz’s law

Question 13.
AC power is transmitted from a power house at a high voltage as-
(a) the rate of transmission is faster at high voltages
(b) it is more economical due to less power loss
(c) power cannot be transmitted at low voltages
(d) a precaution against theft of transmission lines
Answer:
(b) it is more economical due to less power loss

Question 14.
In a step-down transformer the input voltage is 22 kV and the output voltage is 550 V. The ratio of the number of turns in the secondary to that in the primary is-
(a) 1 : 20
(b) 20 : 1
(c) 1 : 40
(d) 40 : 1
Answer:
(c) 1 : 40
Hint:
\(\frac {{ N }_{ s }}{{ N }_{ p }}\) = \(\frac {{ V }_{ s }}{{ V }_{ p }}\) = \(\frac { 550 }{ 22000 }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 40 }\)

Question 15.
The self-inductance of a coil is 5 H. A current of 1 A changes to 2 A within 5 s through the coil. The value of induced emf will be-
(a) 10 V
(b) 0.1 V
(c) 1.0 V
(d) 100 V
Answer:
(c) 1.0 V
Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-76

Question 16.
The low-loss transformer has 230 V applied to the primary and gives 4.6 V in the secondary. The secondary is connected to a load which draws 5 amperes of current. The current (in amperes) in the primary is-
(a) 0.1 A
(b) 1.0 A
(c) 10 A
(d) 250 A
Answer:
(a) 0.1 A
Hint:
Ip = \(\frac {{ V }_{ s }{ I }_{ s }}{{ V }_{ p }}\) = \(\frac { 4.6 × 5 }{ 230 }\) = 0.1A

Question 17.
A coil is wound on a frame of rectangular cross-section. If all the linear dimensions of the frame are increased by a factor 2 and the number of turns per unit length of the coil remains the same. Self-inductance of the coil increases by a factor of-
(a) 4
(b) 8
(c) 12
(d) 16
Answer:
(b) 8
Hint:
If all the linear dimensions are doubled, the cross-sectional are a becomes eight times. Therefore, the flux produced by a given current will become eight times. Hence, the selfinductance increases by a factor of 8.

Question 18.
If N is the number of turns in a coil, the value of self-inductance varies as-
(a) N°
(b) N
(c) N2
(d) N-2
Answer:
(c) N2
Hint:
According to self inductance of long solenoid
L = \(\frac{\mu_{0} \mathrm{N}^{2} \mathrm{A}}{l}\)
⇒ L ∝ N2

Question 19.
A magnetic field 2 x 10-2 T acts at right angles to a coil of area 100 cm2 with 50 turns. The average emf induced in the coil will be 0.1 V if it is removed from the field in time.
(a) 0.01 s
(b) 0.1 s
(c) 1 s
(d) 10 s
Answer:
(b) 0.1 s
Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-77

Question 20.
Number of turns in a coil is increased from 10 to 100. Its inductance becomes-
(a) 10 times
(b) 100 times
(c) 1/10 times
(d) 25 times
Answer:
(a) 10 times

Question 21.
The north pole of a magnet is brought near a metallic ring as shown in the figure. The direction of induced current in the ring, as seen by the magnet is-
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-78
(a) anti-clockwise
(b) first anti-clockwise and then clockwise
(c) clockwise
(d) first clockwise and then anti-clockwise
Answer:
(a) anti-clockwise

Question 22.
Quantity that remains unchanged in a transformer is-
(a) voltage
(b) current
(c) frequency
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) frequency

Question 23.
The core of a transformer is laminated to reduce.
(a) Copper loss
(b) Magnetic loss
(c) Eddy current loss
(d) Hysteresis loss
Answer:
(c) Eddy current loss

Question 24.
Which of the following has the dimension of time?
(a) LC
(b) \(\frac { R }{ L }\)
(c) \(\frac { L }{ R }\)
(d) \(\frac { C }{ L }\)
Answer:
(c) \(\frac { L }{ R }\)

Question 25.
A coil has a self-inductance of 0.04 H. The energy required to establish a steady-state current of 5 A in it is-
(a) 0.5 J
(b) 1.0 J
(c) 0.8 J
(d) 0.2 J
Answer:
(a) 0.5 J

Question 26.
Alternating current can be measured by
(a) moving coil galvanometer
(b) hot wire ammeter
(c) tangent galvanometer
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) hot wire ammeter

Question 27.
In an LCR circuit, the energy is dissipated in-
(a) R only
(b) R and L only
(c) R and C only
(d) R, L and C
Answer:
(a) R only

Question 28.
A 40 Ω electric heater is connected to 200 V, 50 Hz main supply. The peak value of the electric current flowing in the circuit is approximately-
(a) 2.5 A
(b) 5 A
(c) 7 A
(d) 10 A
Answer:
(c) 7 A
Hint:
I0 = \(\frac {{ V }_{0}}{ R }\) = \(\frac{200 \sqrt{2}}{40}\) 5 √2 ≈ 7A

Question 29.
The rms value of an alternating current, which when passed through a resistor produces heat three times of that produced by a direct current of 2 A in the same resistor, is-
(a) 6 A
(b) 3 A
(c) 2 A
(d) 2√3 A
Answer:
(d) 2√3 A
Hint:
\({ I }_{ rms }^{ 2 }\)R = 3(22R) (or) Irms = 2√3 A

Question 30.
An inductance, a capacitance and a resistance are connected in series across a source of alternating voltages. At resonance, the applied voltage and the current flowing through the circuit will have a phase difference of-
(a) \(\frac { π }{ 4 }\)
(b) zero
(c) π
(d) \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\)
Answer:
(b) zero

Question 31.
In an AC circuit, the rms value of the current Irms, is related to the peak current I0 as-
(a) Irms = \(\frac {{I}_{0}}{ π }\)
(b) Irms = \(\frac {{I}_{0}}{ √2 }\)
(c) Irms = √2 I0
(d) Irms = πI0
Answer:
(b) Irms = \(\frac {{I}_{0}}{ √2 }\)

Question 32.
The impedance of a circuit consists of 3 Ω resistance and 4 Ω resistance. The power factor of the circuit is
(a) 0.4
(b) 0.6
(c) 0.8
(d) 1.0
Answer:
(b) 0.6
Hint:
tan Φ = \(\frac { 4 }{ 3 }\).
Power factor = cos Φ = \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 }\) = 0.06

Question 33.
The reactance of a capacitance at 50 Hz is 5 Ω. Its reactance at 100 Hz will be-
(a) 5 Ω
(b) 10 Ω
(c) 20 Ω
(d) 2.5 Ω
Answer:
(d) 2.5 Ω.

Question 34.
In a LCR AC circuit off resonance, the current-
(a) is always in phase with the voltage
(b) always lags behind the voltage
(c) always leads the voltage
(d) may lead or lag behind the voltage
Answer:
(d) may lead or lag behind the voltage

Question 35.
The average power dissipation in a pure inductance L, through which a current I0 sin ωt is flowing is-
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) L\({ I }_{ 0 }^{ 2 }\)
(b) L\({ I }_{ 0 }^{ 2 }\)
(c) 2 L\({ I }_{ 0 }^{ 2 }\)
(d) zero
Answer:
(d) zero

Question 36.
The power in an AC circuit is given by P = Vrms Irms cos Φ. The value of the power factor cos Φ in series LCR circuit at resonance is-
(a) zero
(b) 1
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)
(d) \(\frac { 1 }{ √2 }\)
Answer:
(b) 1
Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-79

Question 37.
In an AC circuit with voltage V and current I, the power dissipated is-
(a) VI
(b) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) VI
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ √2 }\) VI
(d) depends on the phase difference between I and V
Answer:
(d) depends on the phase difference between I and V

Question 38.
In an AC circuit containing only capacitance, the current-
(a) leads the voltage by 180°
(b) remains in phase with the voltage
(c) leads the voltage by 90°
(d) lags the voltage by 90°
Answer:
(c) leads the voltage by 90°

Question 39.
In a series LCR circuit R = 10 Ω and the impedance Z = 20 Ω. Then the phase difference between the current and the voltage is-
(a) 60°
(b) 30°
(c) 45°
(d) 90°
Answer:
(c) 60°
Hint:
cos Φ = \(\frac { R }{ Z }\) = \(\frac { 10 }{ 20 }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)
⇒ Φ = 60°

Question 40.
What is the value of inductance L for which the current is maximum in a series LCR circuit with C = 10 μF and ω = 1000 s-1?
(a) 1 mH
(b) 10 mH
(c) 100 mH
(d) Cannot be calculated unless R is known
Answer:
(c) 100 mH
Hint:
L = \(\frac { 1 }{ { \omega }^{ 2 }C } \) = \(\frac{1}{(1000)^{2} \times 10 \times 10^{-6}}\) = 0.1 H = 100 mH

II Fill in the Blanks

Question 1.
Electromagnetic induction is used in …………….
Answer:
transformer and AC generator

Question 2.
Lenz’s Law is in accordance with the law of …………….
Answer:
conservation of energy.

Question 3.
The self-inductance of a straight conductor is …………….
Answer:
zero

Question 4.
Transformer works on …………….
Answer:
AC only

Question 5.
The power loss is less in transmission lines when …………….
Answer:
voltage is more but current is less

Question 6.
The law that gives the direction of the induced current produced in a circuit is …………….
Answer:
Lenz’s law

Question 7.
Fleming’s right hand rule is otherwise called …………….
Answer:
generator rule

Question 8.
Unit of self-inductance is …………….
Answer:
Henry

Question 9.
The mutual induction is very large, if the two coils are wound on …………….
Answer:
soft iron core

Question 10.
When the coil is in vertical position, the angle between the normal to the plane of the coil and magnetic field is …………….
Answer:
zero

Question 11.
The emf induced by changing the orientation of the coil is ……………. in nature.
Answer:
sinusoidal

Question 12.
In a three phase AC generator, the three coils are inclined at an angle of …………….
Answer:
120°

Question 13.
The emf induced in each of the coils differ in phase by …………….
Answer:
120°

Question 14.
A device which converts high alternating voltage into low alternating voltage and vice versa is …………….
Answer:
transformer

Question 15.
For an ideal transformer efficiency η is …………….
Answer:
1

Question 16.
The alternating emf induced in the coil varies …………….
Answer:
periodically in both magnitude and direction

Question 17.
For direct current, inductive reactance is …………….
Answer:
zero

Question 18.
In an inductive circuit the average power of sinusoidal quantity of double the frequency over a complete cycle is …………….
zero

Question 19.
For direct current, the resistance offered by a capacitor is …………….
Answer:
infinity

Question 20.
In a capacitive circuit, power over a complete cycle is …………….
Answer:
zero

Question 21.
Q-factor measures the …………….in resonant circuit
Answer:
selectivity

Question 22.
Voltage drop across inductor and capacitor differ in phase by …………….
Answer:
180°

Question 23.
Angular resonant frequency (co) is …………….
Answer:
\(\frac { 1 }{ \sqrt { LC } } \)

Question 24.
A circuit will have flat resonance if its Q-value is …………….
Answer:
low

Question 25.
The average power consumed by the choke coil over a complete cycle is …………….
Answer:
zero

III Match the following

Question 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-80
Answer:
(i) → (c)
(ii) → (a)
(iii) → (d)
(iv) → (b)

Question 2.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-81
Answer:
(i) → (c)
(ii) → (a)
(iii) → (d)
(iv) → (b)

Question 3.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-82
Answer:
(i) → (c)
(ii) → (d)
(iii) → (b)
(iv) → (a)

Question 4.
Type of impedance Phase between voltage and current
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-83
Answer:
(i) → (c)
(ii) → (d)
(iii) → (a)
(iv) → (b)

Question 5.
Energy in two oscillatory systems: (LC oscillator and spring mass system)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-84
Answer:
(i) → (c)
(ii) → (d)
(iii) → (a)
(iv) → (b)

IV Assertion and reason

(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
(e) If assertion is false but reason is true.

Question 1.
Assertion: Eddy currents is produced in any metallic conductor when flux is changed around it.
Reason: Electric potential determines the flow of charge.
Answer:
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
Solution:
When a metallic conductor is moved in a magnetic field, magnetic flux is “varied. It disturbs the free electrons of the metal and set up an induced emf in it. As there are no free ends of the metal i.e., it will be closed in itself so there will be induced current.

Question 2.
Assertion: Faraday’s laws are consequences of conservation of energy.
Reason: In a purely resistive AC circuit, the current lags behind the emf in phase.
Answer:
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
Solution:
According to Faraday’s law, the conversion of mechanical energy into electrical energy is in accordance with the law of conservation of energy. It is also clearly known that in pure resistance, the emf is in phase with the current.

Question 3.
Assertion: Inductance coil are made of copper.
Reason: Induced current is more in wire having less resistance.
Answer:
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason in the correct explanation of the assertion.
Solution:
Inductance coils made of copper will have very small ohmic resistance.

Question 4.
Assertion: An aircraft flies along the meridian, the potential at the ends of its wings will be the same.
Reason: Whenever there is a change in the magnetic flux, and emf is induced.
Answer:
(e) If assertion is false but reason is true.
Solution:
As the aircraft flies magnetic flux change through its wings due to the vertical component of the Earth’s magnetic field. Due to this, induced emf is produced across the wings of the aircraft. Therefore, the wings of the aircraft will not be at the same potential.

Question 5.
Assertion: In series LCR circuit resonance can take place.
Reason: Resonance takes place if inductance and capacitive reactances are equal and opposite.
Answer:
(a) If both assertion and reason are hue and the reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
Solution:
At resonant frequency XL = XC
So, Impedance, Z = R (minimum)
Therefore, the current in the circuit is maximum.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define magnetic flux (ΦB).
The magnetic flux through an area A in a magnetic field is defined as the number of magnetic field lines passing through that area normally and is given by the equation,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-85

Question 2.
Write down the drawbacks of Eddy currents.
Answer:
When eddy currents flow in the conductor, a large amount of energy is dissipated in the form of heat. The energy loss due to the flow of eddy current is inevitable but it can be reduced to a greater extent with suitable measures. The design of transformer core and electric motor armature is crucial in order to minimise the eddy current loss.

To reduce these losses, the core of the transformer is made up of thin laminas insulated from one another while for electric motor the winding is made up of a group of wires insulated from one another. The insulation used does not allow huge eddy currents to flow and hence losses are minimized.

Question 3.
Define the unit of self-inductance.
Answer:
The unit of self-inductance is henry. One henry is defined as the self-inductance of a coil in which a change in current of one ampere per second produces an opposing emf of one volt.

Question 4.
Define mutual inductance in terms of flux and current.
Answer:
The mutual inductance M21 is defined as the flux linkage of the coil 2 when 1A current flows through coil 1.
M21 = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{2} \mathrm{\phi}_{21}}{i_{1}}\)

Question 5.
Define mutual inductance in terms of emf and current.
Answer:
Mutual inductance M21 is also defined as the opposing emf induced is the coil 2 when the rate of change of current through the coil 1 is 1 As-1.
M12 = \(\frac{-\varepsilon_{1}}{d i_{2} / d t}\)

Question 6.
List out the advantages of three phase alternator.
Answer:
Three-phase system has many advantages over single-phase system, which is as follows:
(i) For a given dimension of the generator, three-phase machine produces higher power output than a single-phase machine.
(ii) For the same capacity, three-phase alternator is smaller in size when compared to single phase alternator.
(iii) Three-phase transmission system is cheaper. A relatively thinner wire is sufficient for transmission of three-phase power.

Question 7.
Mentions the differences betw een a step up and step down transformer.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-86

Question 8.
Define efficiency of transformer.
Answer:
The efficiency p of a transformer is defined as the ratio of the useful output power to the input power. Thus
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-87
Transformers are highly efficient devices having their efficiency in the range of 96 – 99%. Various energy losses in a transformer will not allow them to be 100% efficient.

Question 9.
What is meant by sinusoidal alternating voltage?
Answer:
If the waveform of alternating voltage is a sine wave, then it is known as sinusoidal alternating voltage, which is given by the relation.
υ = Vm sin ωt

Question 10.
An inductor blocks AC but it allows DC. Why? and How?
Answer:
An inductor L is a closely wound helical coil. The steady DC current flowing through L produces uniform magnetic field around it and the magnetic flux linked remains constant. Therefore there is no self-induction and self-induced emf (back emf). Since inductor behaves like a resistor, DC flows through an inductor.

The AC flowing through L produces time-varying magnetic field which in turn induces self- induced emf (back emf). This back emf, according to Lenz’s law, opposes any change in the current. Since AC varies both in magnitude and direction, its flow is opposed in L. For an ideal inductor of zero ohmic resistance, the back emf is equal and opposite to the applied emf. Therefore L blocks AC.

Question 11.
A capacitor blocks DC but allows AC. Explain.
Answer:
Capacitive reactance, XC = \(\frac { 1 }{ ωC }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2πƒc }\)
where, ƒ = 0, XC = ∞
where, ƒ is the frequency of the ac supply. In a dc circuit ƒ = 0. Hence the capacitive reactance has infinite value for dc and a finite value for ac. In other words, a capacitor serves as a block for dc and offers an easy path to ac.

Question 12.
Why dc ammeter cannot read ac?
Answer:
A dc ammeter cannot read ac because, the average value of ac is zero over a complete cycle.

Question 13.
Write down the applications of series RLC resonant circuit.
Answer:
RLC circuits have many applications like filter circuits, oscillators and voltage multipliers, etc. An important use of series RLC resonant circuits is in the tuning circuits of radio and TV systems. The signals from many broadcasting stations at different frequencies are available in the air. To receive the signal of a particular station, tuning is done.

Question 14.
What is meant by ‘Wattful current’?
Answer:
The component of current (Irms cos Φ) which is in phase with the voltage is called active component. The power consumed by this current = Vrms Irms cos Φ. So that it is also known as ‘Wattful’ current.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Derive an expression for Mutual Inductance between two long co-axial solenoids.
Answer:
Mutual inductance between two long co-axial solenoids:
Consider two long co-axial solenoids of same length 1. The length of these solenoids is large when compared to their radii so that the magnetic field produced inside the solenoids is uniform and the fringing effect at the ends may be ignored. Let A1 and A2 be the area of cross section of the solenoids with A1 being greater than A2. The turn density of these solenoids are n1 and n2 respectively.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-88
Let i1 be the current flowing through solenoid 1, then the magnetic field produced inside it is
B1 = μ0n1i1.
As the field lines of \(\vec {{ B }_{1}} \) are passing through the area bounded by solenoid 2, the magnetic flux is linked with each turn of solenoid 2 due to solenoid 1 and is given by
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-89
since θ = 0°
The flux linkage of solenoid 2 with total turns N2 is
N2Φ21 = (n2l)(μ0 n1 i1)
since N2 = n2l
N2Φ21 = (μ0 n1 n2 A2l)i1 ….. (1)
From equation of mutual induction
N2Φ21 = M21 i1 …… (2)
Comparing the equations (1) and (2),
M21 = μ0 n1 n2 A2l ….. (3)
This gives the expression for mutual inductance M21 of the solenoid 2 with respect to solenoid 1. Similarly, we can find mutual inductance M21 of solenoid 1 with respect to solenoid 2 as given below.
The magnetic field produced by the solenoid 2 when carrying a current i2 is
B2 = μ0 n2 i2
This magnetic field B2 is uniform inside the solenoid 2 but outside the solenoid 2, it is almost zero. Therefore for solenoid 1, the area A2 is the effective area over which the magnetic field B2 is present; not area A2 Then the magnetic flux Φ12 linked with each turn of solenoid 1 due to solenoid 2 is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-90
The flux linkage of solenoid 1 with total turns N1 is
[Since N1 = n1l]
[Since N1 Φ12 = M12i2]
N1 Φ12 = (n1l) (μ0 n2 i2) A2
N1 Φ12 = (μ0 n1 n2 A2l) i2
M12i2 = (μ0 n1 n2 A2l) i2
Therefore, we get
∴ M12 = μ0 n1 n2 A2l ……. (4)
From equation (3) and (4), we can write
M12 = M21 = M ……. (5)
In general, the mutual inductance between two long co-axial solenoids is given by
M= μ0 n1 n2 A2l ……. (6)
If a dielectric medium of relative permeability’ pr is present inside the solenoids, then
M = μn1 n2 A2l
or M = μ0 μr n1 n2 A2l

Question 2.
How will you define the unit of mutual-inductance?
Answer:
Unit of mutual inductance:
The unit of mutual inductance is also henry (H).
If iA= 1 A and N2 Φ21 = 1 Wb turns, then M21 = 1 H.
Therefore, the mutual inductance between two coils is said to be one henry if a current of 1A in coil 1 produces unit flux linkage in coil 2.
If \(\frac {{ di }_{1}}{ 2 }\) = 1 As-1 and ε2 = -1V, theen M21 = 1H.
Therefore, the mutual inductance between two coils is one henry if a current changing at the rate of lAs-1 in coil 1 induces an opposing emf of IV in coil 2.

Question 3.
Find out the phase relationship between voltage and current in a pure resister circuit.
Answer:
AC circuit containing pure resistor:
Consider a circuit containing a pure resistor of resistance R connected across an alternating voltage source. The instantaneous value of the alternating voltage is given by
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-91
υ = Vm sin ωt ….. (1)
An alternating current i flowing in the circuit due to this voltage, develops a potential drop across R and is given by
VR = iR ……. (2)
Kirchoff’s loop rule states that the algebraic sum of potential differences in a closed circuit is zero. For this resistive circuit,
υ – VR = 0
From equation (1) and (2),
Vm sin ωt = iR
⇒ i = \(\frac {{ V }_{m}}{ R }\) sin ωt
i = Im sin ωt …… (3)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-92
where V\(\frac {{ V }_{m}}{ R }\) = Im the peak value of alternating current in the circuit. From equations (1) and and (3), it is clear that the applied voltage and the current are in phase with each other in a resistive circuit. It means that they reach their maxima and minima simultaneously. This is indicated in the phasor diagram. The wave diagram also depicts that current is in phase with the applied voltage.

Question 4.
Find out the phase relationship between voltage and current in a pure capacitor circuit.
Answer:
AC circuit containing only a capacitor:
Consider a circuit containing a capacitor of capacitance C connected across an alternating voltage source.
The alternating voltage is given by
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-93
Vm sin ωt …… (1)
Let q be the instantaneous charge on the capacitor. The emf across the capacitor at that instant is \(\frac { q }{ C }\). According to Kirchoff’s loop rule,.
υ = \(\frac { q }{ C }\) = 0
⇒ CVm sin ωt
By the definition of current,
i = \(\frac { dq }{ dt }\) = \(\frac { d }{ dt }\) CVm \(\frac { d }{ dt }\) (sin ωt)
= CVm sin ωt
or i = \(\frac{\frac{\mathrm{V}_{m}}{1}}{\frac{\mathrm{l}}{\mathrm{C} \omega}}\) sin \(\left(\omega t+\frac{\pi}{2}\right)\)
i = Im sin \(\left(\omega t+\frac{\pi}{2}\right)\) ….. (2)
where \(\frac{\frac{\mathrm{V}_{m}}{1}}{\frac{\mathrm{l}}{\mathrm{C} \omega}}\) = Im, the peak value of the alternating current. From equation (1) and (2), it is clear that current leads the applied voltage by π/2 in a capacitive circuit. The wave diagram for a capacitive circuit also shows that the current leads the applied voltage by 90°.

Question 5.
What are LC oscillation? and explain the generation of LC oscillation.
Answer:
Whenever energy is given to a circuit containing a pure inductor of inductance L and a capacitor of capacitance C, the energy oscillates back and forth between the magnetic field of the inductor and the electric field of the capacitor. Thus the electrical oscillations of definite frequency are generated. These oscillations are called LC oscillations.

Generation of LC oscillations:
Let us assume that the capacitor is fully charged with maximum charge Qm at the initial stage. So that the energy stored in the capacitor is maximum and is given by UEm = \(\frac{\mathrm{Q}_{\mathrm{m}}^{2}}{2 \mathrm{C}}\) As there is no current in the inductor, the energy stored in it is zero i.e., UB = 0. Therefore, the total energy is wholly electrical.

The capacitor now begins to discharge through the inductor that establishes current i in clockwise direction. This current produces a magnetic field around the inductor and the energy stored in the inductor is given by UB = \(\frac {{ Li }_{ 2 }}{ 2 }\). As the charge in the capacitor decreases, the energy stored in it also decreases and is given by UE = \(\frac {{ q }_{ 2 }}{ 2C }\). Thus there is a transfer of some part of energy from the capacitor to the inductor. At that instant, the total energy is the sum of electrical and magnetic energies.

When the charges in the capacitor are exhausted, its energy becomes zero i.e., UE = 0. The energy is fully transferred to the magnetic field of the inductor and its energy is maximum. This maximum energy is given by UB = \(\frac{\mathrm{LI}_{\mathrm{m}}^{2}}{2}\) where Im is the maximum current flowing in the circuit. The total energy is wholly magnetic.

Even though the charge in the capacitor is zero, the current will continue to flow in the same direction because the inductor will not allow it to stop immediately. The current is made to flow with decreasing magnitude by the collapsing magnetic field of the inductor. As a result of this, the capacitor begins to charge in the opposite direction. A part of the energy is transferred from the inductor back to the capacitor. The total energy is the sum of the electrical and magnetic energies.

When the current in the circuit reduces to zero, the capacitor becomes frilly charged in the opposite direction. The energy stored in the capacitor becomes maximum. Since the current is zero, the energy stored in the inductor is zero. The total energy is wholly electrical. The state of the circuit is similar to the initial state but the difference is that the capacitor is charged in opposite direction. The capacitor then starts to discharge through the inductor with anti-clockwise current. The total energy is the sum of the electrical and magnetic energies.

As already explained, the processes are repeated in opposite direction. Finally, the circuit returns to the initial state. Thus, when the circuit goes through these stages, an alternating current flows in the circuit. As this process is repeated again and again, the electrical oscillations of definite frequency are generated. These are known as LC oscillations. In the ideal LC circuit, there is no loss of energy. Therefore, the oscillations will continue indefinitely. Such oscillations are called undamped oscillations.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current Numerical Problems

Question 1.
A coil has 2000 turns and area 70 cm2. The magnetic field perpendicular to the plane of the coil is 0.3 Wb/m2. The coil takes 0.1 s to rotate through 180°. Then what is the value of induced emf?
Solution:
Magnitude of change in flux,
|∆Φ | = |NBA (cos 180° – cos 0°
= |NBA(-1 – 1)| = |-2 NBA| = |2 NBA|
Where,
N = 2000
B = 0.3 Wb/m2
A = 70 x 10-4 m2
t = 0.1 sec
Induced emf, ε = \(\frac { \left| \Delta \phi \right| }{ \Delta t } \) = \(\frac { 2NBA }{ ∆t }\) = \(\frac {{ 2 × 2000 × 0.3 × 70 × 10 }^{-4}}{ 0.1 }\)
ε = 84 V

Question 2.
A rectangular loop of sides 8 cm and 2 cm is lying in a uniform magnetic field of magnitude 0.5 T with its plane normal to the field. The field is now gradually reduced at the rate of 0.02 T/s. If the resistance of the loop is 1.6 Ω, then find the power dissipated by the loop as heat.
Solution:
Induced emf, |ε| = \(\frac { dΦ }{ dt } \) = A \(\frac { dB }{ dt } \) = 8 × 2 × 10-4 × 0.02
ε = 3.2 × 10-5 V
Induced current, I = \(\frac { ε }{ R } \) = 2 × 10-5 A
Power loss = I2R = 4 × 10-10 × 1.6 = 6.4 × 10-10 W

Question 3.
A current of 2 A flowing through a coil of 100 turns gives rise to a magnetic flux of 5 x 10-5 Wb per turn. What is the magnetic energy associated with the coil?
Solution:
Self inductance of coil, L = \(\frac { NΦ }{ I } \) = \(\frac {{ 100 × 5 × 10 }^{-3}}{ 2 } \)
= 2.5 × 10-3 H
Magnetic energy associated with inductance,
U = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) LI2 = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) × 2.5 × 10-3 × (2)2
= \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) × 2.5 × 10-3 × 4 = 5 × 10-3 J

Question 4.
A transformer is used to light a 140 W, 24 V bulb from a 240 V AC mains. The current in the main cable is 0.7 A. Find the efficiency of the transformer.
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-95
η = \(\frac { 140 }{ 240 × 0.7 }\) × 100 = 83.3%

Question 5.
In an ideal step up transformer the turns ratio is 1 : 10. A resistance of 200 ohm connected across the secondary is drawing a current of 0.5 A. What are the primary voltage and current?
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-96
Primary current, Ip = 5 A
Promary voltage, Ep = 10 V

Question 6.
A capacitor of capacitance 2 μF is connected in a tank circuit oscillating with a frequency of 1 kHz. If the current flowing in the circuit is 2 mA, then find the voltage across the capacitor.
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-97

Question 7.
An ideal inductor takes a current of 10 A when connected to a 125 V, 50 Hz AC supply. A pure resistor across the same source takes 12.5 A. If the two are connected in series across a 100 √2 V, 40 Hz supply, then calculate the current through the circuit.
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-98

Question 8.
An LCR series circuit containing a resistance of 120 Ω. has angular resonance frequency 4 x 105 rad s-1. At resonance the voltages across resistance and inductance are 60 V and 40 V, respectively. Find the values of L and C.
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-99

Question 9.
A coil of inductive reactance 31 Ω has a resistance of 8 Ω. It is placed in series with a capacitor of capacitance reactance 25 Ω. The combination is connected to an ac source of 110 volt. Find the power factor of the circuit.
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-100
Power faactor = 0.8

Question 10.
The power factor of an RL circuit is \(\frac { 1 }{ √2 }\). If the frequency of AC is doubled, what will be the power factor?
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-101

Question 11.
The instantaneous value of alternating current and voltage are given as i = \(\frac { 1 }{ √2 }\) sin (100 πt) A and e = \(\frac { 1 }{ √2 }\) sin(100 πt + \(\frac { π }{ 3 }\)) volt. Find the average power in watts consumed in the circuit.
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current-102

Common Errors and its Rectifications:

Common Errors:

  1. Students sometimes may confuse the peak current and instantaneous value of current and emf.
  2. They may confuse in the area of R, L and C with AC. The relation between current and induced emf.

Rectifications:

  1. Instantaneous current, i = I0 sin tot Peak current, I0 = √2 Irms Instantaneous emf, e = E0 sin cor Peak emf, E0 = √2 Erms
  2. In Inductor: current is \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\) rad less than that of emf.
    In Resistor: current and emf are same phase.
    In Capacitor: current is \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\) rad greater than that of emf.

We believe that the shared knowledge about Tamilnadu State Board Solutions for 12th Physics Chapter 4 Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current Questions and Answers learning resource will definitely guide you at the time of preparation. For more details visit Tamilnadu State Board Solutions for 12th Physics Solutions and for more information ask us in the below comments and we’ll revert back to you asap.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics

Are you searching for the Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chapter Wise Solutions PDF? Then, get your Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chapter Wise Solutions PDF for free on our website. Students can Download Chemistry Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics Questions and Answers, Notes Pdf, Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics

All concepts are explained in an easy way on our website. So, students can easily learn and practice Tamilnadu State Board 12th Chemistry Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics Question and Answers. You can enjoy the digitized learning with the help of the Tamilnadu State Board Chemistry Online Material.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chemical Kinetics Elements Text Book Evalution

I. Choose the correct answer.

12th Chemistry Chapter 7 Book Back Answers Question 1.
For a first order reaction A → B the rate constant is x min-1. If the initial concentration of A is 0.01 M, the concentration of A after one hour is given by the expression.
(a) 0.01 e-x
(b) 1 x 10-2 (1 – e-60x)
(c) (1 x 10-2) e-60x
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) (1 x 10-2) e-60x
Answer:
Solutions:
12th Chemistry Chapter 7 Book Back Answers Chemical Kinetics Samacheer Kalvi
In this case
k = x min-1 and [A0] = 0.01 M
= 1 x 10-2 M
t = 1 hour = 60 min
[A] = 1 x 10-2(e-60x)

12th Chemistry 7th Lesson Book Back Answers Question 2.
A zero order reaction X → Product, with an initial concentration 0.02M has a half life of 10 min. If one starts with concentration 0.04M, then the half life is …………….
(a) 10 s
(b) 5 min
(c) 20 min
(d) cannot be predicted using the given information
Answer:
(c) 20 min
Solutions:
12th Chemistry 7th Lesson Book Back Answers Chemical Kinetics Samacheer Kalvi
Given,
[A0] = 0.02 M ; t1/2 = 10 min
[A0] = 0.04 M ; t1/2 = ?
Substitute in (1)
10 min ? 0.02 M ……………………..(2)
t1/2 ∝ 0.04 M ……………………..(3)
Dividing Eq.(3) by Eq. (2) we get,
\(\frac { { t }^{ 1/2 } }{ 10min }\) = \(\frac { 0.04M }{ 0.02M }\)
t1/2 = 2 x 10 min = 20 min

Chemical Kinetics Book Back Answers Question 3.
Among the following graphs showing variation of rate constant with temperature (T) for a reaction, the one that exhibits Arrhenius behavior over the entire temperature range is ……………
Chemical Kinetics Book Back Answers Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi Guru 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics
Solution:
Samacheer 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics
In k = In A – \(\left( \frac { { E }_{ a } }{ R } \right)\) \((\frac { 1 }{ T })\)
this equation is in the form of a straight
line equation y = c + m x
a plot of ink vs \((\frac { 1 }{ T })\) is a straight line with negative slope.

Samacheer Kalvi Guru 12th Chemistry Question 4.
For a first order react ion A → product with initial concentration x mol L-1, has a half life period of 2.5 hours. For the same reaction with initial concentration mol L-1 the half life is
(a) (2.5 x 2) hours
(b) \((\frac { 2.5 }{ 2 })\) hours
(c) 2.5 hours
(d) Without knowing the rate constant, t1/2 cannot be determined from the given data
Answer:
(d) Without knowing the rate constant, t1/2 cannot be determined from the given data.
Solutions:
For a first order reaction
t1/2 = \(\frac { 0.693 }{ k }\) t1/2 does not depend on the initial concentration and it remains constant (whatever may be the initial concentration)
t1/2 = 2.5 hrs .

Samacheer 12 Chemistry Solutions Question 5.
For the reaction, 2NH3 → N2 + 3H2, if
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics
then the relation between
k1, k2 and k3 is
(a) k1 = k2 = k3
(b) k1 = 3 k2 = 2 k3
(c) 1.5k1 = 3 k2 = k3
(d) 2k1 = k2 = 3 k3
Answer:
(c) 1.5k1 = 3 k2 = k3
Solution:
Chemical Kinetics Solutions Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chapter 7

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Question 6.
The decomposition of phosphine (PH3) on tungsten at low pressure is a first order reaction. It is because the …………….
(a) rate is proportional to the surface coverage
(b) rate is inversely proportional to the surface coverage
(c) rate is independent of the surface coverage
(d) rate of decomposition is slow
Answer:
(c) rate is independent of the surface coverage
Solution:
Given:
At low pressure the reaction follows first order, therefore Rate ∝ [reactant]1 Rate ∝ (surface area) At high pressure due to the complete coverage of surface area, the reaction follows zero order. Rate ∝ [reactant]°. Therefore the rate is independent of surface area.

Chemical Kinetics Solutions Question 7.
For a reaction Rate = k [acetone]3/2 then unit of rate constant and rate of reaction respectively is …………..
(a) (mol L-1 s-1), (mol-1/2 L1/2 s-1)
(b) (mol-1/2 L1/2 s-1), (mol L-1 s-1)
(c) (mol1/2 L1/2 s-1), (mol L-1 s-1)
(d) (mol L s-1), (mol1/2 L1/2 s)
Answer:
(b) (mol1/2 L1/2 s-1), (mol L-1 s-1)
Solution:
Rate = k [A]n
Rate = \(\frac { -d[A] }{ dt } \)
unit of rate = \(\frac { mol{ L }^{ -1 } }{ s }\) = mol L-1 s-1
unit of rate constant = \(\frac { (mol{ L }^{ -1 }{ S }^{ -1 }) }{ { (mol{ L }^{ -1 }) }^{ n } }\)
= mol1-n Ln-1 S-1
in this case, rate k [Acetone]3/2
n = 3/2
mol1-(3/2) L(3/2)-1 s-1
mol-(1/2) L(1/2) s-1

Samacheer Kalvi Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Question 8.
The addition of a catalyst during a chemical reaction alters which of the following quantities?
(a) Enthalpy
(b) Activation energy
(c) Entropy
(d) Internal energy
Answer:
(b) Activation energy
Solution:
A catalyst provides a new path to the reaction with low activation energy. i.e., it lowers the activation energy.

Chemical Kinetics In Tamil Question 9.
Consider the following statements:
(i) increase in concentration of the reactant increases the rate of a zero order reaction.
(ii) rate constant k is equal to collision frequency A if Ea = o
(iii) rate constant k is equal to collision frequency A if Ea = o
(iv) a plot of ln (k) vs T is a straight line.
(v) a plot of In (k) vs \((\frac { 1 }{ T })\) is a straight line with a positive slope.

Correct statements are
(a) (ii) only
(b) (ii) and (iv)
(c) (ii) and (v)
(d) (i), (ii) and (v)
Answer:
(a) (ii) only
Solutions:
In zero order reactions, increase in the concentration of reactant does not alter the rate, So statement (i) is wrong.
Samacheer Kalvi Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics
if Ea = O (so, statement (ii) is correct, and statement (iii) is wrong)
k = A e°
k = A
in k = A – \(\left( \frac { { E }_{ a } }{ R } \right)\) \(\frac { 1 }{ T }\)
this equation is in the form of a straight line equation yc + m x. a plot of Ink vs \(\frac { 1 }{ T }\) is a straight line with negative slope so statements (iv) and (v) are wrong.

Samacheer Kalvi Guru Class 12 Chemistry Question 10.
In a reversible reaction, the enthalpy change and the activation energy in the forward direction are respectively – x kJ mol-1 and y kJ mol-1. Therefore, the energy of activation in the backward direction is ………..
(a) (v – x)kJ mol-1
(b) (x + y) J mol-1
(c) (x – y) kJ mol-1
(d) (x + y) x 103 J mol-1
Answer:
(d) (x + y) x 103 J mol-1
Solution:
Chemical Kinetics In Tamil Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7

12th Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Question 11.
What is the activation energy for a reaction if its rate doubles when the temperature is raised from 200K to 400K? (R 8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
(a) 234.65 kJ mol-1 K-1
(b) 434.65 kJ mol-1 K-1
(c) 434.65 J mol-1 K-1
(d) 334.65 J mol-1 K-1
Answer:
(c)434.65 J mol-1 K-1
Solutions:
Samacheer Kalvi Guru Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics

Question 12.
12th Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics
This reaction follows first order kinetics. The rate constant at particular temperature is 2.303 x 102 hourd. The initial concentration of cyclopropane is 0.25 M. What will be the concentration of cyclopropane after 1806 minutes? (Log 2 = 0.30 10)
(a) 0.125 M
(b) 0.215 M
(c) 0.25 x 2.303 M
(d) 0.05 M
Answer:
(b) 0.2 15 M
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-12

Question 13.
For a first order reaction, the rate constant is 6.909 min-1.The time taken for 75% conversion in minutes is …………
(a) \((\frac { 3 }{ 2 })\) log 2
(b) \((\frac { 3 }{ 2 })\) log 2
(c) \((\frac { 3 }{ 2 })\) log \((\frac { 3 }{ 4 })\)
(d) \((\frac { 2 }{ 3 })\) log \((\frac { 4 }{ 3 })\)
Answer:
(b) \((\frac { 3 }{ 2 })\) log 2
Solution:
k = \((\frac { 2.303 }{ t })\) log \(\left( \frac { \left[ { A }_{ 0 } \right] }{ \left[ A \right] } \right)\)
[A0] = 100
[A] = 25
[A0]= 100; [A]=25
6.909 = \((\frac { 2.303 }{ t })\) log \((\frac { 100 }{ 25 })\)
t = \((\frac { 2.303 }{ 6.909 })\) log (4) ⇒ t = \((\frac { 1 }{ 3 })\) log 22
t = \((\frac { 2 }{ 3 })\) log 2

Question 14.
In a first order reaction x → y; if k is the rate constant and the initial concentration of the reactant x is 0.1 M, then, the half life is ……..
(a) \((\frac { log2 }{ k })\)
(b) \((\frac { 0.693 }{ (0.1)k })\)
(c) \((\frac { In2 }{ k })\)
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) \((\frac { In2 }{ k })\)
Solution:
k = \((\frac { 1 }{ t })\) In \(\left( \frac { \left[ { A }_{ 0 } \right] }{ \left[ A \right] } \right)\)
[A0] = 0.1
[A] = 0.05
k = \(\left( \frac { 1 }{ { t }_{ 1/2 } } \right)\) In \((\frac { 0.1 }{ 0.05 })\)
k = \(\left( \frac { 1 }{ { t }_{ 1/2 } } \right)\) In (2) ⇒ t1/2 = \((\frac { In(2) }{ k })\)

Question 15.
Predict the rate law of the following reaction based on the data given below:
2A + B → C + 3D
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-15
(a) rate = k [A]2 [B]
(b) rate = k [A][B]2
(c) rate = k [A][B]
(d) rate = k [A]1/2 [B]3/2
Answer:
(b) rate = k [A][B]2
Solution:
rate1 = k [0.1]n [0.1]m ……………(1)
rate2 = k [0.2]n [0.1]m …………(2)
Dividing Eq.(2) by Eq.(1)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-16
\(\frac { 2x }{ x }\) = 2n
∴ n = 1
rate3 = k [0.1]n [0.2]m …………..(3)
rate4 = k [0.2]n [0.2]m …………..(4)
Dividing Eq.(4) by Eq.(2)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-17
\(\frac { 8 }{ 2 } \) = 2m
∴m = 1
∴ rate = k [A]1 [B]2

Question 16.
Assertion: rate of reaction doubles when the concentration of the reactant is doubles if it is a first order reaction.
Reason: rate constant also doubles
(a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.
(b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
(c) Assertion is true but reason is false.
(d) Both assertion and reason are false.
Answer:
(c) Assertion is true but reason is false.
Solution:
For a first reaction, when the concentration of reactant is doubled, then the rate of reaction also doubled. Rate constant is independent of concentration and is a constant at a constant temperature, i.e., it depends on the temperature and hence, it will not be doubled and when the concentration of the reactant is doubled.

Question 17.
The rate constant of a reaction is 5.8 x 102 s1. The order of the reaction is ………….
(a) First order
(b) zero order
(c) Second order
(a) Third order
Answer:
(a) First order
Solution:
The unit of rate constant is s-1 and it indicates that the reaction is first order.

Question 18.
For the reaction N2 O5(g) → 2NO2(g) +\(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) – O2(g) the value of rate of disappearance of N2O5 is given as 6.5 x 10-2 mol L-1s-1 The rate of formation of NO2 and O2 is given respectively as …………….
(a) (3.25 x 10-2 mol L-1s-1) and (1.3 x 10-2 mol L-1s-1)
(b) (1.3 x 10-2 mol L-1s-1) and (3.25 x 102 mol L-1s-1)
(c) (1.3 x 10-1 mol L-1s-1) and (3.25 x 10-2 mol L-1s-1)
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) (1.3 x 10-1 mol L-1s-1) and (3.25 x 10-2 mol L-1s-1)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-18

Question 19.
During the decomposition of H2O2 to give dioxygen, 48g O2 is formed per minute at certain point of time. The rate of formation of water at this point is …………….
(a) 0.75 mol min-1
(b) 1.5 mol min-1
(c) 2.25 mol min-1
(d) 3.0 mol min-1
Answer:
(d) 3.0 mol min-1
Solution:
H2O2 → H2O + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)O2
Rate = Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-19
No. of moles of oxygen = \((\frac { 48 }{ 32 })\) = 1.5 mol
Rate of formation of oxygen = 2 x 1.5
= 3 mol min-1

Question 20.
If the initial concentration of the reactant is doubled, the time for half reaction is also doubled. Then the order of the reaction is …………
(a) Zero
(b) one
(c) Fraction
(d) none
Answer:
(a) Zero
Solution:
For a first order reaction t1/2 is independent of initial concentration .i.e., n \(\neq\) 1 for such cases
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-20

Question 21.
In a homogeneous reaction A ? B + C + D, the initial pressure was P0 and after time t it was P. Expression for rate constant in terms of P0, P and t will be ……….
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-21
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-22
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-23
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-24

Question 22.
If 75% of a first order reaction was completed in 60 minutes, 50% of the same reaction under the same conditions would be completed in ………
(a) 20 minutes
(b) 30 minutes
(c) 35 minutes
(d) 75 minutes
Answer:
(b) 30 minutes
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-25

Question 23.
The half life period of a radioactive element is 140 days. After 560 days, 1 g of element will be reduced to
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) g
(b) \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 }\) g
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 }\) g
(d) \(\frac { 1 }{ 16 }\) g
Answer:
(d) \(\frac { 1 }{ 16 }\) g
Solution:
in 140 days ⇒ initial concentration reduced to \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) g
in 280 days ⇒ initial concentration reduced to \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 }\) g
in 420 days ⇒ initial concentration reduced to \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 }\) g
in 560 days ⇒ initial concentration reduced to \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 }\) g

Question 24.
The correct difference between first and second order reactions is that …………
(a) A first order reaction can be catalysed a second order reaction cannot be catalysed.
(b) The half life of a first order reaction does not depend on [A0] the half life of a second order reaction does depend on [A0].
(c) The rate of a first order reaction does not depend on reactant concentrations; the rate of a second order reaction does depend on reactant concentrations.
(d) The rate of a first order reaction does depend on reactant concentrations; the rate of a second order reaction does not depend on reactant concentrations,
Answer:
(b) The half life of a first order reaction does not depend on [A0]; the half life of a second order reaction does depend on [A0].
Solution:
For a first order reaction
t1/2 = \(\frac { 0.6932 }{ k }\)
For a second order reaction
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-26

Question 25.
After 2 hours, a radioactive substance becomes \((\frac { 1 }{ 16 })\)th of original amount. Then the half life (in mm) is ………………
(a) 60 minutes
(b) 120 minutes
(c) 30 minutes
(d) 15 minutes
Answer:
(c) 30 minutes
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-27

II . Answer the following questions:

Question 1.
Define average rate and instantaneous rate.
Answer:
1. Average rate:
The average rate of a reaction is defined as the rate of change of concentration of a reactant (or of a product) over a specified measurable period of time.

2. insantaneous rate:
Instantaneous rate of reaction gives the tendency of the reaction at a particular point of time during its course (or) The time derivative of the concentration of a reactant (or product) converted to a positive number is called the instantaneous rate of reaction.

Question 2.
Define rate law and rate constant.
1. Rate law:
The expression in which reaction rate is given in terms of molar concentration of the reactants with each term raised to some power, which may or may not be same as the Stoichiometric coefficient of the reacting species in a balanced chemical equation.
x A + y B → products
Rate = k [A]m [B]m
k = Rate constant

2. Rate constant:
For a reaction involving the reactants A and B, Reaction rate = k [A]m [B]m The constant k is called rate constant of the reaction. If [A] = 1 M and [B] = 1 M; Reaction rate = k Thus, the rate constant (k) of a reaction is equal to the rate of reaction when the concentration of each reactant is equal to 1 mol L-1. The change in the concentration of reactant or product per unit time under the condition of unit concentration of all the reactant.

Question 3.
Derive integrated rate law for a zero order reaction A product. A reaction in which the rate is independent of the concentration of the reactant over a wide range of concentrations is called as zero order reactions. Such reactions are rare. Let us consider the following hypothetical zero order reaction.
A → Product
The rate law can be written
Rate = k [A]°
(∴[A]° = 1)
– d [A] k (l)
\(\frac { -d[A] }{ dt }\) = k(1)
-d[A] = k dt
Integrate the above equation between the limits of [A0] at zero time and [A] at some later time ‘t’,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-28

Question 4.
Define half life of a reaction. Show that for a first order reaction half life is independent of Initial concentration.
Answer:
Half life of a reaction is defined as the time required for the reactant concentration to reach one half of its initial value. For a first order reaction, the half life is a constant i.e., it does not depend on the initial concentration. The rate constant for a first order reaction is given by,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-29
Question 5.
What is an elementary reaction? Give the differences between order and molecularity of a reaction.
Answer:
Elementary reaction – Each and every single step in a reaction mechanism is called an elementary reaction. Differences between order and molecularity:
Order of a reaction:

  1. It is the sum of the powers of concentration terms involved in the experimentally determined rate law.
  2. It can be zero (or) fractional (or) integer.
  3. It is assigned for a overall reaction.

Molecularity of a reaction:

  1. It is the total number of reactant species that are involved in an elementary step.
  2. It is always a whole number, cannot be zero or a fractional number.
  3. It is assigned for each elementary step of mechanism.

Question 6.
Explain the rate determining step with an example.
Answer:
1. Most of the chemical reactions occur by multistep reactions. In the sequence of steps it is found that one of the steps is considerably slower than the others. The overall rate of the reaction cannot be lower in value than the rate of the slowest step.

2. Thus in a multistep reaction the experimentally determined rate corresponds to the rate of the slowest step. The step which has the lowest rate value among the other steps of the reaction is called as the rate determining step (or) rate limiting step.

3. Consider the reaction,
2A + B → C + D
going by two steps as follows,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-30
Here the overall rate of the reaction corresponds to the rate of the first step which is the slow step and thus the first step is called as the rate determining step of the reaction. In the above equation, the rate of the reaction depends upon the rate constant k ( only. The rate of second step dosn’t contribute experimentally determined overall rate of the reaction.
For example,
NO2(g) + CO2(g) → NO(g) + CO2(g)
Which occurs in two elementary steps:

  • NO2 + NO2 → NO + NO3 (Slow)
  • NO3+ CO → NO2 + CO2 (fast)

Because the first step is the lowest step, the overall reaction cannot proceed any faster than the rate of the first elementary step. The first elementary step in this example is therefore the rate determining step.

The rate equation for this reaction is equal to the rate is constant of step-1 multiplied by the reactants of that first step. If the rate constant of step-1 is denoted as k1 then the rate of the first step in the reaction (and the total reaction) will be,
Rate = k, [NO2] [NO2]
= k1 [NO2]2

Question 7.
Describe the graphical representation of first order reaction.
Answer:
Rate constant for first order reaction is,
kt = ln\(\left( \frac { \left[ { A }_{ 0 } \right] }{ \left[ A \right] } \right)\)
kt = In [A0] – In [A]
In[A] = In [A0] – kty = c + mx
If we follow the reaction by measuring the concentration of the reactants at regular time interval ‘t’, a plot of ln[A] against ‘t’ yields a straight line with a negative slope. From this, the rate constant is calculated.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-31

Question 8.
Write the rate law for the following reactions.

  1. A reaction that is 3/2 order in x and zero order in y.
  2. A reaction that is second order in NO and first order in Br2.

Answer:
1. \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\) x + y (excess) → products
– \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\) \(\frac { d[x] }{ dt }\) = k [x]3/2

2. 2NO + Br2 → products
– \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) \(\frac { d[NO] }{ dt }\) = k [NO]2 [Br2]

Question 9.
Explain the effect of catalyst on reaction rate with an example.
Answer:

  1. Significant changes in the reaction can be brought out by the addition of a substance called catalyst.
  2. A catalyst is substance which alters the rate of a reaction without itself undergoing any permanent chemical change.
  3. They may participate in the reaction, but again regenerated and the end of the reaction.
  4. In the presence of a catalyst, the energy of activation is lowered and hence, greater number of molecules can cross the energy barrier and change over to products, thereby increasing the rate of the reaction.
  5. For example, decomposition of potassium chlorate is enhanced by addition of MnO2.

2KClO3 \(\frac{\mathrm{MnO}_{4}}{\Delta} 2 \mathrm{KCl}\) + 3O2 (MnO2 – Catalyst)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-32

Question 10.
The rate law for a reaction of A, B and C has been found to be rate = k[A]2 [B][L]3/2. How would the rate of reaction change when

  1. Concentration of [L] is quadrupled
  2. Concentration of both [A] and [B] are doubled
  3. Concentration of [A] is halved
  4. Concentration of [A] is reduced to(1/3) and concentration of [L] is quadrupled.

Solution:
Rate = k [A]2 [B] [L]3/2 ………….(1)
1. when [L] = [4L]
Rate = k [A]2 [B] [4L]3/2
Rate = 8 (k[A]2 [B] [L]3/2) …………………..(2)
Comparing (1) and (3) rate is increased by 8 times.

2. when [A] = [2A] and [B] = [2B]
Rate = k[2A]2 [2B ] [L]3/2
Rate = 8 (k[A]2 [B] [L]3/2 …………….(3)
Comparing (1) and (3); rate is increased by 8 times.

3. when [A] = \([\frac { A }{ 2 }]\)
Rate = k \([\frac { A }{ 2 }]\)2 [L]\(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\)
Rate = \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 }\) (k[A]2 [B] [L]3/2) ……………..(4)
Comparing (1) and ( 4); rate is reduced to \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 }\) times.

4. when [A] = \([\frac { A }{ 3 }]\) and [L] = [4L]
Rate k\(\frac { A }{ 3 }\)2 [B] [4L]3/2
Rate = \([\frac { 8 }{ 9 }]\) (k[A]2 [B] [L]3/2) ……………….(5)
Comparing (1) and (5); rate is reduced to 8/9 times.

Question 11.
The rate of formation of a dimer in a second order reaction is 7.5 x 10-3 mol L-1s-1 at 0.05 mol L-1 monomer concentration. Calculate the rate constant.
Solution:
Let us consider the dimensation of a monomer M
2M → (M)2
Rate = k [M]n
Given that n =2 and [M] = 0.05 mol L-1
Rate = 7.5 x 10-3 mol L-1s-1
Rate 7.5 x 103 mol L-1 s-1
k = \(\frac { Rate }{ { \left[ M \right] }^{ n } }\)
k= =\(\frac { 7.5\times { 10 }^{ -3 } }{ { \left( 0.05 \right) }^{ 2 } }\) = 3 mol-1 Ls-1

Question 12.
For a reaction x +y + z → products, the rate law is given by rate = k [x]3/2 [y]1/2 what is the overall order of the reaction and what is the order of the reaction with respect to z.
Solution:
Rate = k [x]3/2 [y]1/2
overall order = \(\left( \frac { 3 }{ 2 } +\frac { 1 }{ 2 } \right)\) = 2
i.e., second order reaction.
Since the rate expression does not contain the concentration of Z , the reaction is zero order with respect to Z.

Question 13.
Explain briefly the collision theory of bimolecular reactions.
Answer:
Collision theory is based on the kinetic theory of gases. According to this theory, chemical reactions occur as a result of collisions between the reacting molecules. Let us understand this theory by considering the following reaction.
A2(g) + B2(g) → 2AB(g)

If we consider that, the reaction between A2 and B2 molecules proceeds through collisions between them, then the rate would be proportional to the number of collisions per second. Rate ix Number of molecules colliding per litre per second (or) Rate ∝ Collision rate. The number of collisions is directly proportional to the concentration of both A2 and B2.
Collision rate ∝ [A2] [B2] …………………(1)
Collision rate = Z [A2] [B2] ……………………..(2)
Where, Z is a constant.

The collision rate ¡n gases can be calculated from kinetic theory of gases. For a gas at room temperature (298K) and 1 atm pressure, each molecule undergoes approximately 109 collisions per second, i.e., I collision in 109 second. Thus, if every collision resulted in reaction, the reaction would be complete in 109 second.

In actual practice this does not happen. It implies that all collisions are not effective to lead to the reaction. In order to react, the colliding molecules must possess a minimum energy called activation energy. The molecules that collide with less energy than activation energy will remain intact and no reaction occurs.

Fraction of effective collisions (f) is given by the following expression, \({ e }^{ \frac { { -E }_{ a } }{ RT } }\)
Fraction of collisions is further reduced due to orientation factor i.e., even if the reactant collide with sufficient energy, they will not react unless the orientation of the reactant molecules is suitable for the formation of the transition state. The fraction of effective collisions (f) having proper orientation is given by the steric factor P.

Rate = P x f x collision rate
Rate= P x \({ e }^{ \frac { { -E }_{ a } }{ RT } }\) x Z [A2] [B2] ……..(1)
As per the rate law, Rate = k [A2] [B2] ………………….(2)
Where k is the rate constant
On comparing equation (1) and (2), the rate constant k is,
k = p Z \({ e }^{ \frac { { -E }_{ a } }{ RT } }\)

Question 14.
Write Arrhenius equation and explains the terms involved.
Answer:
Arrhenius equation:
k = A\({ e }^{ \frac { { -E }_{ a } }{ RT } }\)
A = Arrhenius factor (frequency factor)
R = Gas constant
k = Rate constant
Ea = Activation energy
T = Absolute temperature (in K)

Question.15.
The decomposition of Cl2O7 at 500K in the gas phase to Cl2 and O2 is a first order reaction. After 1 minute at 500K, the pressure of Cl2O7 falls from 0.08 to 0.04 atm. Calculate the rate constant in s-1.
Answer:
Solution:
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ t }\) log \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{A}_{0}\right]}{[\mathrm{A}]}\)
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ 1 min }\) log \(\frac { [0.08] }{ [0.04] }\)
k = 2.303 log 2
k = 2.303 x 0.3010
k = 0.693 2 min-1
k = \((\frac { 0.6932 }{ 60 })\) s-1
k = 1.153 x 10-2 s-1

Question 16.
Give the examples for a zero order reaction.
Answer:
Examples for a zero order reaction:
1. Photochemical reaction between H2 and Cl
H2(g) + Cl2(g) \(\underrightarrow { h\nu }\) 2HCI(g)

2. Decomposition of N2O on hot platinum surface
N2 O(g) \(\rightleftharpoons\) N2(g) + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) O2(g)

3. lodination of acetone in acid medium is zero order with respect to iodine.
CH3COCH3 + I2 \(\underrightarrow { { H }^{ + } } \) ICH2COCH3 + HI
Rate k [CH3COCI3] [H+]

Question 17.
Explain pseudo first order reaction with an example.
Answer:
A second order reaction can be altered to a first order reaction by taking one of the reactant in large excess, such reaction is called pseudo first order reaction. Let us consider the acid hydrolysis of an ester,
CH3COOCH3(aq) +H2 O(1) \(\underrightarrow { { H }^{ + } } \) CH3COOH(aq) + CH3OH(aq)
Rate = k [CH3COOCH3] [H2O]

If the reaction is carried out with the large excess of water, there is no significant change in the concentration of water during hydrolysis. i.e., concentration of water remains almost a constant. Now we can define k [H2O] = k
∴ The above rate equation becomes
Rate k [CHCOOCH] Thus it follows first order kinetics.

Question 18.
Identify the order for the following reactions

  1. Rusting of Iron
  2. Radioactive disintegration of 92U23
  3. 2 A+ B → products; rate = k [A]1/2 [B]2

Answer:
1.Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-36
Theoritically order value may be more than one but practically one.

2. All radioactive disintegrations are first order reactions

3. 2A + 3B → products:
rate = k[A]1/2 [B]2
Order = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) + 2 = \(\frac { 5 }{ 2 }\) = 2.5

Question 19.
A gas phase reaction has energy of activation 200 kJ mol-1. If the frequency factor of the reaction is 1.6 x 1013 s-1. Calculate the rate constant at 600 K. (e-40.09 = 3.8 x I0-18 )
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-37

Question 20.
For the reaction 2x +y → L find the rate law from the following data.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-38
Answer:
Rate = k [x]n [y]m
0.15 = k [0.2]n [0.02]m ……………..(1)
0.30 = k [0.4]n [0.02]m ……………… (2)
1.20 = k [0.4]n [0.08]m ……………… (3)
Dividing Eq(3) by Eq (2) we get
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-39
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-40

Question 21.
How do concentrations of the reactant influence the rate of reaction?
Answer:
The rate of a reaction increases with the increase in the concentration of the reactants. The effect of concentration is explained on the basis of collision theory of reaction rates.

According to this theory, the rate of a reaction depends upon the number of collisions between the reacting molecules. Higher the concentration, greater is the possibility for collision and hence the rate.

Question 22.
How do nature of the reactant influence rate of reaction?
Answer:
Nature and state of the reactant:
We know that a chemical reaction involves breaking of certain existing bonds of the reactant and forming new bonds which lead to the product.

The net energy involved in this process is dependent on the nature of the reactant and hence the rates arc different for different reactants. Let us compare the following two reactions that we carried out in volumetric analysis.

  1. Redox reaction between ferrous ammonium sulphate (FAS) and KMnO4
  2. Redox reaction between oxalic acid and KMnO4

The oxidation of oxalate ion by KMnO4 is relatively slow compared to the reaction between KMnO4 and Fe . In fact heating is required for the reaction between KMnO4 and Oxalate ion and is carried out at around 60°C. The physical state of the reactant also plays an important role to influence the rate of reactions. Gas phase reactions are faster as compared to the reactions involving solid or liquid reactants.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-41
For example, reaction of sodium metal with iodine vapours is faster than the reaction between solid sodium and solid iodine. Let us consider another example that we carried out in inorganic qualitative analysis of lead salts.

If we mix the aqueous solution of colorless potassium iodide with the colorless solution of lead nitrate, precipitation of yellow lead iodide take place instantancously, whereas if we mix the solid lead nitrate with solid potassium iodide, yellow coloration will appear slowly.

Question 23.
The rate constant for a first order reaction is 1.54 x 10 s-1. Calculate its half life time.
Answer:
We know that, t, 0.693 k
t1/2 = 0.693/1.54 x 1o-3 = 450 s

Question 24.
The half life of the homogeneous gaseous reaction SO2CI2 → SO2 + Cl2 which obeys first order kinetics Is 8.0 minutes. How long will it take for the concentration of SO2Cl2 to be reduced to 1% of the initial value?
Answer:
We know that, k = 0.693/ t1/2
k = 0.693/8.0 minutes = 0.087 minutes -1
For a first order reaction,
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ k }\) log \(\left( \frac { \left[ { A }_{ 0 } \right] }{ \left[ A \right] } \right)\)
t = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ 0.087{ min }^{ -1 } }\) log\(\frac { 100 }{ 1 }\)
t = 52.93 mm

Question 25.
The time for half change in a first order decomposition of a substance A is 60 seconds. Calculate the rate constant. How much of A will be left after 180 seconds?
Answer:
1. Order of a reaction = 1
t1/2 = 60
seconds, k = ?
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ 60 }\)
We know that, k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ { t }_{ 1/2 } }\)
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ 60 }\) = 0.01155 s-1

2. [A0] = 100%
t = 180 s
k = 0.01155 seconds-1
[A] = ?
For the first order reaction k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ 60 }\) log \(\left( \frac { \left[ { A }_{ 0 } \right] }{ \left[ A \right] } \right)\)
0.9207 = log 100 – log [A]
log [A] = log 100 – 0.9207
log [A] = 2 – 0.9207
log[A] = 1.0973
[A] = antilog of (1.0973)
[A] = l2.5%

Question 26.
A zero order reaction is 20% complete in 20 minutes. Calculate the value of the rate constant. In what time will the reaction be 80% complete?
Answer:
1. A = 100%, x = 20%, Therefore, a – x =100 – 20 = 80
For the zero order reaction k= \((\frac { x }{ t })\) ⇒
k = \((\frac { 20 }{ 20 })\) = 1
Rate constant for a reaction = 1

2. To calculate the time for 80% of completion
k = 1, a = l00, x = 80%, t = ?
Therefore, t = \((\frac { x }{ k })\) = \((\frac { 80 }{ 1 })\) = 80 min

Question 27.
The activation energy of a reaction is 225 k cal mol-1 and the value of rate constant at 40°C is 1.8 x 10-5 s-1. Calculate the frequency factor, A. Here, we arc given that
Answer:
Ea = 22.5 kcal mol-1 = 22500 cal mol-1
T = 40°C = 40 + 273 = 313 K
k = 1.8 x 10-5 sec-1
Substituting the values in the equation
log A = log k + \(\left( \frac { { E }_{ a } }{ 2.303RT } \right)\)
log A = log (l .8 x 10-5) + \(\left( \frac { 22500 }{ 2.303\times 1.987\times 313 } \right)\)
log A = log (l.8) – 5 + (15.7089)
log A = (10.9642)
A = antilog ( 10.9642)
A = 9.208 x 1010 collisions s-1

Question 28.
Benzene diazonium chloride in aqueous solution decomposes according to the equation
C6H5N2CI C6H5CI + N2. Starting with an initial concentration of 10 g L-1 volume of N2. gas obtained at 50°C at different intervals of time was found to be as under:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-43
Show that the above reaction follows the first order kinetics. What is the value of the rate constant ?
Solution:
For a first order reaction
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ t }\) log \(\frac { a }{ (a-x) }\)
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ t }\) log \(\frac { { V }_{ \infty } }{ { V }_{ \infty }-{ V }_{ t } }\)
In this case, V = 58.3 ml
The value of k at different time can be calculated as follows:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-44
Since the value of k comes out to be nearly constant, the given reaction is of the first order. The mean value of k = 0.0674 min-1

Question 29.
From the following data, show that the decomposition of hydrogen peroxide is a reaction of the first order:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-45
Where t is the volume of standard KMnO4 solution required for titrating the same volume of the reaction mixture.
Solution:
Volume of KMnO4 solution used Amount of H2O2 present. Hence if the given reaction is of the first order, it must obey the equation
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ t }\) log \(\frac { a }{ (a-x) }\)
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ t }\) log \(\frac { { V }_{ 0 } }{ { V }_{ t } }\)
In this case,V0 = 46.1 ml
The value of k at each instant can be calculated as follows:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-46
Thus, the value of k comes out to be nearly constant. Hence it is a reaction of the first order.

Question 30.
A first order reaction is 40% complete in 50 minutes. Calculate the value of the rate constant. in what time will the reaction be 80% complete?
Answer:
1. For the first order reaction k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ t }\) log \(\frac { a }{ (a-x) }\)
Assume, a = 100 %, x = 40%, t = 50 minutes
Therefore, a – x = 100 – 40 = 60
k = (2.303/50) log (100/60)
k = 0.010216 min-1
Hence the value of the rate constant is 0.010216 min-1

2. t = ?, when x = 8O%
Therefore, a – x = 100 – 80 = 20
From above, k = 0.0102 16 min-1
t = (2.303 / 0.010216) log (100 / 20)
t = 157.58 min
The time at which the reaction will be 80% complete is 157.58 min.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chemical Kinetics Elements Evaluate yourself

Question 1.
Write the rate expression for the following reactions, assuming them as elementary reactions.

  1. 3A + 5B2 → 4CD
  2. X2 + Y2 → 2XY

Answer:
1. 3A + 5B2 → 4CD
Rate = – \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 }\) \(\frac { \triangle [A] }{ dt }\)
= – \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 }\) \(\frac { \triangle [{ B }_{ 2 }] }{ dt }\)
= + \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 }\) \(\frac { \triangle [CD] }{ dt }\)

2. X2 + Y2 → 2XY
Rate = – \(\frac { \triangle [{ X }_{ 2 }] }{ dt }\)
= + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) \( [latex]\frac { \triangle [{ XY }_{ 2 }] }{ dt }\)

Question 2.
Consider the decomposition of N2O5(g) to form NO2(g) and O2(g). At a particular instant N2O5 disappears at a rate of 2.5 x 10-2 mol dm-3 s-1. At what rates are NO2 and O2 formed? What is the rate of the reaction?
Solution:
2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
from the stoichiometry of the reaction.
– \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) \(\frac { d[{ N }_{ 2 }{ O }_{ 5 }] }{ dt }\)
= \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 }\) \(\frac { d[{ N }{ O }_{ 2 }] }{ dt }\)
= –\(\frac { d[{ N }{ O }_{ 2 }] }{ dt }\)
= 2 –\(\frac { d[{ N }_{ 2 }{ O }_{ 5 }] }{ dt }\)
Rate of disappearance of N2O5 is 2.5 x 10-2 mol dm-3 s-1
∴ The rate of formation of NO2 at this temperature is 2 x 2.5 x 10-2 = 5 x 10-2 mol dm-3 s-1.
– \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) \(\frac { d[{ N }_{ 2 }{ O }_{ 5 }] }{ dt }\)
= – \(\frac { d[{ O }_{ 2 }] }{ dt }\)
∴ \(\frac { d[{ O }_{ 2 }] }{ dt }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) x 2.5 x 10-2 mol dm-3 s-1
= 1.25 x 10-2 mol dm-3 s-1

Question 3.
For a reaction, X + Y → Product quadrupling [x], increases the rate by a factor of 8. Quailrupling both [x] and [y] increases the rate by a factor of 16. Find the order of the reaction with respect to x and y. what is the overall order of the reaction?
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-51
z = k[x]m [y]n …………(1)
8z = k[x]m [y]n …………(2)
16z = k[x]m [y]n ……………(3)
Dividing Eq (2) by Eq (1) we get,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-95
8 = 4m ⇒23 = (22)m ⇒ 2 = 22m
2m = 3
m = 3/2
1.5 order with respect to x.
Dividing Eq (3) by Eq (1) we get,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-96
16 = 4m. 4n
16 = 42. 4n
\(\frac { 16 }{ 16 }\) = 4n
1 = 4n
∴ n = 0 [Zero order with respect to y]
Overall order of the reaction.
k [x]m [y]n
k [x]1.5 [y]0
Order (1.5+0) = 1.5

Question 4.
Find the individual and overall order of the following reaction using the given data.
2NO(g) + Cl2 (g) → 2NOCI(g)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-97
Solution:
Rate = k [NO]m [CI2]
For experiment 1, the rate law is,
Rate1 = k [NO]m [CI2]n
7.8 x 10-5 k[0.1]m [0.1]n ………………(1)

For experiment 2, the rate law is.
Rate2 = k [NO]m [CI2]n
3.12 x 10-4 = k[O.2]m [0.1]n ……………….(2)

For experiment 3, the rate law is,
Rate3 = k [NO]m [CI2]n
9.36 x 10-4 = k [O.2]m [0.3]m ……………(3)
Dividing Eq (2) by Eq (l) we get,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-99
4 = \(\frac { 0.2 }{ 0.1 }\)m
⇒ 22 = 2m
∴m = 2
Therefore the reaction is secondary order with respect to NO.
Dividing Eq (3) by Eq (2) we get,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-99
Therefore the reaction is first order with respect to Cl2
The rate law is, Rate = k [NO]2 [Cl2]1
The overall order of the reaction (2 +1) = 3.

Question 5.
In a first order reaction A → products, 60% of the given sample of A decomposes in 40 min. what is the half life of the reaction?
Solution:
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ t }\) log \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{A}_{0}\right]}{[\mathrm{A}]}\)
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ 40min }\) log \(\frac { 100 }{ (100-60) }\)
k = 0.0575 (0.3979) ⇒ k = 0.02287 min-1
t1/2 = \(\frac { 0.6932 }{ k }\) log \(\frac { 0.6932 }{ 0.02287 }\)
t1/2 = 30.31 min.

Question 6.
The rate constant for a first order reaction is 2.3 x 10-4 s-1. If the initial concentration of the reactant is 0.01 M. what concentration will remain after 1 hour?
Solution:
Rate constant of a first order reaction k = 2.3 x 10-4 s-1
Initial concentration of the reactant [A0] = 0.01 M
Initial concentration ot the reactant [A0] = 0.01 M
Concentration will remain after 1 hour [A] =7
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ t }\) log \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{A}_{0}\right]}{[\mathrm{A}]}\)
2.3 x 10-4 = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ 1 hour }\) log \(\frac { [0.01] }{ [A] }\)
\(\frac { 2.3\times { 10 }^{ -4 }\times 1 }{ 2.303 }\) = log [0.01] – log[A]
9.986 x 10-5 = – 2 – log [A]
11.986 x 10-5 = – log [A]
[A] = Antilog (-11.986 x 10-5)
[A] = 0.997 M

Question 7.
Hydrolysis of an ester in an aqueous solution was studied by titrating the liberated carboxylic acid against sodium hydroxide solution. The concentrations of the ester at different time intervals are given below.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-102
Show that, the reaction follows first order kinetics.
Solution:
The value of k at different time can be calculated as follows:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-103
This value shows that reaction follows first order kinetics.

Question 8.
For a first order reaction the rate constant at 500K is 8 x 10-4 s-1. Calculate the frequency factor, if the energy of activation for the reaction is 190 kJ mol-1.
k = 8 x 10-4s
T = 500K
Ea = 190 kJ mol-1 A = ?
According to Arrhenius equation,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-104

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chemical Kinetics Elements Text book Example problems

Question 1.
The oxidation of nitric oxide (NO)
2NO(g) + O2(g) → NO2(g)
Series of experiments are conducted by keeping the concentration of one of the reactants constant and the changing the concentration of the others.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-105
Find out the individual overall order of the reaction.
Solution:
Rate = k [NO]m [O2]n
For experiment 1, the rate law is
Rate2 = k [NO]m [O2]n
19.26 x 10-2 = k[1.3]m [1.1]n ………………(1)
Similarly for experiment 2
Rate2 = k [No]m [O2]n
38.40 x 10-2 = k [1.3]m [2.2]n …………………..(2)
For experiment 3
Rate3 = k [NO]m [O2]n
76.8 x 10-2 = k [2.6]m [1.1]n ……….(3)
Dividing Eq (2) by Eq (1)
\(\frac { 38.40\times { 10 }^{ -2 } }{ 19.26\times { 10 }^{ -2 } }\) = \(\frac { k{ \left[ 1.3 \right] }^{ m }{ \left[ 2.2 \right] }^{ n } }{ k{ \left[ 1.3 \right] }^{ m }{ \left[ 1.1 \right] }^{ n } }\)
2 = \({ \left( \frac { 2.2 }{ 1.1 } \right) }^{ n }\)
2 = 2n
i.e., n= 1
Therefore the reaction is first order with respect to O2
Dividing Eq (3) byEq (1)
\(\frac { 76.8\times { 10 }^{ -2 } }{ 19.26\times { 10 }^{ -2 } }\) = \(\frac { k{ \left[ 2.6 \right] }^{ m }{ \left[ 1.1 \right] }^{ n } }{ k{ \left[ 1.3 \right] }^{ m }{ \left[ 1.1 \right] }^{ n } }\)
4 = \({ \left( \frac { 2.6 }{ 1.3 } \right) }^{ m }\)
4 = 2m
i.e., m = 2
Therefore the reaction is second order with respect to NO
The rate law is Rate1 = k [NO]2 [O2]1
The overall order of the reaction = (2 + 1) = 3

Question 2.
Consider the oxidation of nitric oxide to form NO2
2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)

  • Express the rate of the reaction in terms of changes in the concentration of NO, O2 and NO2.
  • At a particular instant, when [O2] is decreasing at 0.2 mol L-1 s-1 at what rate is
    [NO2] increasing at that instant?

Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-108

Question 3.
What is the order with respect to each of the reactant and overall order of the following reactions?
1.  5Br(aq) + BrO3 (aq)+ 6H+(aq)  → 3Br2(1) +3H2O(1)
The experimental rate law is
Rate = k [Br] [BrO3][H+]2

2.  CH3 CHO(g) \(\underrightarrow { \triangle }\) CH4(g) + CO(g)
the experimental rate law is
Rate = k [CH3CHO]3/2
Solution:
1. First order with respect to Br, first order with respect to BrO3 and second order with respect to H+. Hence the overall order of the reaction is equal to 1+1+2=4

2. Order of the reaction with respect to acetaldehyde is \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\)and overall order is also \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\)

Question 4.
The rate of the reaction x + 2y → product is 4 x 10-3 mol L-1 s-1, if [x] = [y] = 0.2 M and rate constant at 400K is 2 x 10-2 s-1. what is the overall order of the reaction.
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-109
Comparing the powers on both sides, the overall order of the reaction n + m = 1

Question 5.
A first order reaction takes 8 hours for 90% completion. Calculate the time required for 80% completion. (log 5 = 0.6989; log10 = 1)
Solution:
For a first order reaction,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-110
Let [A0] = 100M
When
t = t90%; [A] = 10M (given that t90% = 8 hours)
t = t80%; [A] = 20M
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-111
Find the value of k using the given data
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t_{90 \%}}\) log \((\frac { 100 }{ 10 })\)
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ 8 hours }\) log 10
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ 8 hours }\) (1)
Substitute the value of k in equation (2)
t80% = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ 2.303/8 hours }\) log (5)
t80% = 8 hours x 0.6989
t80% = 5.59 hours

Question 6.
The half life of a first order reaction x → products is 6.932 x 104 s at 500K . What percentage of x would be decomposed on heating at 500K for 100 min. (e0.06 = 1.06)
Solution:
Given t1/2 = 0.6932 x 104 s
To solve: when t = 100 min
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-112
We know that for a first order reaction,t1/2 = \(\frac { 0.6932 }{ k }\)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-113

Question 7.
Show that in case of first order reaction, the time required for 99.9% completion is nearly ten times the time required for half completion of the reaction.
Solution:
Let [A0] = 100
When t = t99.9%; [A] = (100 – 99.9) = 0.1
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-114

Question 8.
The rate constant of a reaction at 400 and 200K are 0.04 and 0.02 s-1 respectively. Calculate the value of activation energy.
Answer:
According to Arrhenius equation.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-115

Question 9.
Rate constant k of a reaction varies with temperature T according to the following Arrhenius equation. log k = log A \(\frac { { E }_{ a } }{ 2.303R }\) \(\frac { 1 }{ T }\).

Where E is the activation energy. When a graph is plotted for log k Vs \(\frac { 1 }{ T }\) a straight line with a slope of 4000K is obtained. Calculate the activation energy.
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-116
Ea = – 2.303 Rm
Ea = – 2.303 x 8.314 JK-1 mol-1 x (-4000k)
Ea = 76,589 J mol-1
Ea = 76,589 kJ mol-1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chemical Kinetics Elements Additional Questions

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chemical Kinetics Elements 1 Mark Questions and Answers

I. Choose the correct answer.

Question 1.
Which one of the following is a slow reaction?
(a) Rusting of iron
(b) Combustion of carbon
(c) Reaction between BaCl2 and dil. H2SO4
(d) Reaction between acidified K2Cr2O7 with NaCl.
Answer:
(a) Rusting of iron

Question 2.
Which one of the following is the unit of rate of reaction?
(a) s-1
(b) mol s-1
(c) mol L-1 s-1
(d) mol L s
Answer:
(c) mol L-1 s-1

Question 3.
For a gas phase reaction, the unit of reaction rate is ……………
(a) s-1
(b) atm s-1
(c) mol L-1 s-1
(d) mol-1 L-1 s-1
Answer:
(b) atm s-1

Question 4.
For the reaction A → 2B, the rate of the reaction is ………….
(a) +\(\frac { d[B] }{ dt }\) = 2 – \(\frac { d[A] }{ dt }\)
(b) +\(\frac { d[A] }{ dt }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) \(\frac { d[B] }{ dt }\)
(c) Rate = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) = \(\frac { d[A] }{ dt }\)
(d) Rate = 2\(\frac { d[B] }{ dt }\)
Answer:
(a) +\(\frac { d[B] }{ dt }\) = 2 – \(\frac { d[A] }{ dt }\)

Question 5.
Consider the following statement.
(i) In ionisation of cyclopropane, if the concentration of cyclopropane is reduced half, the rate increases twice.
(ii) The rate of the reaction depends upon the concentration of the reactant.
(iii) Order values must be determined experimentally.

Which of the above statement (s) is / are not correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (ii) and (iii)
(c) (iii) only
(d) (ii) only
Answer:
(a) (i) only

Question 6.
In the reaction 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g) the order of the reaction with respect to NO is…………
(a) first order
(b) second order
(c) third order
(d) zero order
Answer:
(b) second order

Question 7.
In the reaction 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g). the order of the reaction with respect to O2is …….
(a) zero order
(b) first order
(c) second order
(d) third order
Answer:
(b) first order

Question 8.
The overall order of the reaction 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g) is …………….
(a) 2
(b) 1
(c) 3
(d) 0
Answer:
(c) 3

Question 9.
Consider the following statements.
(i) Rate of the reaction does not depend on the initial concentration of the reactants.
(ii) Rate constant of the reaction depends on the initial concentration of reactants.
(iii) Rate constant of the reaction is equal to the rate of the reaction, when the concentration of each of the reactants is unity.
Which of the above statement(s) is / are not correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (ii) only
(c) (i) and (ii)
(d) (iii) only
Answer:
(a) (iii) only

Question 10.
The overall molecularity of the reaction 2H2 O2(aq) \(\underrightarrow { { I }^{ – } }\) 2H2O1 + O2(g) is …………
(a) unimolecular
(b) bimolecular
(c) termolecular
(d) pentamolecular
Answer:
(b) bimolecular

Question 11.
Which of the following is the order of decomposition of hydrogen peroxide catalysed by I ………….
(a) First order
(b) Second order
(c) Zero order
(a) Third order
Answer:
(a) First order

Question 12.
Consider the following statements.
(i) order cannot be zero.
(ii) Molecularity can be zero (or) fractional (or) integer.
(iii) order can be determined only by experiment.

Which of the above statement(s) is / are not correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (ii) only
(c) (iii) only
(d) (i) and (ii)
Answer:
(c) (iii) only

Question 13.
The overall order of the reaction 5Br + BrO3 + 6H+ is ……..
(a) 4
(b) 3/2
(c) 12
(d) 1
Answer:
(a) 4

Question 14.
Which one of the following reaction is a fractional order reaction?
(a) 2NO +O2 → 2NO2
(b) CH3CHO(g) → CH4(g) + CO(g)
(c) 2H2O2 → 2H2)O(1) + O2(g)
(d) H2 + Br2 → 2HBr
Answer:
(b) CH3CHO(g) → CH4(g) + CO(g)

Question 15.
The order of decomposition of acetaldehyde is …………….
(a) 1
(b) 1.5
(c) 2
(d) 5/2
Answer:
(b) 1.5

Question 16.
Which one of the following is the unit of rate constant for a first order reaction?
(a) mol-1 L s-1
(b) mol L-1 s-1
(c) s-1
(d) mol L S
Answer:
(c) s-1

Question 17.
Which one of the following is an example for first order reaction?
(a) 2NO(g)+ O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
(b) CH3CHO(g) → CH4(g) + CO(g)
(c) SO2 Cl2(1) → SO2(g) + Cl2(g)
(d) 2HBr → H2 + Br2
Answer:
(c) SO2 Cl2(1) → SO2(g) + Cl2(g)

Question 18.
Which one of the following is not an example for first order reaction?
(a) N2O5(g) → 2NO2(g) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) O2(g)
(b) SO2Cl2(1) → SO2(g) + Cl2(g)
(e) H2O2(aq) → H2O1\(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)O2(g)
(d) CH3CHO(g) → CH4(g) + CO(g)
Answer:
(d) CH3CHO(g) → CH4(g) + CO(g)

Question 19.
What is the order of isomerisation of cyclopropane to propene?
(a) 1.5
(b) 3/2
(c) 5/2
(d) 1
Answer:
(d) 1

Question 20.
Which one of the following is an example of pseudo first order reaction?
(a) CH3CHO4(g) → CH4(g) + CO(g)
(b) 2H2O2(aq) → H2O(1) +O2(g)
(c) CH3COOCH3(aq) + H2O(1) \(\underrightarrow { { H }^{ + } }\) CH3COOH(aq) + CH3OH(aq)
(d) Isomerisation of cyclo propane to propene
Answer:
(c) CH3COOCH3(aq) + H2O(1) \(\underrightarrow { { H }^{ + } }\) CH3COOH(aq) + CH3OH(aq)

Question 21.
Which one of the following is called pseudo first order reaction?
(a) Decomposition of acetaldehyde
(b) Acid hydrolysis of an ester
(c) Isomerisation of cyclopropane to propene
(d) Decomposition of hydrogen peroxide
Answer:
(b) Acid hydrolysis of an ester

Question 22.
Which of the following is an example of zero order reaction?
(a) lodination of acetone in acid medium
(b) Hydrolysis of an ester in acid medium
(c) Decomposition of acetaldehyde
(d) Isomerisation of cyclopropane to propene
Answer:
(a) lodination of acetone in acid medium

Question 23.
Which one of the follow is not zero order reaction?
(a) H2(g) + Cl2(g) \(\underrightarrow { h\nu }\)  2HCI(g)
(b) N2O(g) \(\rightleftharpoons\) N2(g) + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) O2(g)
(c) CH3CHO(g) → CH4(g)+ CO(g)
(d) CH3COCH3 + I2 \(\underrightarrow { { H }^{ + } }\) CH2COCH3 + HI
Answer:
(c) CH3CHO(g) → CH4(g)+ CO(g)

Question 24.
Consider the following statements.
(i) For a first order reaction, half life period is independent of initial concentration.
(ii) Photo chemical reaction between H2 and Cl2 is a zero order reaction
(iii) Acid hydrolysis of an ester is a second order reaction

Which of the above statement is/are correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (iii) only
(c) (i) & (ii)
(d) (ii) & (iii)
Answer:
(c) (i) & (ii)

Question 25.
The formula of half life for an nth order reaction involving reactant A and n \(\neq\) 1 is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-117
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-118

Question 26.
The half life period of first order reaction is 10 seconds. What is the time required for 99.9% completion of that reaction?
(a) 20 seconds
(b) 1000 seconds
(c) 100 seconds
(d) 999 seconds
Answer:
(c) loo seconds
Hint:
10 x t1/2 = t99.9%
∴ t99.9% = 10 x 10 sec = 100 sec

Question 27.
Which one of the following is known as arrhenius equation?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-119
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-120

Question 28.
Which one of the following does not affect the rate of the reaction?
(a) Nature of the reactant
(b) Concentration of the reactants
(c) Surface area and temperature
(d) pressure
Answer:
(d) pressure

Question 29.
Consider the following statements.
(i) Higher the concentration, slower is the possibility for collision and rate also slower
(ii) Increase in surface area of reactant leads to more collisions per litre per second
(iii) Gas phas reactions are slower as compared to solid or liquid reactants

Which of the above statement is/are not correct?
(a) (ii)
(b) (i) & (iii)
(c) (ii) & (iii)
(d) (i) & (ii)
Answer:
(b) (i) & (iii)

Question 30.
Which of the following reaction take place at a faster rate?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-52
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-53

Question 31.
Which one of the following graph is not correct ………..
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-54
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-55

Question 32.
The half life of paracetamol with in the body is ………
(a) 2 hours
(b) 2.5 hours
(c) 6 hours
(d) 10 hours
Answer:
(b) 2.5 hours

Question 33.
What is the order of radioactive decay?
(a) first order
(b) zero order
(c) second order
(d) third order
Answer:
(a) first order

Question 34.
t1/2 of the reaction increases with increase in initial concentration of the reaction means the order of the reaction will be …………
(a) first order
(b) zero order
(c) second order
(d) third order
Answer:
(b) zero order

Question 35.
The reaction rate that does not decrease with time is …………
(a) pseudo first order reaction
(b) first order reaction
(c) zero order reaction
(d) second order reaction
Answer:
(c) zero order reaction

Question 36.
The rate of the reaction X → Y becomes 8 times when the concentration of the reactant ‘X’ is doubled. The rate law of the reaction is ………
(a) – \(\frac { d[x] }{ dt }\) = k[X]2
(b) – \(\frac { d[x] }{ dt }\) = k[X]3
(c) – \(\frac { d[x] }{ dt }\) = k[X]4
(d) – \(\frac { d[x] }{ dt }\) = k[X]8
Answer:
(b) – \(\frac { d[x] }{ dt }\) = k[X]3

Question 37.
The decomposition of ammonia gas on platinum surface has a rate constant k = 2.5 x 10-4 mol L-1 s-1 What is the order of the reaction?
(a) first order
(b) second order
(c) third order
(d) zero order
Answer:
(d) zero order

Question 38.
A reaction is 50% completed in 2 hours and 75% completed in 4 hours. Then the order of the reaction is ………….
(a) first order
(b) zero order
(c) second order
(d) third order
Answer:
(a) first order
Answer:
(a) first order

Question 39.
What is the rate equation for the reaction A + B → C has zero order?
(a) Rate = k
(b) Rate = k [A]
(c) Rate = k [A]. [B]
(a) Rate = k. \(\frac { 1 }{ [c] }\)
Answer:
(c) Rate = k [A]. [B]

Question 40.
How does the value of rate constant vary with reactant concentration?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-56
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-57

Question 41.
Identify the reaction order if the unit of rate constant is s-1 ……….
(a) zero order reaction
(b) second order reaction
(c) first order reaction
(d) third order reaction
Answer:
(c) first order reaction

Question 42.
What is unit of zero order reaction?
(a) s-1
(b) mol-1 L-1 s-1
(c) mol L-1 s-1
(d) mol L s-1
Answer:
(c) mol L-1 s-1

Question 43.
Which of the following factor affect the rate of the reaction’?
(a) volume
(b) pressure
(c) cone
(d) all the above
Answer:
(c) cone

Question 44.
Acid hydrolysis of an ester is an example of ………
(a) zero order reaction
(b) Pseudo first order reaction
(c) second order reaction
(d) first order reaction
Answer:
(b) Pseudo first order reaction

Question 45.
Polymerisation reactions follows ………………. order kinetics.
(a) fractional
(b) first
(c) zero
(d) Pseudo first
Answer:
(a) fractional

Question 46.
Activation energy of a chemical reaction can be determined by ……….
(a) changing concentration of the reactants
(b) Evaluating rate constants at standard temperature
(c) Evaluating rate constants at two different temperature
(d) Evaluating reIocities of reaction at two different temperature
Answer:
(c) Evaluating rate constants at two different temperature

Question 47.
Which of the following is the fastest reaction?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-58
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-59

Question 48.
Half life period of a reaction is found to be inversely proportional to the cube of its initial concentration. The order of the reaction is ………
(a) 2
(b) 5
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(d) 4

Question 49.
A large increase in the rate of a reaction for a rise in temperature is due to ………
(a) the decrease in the number of collisions
(b) increase in the number of activated molecules
(c) the shortening of mean free path
(d) the lowering of activation energy
Answer:
(b) increase in the number of activated molecules

Question 50.
The minimum energy of a molecule would possess in order to enter into a fruitful collision is known as …………..
(a) Reaction energy
(b) collision energy
(c) Activation energy
(d) Threshold energy
Answer:
(a) Threshold energy

II. Fill in the blanks.

  1. The unit of the rate of a reaction is ………..
  2. For a ……….. reaction, the unit of the reaction rate is atm s
  3. An elementary step is characterised by its ………..
  4. The total number of reactant species involved in an elementary step is called ………..
  5. The sum of powers of concentration terms involved in the experimentally determined rate law is called ………..
  6. The overall order of decomposition of acetaldehyde to methane and carbon monoxide is ………..
  7. A second order reaction can be altered to a first order reaction by taking one of the reactant in large excess, it is called ………..
  8. A reaction in which rate is independent of the concentration of the reactant over a wide range of concentration is called ………..
  9. All radioactive disentegration reactions follow ……….. kinetics.
  10. For a first order reaction, half life does not depend on ………..
  11. Half life period of zero order reaction is ……….. proportional to initial concentration of the reactant.
  12. Half life period ……….. reaction is directly proportional to initial concentration of the reactant.
  13.  ……….. was proposed by Max Trautz and William lewis.
  14. Collision theory was proposed by ……….. in 1916 and in ……….. 1918.
  15. For a gas at room temperature (298 K) and I atm, each molecule undergoes approximately ……….. per second.
  16. In order to react, the collidng molecules must possess a minimum energy called ………..
  17. Generally the reaction rate tends to double when the temperature is increased by ………..
  18. The number of collisions of reactant molecules per second is known as ………..
  19. Heating is required for the reaction between KMnO4 and oxalate ion and is carried out at around ………..
  20. ……….. reactions are faster as compared to reactions involving solid or liquid reactants.
  21. The rate of the reaction ……….. with the increase in the concentration of the reactants.
  22. Higher the concentration of reactants greater is the possibility of and hence the ………..
  23. In the presence of catalyst the energy of activation is ……….. and hence greater number of molecules change over to products there by increasing the rate of the reaction.
  24. Bio availability of drugs within the body and this branch of study is called ………..
  25. ……….. has a half life of 2.5 hours within the body.
  26. The change in concentration of species per unit time gives the ……….. of the reaction.
  27. The rate constant is equal to the rate of the reaction when concentration of reactants is ………..
  28. Increase in surface area of reactant leads to more collisions per litre per second and hence the rate of the reaction is ………..
  29. Acid hydroJysis of an ester is an example of ………..
  30. Molecularity of a chemical reaction will never be equal to ………..

Answer:

  1. moI L-1 s-1
  2. gas phase
  3. molecularity
  4. Molecularity
  5. order
  6. 3/2 or 1.5
  7. Pseudo first order reaction
  8. Zero order reaction
  9. First order
  10. initial concentration
  11. directly
  12. zero order
  13. Collision theory
  14. Max Trautz, William lewis
  15. 10 collisions
  16. Activation energy
  17. 10°C
  18. Frequency factor (A)
  19. 60°C
  20. Gas phase
  21. increases
  22. collisions, rate
  23. lowered
  24. Pharmaco kinetics
  25. Paracetamol
  26. rate
  27. unity
  28. increased
  29. Pseudo first order reaction
  30. zero

III. Match the following

Match the list I and II using the code given below the list.

Quetion 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-60
Answer:
(a) 3, 4, 1, 2

Question 2.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-61
Answer:
(a) 3, 4, 1, 2

Question 3.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-62
Answer:
(a) 3, 1, 4, 2

Question 4.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-63
Answer:
(a) 3, 4, 2, 1

IV. Assertion and Reason

Question 1.
Assertion (A): Decomposition of hydrogen peroxide catalysed by I is a bimolecular first order reaction.
Reason (R): The above reaction take place in two steps, step 1 involves both H2O2 and I and so it is bimolecular but order is determined experimentally as 1.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R arc correct and R is the correct explanation of A

Question 2.
Assertion (A): Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-64 The overall order of the reaction is equal to 4.
Reason (R): The experimental rate law is.
Rate = K [Br] [BrO3] [H+]2.
So 1 + 1 + 2 = 4 order value is 4.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are wrong
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation olA.

Question 3.
Assertion (A): The rate of a reaction increases with the increase in the concentration of the reactants.
Reason (R): The rate of the reaction depends upon the number of collisions between the reacting molecules. Higher the concentration, greater is the possibility for collision and hence the rate.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A,
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 4.
Assertion (A): Powdered calcium carbonate reacts much faster with dilute
HCL than with the same mass of CaCO3 as marble.
Reason (R): For a given mass of a reactant, when the particle size decreases, surface area increases. Increase in surface area of the reactant leads to more collisions per litre per second and hence the rate of the reaction also increases.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R arc correct but R is not correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 5.
Assertion (A): Catalyst presence increases the rate of the reaction
Reason (R): In the presence of a catalyst, energy of activation is lowered and hence greater number of molecules can across the energy harrier and change over to products thereby increasing the rate of the reaction.
(a) Both A and R are correct but R is not correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(b) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A

Question 6.
Assertion (A): Doctors adviced to take paracetamol once in 6 hours during fever and body pain
Reason (R): Paracetarnol has a half life of 2.5 hours within the body. After 10 hours (4 half lives) only 6.25% of drug remains. Based on this, doctors adviced to take it once in 6 hours.
(a) Both A and R are wrong
(b) A is correct but R is wrong
(c) A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
(d) A and R are correct but R is not correct explanation of A
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 7.
Assertion (A): Order of the reaction can be zero or fractional
Reason (R): We cannot determine order from balanced chemical equation
(a) Both A and R are correct but R is not correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is not correct explanation of A

Question 8.
Assertion (A): If the activation enery of a reaction is zero, temperature will have no effect on the rate constant
Reason (R): Lower the activation energy, faster is the reaction.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is not correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is not correct explanation of A

V. Find the odd one out

Question 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-121
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-122
Hint: It is a fractional order reaction with order value 3/2 where as others are first order reaction.

Question 2.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-123
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-124
Hint: It is first order reaction whereas others are zero order reaction.

Question 3.
(a) Decomposition of dinitrogen pentoxide
(b) Iodination of acetone in acid medium
(c) Decomposition of N20 on hot Pt surface
(d) photochemical reaction between H2 and CI2
Answer:
(a) Decomposition of dinitrogen pentoxide
Hint: It is a first order reaction whereas others are zero order reactions

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chemical Kinetics Elements 2 Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Define rate of the reaction. Give the unit of rate.
Answer:
1. In a chemical reaction, the change in the concentration of the species involved in a chemical reaction per unit time gives the rate of a reaction.
A → B
Rate = –\(\frac { \triangle [A] }{ dt }\) (or) \(\frac { \triangle [B] }{ dt }\)

2.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-65
= mol L-1 s-1

Question 2.
Define molecularity of a reaction.
Answer:
Molecularity of a reaction is the total number of reactant species that are involved in an elementary step.

Question 3.
Define order of a chemical reaction.
Answer:
Order of a chemical reaction is the sum of powers of concentration terms involved in the experimentally determined rate law.

Question 4.
Define Half life period.
Answer:
The half life ola reaction is defined as the time required for the reactant concentration to reach one half its initial value.

Question 5.
Mention the factors affecting the reaction rate.
Answer:
The rate of the reaction is affected by the following factors.

  1. Nature and state of the reactant
  2. Concentration of the reactant
  3. Surface area of the reactant
  4. Temperature of the reaction
  5. Presence of a catalyst

Question 6.
How is surface area of the reactant affect the rate of the reaction?
Answer:

  1. In heterogeneous reactions, the surface area of the solid reactants play an important role in deciding the rate.
  2. For a given mass of a reactant, when the particle size decreases surface area increases. Increase in surface area of reactant leads to more collisions per litre per second and hence the rate of reaction is increased.
  3. For example, powdered calcium carbonate reacts much faster with dilute HCl than with the same mass of CaCO3 as marble.

Question 7.
Paracetamol is prescribed to take once in 6 hours. Justify this statement.
Answer:
1. Paracetamol is a well known antipyretic and analgesic that is prescribed in cases of fever and body pain.

2. Paracetamol has a half life of 2.5 hours within the body. (Le) the plasma concentration of the drug is halved after 2.5 hours. So after 10 hours (4 half lives), only 6.25% of drug remains. Based on this, the dosage and frequency will be decided.

3. In the case of paracetamol, it is usually prescribed to take once in 6 hours.

Question 8.
For a reaction, A + B → product; the rate law is given by r = k[A]1/2 [B]2. What is the order of the reaction?
Answer:
Order of the reaction = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) + 2 = 2 \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) or 0.5

Question 9.
The conversion of molecules X to Y follows second order kinetics. If concentration of X is increased to three times how will ¡t affect the rate of formation of Y?
Answer:
For the reaction, X → Y as it follows second order kinetics, therefore the rate law equation will be
Rate = k[X]2 = ka2
if [X] = a mol-1
if the concentration of X is increased three times, then
[X] = 3a mol L-1
∴ Rate = k (3a)2 = 9 ka2
Thus, the rate of the reaction will become 9 times. Hence the rate of formation of Y will increase by 9 times.

Question 10.
Time required to decompose SO2Cl2 to half of its initial amount is 60 minutes. If the decomposition is a first order reaction, calculate the rate constant of the reaction.
Answer:
For a first order reaction,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-66

Question 11.
What will be the effect of temperature on rate constant?
Answer:
Rate constant of a reaction is nearly doubled with rise in temperature by 10°C. The exact dependence of the rate constant on temperature is given by Arrhenius equation:
Rate constant,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-67

Question 12.
A reaction is first order in A and second order in B.

  1. Write the differential rate equation.
  2. How is the rate affected on increasing the concentration of B three times?
  3. How is the rate affected when the concentrations of both A and B arc doubled?

Answer:

  1. \(\frac { dx }{ dt }\) = k [A]1 [B]2
  2. If concentration of ‘B’ is tripled, then the rate will become 9 times.
  3. When concentration of both A and B are doubled, then the rate will become 8 times.

Question 13.
Define zero order reaction. Give the unit for its rate constant(k).
Answer:
Zero Order Reaction. The reaction in which the rate of reaction is independent of the concentration of the reactants is called zero order reaction.
Rate = k [A]0 ⇒ k
Where k is the rate constant. Its unit is mol L-1 s-1

Question 14.
Write units of rate constant k for zero order, first order, second order and n order reaction.
Answer:
Order of Reaction

  1. Zero order reaction
  2. First order reaction
  3. Second order reaction
  4. nth order reaction

Unit of k:

  1. mol L-1 s-1
  2. s-1
  3. mol L s-1
  4. (mol/ L)1-n s-1

Question 15.
What is the effect of catalyst on the activation energy? Why?
Answer:
A Catalyst lower down the activation energy. It provides an alternate path to the reaction. It forms an unstable intermediate which readily changes into products.

Question 16.
Give two differences between zero order and first order reaction.
Answer:
Zero Order:

  1. Its ‘k’ has unit = mol L-1 s-1
  2. Its t 1/2 is directly proportional to initial conc. of reactant

First order:

  1. Its ‘k’ has unit = time-1 = sec-1
  2. Its half life is independent of the initial conc. of the reactant.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chemical Kinetics Elements 3 Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write the differences between the rate and rate constant of the reaction.
Answer:
Rate of a reaction:

  1. It represents the speed at which the reactants are converted into products at any instant
  2. It is measured as decrease in the concentration of the reactants (or) increase in the concentration of products
  3. It depends on the initial concentration of reactants

Rate constant of a reaction:

  1. It is a proportionality constant
  2. It is equal to the rate of the reaction, when the concentration of each of the reactants is unity
  3. It does not depend on the initial concentration of the reactants

Question 2.
What are the examples of first order reaction?
Answer:

  1. Decompostion of dinitrogen pentoxide
    N2O2(g) → 2NO2(g) + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) O2(g)
  2. Decomposition of thionylchloride
    SO2Cl2(g) → SO2(g) + CI2(g)
  3. Decomposition of H2O2 in aqueous solution
    H2O2(aq) → H2O(1) + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) O2(g)
  4. Isomerisation of cyclopropane to propene

Question 3.
For the reaction R → P, the concentration of a reactant changes from 0.03 M to 0.02 M in 25 minutes. Calculate the average rate of reaction using units of time both in minutes and seconds.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-68

Question 4.
In a reaction, 2 A → products. the concentration of A decreases from 0.5 moI L-1 to 0.4 mol L-1 in 10 minutes. Calculate the rate during this interval.
Answer:
Average rate
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-70

Question 5.
A first order reaction has a rate constant, 1.15 x 10-3 s-1. How long will 5 g of this reactant take to reduce to 3 g?
Answer:
Here,
[R]0 = 5g
[R] = 3 g
k = 1.15 x 10-3 s-1 As the reaction is of first order,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-71

Question 6.
Time required to decompose SO2CI2 to half of its initial amount is 60 minutes. If the decomposition is a first order reaction, calculate the rate constant of the reaction. For a first order reaction,
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-72

Question 7.
A reaction is second order with respect to a reactant. How is the rate of reaction affected if the concentration of the reactant is-

  1. doubled
  2. reduced to half.

Answer:
1. Reaction is second order with respect to the reactant
∴ Rate = k[A]2 = ka2.
when [A] = 2a
Rate k (2a)2
= 4ka2
= 4 times
Therefore, when concentration of the reactant is doubled the rate will become 4 times

2. when [A] = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) a
Rate = k \({ \left( \frac { 1 }{ 2 } a \right) }^{ 2 }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 }\) ka2 = \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 }\) k
Therefore, rate will be reduced to one-fourth of the initial rate.

Question 8.
The rate constant for a first order reaction is 60 s1. How much time will It take to reduce the initial concentration of the reactant to its 1/6th value?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-73

Question 9.
For a first order reaction, show that time required for 99% completion is twice the time required for the completion of 90% of reaction.
Answer:
For a first order reaction, t = k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ t }\) log \(\frac { a }{ a-x }\)
99% completion means that
x = 99% of a =0.99 a
t99% = \(\frac { 2303 }{ k }\) log \(\frac { a }{ a-0.99a }\) = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ k }\) log 102 = 2 x \(\frac { 2303 }{ k }\)
90% completion means that
x = 90% of a = 0.90 a
t99% = \(\frac { 2303 }{ k }\) log \(\frac { a }{ a-0.99a }\) = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ k }\) log 10 = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ k }\)
\(\frac{t_{99 \%}}{t_{90 \%}}=\left(\frac{2 \times 2303}{k}\right) / \frac{2.303}{k}=2\)
or
t99% = 2 x t90%

Question 10.
Calculate the half life of a first order reaction whose rate constant is 200 s-1
Answer:
Here rate constant
k= 200 s-1
∴ Half – life of a first order reaction is
t1/2 = \(\frac { 0.693 }{ k }\) = \(\frac { 0.693 }{ 200 }\) = 3.46 x 10-3 sec

Question 11.
The decomposition of dinitrogen pentoxide (N2O) follows the first order rate law. Calculate the rate constant from the given data.
t = 800 sec, [N2O5] = 1.45 moI L-1 = [A2]
t = 1600 sec
[N2O3] = 0.88 moI L-1 = [A2]
Answer:
Applying the formula,
k = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ \left( { t }_{ 2 }-{ t }_{ 1 } \right) }\) log 10 \(\frac { \left[ { A }_{ 1 } \right] }{ \left[ { A }_{ 2 } \right] }\)
= \(\frac { 2.303 }{ (1600 – 800) }\) log 10 \(\frac { 1.45 }{ 0.88 }\) = \(\frac { 2.303 }{ 800 }\) x 0.2169
= 6.24 x 10-4 sec-1

Question 12.
A second order reaction in which both the reactants have same concentration, is 20% completed in 500 seconds. How much time it will take for 60% completion?
Answer:
The second order equation when both the reactants have same concentration is
k = \(\frac { 1 }{ t }\). \(\frac { x }{ a(a – x) }\)
If a = 100, x = 20, 1= 500 seconds
Then k = \(\frac { 1 }{ 500 }\) x \(\frac { 20 }{ 100  x  (100-20) }\)
When
a = 100
x = 60
t = ?
t = \(\frac { 1 }{ k }\) \(\frac { 60 }{ 100  x  40 }\)
Substituting the value of k,
t = \(\frac { 500  x  100  x  80 }{ 20 }\) x \(\frac { 60 }{ 100  x  40 }\)
or
t = 3000 seconds

Question 13.
A first order reaction is 20% completed in 10 minutes. Calculate the time taken for the reaction to go to 80% completion.
Answer:
Applying the first order equation,
k = \(\frac { 2303 }{ t }\) l0g \(\frac { { \left[ R \right] }_{ 0 } }{ \left[ R \right] }\)
At t = 10 min
R = 100 – 20
k = \(\frac { 2303 }{ t }\) log 10 \(\frac { 100 }{ (100 – 20) }\)
t = \(\frac { 2303 }{ 10 }\) log 10 \(\frac { 100 }{ 80 }\)
= 0.0223 min-1

Question 14.
For a reaction: 2NH3(g)  \(\underrightarrow { Pt }\)  N2(g)+ 3H2(g) Rate = K

  1. Write the order and molecularity of this reaction.
  2. Write the unit of K.

Answer:

  1. Order of reaction Zero order. Molecularity = 2
  2. Unit of K = mol L-1 sec-1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chemical Kinetics Elements 5 Marks Questions and Answers

Question 1.
How would you calculate the order of the reaction 2NO + O2(g) → 2NO2(g) by an experiment?
(or)
prove that 2NO + O2 → 2 NO2 is a third order reaction.
Answer:
2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
Series of experiments are conducted by keeping the concentration of one of the reactants as constant and changing the concentration of the others.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-76
Rate = k [NO]m[O2]n
For experiment 1, the rate law is
Rate1 = k [NO]m [O2]n
19.26 x 10-2 = k [1.3]m [1.1]n ………………….(1)
For experiment 2
Rate2 = k [NO]m [O2]n
38.40 x 10-2 = k [1.3]m [2.2]n ……………….(2)
For experiment 3
Rate3 = k [NO]m [O2]n
76.8 x 10-2 = k [2.6]m [1.1]n ………………(3)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-77
2 = \({ \left( \frac { 2.2 }{ 1.1 } \right) }^{ n }\)
4 = 2m
⇒ n = 1
Therefore the reaction is first order with respect to O2
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-78
2 = \({ \left( \frac { 2.6 }{ 1.3 } \right) }^{ m }\)
4 = 2m
⇒ m = 1
Therefore the reaction is second order with respect to NO
The rate law is Rate = k [NO]2 [O2]1
The overall order of the reaction = 2 + 1 = 3

Question 2.
Derive the integrated rate law for a first order reaction?
Answer:
A reaction whose rate depends on the reactant concentration raised to the first power is called a first order reaction. First order reaction is A → product. Rate law can be expressed as, Rate = k [A]1. Where, k is the first order rate constant
\(\frac { -d[A] }{ dt }\) = k[A]1
\(\frac { -d[A] }{ [A] }\) = k.dt ……………………(1)
Integrate the above equation (I) between the limits of time t = 0 and time equal to t, while the concentration varies from initial concentration [A0] to [A] at the later time.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-79
This equation (2) is in natural logarithm. To convert it into usual logarithm with base 10, we have to multiply the term by 2.303
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-80

Question 3.
Explain the effect of temperature on reaction rate based on Arrhenius theory.
Answer:
1. Generally, the rate of a reaction increases with increasing temperature. However, there are very few exceptions.

2. As a rough rule, for many reactions near room temperature, reaction rate tends to double when the temperature is increased by 10°C.

3. A large number of reactions are known which do not take place at room temperature but occur readily at higher temperature. Example – Reaction between H2 and O2 to form H2O takes place only when an electric spark is passed.

4. Arrhenius suggested that the rates of most reactions vary with temperature in such a way that the rate constant is directly proportional to
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-81 and he proposed a relation between the rate constant and temperature.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-82
where
k = frequency factor
R = gas constant ,
Ea = Activation energy
T = Absolute temperature (in kelvin)
The factor A does not vary significantly with temperature and hence it may be taken as a constant.

5. Taking logarithm on both side of the equation (1)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-83

6. The plot of Ink vs \((\frac { 1 }{ T })\) is a straight line with negative slope\(\frac { { E }_{ a } }{ RT }\). If the rate constant for a reaction at two different temperatures is known, we can calculate the activation energy.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-84
This equation can be used to calculate E from rate Ea constants k1 & k2 at temperature T1 and T2

Question 4.
Explain about the factors that affecting the reaction rate.
Answer:
The rate of a reaction is affected by the following factors.
1. Nature and state of the reactant
(a) A chemical reaction involves breaking of certain existing bonds of the reactant and forming new bonds which lead to the product. The net energy involved in this process is dependent on the nature of the reactant and hence the rates are different for different reactants.

(b) Gas phase reactions are faster as compared to the reactions involving solid or liquid reactants. For example, reaction of sodium metal with iodine vapours is faster than the reaction between solid sodium and solid iodine.

2. Concentration of the reactant
The rate of the reaction increases with the increase in the concentration of the reactants. According to collision theory, the rate of the reaction depends upon the number of collisions between the reacting molecules. Higher the concentration, greater is the possibility for collision and hence the rate.

3. Effect of surface area of the reactant:
In heterogeneous reactions, the surface areas of the solid reactants plays an important role in deciding the rate. For a given mass of a reactant, when the particle size decreases surface area increases.

Increase in surface area of reactant leads to more collisions per litre per second and hence the rate of reaction is increased. For example, powdered calcium carbonate reacts much faster with dilute HCI than with the same mass of CaCOl as marble

4. Temperature:
For many reactions near room temperature, the reaction rate tends to double when the temperature is increased by 10°C . For eg, Reaction between H2 and O2 to form H2O take place only when an electric spark is passed. So when the temperature increases, the rate of the reaction also increases.

5. Effect of presence of catalyst
(a) A catalyst is substance which alters the rate of a reaction without itself undergoing any permanent chemical change. They may participate in the reaction, but again regenerated and the end of the reaction.

(b) In the presence of a catalyst, the energy of activation is lowered and hence greater number of molecules can cross the energy barrier and change over to products,thereby increasing the rate of the reaction.

Question 5.
The decomposition of A into product has value of k as 4.5 x 103 s-1 at 10°C and energy of activation 60 kJ mol-1. At what temperature would k be 1.5 x 104 s-1 ?
Answer:
k1 = 4.5 x 103 s-1
T1 = 10 + 273 K = 283 K
k2 = 1.5 x 104 s-1
T2 = ?
Ea = 6o kJ mol-1
According to Arrhenius equation
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-85

Question 6.
For a decomposition reaction the values of rate constant k at two different temperatures are given below:
k1 = 2.15 x 10 L mol-1 s-1 at 650 K
k2 = 2.39 x 10 L mol-1 s-1 at 700 K
Calculate the value of activation energy for this reaction. (R = 8.314 J K-1 mol-1 )
Answer:
Here
k1 = 2.15 x 10 L mol-1 s-1 at 650 K
T1 = 650 K
T2 = 700K and
k2 = 2.39 x 10 L mol-1 s-1 at 700 K
R = 8.314 J K-1 mol-1
Using the formula
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-86

Question 7.
For a certain chemical reaction variation In concentration, In IRI Vs time (s) plot is given below.
For this reaction write/draw:

  1. What is the order of the reaction?
  2. What is the units of rate constant (k)?
  3. Give the relationship between k and t1/2 (half-life period).
  4. What does the slope of above line indicate?
  5. Draw the plot of log [R0]/[R] vs time (s)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-87

Answer:
1. First order
2. time-1 (s-1)
3. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-88
4.  Rate constat (k) of reaction
5. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-89

Question 8.
A substance reacts according to the first order rate law and the specific reaction rate for the reaction ¡s 1 x 10-2 s-1. If the initial concentration is 1.0 M.

  1. What is the initial rate?
  2. What ¡s the reaction rate after 1 minute?

Answer:

1. Initial rate of a first order reaction
= k C
= l x 10-2 x 1.0
= l x 10-2 mol L-1 s-1

2. Concentration after 60 seconds is calculated by applying the first order kinetic equation,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-90
Rate of reaction after 1 minute
= k x C
= l x 10-2 x 0.5489
5.489 x 10-3 mol L-1 s-1

Question 9.
A first order reaction is 50% completed in 30 minutes at 27°C and in 10 minutes at 47°C. Calculate the reaction rate constant at 27°C and the energy of activation of the reaction in kJ mol-1
Answer:
For a first order reaction
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-91

Now applying the following equation:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-92

Question 10.
In Arrhenius equation for a certain reaction, the values of A and E (activation energy) are 4 x 1013 sec-1 and 98.6 KJ mol-1 respectively. If the reaction is of first order, at what temperature will its half life period be 10 minutes?
Answer:
According to the Arrhenius equation.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-93
For a first order reaction
t1/2 = \(\frac { 0.693 }{ k }\) \(\frac { 0.693 }{ 600 }\)
So,
k = \(\frac { 0.693 }{ 600 }\) sec-1 (t1/2 = 10 min = 600 sec)
= 1.1 x 10-3 sec-1
Hence, log (1.1 x 10-3)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics-94

Common Errors

Common Errors:

  1. Order and molecularity may get confused
  2. Unit of first order Rate constant and zero order may get con fused.
  3. t1/2 – Half liefe period may be difficult to remember

Rectifications:

  1. Order and molecularity are same for the single step process. But for reactions of more than one step, they may be different.
  2. First order sec-1, Zero order – mol litre-1 sec-1
  3. t1/2 = 0.693 / k1 for first order reaction.

Hope you love the Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chapter Wise Material. Clearly understand the deep concept of Chemistry learning with the help of Tamilnadu State Board 12th Chemistry Chapter 7 Chemical Kinetics Questions and AnswersPDF. Refer your friends to and bookmark our website for instant updates. Also, keep in touch with us using the comment section.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State

Are you searching for the Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chapter Wise Solutions PDF? Then, get your Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chapter Wise Solutions PDF for free on our website. Students can Download Chemistry Chapter 6 Solid State Questions and Answers, Notes Pdf, Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Solid State

All concepts are explained in an easy way on our website. So, students can easily learn and practice Tamilnadu State Board 12th Chemistry Chapter 6 Solid State Question and Answers. You can enjoy the digitized learning with the help of the Tamilnadu State Board Chemistry Online Material.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solid State Text Book Evalution

I. Choose the correct answer.

12th Chemistry Chapter 6 Book Back Answers Question 1.
Graphite and diamond are ………..
(a) Covalent and molecular crystals
(b) ionic and covalent
(c) both covalent crystals
(d) both molecular crystals
Answer:
(c) both covalent crystals

12th Chemistry Solid State Book Back Answers Question 2.
An ionic compound Ax By crystallizes in fee type crystal structure with B ions at the centre of each face and A ion occupying centre of the cube, the correct formula of A B is ………..
(a) AB
(b) AB3
(c) A3B
(d) A8B6
Answer:
(b) AB3
Hint: Number of A ions = \(\left( \frac { { N }_{ c } }{ 8 } \right)\) = \(\left( \frac { 8 }{ 8 } \right)\) = 1
Number of B ions = \(\left( \frac { { N }_{ f } }{ 2 } \right)\) = \(\left( \frac { 6 }{ 2 } \right)\) = 3
Simplest formula AB3

12th Chemistry Unit 6 Book Back Answers Question 3.
The rano of close packed atoms to tetrahedral hole in cubic packing is ………..
(a) 1:1
(b) 1:2
(c) 2:1
(d) 1:4
Answer:
(b) 1:2
Hint: If number of close packed atoms =N; then, The number of Tetrahedral holes formed = 2N, Number of Octahedral holes formed = N. Therefore N : 2N = 1 : 2

Solid State Questions Pdf Question 4.
Solid CO2 is an example of ………..
(a) Covalent solid
(b) metallic solid
(c) molecular solid
(d) ionic solid
Answer:
(c) molecular solid
Hint: Lattice points are occupied by CO2 molecules

Solid State Numericals Class 12 Question 5.
Assertion: monoclinic sulphur is an example of monoclinic crystal system.
Reason: for a monoclinic system, a \(\neq\) b \(\neq\) c and α = γ = 90° , β \(\neq\) 90°.
(a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.
(b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
(c) Assertion is true but reason is false.
(d) Both assertion and reason are false.
Answer:
(a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion

Chemistry Class 12 Samacheer Kalvi Question 6.
In calcium fluoride, having the flurite structure the coordination number of Ca2+ ion and F Ion are ………..
(a) 4 and 2
(b) 6 and 6
(c) 8 and 4
(d) 4 and 8
Answer:
(c) 8 and 4
Hint: CaF2 has cubical close packed arrangement Ca2+ ions are in face centered cubic arrangement, each Ca2+ ions is surrounded by 8 F ions and each F ion is surrounded by 4 Ca2+ ions.Therefore coordination number of Ca2+ is 8 and of F is 4 pattern is (NA is the Avogadro number)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Question 7.
The number of unit cells in 8gm of an element X (atomic mass 40) which crystallizes in bcc pattern is (NA is the Avogadro number)
(a) 6.023 x 1023
(b) 6.023 x 1022
(c) 60.23 x 1023
(d) \(\left( \frac { 6.023\times { 10 }^{ 23 } }{ 8\times 40 } \right)\)
Answer:
(b) 6.023 x 1022
Hint: In bcc unit cell, 2 atoms = 1 unit cell
Number of atoms in 8g of element is, Number of moles = \(\left( \frac { 8g }{ 40g,{ mol }^{ -1 } } \right)\) = 0.2 mol
1 mole contains 6.023 x 1023 atoms 0.2 mole contains 0.2 x 6.023 x 1023 atoms
\((\frac{1unit cell}{2 atoms})\) x 0.2 x 6.023 x 1023 = 6.023 x 1022 unit cells

Samacheer Kalvi Guru 12th Chemistry Question 8.
The number of carbon atoms per unit cell of diamond is ………..
(a) 8
(b) 6
(c) 1
(d) 4
Answer:
(a) 8
Hint: In diamond carbon forming fee. Carbon occupies comers and face centres and also occupying half of the tetrahedral voids.
\(\left( \frac { { N }_{ c } }{ 8 } \right)\) + \(\left( \frac { { N }_{ f } }{ 2 } \right)\) + 4C atoms in Td voids
\(\left( \frac { 8 }{ 8 } \right)\) + \(\left( \frac { 6 }{ 2 } \right)\) + 4 = 8.

Samacheerkalvi.Guru 12th Chemistry Question 9.
In a solid atom M occupies ccp lattice and \(\left( \frac { 1 }{ 3 } \right)\) of tetrahedral voids are occupied by atom N. Find the formula of solid formed by M and N.
(a) MN
(b) M3N
(C) MN3
(d) M3N2
Answer:
(d) M3N2
Hint: If the total number of M atoms is n, then the number of tetrahedral voids = 2 n. Given that \(\left( \frac { 1 }{ 3 } \right)\)rd of tetrahedral voids are occupied i.e., \(\left( \frac { 1 }{ 3 } \right)\) x 2 n are occupied by N atoms.
∴ M : N ⇒ n : \(\left( \frac { 2 }{ 3 } \right)\)
1 : \(\left( \frac { 1 }{ 3 } \right)\) 3 : 2 ⇒ M3N2

12th Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Question 10.
The Composition of a sample of wurizite is Fe0.93 O1.00 what % of Iron present in the form of Fe3+
(a) 16.05%
(b) 15.05%
(c) 18.05%
(d) 17.05%
Answer:
(b) 15.05%
Hint: Let the number of Fe2+ ions in the crystal be x. The number of Fe3+ ions in the crystal be y. Total number of Fe2+ and Fe3+ ions is x + y. Given that x + y = 0.93. The total charge= 0 x (2+) + (0.93 – x) (+ 3) – 2 = 0 ⇒ 2x + 2.97 – 3x – 2 = 0 x 0.79 Percentage of Fe3+ = \(\left( \frac { (0.93-0.79) }{ 0.93 } \right)\)100 = 15.05%

Samacheer Kalvi Guru Class 12 Chemistry Question 11.
The ionic radii of A+ and B are 0.98 x 10-10 m and 1.81 x 10-10 m , the coordination number of each ion in AB is ………..
(a) 8
(b) 2
(c) 6
(d) 4
Answer:
(c) 6
Hint: \(\frac { { r }_{ { c }^{ 1 } } }{ { r }_{ { A }^{ – } } }\) = \(\left( \frac { 0.98\times { 10 }^{ -10 } }{ 1.81\times { 10 }^{ -10 } } \right)\) = 0.54. It is in the range of 0.414, 0.732,hence the coordination number of each ion is 6.

Class 12 Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Question 12.
CsCl has bcc arrangement, its unit cell edge length is 400pm, its inter atomic distance is ………..
(a) 400pm
(b) 800pm
(c) \(g\sqrt { 3 } \) x 100pm
(d) \(\left( \frac { \sqrt { 3 } }{ 2 } \right)\) x 400 pm
Answer:
(d) \(\left( \frac { \sqrt { 3 } }{ 2 } \right)\) x 400 pm
Hint:
\(g\sqrt { 3 } \)a = rCs+ + 2rCs + rCs+
\(\left( \frac { \sqrt { 3 } }{ 2 } \right)\)a = (rCs+ + rCs)
\(\left( \frac { \sqrt { 3 } }{ 2 } \right)\)400 = inter ionic distance

12 Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Question 13.
A solid compound XY has NaCl structure, if the radius of the cation is 100pm , the radius of the anion will be ………..
(a) \(\left( \frac { 100 }{ 0.414 } \right)\)
(b) \(\left( \frac { 0.732 }{ 100 } \right)\)
(c) 100 x 0.414
(d) \(\left( \frac { 0.414 }{ 100 } \right)\)
Answer:
(a) \(\left( \frac { 100 }{ 0.414 } \right)\)
Hint: For an fcc structure

12th Chemistry Solutions Samacheer Kalvi Question 14.
The vacant space in bcc lattice unit cell is ………..
(a) 48%
(b) 23%
(c) 32%
(d) 26%
Answer:
(c) 32%
Hint: Packing efficiency = 68%. Therefore empty space percentage = (100-68) = 32%

Solid State Book Back Answers Question 15.
The radius of an atom is 300pm, if it crystallizes in a face centered cubic lattice, the length of the edge of the unit cell is ………..
(a) 488.5pm
(b) 848.5pm
(c) 884.5pm
(d) 484.5pm
Answer:
(b) 848.5pm
Hint: Let edge length = a \(g\sqrt { 2 } \)a = 4r
a = \(\left( \frac { 4\times 300 }{ \sqrt { 2 } } \right)\)
a = 600 x 1.414
a = 848.4 pm

Samacheer Kalvi Guru Chemistry Question 16.
The fraction of total volume occupied by the atoms in a simple cubic is ………..
(a) \(\left( \frac { \pi }{ 4\sqrt { 2 } } \right)\)
(b) \(\left( \frac { \pi }{ 6 } \right)\)
(c) \(\left( \frac { \pi }{ 4 } \right)\)
(d) \(\left( \frac { \pi }{ 3\sqrt { 2 } } \right)\)
Answer:
(b) \(\left( \frac { \pi }{ 6 } \right)\)
Hint:
12th Chemistry Chapter 6 Book Back Answers Solid State Samacheer Kalvi

12th Chemistry Solid State Pdf Question 17.
The yellow colour in NaCl crystal is due to ………..
(a) excitation of electrons in F centers
(b) reflection of light from Cl ion on the surface
(c) refraction of light from Na+ ion
(d) all of the above
Answer:
(a) excitation of electrons in F centers

Solid State Chemistry Class 12 Pdf Question 18.
If ’a’ stands for the edge length of the cubic system; sc ,bcc, and fcc. Then the ratio of radii of spheres in these systems wilL be respectively.
12th Chemistry Solid State Book Back Answers Chapter 6 Samacheer Kalvi
Answer:
12th Chemistry Unit 6 Book Back Answers Solid State Samacheer Kalvi
Hing:
Solid State Questions Pdf Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6

Solid State Chemistry Class 12 Question 19.
If a is the length of the side of the cube, the distance between the body centered atom and one comer atom in the cube will be ………..
(a) \(\left( \frac { 2 }{ \sqrt { 3 } } \right) a\)
(b) \(\left( \frac { 4 }{ \sqrt { 3 } } \right) a\)
(c) \(\left( \frac { \sqrt { 3 } }{ 4 } \right) a\)
(d) \(\left( \frac { \sqrt { 3 } }{ 2 } \right) a\)
Answer:
(d) \(\left( \frac { \sqrt { 3 } }{ 2 } \right) a\)
Hint: If a is the length of the side, then the length of the leading diagonal passing through the body centered atom is \(g\sqrt { 3 } \)a. Required distance = \(\left( \frac { \sqrt { 3 } }{ 2 } \right) a\)

Question 20.
Potassium has a bcc structure with nearest neighbor distance 4.52 A. its atomic weight is 39. Its density will be ………..
(a) 915 kg m-3
(b) 2142 kg m-3
(c) 452 kg m-3
(d) 390 kg m-3
Answer:
(a) 915 kg m-3
Hint:
(ρ) = \(\frac { nM }{ { a }^{ 3 }{ N }_{ A } }\)For bcc n = 2 M 39. Nearest distance 2r = 4.52
Chemistry Class 12 Samacheer Kalvi Solution Chapter 6 Solid State
ρ = 915 kg m-3 NA

Question 21.
Schottky defect in a crystal is observed when ………..
(a) unequal number of anions and anions are missing from the lattice
(b) equal number of anions and anions are missing from the lattice
(e) an ion leaves its normal site and occupies an interstitial site
(d) no ion is missing from its lattice.
Answer:
(b) equal number of anions and anions are missing from the lattice

Question 22.
The cation leaves its normal position in the crystal and moves to some interstitial position, the defect in the crystal is known as ………..
(a) Schottky defect
(b) F center
(c) Frenkel defect
(d) non-stoichiometric defect
Answer:
(c) Frenkel defect

Question 23.
Assertion – due to Frenkel defect, density of the crystalline solid decreases.
Reason – in Frenkel defect cation and anion leaves the crystal.
(a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.
(b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
(c) Assertion is true but reason is false.
(d) Both assertion and reason are false
Answer:
(d) Both assertion and reason are false

Question 24.
The crystal with a metal deficiency defect is ………..
(a) NaCI
(b) FeO
(c) ZnO
(a) KCI
Answer:
(b) FeO

Question 25.
A two dimensional solid pattern formed by two different atoms X and Y is shown below. The black and white squares represent atoms X and Y respectively. The simplest formula for the compound based on the unit cell from the pattern is ………..
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State
(a) XY8
(b) X4Y9
(c) XY2
(d) XY4
Answer:
(a) XY8

II. Answer the following questions:

Question 1.
Define unit cell.
Answer:
A basic repeating structural unit of a crystalline solid is called a unit ccli.

Question 2.
Cive any three characteristics of ionic crystals.
Answer:

  1. Ionic solids have high melting points.
  2. These solids do not conduct electricity, because the ions are fixed in their lattice positions.
  3. They do conduct electricity in molten state (or) when dissolved in water because, the ions are free to move in the molten state or solution.

Question 3.
Differentiate crystalline solids and amorphous solids.
Answer:
Crystalline solids:

  1. Long range orderly arrangement of constituents
  2. Definite shape
  3. Generally crystalline solids are anisotropic in nature
  4. They are true solids
  5. Definite Heat of fusion
  6. They have sharp melting points.
  7. Examples: NaCl, diamond etc.,

Amorphous solids:

  1. Short range, random arrangement of constituents
  2. Irregular shape
  3. They are isotropic like liquids
  4. They are considered as pseudo solids (or) super cooled liquids
  5. Heat of fusion is not definite
  6. Gradually soften over a range of temperature and so can be moulded.
  7. Examples: Rubber , plastics, glass etc

Question 4.
Classify the following solids.

  1. P4
  2. Brass
  3. Diamond
  4. NaCI
  5. iodine

Answer:

  1. P4 – Molecular solid
  2. Brass – Metallic solid
  3. Diamond –
  4. NaCl – Ionic solid
  5. Iodine – Molecular solid

Question 5.
Explain briefly seven types of unit cell.
Answer:
Seven types of unit cell:
Samacheer Kalvi Guru 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State

  1. Cubic – NaCl
  2.  Tetragonal – TiO2
  3. Orthorhombic – BaSO4
  4. Hexagonal – ZnO
  5. Monoclinic – PbCrO4
  6. Triclinic – H3BO3
  7. Rhombohedral – Cinnabar Cubic

They differ in the arrangements of their crystallographic axes and angles. Corresponding to the above seven, Bravis defined 14 possible crystal system as shown in the figure.

Question 6.
Distinguish between hexagonal close packing and cubic close packing.
Answer:
Hexagonal close packing

  1. aba arrangement
  2. In this case, the spheres of the third layer are exactly aligned with those of the first layer
  3. In HCP, tetrahedral voids of the second layer may be covered by the spheres of the third layer

Cubic close packing:

  1. abc arrangement
  2. In this case, the spheres of the third layer are not aligned with those of the first layer or second layer. Only when fourth layer is placed, its spheres are aligned with the first layer
  3. In cep third layer may be placed above the second layer in a manner such that its sphere cover the octahedral voids

Question 7.
Distinguish tetrahedral and octahedral voids.
Answer:
Tetrahedral void

  1. A single triangular void in a crystal is surrounded by four (4) spheres and is called a tetrahedral void
  2. A sphere of second layer is above the void of the first layer, a tetrahedral void is formed
  3. This constitutes four spheres, three in the lower and one in upper layer. When the centres of these four spheres are joined a tetrahedron is formed
  4. The radius of the sphere which can be accommodated in an octahedral hole without disturbing the structure should not exceed 0.414 times that of the structure forming sphere
  5. Radius of an tetrahedral void \(\frac { r }{ R }\) = 0.225

Octahedral void

  1. A double triangular void like c is surrounded by six(6) spheres and is called an octahedral void
  2. The voids in the first layer are partially covered by the spheres of layer now such a void is called a octahedral void
  3. This constitutes six spheres, three in the lower layer and three in the upper layer. When the centers of these six spheres are joined an octahedron is formed
  4. The sphere which can be placed in a tetrahedral hole without disturbing the close packed structure should not have a radius larger than 0.225 times the radius of the sphere forming the structure
  5. Radius of a octahedral void \(\frac { r }{ R } \) = 0.414

Question 8.
What are point defects?
Answer:
If the deviation occurs due to missing atoms, displaced atoms or extra atoms the imperfection is named as a point defect. Such defects arise due to imperfect packing during the original crystallisation or they may arise from thermal vibrations of atoms at elevated temperatures.
Samacheerkalvi.Guru 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State

Question 9.
Explain Schottky defect.
Answer:
Schottky defect arises due to the missing of equal number of cations and anions from the crystal lattice. This effect does not change the stoichiometry of the crystal.Ionic solids in which the cation and anion are of almost of similar size show schottky defect.
Example: NaCl.
12th Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Solution Chapter 6 Solid State
Presence of large number of schottky defects in a crystal, lowers its density. For example, the theoretical density of vanadium monoxide (VO) calculated using the edge length of the unit cell is 6.5 g cm-3 but the actual experimental density is 5.6 gcm3. It indicates that there is approximately 14% Schottky defect in VO crystal. Presence of Schottky defect in the crystal provides a simple way by which atoms or ions can move within the crystal lattice.

Question 10.
Write short note on metal excess and metal deficiency defect with an example. Metal excess defect.
Answer:
Metal excess defect arises due to the presence of more number of metal ions as compared to anions.Alkali metal halides NaCl, KCl show this type of defect.The electrical neutrality of the crystal can be maintained by the presence of anionic vacancies equal to the excess metal ions (or) by the presence of extra cation and electron present in interstitial position.
Samacheer Kalvi Guru Class 12 Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State
For example, when NaCl crystals are heated in the presence of sodium vapour, Na+ ions are formed and are deposited on the surface of the crystal. Chloride ions (Cl) diffuse to the surface from the lattice point and combines with Na+ ion.

The electron lost by the sodium vapour diffuse into the crystal lattice and occupies the vacancy created by the Cl ions. Such anionic vacancies which are occupied by unpaired electrons are called F centers. Hence, the formula of NaCl which contains excess Na+ ions can be written as Na1+xCl.

Metal deficiency defect:
Metal deficiency defect arises due to the presence of less number of cations than the anions. This defect is observed in a crystal in which, the cations have variable oxidation states. For example, in FeO crystal, some of the Fe2+ ions are missing from the crystal lattice.

To maintain the electrical neutrality, twice the number of other Fe2+ ions in the crystal is oxidized to Fe3+ ions. In such cases, overall number of Fe2+ and Fe3+ ions is less than the O2- ions. It was experimentally found that the general formula of ferrous oxide is FexO, where x ranges from 0.93 to 0.98.
Class 12 Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Solution Chapter 6 Solid State

Question 11.
Calculate the number of atoms in a fee unit cell.
Answer:
Number of atoms in a fee unit cell,
= \(\frac { { N }_{ c } }{ 8 }\) + \(\frac { { N }_{ f } }{ 2 }\)
= \(\frac { 8 }{ 8 } \) + \(\frac { 6 }{ 2 } \) = 1 + 3 = 4
12 Chemistry Samacheer Kalvi Solution Chapter 6 Solid State

Question 12.
Explain AAAA and ABABA and ABCABC type of three dimensional packing with the help of neat diagram.
Answer:
1. AAAA type of three dimensional packing
This type of three dimensional packing arrangements can be obtained by repeating the AAAA type two dimensional arrangements in three dimensions, i.e., spheres in one layer sitting directly on the top of those in the previous layer so that all layers are identical.

All spheres of different layers of crystal are perfectly aligned horizontally and also vertically, so that any unit cell of such arrangement as simple cubic structure as shown in fig.
12th Chemistry Solutions Samacheer Kalvi Chapter 6 Solid State
In simple cubic packing, each sphere is in contact with 6 neighbouring spheres – Four in its own layer, one above and one below and hence the coordination number of the sphere in simple cubic arrangement is 6.

2. ABABA type of three dimensional packing:
In this arrangement, the spheres in the first layer (A type) are slightly separated and the second layer is formed by arranging the spheres in the depressions between the spheres in layer A as shown in figure.

The third layer is a repeat of the first. This pattern ABABAB is repeated throughout the crystal. In this arrangement, each sphere has a coordination number of 8, four neighbors in the layer above and four in the layer below.
Solid State Book Back Answers Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6

3. ABCABC type of three dimensional packing:
In this arrangement (FCC) second layer spheres are arranged at the dips of first layer. Third layer spheres are arranged in a manner such that it cover the octahedral void. Then no longer third layer is similar to first or second layer.

Third layer gives different arrangement. Fourth layer spheres are similar to first layer. If the first, second and third layer are represented as A,B,C then this type of packing gives the arrangement of layers as ABCABC… (i.e.,), the first three layers do not resemble first, second and third layers respectively and the sequence is repeated.

with the addition of more layers. In this arrangement atoms occupy 74% of the available space and thus has 26% vacant space. The coordination number is 12. Voids – The empty spaces between the three dimensional layers are known as voids. There are two types of common voids possible. They are tetrahedral and octahedral voids.

Tetrahedral void – A void formed by three spheres of a layer in contact with each other and also with a sphere on the top or bottom layer is a hole between four spheres. The spheres are arranged at the vertices of a regular tetrahedron such a hole or void is called tetrahedral void.
Samacheer Kalvi Guru Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State
Octahedral void:
A hole or void formed by three spheres of a hexagonal layer and another three spheres of the adjacent layer is a hole between six spheres. The spheres are arranged at the vertices of a regular octahedron. Such a hole or void is abc arrangement – ccp structure called octahedral void.

Question 13.
Why ionic crystals are hard and brittle?
Answer:
The ionic compounds are very hard and brittle. In ionic compounds the ions are rigidly held in a lattice because the positive and negative ions are strongly attracted to each other and difficult to separate. But the brittleness of a compound is now easy to shift the position of atoms or ions in a lattice.

If we apply a pressure on the ionic compounds the layers shifts slightly. The same charged ions in the lattice comes closer. A repulsive forces arises between ‘ same charged ions, due to this repulsions the lattice structure breaks down chemical bonding.

Question 14.
Calculate the percentage efficiency of packing in case of body centered cubic crystal. Packing efficiency.
Answer:
In body centered cubic arrangement the spheres are touching along the leading diagonal of the cube as shown in the In ∆ABC,
12th Chemistry Solid State Pdf Chapter 6 Samacheer Kalvi
AC2 = AB2 + BC2
AC = \(g\sqrt { { AB }^{ 2 }+{ BC }^{ 2 } }\)
AC = \(g\sqrt { { a }^{ 2 }+{ a }^{ 2 } }\) = a2
In ∆ACG,
AG2 = AC2 + CG2
AG =\(g\sqrt { { AC }^{ 2 }+{ CG }^{ 2 } }\)
AG = \(\sqrt { { \left( \sqrt { 2 } a \right) }^{ 2 }+{ a }^{ 2 } }\)
AG = \(g\sqrt { { 2a }^{ 2 }+a^{ 2 } }\) = \(g\sqrt { 3a^{ 2 } } \) = \(\sqrt { 3 } a\)
i.e., \(g\sqrt { 3 } \)a = 4r
r = \(\frac { \sqrt { 3 } }{ 4 } a\)
∴ Volume of the sphere with radius ‘r’
= \(\frac { 4 }{ 3 } \) πr3
= \(\frac { 4 }{ 3 } \) π \(\left( \frac { \sqrt { 3 } }{ 4 } a \right)\)
= \(\frac { \sqrt { 3 } }{ 6 }\) πa3
Number of spheres belong to a unit cell in bee arrangement is equal to two and hence the total volume of all spheres
Solid State Chemistry Class 12 Pdf Chapter 6 Samacheer Kalvi
i.e., 68% of the available volume is occupied.The available space is used more efficiently than in simple cubic packing

Question 15.
What is the two dimensional coordination number of a molecule in square close packed layer?
Answer:
Square close packing – When the spheres of the second row are placed exactly above those of the first row. This way the spheres are aligned horizontally as well as vertically. The arrangement is AAA type. Coordination number is 4.
Solid State Chemistry Class 12 Solution Chapter 6 Samacheer Kalvi

Question 16.
Experiment shows that Nickel oxide has the formula Ni0.96 O1.00. What fraction of Nickel exists as of Ni2+ and Ni3+ ions ?
Answer:
Let the number of Ni2+. Then the number of Ni3+ ion will be = (0.96 – x). Total number of cation, = 2 x + 3 (0.96 – x)
= 2x + 2.88 – 3x
= ( – x) + 2.88
Number of anions O2- ( – 2) x 1 = -2. Number of cations = Number of anions
– x + 2.88 2
– x = – 2.88 + 2
x =0.88
%of Ni as Ni2 =\(\frac { 0.08 }{ 0.96 } \times 100\) = 91.66%
Number of Ni3+ ion will be = 0.96 – x
= 0.96 – 0.88 = 0.08
% of Ni as Ni3+ = \(\frac { 0.08 }{ 0.96 } \times 100\) = 8.3 %

Question 17.
What is meant by the term “coordination number”? What is the coordination number of atoms in a bcc structure?
Answer:

  1. Coordination number – The number of nearest neighbours that surrounding a particle in a crystal is called the coordination number of that particle.
  2. Coordination number of atoms in a bcc structure is 8

Question 18.
An element has bcc structure with a cell edge of 288 pm. the density of the element is 7.2 gcm-3. How many atoms are present ¡n 208g of the element.
Answer:
An elemeñt has bec structure with a cell edge of 288 pm. The density of the element is 7.2 gcm-3. For the Bec structure, n = 2
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-19
By mole concept, 51.42 g of the element contains 6.023 x 1023 atom 208 g of the element will contain
= \(\frac { 6.023\times { 10 }^{ 23 }\times 208 }{ 51.42 }\) atoms
= 24.17 x 1023 atoms (or) 2.417 x 1024 atoms

Question 19.
Aluminium crystallizes in a cubic close packed structure. Its metallic radius is 125pm. Calculate the edge length of unit cell.
Answer:
Given, Radius (r) = 125 pm
Edge length of unit cell (a) = ?
Since aluminium crystallizes in Face centered cubic
r= \(\frac { a\sqrt { 2 } }{ 4 } \) (or) r=\(\frac { a }{ 2\sqrt { 2 } } \)
a = r x 2 x \(g\sqrt { 2 } \)
= 125 x 2 x 1.414
a = 353.5 pm

Question 20.
If NaCI is doped with 102 mol percentage of strontium chloride, what is the concentration of cation vacancy?
Answer:
We know that two Na+ ions are replaced by each of the Sr2+ ions while SrCl2, is doped with NaCI. But in this case, only one lattice point is occupied by each of the Sr2+ ions and produce one cation vacancy.

Here 10-2 mole of SrCI2, is doped with 100 moIes of NaCI. Thus, cation vacancies produced by NaCi = 10-2 mol. Since, 100 moles of NaCl produces cation vacancies after doping = 10-2 mol. Therefore, I mole of NaCl will produce cation vacancies after doping

= \(\frac { { 10 }^{ -2 } }{ 100 }\)= 10-4mol
:. Total cationic vacancies,
= 10-4 x Avogadro’s number
= 10 x 6.023 x 1023
= 6.023 x 1019 vacancies

Question 21.
KF crystallizes in fcc structure like sodium chloride, calculate the distance between K+ and F in KF. (given : density of KF is 2.48 g cm-3)
Answer:
Density of KF 2.48 g cm-3
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-33
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-32

Question 22.
An atom crystallizes ¡n fcc crystal lattice and has a density of 10 gcm3 with unit cell edge length of 100pm. calculate the number of atoms present in 1 g of crystal.
Answer:
Given, Density = 10 g cm-3
mass = 1 g
Edge length of unit cell = 100 pm
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-20
= 0.1 cm3
Volume of unit cell = a3
= (100 x 10-10cm)3
= 1 x 10-24 cm3
Number of unit cell in 1 g of crystal,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-21
The given unit cell is of FCC type. Therefore. it contains 4 atoms.
0.1 x 1024 unit cells will contain 4 x 0.1 x 1024 = 4 x 1023atoms

Question 23.
Atoms X and Y form bcc crystalline structure. Atom X is present at the corners of the cube and Y is at the centre of the cube. What is the formula of the compound?
Answer:
Atoms X and Y form bcc crystalline structure. Atom X is present at the corners of the cube Atom Y is present at the centre of the cube.
No of atoms of X in the unit cell = \(\frac { { N }_{ c } }{ 8 }\) = \(\frac { 8 }{ 8 } \) = 1
No of atoms of Y in the unit cell = \(\frac { { N }_{ b } }{ 1 } \) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 1 } \) = 1
Ratio of atoms X : Y = 1 : 1
Hence formula of the compound = XY.

Question 24.
Sodium metal crystallizes in bcc structure with the edge length of the unit cell 4.3 x 10-8 cm. Calculate the radius of sodium atom.
Answer:
Edge length of the unit cell (a) = 4.3 x 10-8cm
Radius of sodium atom (r) = ?
For bcc structure, r = \(\frac { \sqrt { 3 } }{ 4 } a\)
= \(\frac { \sqrt { 3 } }{ 4 } a\) (4.3 x 10-8cm)
\(\frac { 1.732\times 4.3\times { 10 }^{ -8 } }{ 4 }\)
= \(\frac { 1.732 }{ 4 } \times { 10 }^{ -8 }cm\)
= 1.86 x 10-8 cm = l.86Å

Question 25.
Write a note on Frenkel defect.
Answer:
Frenkel defect arises due to the dislocation of ions from its crystal lattice. The ion which is missing from the lattice point occupies an interstitial position. This defect is shown by ionic solids in which cation and anion differ in size.

Unlike Schottky defect, this defect does not affect the density of the crystal. For example AgBr, in this casc, small Ag ion leaves its normal site and occupies an interstitial position as shown in the figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-1.1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solid State Evaluate Yourself

Question 1.
An element has a face centered cubic unit cell with a length of 352.4 pm along an edge. The density of the element is 8.9 gcm-3. How many atoms are present in loo g of an element?
Answer:
Mass = 100g
Density = 8.9 g cm-3
Edge length = 352.4 pm
(a) 352.4 x 10-10cm
Volume of the unit cell,
a3 = (352.4 x 1010cm) 34.37 x 1023 cm3
Volume of 100 g of an element.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-23
Therefore number of unit cells,
\(\frac { 11.23 }{ 4.37\times { 10 }^{ -23 } }\) = 11.23 = 2.56 x 1023
Since each Fcc cube contains 4 atoms, therefore total number of atoms in 100 g.
= 4 x (2.56 x 1023) = 10.24 x 1023 atoms

Question 2.
Determine the density of CsCl which crystallizes in a bcc type structure with an edge length 412.1 pm.
Answer:
Molar mass of cscl = 168.5 g /mol
Number atoms present in per unit cell for bcc (cscl)
n = 1
Edge length (a) = 412.1 pm
Density (ρ) = ?
ρ = \(\frac { nM }{ { a }^{ 3 }{ N }_{ A } }\)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-24

Question 3.
A face centered cubic solid of an element (atomic mass 60) has a cube edge of 4 Å. Calculate its density.
For FCC unit cell n = 4
Edge length (a) = 4Å = 4 x 10-8cm
Mass (M) = 60 g mol-1
Density (p) = ?
ρ = \(\frac { nM }{ { a }^{ 3 }{ N }_{ A } }\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-25

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solid State Additional Questions

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solid State 1 Mark Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best answer.

Question 1.
Consider the following statements
(i) Solids have definite volume and shape
(ii) Solids are rigid and compressible
(iii) Solids have weak cohesive forces

Which of the above statemetns is / are not correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (ii) & (iii) only
(c) (iii) only
(d) (i) & (ii) only
Answer:
(b) (ii) & (iii) only

Question 2.
Which one of the following is an ionic crystal?
(a) Glass
(b) Rubber
(c) NaCl
(d) SiO2
Answer:
(c) NaCl

Question 3.
Which one of the following is an amorphous solid?
(a) Glass
(b) SiO2
(c) NaCl
(d) Na
Answer:
(a) Glass

Question 4.
Which one of the following is an example for molecular crystals?
(a) Diamond
(b) Silica
(c) Glass
(d) Naphthalene
Answer:
(d) Naphthalene

Question 5.
Which one of the following is an example for atomic solids?
(a) Frozen elements of group 18
(b) Group 17 elements
(c) Inner – transition elements
(d) chalcogens
Answer:
(a) Frozen elements of group 18

Question 6.
Which one of the following is a covalent crystal?
(a) Glass
(b) Diamond
(c) Anthracene
(d) Glucose
Answer:
(b) Diamond

Questions 7.
Consider the following statements.
(i) Crystalline solids have irregular shape
(ii) Generally crystalline solids are anisotropic in nature
(iii) Heat of fusion of crystalline solids are not definite

Which of the above statements is / are correct?
(a) (i) & (iii)
(b) (i) only
(c) (iii) only
(d) (ii) only
Answer:
(d) (ii) only

Question 8.
Consider the following statements.
(i) Amorphous solids are isotropic like liquids
(ii) Amorphous solids are considered as pseudo solids
(iii) Amorphous solids have sharp melting points

Which of the above statemetns is / are correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (ii) only
(c) (i) & (ii)
(d) (i) & (iii)
Answer:
(c) (i) & (ii)

Question 9.
In an ionic crystal, both cations and anions are bound together by ………..
(a) Strong electrostatic attractive forces
(b) Weak electrostatic attractive forces
(c) Vanderwaals forces of attraction
(d) Weak cohesive forces
Answer:
(a) Strong electrostatic attractive forces

Question 10.
Molecular solids contains neutral molecules held together by ………..
(a) strong cohesive forces
(b) weak vanderwaals forces
(c) weak ionic forces
(d) strong electrostatic forces
Answer:
(b) weak vanderwaals forces

Question 11.
Which is used inside pencils and in many lubricants?
(a) Lead nitrate
(b) charcoal
(c) graphite
(d) coke
Answer:
(c) graphite

Question 12.
In non polar molecular solids, molecules are held together by ………..
(a) London forces
(b) weak vanderwaals forces
(c) Strong electrostatic forces
(d) strong cohesive forces
Answer:
(a) London forces

Question 13.
Which one of the following is non-polar molecular solids?
(a) Diamond
(b) SiC
(c) Anthracene
(d) Glass
Answer:
(c) Anthracene

Question 14.
Silicon carbide is an example of ………..
(a) Ionic solid
(b) Covalent solid
(c) Polar molecular solid
(d) Non – polar molecular solid
Answer:
(b) Covalent solid

Question 15.
Naphthalene is an example of ………..
(a) ionic solid
(b) covalent solid
(c) non polar molecular solid
(d) polar molecular solid
Answer:
(c) non polar molecular solid

Question 16.
Solid NH3 solid CO2 are examples of ………..
(a) Covalent solids
(b) polar molecular solids
(c) molecular solids
(d) ionic solids
Answer:
(b) polar molecular solids

Question 17.
Solids ice, glucose are examples of ………..
(a) metallic solids
(b) ionic solids
(c) hydrogen bonded molecular solids
(d) non polar molecular solids
Answer:
(c) hydrogen bonded molecular solids

Question 18.
Consider the following statements.
(i) metallic solids possess high electrical and thermal conductivity
(ii) solid ice are soft solids under room temperature
(iii) In non polar molecular solids constituent molecules are held together by strong electrostatic forces of attraction

Which of the above statements is / are not correct?
(a) (i) & (ii)only
(b) (iii) only
(c) (ii) only
(d) (i) only
Answer:
(b) (iii) only

Question 19.
Each atom in the comer of the cubic unit cell is shared by how many unit cells?
(a) 8
(b) 6
(c) 1
(d) 12
Answer:
(a) 8

Question 20.
Which is the coordination number of each atom in a simple cubic unit cell?
(a) 8
(b) 6
(c) 12
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 6

Question 21.
The number of atoms belongs to fcc unit cell is ………..
(a) 2
(b) 4
(c) 6
(d) 12
Answer:
(a) 2

Question 22.
The number of atoms in fee unit cell is ………..
(a) 2
(b) 4
(c) 6
(d) 8
Answer:
(b) 4

Question 23.
The atoms the face centre is being shared by ………..
(a) 4
(b) 8
(c) 2
(d) 6
Answer:
(c) 2

Question 24.
An atom present at the body centre be longs to only unit cell ………..
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 4
(d) 8
Answer:
(a) 1

Question 25.
Which one of the following is known as Bragg’s equation’?
(a) d = \(\frac { 2sinθ }{ nλ } \)
(b) d = \(\frac { nλ }{ 2sinθ } \)
(c) d = \(\frac { d }{ sinθ } \)
(d) d = \(\frac { 2sinθ }{ nλ } \)
Answer:
(b) d = \(\frac { nλ }{ 2sinθ } \)

Question 26.
Which one of the following formula is used to calculate the density of the unit cell ?
(a) ρ = \(\frac { nM }{ { a }^{ 3 }{ N }_{ A } } \)
(b) ρ = \(\frac { { a }^{ 3 }{ N }_{ A } }{ nM } \)
(c) ρ = \(\frac { { N }_{ A } }{ { a }^{ 3 }{ N }M } \)
(d) ρ = \(\frac { { a }^{ 3 }{ N }_{ A } }{ n } \)
Answer:
(a) ρ = \(\frac { nM }{ { a }^{ 3 }{ N }_{ A } } \)

Question 27.
Which is the packing fraction in simple cubic unit cell?
(a) 52.31%
(b) 100%
(c) 68%
(d) 75%
Answer:
(a) 52.3 1%

Question 28.
The packing fraction in bcc arrangement is ………..
(a) 52.3 1%
(b) 68%
(c) 100%
(d) 80%
Answer:
(b) 68%

Question 29.
Which is the coordination number in both hep and ccp arrangements?
(a) 12
(b) 6
(c) 4
(d) 8
Answer:
(a) 12

Question 30.
What is the coordination number of B2O3?
(a) 4
(b) 6
(c) 8
(d) 3
Answer:
(d) 3

Question 31.
Which one of the following is the structure of B2O3 ?
(a) Tetra hedral
(b) Octahedral
(c) Trigonal planar
(d) Cubic
Answer:
(c) Trigonal planar

Question 32.
The coordination number of zinc sulphide is ………..
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 6
(d) 8
Answer:
(b) 4

Question 33.
The coordination number of CSCI ¡s ………..
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 6
(d) 8
Answer:
(d) 8

Question 34.
Which one of the following is the coordination number of NaCl?
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 6
(d) 8
Answer:
(c) 6

Question 35.
Which one of the following is the packing efficiency in fcc unit cell?
(a) 74%
(b) 52.6 1%
(c) 100%
(d) 68%
Answer:
(a) 74%

Question 36.
Which one of the following is an example for schoriky defect?
(a) NaCI
(b) AgBr
(c) KCI
(d) FeS
Answer:
(a) NaCl

Question 37.
Which one of the following is an example for Frenkel defect?
(a) NaCl
(b) AgCI
(c) AgBr
(d) AgNO3
Answer:
(c) AgBr

Question 38.
Metal excess defect is possible in ………..
(a) AgCI
(b) AgBr
(c) KCl
(d) Fes
Answer:
(c) KCl

Question 39.
Which one of the following is the metal deficiency defect?
(a) FeO
(b) ZnO
(c) KCl
(d) NaCl
Answer:
(a) FeO

Question 40.
Which one of the following shows non- stoichiometric defect?
(a) FeO
(b) AgBr
(c) ZnO
(d) Both a and c
Answer:
(d) Both a and c

II. Fill in the blanks

  1. Naphthalene,Anthracene and glucose are examples of ……………
  2. The best examples of covalent crystals are …………… and ……………
  3. Frozen elements of group 18 are called ……………
  4. Glass, Rubber, plastics are the examples of …………… solids.
  5. …………… means uniformity in all directions.
  6. Crystalline solids are …………… and they show different values of physical properties when measured along different directions.
  7. NaCl and KCl are the examples of …………… crystals.
  8. Diamond and silicon carbide are the examples of …………… solids.
  9. In molecular solids, the neutral molecules are held together by weak ……………
  10. …………… is a component of many lubricants for example cycle chain oil.
  11. In non polar molecular solids constituent molecules are held together by ……………
  12. In solids CO2 solid NH3 the molecules are held together by strong ……………
  13. Glucose and urea are generally …………… under room temperature.
  14. …………… solids possess excellent electrical and thermal conductivity.
  15. The regular arrangement of the ions throughout the crystal is called a ……………
  16. The basic repeating structural unit of a crystalline solid is called a ……………
  17. The number of the nearest neighbours that surrounding a particle in a crystal is called the ……………
  18. A unit cell that contains only one lattice point is called a ……………
  19. There are …………… primitive crystal systems.
  20. The coordination number of bcc is ……………
  21. Each atom in the comer of cubic unit cell is shared by …………… neighbouring unit cells.
  22. The number of atoms in bcc unit cell is ……………
  23. The number of atoms in a fee unit cell is ……………
  24. …………… is the most powerful tool for the determinaiton of crystal structure.
  25. Only …………… of the available volume is occupied by the spheres in simple cubic packing
  26. Of all the metals in the periodic table, only …………… crystallizes in simple cubic pattern.
  27. In bcc cubic pattern …………… of the available volume is occupied.
  28. If the third layer arrangement is aba arrangement, it is called …………… arrangement.
  29. If third layer arrangement is abc arrangment, it is known as …………… arrangement.
  30. In both …………… and …………… arrangements, the coordination number of each sphere is 12.
  31. The packing efficiency of fee unit cell is ……………
  32. …………… defect arises due to the missing of equal number of cations and anions from the crystal lattice.
  33. Presence of large number of schottky defects in a crystal, lowers its ……………
  34. Vanadium monoxide shows …………… defect.
  35. …………… arises due to the dislocation of ions from its crystal lattice.
  36. …………… arises due to the presence of more number of metalions as compared to anions.
  37. Zno is …………… at room temperature but when it is heated it becomes in colour.
  38. …………… arises due to the presence of less number of cations than the anions.
  39. …………… is the appearance of an electrical potential across the sides of the crystal, when it is subjected to mechanical stress.
  40. Stoichiometric defects in an ionic solid is also called …………… or …………… defect.

Answer:

  1. Molecular crystals
  2. Diamond, SiO2
  3. Atomic solids
  4. Amorphous
  5. Isotropy
  6. Anisotropic
  7. Ioni
  8. Covalent
  9. Vander waals forces
  10. Graphite
  11. London forces
  12. dipole-dipole interactions
  13. Soft solids
  14. Metallic
  15. Crystal lattice
  16. Unit cell
  17. Coordination number
  18. Primitive unit cell
  19. Seven
  20. Eight
  21. Eight
  22. Two
  23. Four
  24. X-ray diffraction analysis
  25. 52.31%
  26. Polonium
  27. 68%
  28. hep or hexagonal close packed
  29. ccp or cubic close packed
  30. hep, ccp
  31. 74%
  32. Schottky
  33. density
  34. Schottky defect
  35. Frenkel defect
  36. metal excess defect
  37. Colourless, yellow
  38. Metal deficiency
  39. Piezoelectricity
  40. intrinsic or thermodynamic

III. Match the following:

Question 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-26
Answer:
(a) 3, 4, 1, 2

Question 2.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-27
Answer:
Answer:
(b) 3, 1, 4, 2

Question 3.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-28
Answer:
(a) 2, 4, 1, 3

Question 4.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-34
Answer:
(b) 3, 1, 4, 2

Question 5.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-29
Answer:
(c) 4, 1, 2, 3

IV. Assertion and Reason

Question 1.
Assertion (A): Amorphous solids are isotropic in nature.
Reason (R): In amorphous solids, they have identical values of physical properties such as refractive index, electrical conductance in all directions which is called isotropy.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a)Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 2.
Assertion (A): Crystalline solids are anisotropic in nature.
Reason (R): Anisotropy is the property which depends on the direction of measurement. Crystalline solids are anisotropic and they show different values of physical properties when measured along different directions.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a)Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 3.
Assertion (A): Ionic solids do not conduct electricity in solid state but in molten state they conduct electricity.
Reason (R): In solid state, the ions are fixed in their lattice positions but in molten state, the ions are free to move and conduct electricity.
(a) Both A and R are correct but R is not correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(A)Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A

Question 4.
Assertion (A): Diamond and Silicon carbide are very hard and have high melting point.
Reason (R): In covalent solids, the atoms are bound together in a three dimensional network entirely by covalent bonds.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a)Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 5.
Assertion (A): Solid CO2 Solid NH3 have higher melting points.
Reason (R): The constituents are molecules formed by polar covalent bonds. They are held together by relatively strong dipole- dipole interactions.
(a) A is correct but R is wrong.
(b) A is wrong but R is correct
(c) A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
(d) A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A
Answer:
(c) A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A

Question 6.
Assertion (A): Solid ice, Glucose are generally soft solids under room temperature.
Reason (R): The constituents are held together by strong electrostatic forces of attraction.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are correct and R is not the correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong.
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(c) A is correct but R is wrong.

Question 7.
Assertion (A): In bcc, the available volume is more efficiently used than in simple cubic packing.
Reason (R): In simple cubic arrangement, the number of spheres belongs to a unit cell is equal to one whereas in bcc, it is equal to 2.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are correct R is not the correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong.
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A

Question 8.
Assertion (A): B2 O3 has trigonal planar structure.
Reason (R): The ratio of radius of cation and anion \(\frac { { r }_{ { c }^{ + } } }{ { r }_{ { A }^{ – } } } \) = 0.155 – 0.225 plays an important role in determining the structure . and B2 O3 has coordination number as 3 and has trigonal planar structure.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong.
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A

Question 9.
Assertion (A): Schottky defect does not change the stoichiometry of the crystal.
Reason (R): This defect arises due to the missing of equal number of cations and anions from the crystal lattice.
(a) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong.
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A

Question 10.
Assertion (A): Zinc oxide is colourless at room temperature but on heating it becomes yellow in colour.
Reason (R): On heating Zinc loses oxygen and thereby forming free zn2+ ions. The excess zn2+ ions move to interstitial sites and the electrons also occupy interstitial positions.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are correct R is not the correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong.
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A

V. Find the odd one out

Question 1.
(a) Plastic
(b) Rubber
(c) Glucose
(d) Glass
Answer:
(c) Glucose It is a molecular solid where as others are amorphous solids.

Question 2.
(a) Anthracene
(b) Naphthalene
(c) Glucose
(d) Sodium chloride
Answer:
(d) Sodium chloride It is ionic crystall where as others are molecular crystals.

Question 3.
(a) Sodium
(b) Pottasium
(c) Frozen elements of group 18
(d) Gold
Answer:
(c) Frozen elements of group 18 It is atomic solid where as others are metallic solids.

Question 4.
(a) Solid CO2
(b) Solid ice
(c) Glucose
(d) Urea
Answer:
(a) Solid CO2 It is a polar molecular solid where as others are hydrogen bonded molecular solids.

Question 5
(a) Cubic
(b) Rhombohedral
(c) Hexagonal
(d) Cyclic
Answer:
(d) Cyclic It is a ring structure where as other primitive crystal systems.

VI. Find the odd correct pair

Question 1.
(a) Glass, plastic
(b) Rubber, ice
(c) Nacl, Glucose
(d) Urea, solid NH3
Answer:
(a) Glass, plastic (Amorphous solids)

Question 2.
(a) NaCI, KCI
(b) FeO, ZnO
(e) AgBr, AgNO3
(d) VO, ZnO
Answer:
(a) Naci, Kcl (schottky defect)

Question 3.
(a) Solid CO2 Solid ice
(b) Solid CO2 Solid NH3
(c) Graphite, Silicon carbide
(d) Naphthalene, Phenol
Answer:
(b) Solid CO2 Solid NH3 Polar molecular solids

Question 4.
(a) NaCI, SiC
(b) Naphthalene, anthracene
(c) Solid ice, graphite
(d) Copper, KO
Answer:
(b) Naphthalcne, anthracenc – It is non-polar molecular solid examples.

VII. Find out the odd incorrect pair

Question 1.
(a) NaCl, KCl
(b) Naphthalenc, anthracene
(c) Solid CO2, Solid NH3
(d) Diamond, solid ice
Answer:
(d)Diamond, solid ice

Question 2.
(a) Cu, Fc
(b) Glucose, Urca
(c) Diamond, SiC
(d) Benzene, glucose
Answer:
(d) Benzene, glucose

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solid State 2 Mark Question and Answers

Question 1.
What are crystalline solid? Give example.
Answer:
A crystalline solid is one in which its constituents (atoms, ions or molecules) have an orderly arrangement extending over a long range which has three dimensional pattern. Example – NaCl.

Question 2.
What are amorphous solid? Give example.
Answer:
In an amorphous solid, the constituents are randomly arranged. It is a short range arrangement of constituents. Eg – Glass.

Question 3.
What are covalent solids? Give example.
Answer:
In covalent solids, the constituents (atoms) are bound together in a three dimensional network entirely by covalent bonds. Examples. Diamond, Silicon carbide.

Question 4.
Silicon carbide is very hard. Justify this statement.
Answer:
Silicon carbide is very hard. It is a covalent solid contains the atoms which are bound together in a three dimensional network entirely by covalent bonds. So the covalent network crystal SiC is very hard and have high melting point.

Question 5.
Write a note about molecular solids.
Answer:

  1. In molecular solids, the constituents are neutral molecules. They are held together by weak vander waals forces.
  2. Molecular solids are soft and they do not conduct electricity. Eg – Solid CO2

Question 6.
What are non-polar molecular solids? Give example.
Answer:

  1. In non polar molecular solids, constituent molecules are held together by weak dispersion forces or London forces.
  2. They have low melting points and are usually in liquids or gaseous state at room temperature. Eg., Naphthalene, anthrancene.

Question 7.
What are hydrogen bonded molecular solids? Give example.
Answer:

  1. Molecular solids in which the constituents are held together by hydrogen bonds.
  2. They are generally soft solids under room temperature. Examples., Solid ice, Glucose, Urea.

Question 8.
Define crystal lattice.
Answer:
The regular arrangement of these species throughout the crystal is called a crystal lattice.

Question 9.
Define coordination number.
Answer:

  1. A crystal may be considered to consist of large number of unit cells, each one in direct contact with its nearer neighbour and all similarly oriented in space.
  2. The number of the nearest neighbours that surrounding a particle in a crystal is called coordination number of that particle.

Question 10.
Draw the tetragonal crystal systems.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-35
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-34.1

Question 11.
Draw the hexagonal primitive crystal structure.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-36

Question 12.
Draw the typec of monoclinic primitive cubic crystals.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-37
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-36.1

Question 13.
Draw the primitive cubes.

  1. trigonal
  2. triclinic

Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-39
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-38

Question 14.
What is Bragg’s equation?
Answer:
1. X-ray diffraction analysis is the most powerful tool fiw the determination of crystal structure.

2. The interplanar distance (d) between two successive planes of atoms can be calcuLated using the following equation form the X-ray diffraction data 2d sin θ = nλ. The equation is known as Bragg’s equation.

Where λ = wavelength of X-ray – d = Interplanar distance, θ The angle of diffraction – n = order of reflection. By knowing the values of θ, λ and n. we can calculate the value of d. d = \(\frac { nλ }{ 2Sinθ } \) Using these values, the edge of the unit cell can be calculated.

Question 15.
What is meant by linear arrangement of spheres in one direction?
Answer:
1. In a specific direction, there is only one possibility to arrange the spheres in one direction.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-40

2. In this arrangement, each sphere is in contact with two neighbouring spheres on either.

Question 16.
What is meant by piezo electricity?
Answer:
Piezo electricity is the appearance of an electrical potential across the sides of a crystal. When you subject it to mechanical stress. The word piezo electricity means electricity resulting from pressure and latent heat. Even the inverse is possible which is known as inverse piezo electric effect.

Question 17.
Why are solids rigid?
Answer:
In a solid, the constituent particles are very closely – packed. Hence, the forces of attraction among these particles are very strong, that is why they are rigid.

Question 18.
Why do solids have a definite volume?
Answer:
The constituent particles of a solid have fixed positions and are not free to move i.e., they possess rigidity. That is why they have a definite volume.

Question 19.
Classify the following as amorphous or crystalline solids: Polyurethane, naphthalene, benzoic acid, teflon, potassium nitrate, cellophane, polyvinyl chloride, fibre glass, copper.
Answer:
Amorphous solids: Polyurethane, teflon, cellophane, polyvinyl chloride, fibre glass. Crystalline solids: Benzoic acid, naphthalene, potassium nitrate, copper.

Question 20.
Why is glass considered as super cooled liquid?
Answer:
Glass is an amorphous solid. Like liquids it has a tendency to flow, though very slowly. The proof of this fact is that glass panes in the windows or doors of old buildings are invariably found to be slightly thicker at the bottom than at the top.

Question 21.
Refractive index of a solid is observed to have the same value along all directions. Comment on the nature of this solid. Would it show cleavage property?
Answer:
As the solid has same value of refractive index along all directions, this means that it is isotropic and hence amorphous. Being an amorphous solid, it would not show a clean cleavage when cut with a knife. Instead it would break into pieces with irregular surfaces.

Question 22.
Classify the following solids in different categories based on the nature of intermolecular forces operating in them: Potassium sulphate, tin, benzene, urea, ammonia, water, zinc sulphide, graphite, rubidium, argon, silicon carbide.
Answer:

  1. Potassium sulphate – Ionic
  2. Tin – Metallic
  3. Benzene – Molecular (non polar)
  4. Urea – Molecular (polar)
  5. Ammonia – Molecular (hydrogen bonded)
  6. Water – Molecular (hydrogen bonded)
  7. Zinc Suiphide – Ionic
  8. Graphite – Covalent or Network
  9. Rubidium – Metallic
  10. Argon – Molecular (non polar)
  11. Silicon carbide – Covalent or Network

Question 23.
Solid A is a very hard electrical insulator in solid as well as in molten state, and melts at extremely high temperature. What type of solid is it?
Answer:
Covalent or Network solid like SiO2 (quartz) or SIC or C (diamond).

Question 24.
Ionic solids conduct electricity in molten state but not in solid state. Explain.
Answer:
In the molten state, ionic solids dissociate to give free ions and hence can conduct electricity. However in the solid state, as the ions are not free to move but remain held together by strong electrostatic forces of attraction, so they cannot conduct electricity in the solid state.

Question 25.
An element with molar mass 2.7 x 10-2 kg mol-1 forms a cubic unit cell with edge length 405 pm. If the density is 2.7 x 103 kg m-3, what ¡s the nature of the cubic unit cell?
Answer:
Density
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-41
Thus, there are 4 atoms of elements present per unit cell, hence, the cubic unit cell must be facecentred or cubic close – packed (cep).

Question 26.
Ionic solids, which have anionic vacancies due to metal excess defect develop colour. Explain with the help of suitable example.
Answer:
Taking the example of NaCl, when its crystals arc heated in presence of sodium vapour some chloride ion leave their lattice sites to combine with sodium to form NaCI. For this released diffuses into the crystal to occupy the anion vacancies created by Cl ions.

The crystal now has excess of sodium. The sites occupied by unpaired electrons are called F – centres. They impart yellow colour to the crystal because they absorb energy from the visible light and get excited.

Question 27.
Classify each of the following solids as ionic, metallic, molecular, network (covalent) or amorphous.

  1. Tetra phosphorous decoxide (P4 O10)
  2. Ammonium Phosphate (NH4)3PO4
  3. SIC
  4. I2
  5. P4
  6. Plastic
  7. Graphite
  8. Brass
  9. Rb
  10. LiBr
  11. Si

Answer:

  1. Tetra phosphorous decoxide (P4 O10) = Molecular solid
  2. Ammonium Phosphate (NH4)3PO4 = Ionic solid
  3. SiC = Covalent solid
  4. I2 = Molecular solid
  5. P4 = Molecular solid
  6. Plastic Amorphous solid
  7. Graphite = Covalent solid
  8. Brass = Metallic solid
  9. Rb = Metallic solid
  10. LiBr = Ionic solid
  11. Si = Covalent solid

Question 28.
What ¡s the formula of a compound in which the element Y forms ccp Lattice and atoms of X occupy 2/3rd of tetrahedral voids?
Answer:
Number of element Y = n, Number of element X = 2 n x \(\frac { 2 }{ 3 } \). As number of tetrahedral void = 2n
X : Y= \(\frac { 4n }{ 3 } \) : n
Formula = X4 Y3

Question 29.
The energy required to vapourise one mole of copper is smaller than that of energy required to vapourise I mol of diamond. Why?
Answer:
Copper is a metallic solid having metal-metal bonds while diamond is a covalent solid having covalent bonds.Metallic bonds are weaker than covalent bonds and thus less amount of energy is required to break metallic bonds than covalent bonds.

Question 30.
Assign reason for the following:

  1. phosphorous doped silicon is a semiconductor.
  2. Schottky defect lowers the density of a solid.

Answer:

  1. It is because its conductance is intermediate between conductor and insulator.
  2. In Schottky defect, both cations and anions are missing which leads to lowering the density of a solid.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solid State 3 Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Distinguish between isotropy and anisotropy?
Answer:
Isotropy:

  1. Isotropy means uniformity in all directions.
  2. Isotropy means having identical values of physical properties such as refractive index, electrical conductance in all directions.
  3. Isotropy is the property of amorphous solids.

Anisotropy:

  1. Anisotropy means non-uniformity in all directions.
  2. Anisotropy is the property which depends on the direction of measurement. They show different values of physical properties when measured along different directions.
  3. Anisotropy is the properly of crystalline solids.

Question 2.
What are polar molecular solids? Give example.
Answer:

  1. The constituents are molecules formed by polar covalent bonds.
  2. They are held together by relatively strong dipole-dipole interactions.
  3. They have higher melting points than the non-polar molecular solids. Eg., Solid CO2, Solid NH3.

Question 3.
Write a note about metallic solids.
Answer:

  1. In metallic solids, the lattice points are occupied by positive metal ions and a cloud of electrons pervades the space.
  2. They are hard and have high melting point.
  3. Metallic solids possess excellent electrical and thermal conductivity. They possess bright lustre.
  4. Examples – Metals and metal alloys Cu, Fe, Zn, Ag, Ay, Cu – Zn etc.

Question 4.
What are characteristic parameters of a unit cell?
Answer:
1. A basic repeating structural unit of a crystalline solid is called a unit cell.

2. A unit cell is characterised by the three edge lengths or lattice constants a,b and c and the angle between the edges a,P and y.

3.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-42

Question 5.
What are type of unit cells? Give their names.
Answer:

  1. There are two types of unit cells, a) primitive b) Non – primitive.
  2. A unit cell that contains only one lattice point is called a primitive unit cell, which is made up from the lattice points at each of the comers.
  3. In the case of non-primitive unit cells, there are additional lattice points, either on a face of the unit cell or with in the unit cell.

Question 6.
Draw the seven types of primitive crystal systems.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-43

Question 7.
Draw the types of cubic crystal systems.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-44

Question 8.
Draw the types of orthorhombic cubic crystal systems.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-45

Question 9.
Calculate the number of atoms belong to one unit cell of simple cubic unit cell(sc).
Answer:
1. In the simple cubic unit cell, each corner is occupied by an identical atoms (or) ions (or) molecules and they touch along the edges of cube,do not touch diagonally. The coordination number of each atom is 6.

2. Each atom in the comer of the cubic unit cell is shared by 8 neighbouring unit cells and therefore atoms per unit cell is equal to \(\frac { { { N }_{ c } } }{ 8 }\). where Nc is the number of atoms at the corners.

3. no of atoms in a Sc unit cell = \(\left( \frac { { N }_{ c } }{ 8 } \right)\) = \(\left( \frac { 8 }{ 8 } \right) \) = 1
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-46

Question 10.
Calculate the number of atoms per unit cell of bec type.
Answer:
1. In a body centered cubic unit cell, each corner is occupied by an identical particle and in addition to that one atom occupied the body centre.

2. Those atoms which occupy the corners do not touch each other, however they all touch the one that occupies the body centre.

3. Hence each atom is surrounded by eight nearest neighbours and coordination number is 8. An atom present at the body centre belongs to only a particular unit cell i.e., unshared by other cell.
∴number of atoms in a bcc unit cell = \(\frac { { N }_{ c } }{ 8 }\) + \(\frac { { N }_{ b } }{ 1 }\) + \(\frac { 8 }{ 8 } \) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 1 } \) = 1 + 1 = 2
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-47

Question 11.
How will derive the formula of density of a unit cell?
Answer:
1. Using the edge length of a unit cell, we can calculate the density (p )of the crystal by considering a cubic unit cell as follows.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-48
Substitute the value (3) in (2)
Mass of the unit cell = n x \(\frac { M }{ { N }_{ A } }\)
For a cubic unit cell, all the edge lengths are equal. i.e., a = b = c
Volume of the unit cell = a x a x a = a3
∴Density of the unit cell = ρ = \(\frac { nM }{ { a }^{ 3 }{ N }_{ A } }\)

Question 12.
Calculate the packing fraction of siniple cubic arrangement
Answer:
In a simple cubic arrangement
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-49
Consider the cube with an edge length ‘a’
Volume of the cube with edge length a is = a x a x a = a3 …………….(l)
Let ‘r’ ¡s the radius of the sphere
From the figure a = 2 r ⇒ r = \(\frac { a }{ 2 } \)
:. volume of the sphere with radius r = \(\frac { 4 }{ 3 } \) πr3
= \(\frac { 4 }{ 3 } \) π \({ \left( \frac { a }{ 2 } \right) }^{ 3 }\)
= \(\frac { 4 }{ 3 } \) π \(\left( \frac { { a }^{ 3 } }{ 8 } \right) \)
= \(\frac { { πa }^{ 3 } }{ 6 }\) ……………………….(2)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-50
In a simple cubic arrangement. number of spheres belongs to a unit cell equal to one.
∴Total volume occupied by the spheres in sc unit cell = 1 x \(\left( \frac { { πa }^{ 3 } }{ 6 } \right) \) ……(3)
Dividing 3 by 1

Packing fraction = \(\left( \frac { \frac { \pi { a }^{ 3 } }{ 6 } }{ { a }^{ 3 } } \right) \times 100\) = \(\frac { 100π }{ 6 }\) = 52.3 1% Only 52.31% of the available volume is occupied by the spheres in simple cubic packing, making in efficient use of available space and hence minimizing the attractive forces.

Question 13.
What is meant by packing efficiency? How is ¡t measured?
Answer:
1. There is some free space between the spheres of a single layer and the spheres of successive layers.

2. The percentage of total volume occupied by these constituent spheres gives the packing efficiency of an arrangement. For eg., in simple cubic arrangement.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-52

Question 14.
Calculate the packing efficiency in fcc unit cell?
Answer:
Total number of spheres belongs to a single fcc unit cell is 4. Volume of the sphere with radius r is = \(\frac { n }{ 2 }\) π \({ \left( \frac { \sqrt { 2 } a }{ 4 } \right) }^{ 3 }\)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-53

Question 15.
How is radius ratio ¡s useful in determination of structure of an Ionic compound?
Answer:

  1. The structure of an ionic compound depends upon the stoichiometry and the size of the ions.
  2. Generally in ionic crystals, the bigger anions are present in the close packed arrangements the cations occupy the voids.
  3. The ratio of radius of cation and anion plays an important role in determining the structure.
  4. For Eg;

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-54

Question 16.
What Is meant by impurity defect? Explain with example?
Answer:

  1. A method of introducing defects in ionic solids by adding impurity ions.
  2. If the impurity ions are in different valence state from that of host, vaccancies are creited in the crystal lattice of the host.
  3. For cg., addition of CdCl2 to silver chloride yields solid solutions where the divalent cation Cd2+ occupies the position of Ag2+
  4. This will disturb the electrical neutrality of the crystal. In order to maintain the same, proportional number of Ag ions leave the lattice. This produces a cation vaccancy in the lattice, such kind of crystal defects are called impurity defects.

Question 17.
A compound is formed by two elements M and N. The element N forms ccp and atoms of M occupy 1/3 rd of the tetrahedral voids. What is the formula of the compound?
Answer:
Suppose the atoms N in the ccp = n
∴ No. of tetrahedral voids = 2n
As 1/3 rd of the tetrahedral voids are occupied by atoms M, therefore,
No. of atoms M = \(\frac { 2n }{ 3 } \)
∴ Ratio of M : N = \(\frac { 2n }{ 3 } \) : n = 2 : 3
Hence, the formula is M2N3

Question 18.
How many lattice points are there in one unit cell of each of the following lattice?

  1. Face – centred cubic
  2. Face – centred tetragonal
  3. Body – centered

Answer:

  1. Lattice points in face-centred cubic lattice = 8 (at corners) + 6 (at the face centre) = 14
  2. Face centred tetragonal = 8 (at corners) + 6 (at the face centre) = 14
  3. Lattice points in body-centred cube = 8 (at corners) +1 (at the body centre) = 9

Question 19.
Explain:

  1. The basis of similarities and differences between metallic and ionic crystals.
  2. Ionic solids are hard and brittle.

Answer:
1. Similarities:

  • Both ionic and metallic crystals have electrostatic forces of attractiàn.
  • In ionic crystals these forces are between oppositely charged ions. In metals,these forces are among the valence electrons and posityely charged kernels.
  • Both have high melting point.

Differences:

  • Ionic bond is strong due to electrostatic forces of attraction whereas metallic bond may be weak or strong depending upon the number of valence electrons and the size of kernels.
  • In ionic bond, ions are not free to move. Hence, they cannot conduct electricity in solid state. They can do so only in molten state or in aqueous solution. ¡n metals, electrons are free to move. Hence, they conduct electricity in solid state.

2. Ionic crystals are hard due to strong electrostatic forces between them. They are brittle because ionic bond is non – directional.

Question 20.
ZnO is colourless at room temperature, while yellow when hot, why?
Answer:
ZnO is colourless at room temperature. When it is heated, it becomes yellow in colour. On heating, it loses oxygen and thereby forming free Zn2+ ions. The excess Zn2+ ions move to interstitial sites and the electrons also occupy the interstitial positions.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solid State 5 Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What are general characteristics of solids?
Answer:

  1. Solids have definite volume and shape.
  2. Solids are rigid and incompressible.
  3. Solids have strong cohesive forces.
  4. Solids have short interatomic, ionic (or) molecular distances.
  5. Their constituents (atoms, ions or molecules) have fixed positions and can only oscillate about their mean positions.
  6. Unlike gases, in solids, the atoms, ions (or) molecules are held together by strong force of attraction.

Question 2.
Write a note about classification of solids with suitable examples.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-55

Question 3.
What are ionic solids? Give their characteristics.
Answer:

  1. The structural units of an ionic crystals are cations and anions. They are bound together by strong Na electrostatic attractive forces.
  2. To maximize the attractive force, cations are surrounded by as many anions as possible and vice versa.
  3. Ionic crystals possess definite crystals structure.
  4. Many solids are cubic close packed.

Characteristics

  1. Ionic solids have high melting points.
  2. These solids do not conduct electricity, because the ions are fixed in their lattice positions.
  3. They do not conduct electricity in molten state (or) when dissolved in water, because the ions are free to move in the molten state or solution.
  4. They are hard as only strong external force can change the relative positions of ions.
  5. Example – The arrangement of Na and Cl ions in NaCI crystal.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-56

Question 4.
What are molecular solids?Explain their classification with suitable examples.
Answer:
In molecular solids, the constituents are neutral molecules. They are held together by weak vander Waals forces. Generally molecular solids are soft and they do not conduct electricity. These molecular solids are further classified into three types.

  1. Non polar molecular solids.
  2. Polar molecular solids.
  3. Hydrogen bonded molecular solids.

1. Non polar molecular solids

  • In this type, molecules are held together by weak dispersion forces or London forces.
  • They have low melting points and are usually in liquids or gaseous state at room temperature. Examples – Naphthalene, Anthracene etc.

2. Polar molecular solids

  • In this type, molecules formed by polar covalent bonds.
  • They are held together by strong dipole-dipole interactions.
  • They have higher melting points than the non – polar molecular solids. Examples., solid CO2, solid NH3

3. Hydrogen bonded molecular solids

  • The constituents are held together by hydrogen bonds.
  • The constituents are held together by hydrogen bonds.
  • They are soft solids under room temperature Examples: Solid ice, glucose, urea.

Question 5.
An element crystallizes in a fcc lattice with cell edge of 400 pm. The density of the element is 7 g/cm3. How many atoms one present in 280 g of the element?
Answer:
Volume of unit cell a3 (a = edge length)
= 400 pm
= (400 x 10-12 m)3
= (400 x 100-10 cm)3 = 64 x 10-24 cm3
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solution Chapter 6 Solid State-57
Since each f.c.c. unit cell contains 4 atoms therefore,
Total number =4 x 0.46 x 1024,
= 1.84 x 1024 atoms.

Common Errors

Common Errors

  1. sc, bcc, fee structures may get confused if they ask in different order.
  2. Calculation of atoms at each cube may get confused.
  3. Sharing of atoms may get con¬fused.

Rectifications

  1. In sc, only simple cube can be drawn, bcc structure is with one dot at centre, fee structure is with sc with six dots at each face.
    sc – only one atom, bcc – two atoms, fee – four atoms (we can remember as f and f).
  2. Atom at comer is shard by 8 unit cells. Atom at centre is not shared. Atom at face is shared by 2 unit cells. Atom at edge is shared by 4 unit cells.

Hope you love the Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chapter Wise Material. Clearly understand the deep concept of Chemistry learning with the help of Tamilnadu State Board 12th Chemistry Chapter 6 Solid State Questions and AnswersPDF. Refer your friends to and bookmark our website for instant updates. Also, keep in touch with us using the comment section.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers

Are you searching for the Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chapter Wise Solutions PDF? Then, get your Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chapter Wise Solutions PDF for free on our website. Students can Download Chemistry Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers Questions and Answers, Notes Pdf, Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Guide Pdf helps you to revise the complete Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers

All concepts are explained in an easy way on our website. So, students can easily learn and practice Tamilnadu State Board 12th Chemistry Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers Question and Answers. You can enjoy the digitized learning with the help of the Tamilnadu State Board Chemistry Online Material.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers Textual Evaluation Solved

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers Multiple Choice Questions

12th Chemistry Chapter 11 Book Back Answers Question 1.
An alcohol (x) gives blue colour in victormayer’s test and 3.7g of X when treated with metallic sodium liberates 560 mL of hydrogen at 273 K and 1 atm pressure what will be the possible structure of X?
(a) CH3 CH (OH) CH2CH3
(b) CH3 – CH(OH) – CH3
(c) CH3 – C (OH) (CH3)2
(d) CH3 – CH2 – CH (OH) – CH2 – CH3
Answer:
(a) CH3 CH (OH) CH2CH3
Hint:
2R – OH + Na → 2RONa + 2H2 ↑ 2 moles of alcohol gives 1 mole of H2 which occupies
22.4L at 273K and 1 atm
number of moles of alcohol = \(\frac{2 \text { moles of } \mathrm{R}-\mathrm{OH}}{22.4 \mathrm{L} \text { of } \mathrm{H}_{2}}\) x 560 mL = 0.05 moles
number of moles = \(\frac{\text { mass }}{\text { molar mass }}\)
= molar mass = \(\frac{3.7}{0.05}\) = 74 g mol-1
General formula for
R – OH Cn H2n+1 – OH
n(12) + (2n+1) (1) + 16 +1 = 74
14n = 74 – 18
14n = 56
n = \(\frac { 56 }{ 4 }\) = 4
The 2° alcohol which contains 4 carbon is CHn CH(OH)CH2 CH3

Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Question 2.
Which of the following compounds on reaction with methyl magnesium bromide will give tertiary alcohol.
(a) benzaldehyde
(b) propanoic acid
(c) methyl propanoate
(d) acetaldehyde
Answer:
(c) methyl propanoate
Hint:
12th Chemistry Chapter 11 Book Back Answers Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Samacheer Kalvi

12th Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Question 3.
Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11
This ‘X’ is …………..
12th Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Samacheer Kalvi
Answer:
Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Pdf Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11
Hint:
hydro boration – Anti markownikoff product
i.e CH3 – CH2 – CH – CH2 – CH2 – OH

Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Pdf Question 4.
In the reaction sequence, Ethane
Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Samacheer Kalvi
Ethan – 1, 2 – diol. A and X respectively are ………….
(a) Chioroethane and NaOH
(b) ethanol and H2SO4
(c) 2 – chloroethan – 1 – ol and NaHCO3
(d) ethanol and H2O
Answer:
(c) 2 – chloroethan – 1 – ol and NaHCO3
Hint:
Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Important Questions Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11

Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Class 12 Question 5.
Which one of the following is the strongest acid ………..
(a) 2 – nitrophenol
(b) 4 – chlorophenol
(c) 4 – nitrophenol
(d) 3 – nitrophenol
Answer:
(c) 4 – nitrophenol

Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Important Questions Question 6.
12th Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Samacheer Kalvi Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers
on treatment with Con. H2SO4, predominately gives ……………..
12th Chemistry Book Inside Evaluate Yourself Answers Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Samacheer Kalvi
Answer:
12th Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Pdf Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Samacheer Kalvi
Hint:
12th Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Pdf Download Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Samacheer Kalvi

12th Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Samacheer Question 7.
Carbolic acid is …………..
(a) Phenol
(b) Picric acid
(c) benzoic acid
(d) phenylacetic acid
Answer:
(a) Phenol

12th Chemistry Book Inside Evaluate Yourself Answers Question 8.
Which one of the following will react with phenol to give salicyladehyde after hydrolysis …………..
(a) Dichioro methane
(b) trichioroethane
(c) trichloro methane
(d) CO2
Answer:
(c) trichloro methane (Riemer Tiemann reaction)
Hint:
12 Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Samacheer Kalvi

12th Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Pdf Question 9.
12th Std Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Samacheer Kalvi
(a) (CH3)3 CCH = CH2
(b) (CH3)2 C = C (CH3)2
(c) CH2 = C(CH3)CH2 – CH2 – CH3
(d) CH2 = C (CH3) – CH2 – CH2 – CH3
Answer:
(b) (CH3)2 C = C (CH3)2
Hint:
12th Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers Samacheer Kalvi

12th Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Pdf Download Question 10.
The correct IUPAC name of the compound,
Samacheer Kalvi Guru 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers
(a) 4 – chloro – 2, 3 – dimethyl pentan – 1 – ol
(b) 2, 3 – dimethyl – 4 – chloropentan – 1 – ol
(c) 2, 3, 4 – trimethyl – 4 – chiorobutan – 1 – ol
(d) 4 – chioro – 2, 3, 4 – trimethyl pentan – 1 – ol
Answer:
(a) 4 – chloro – 2, 3 – dimethyl pentan – 1 – ol

12 Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Question 11.
Assertion: Phenol is more acidic than ethanol
Reason: Phenoxide ion is resonance stabilized
(a) if both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.
(b) if both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
(c) assertion is true but reason is false
(d) both assertion and reason are false.
Answer:
if both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.

12th Std Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Question 12.
In the reaction Ethanol
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds And Ethers is ………………
(a) ethane
(b) ethoxyethane
(c) ethylbisuiphite
(d) ethanol
Answer:
(d) ethanol
Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-16

12th Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Chapter 11 Question 13.
The reaction
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-17
can be classified as
(a) dehydration
(b) Williams on alcoholsynthesis
(c) Williamson ether synthesis
(d) dehydrogenation of alcohol
Answer:
(c) Williamson ether synthesis
Hint: Cyclic alcohol → sodium cyclic alkoxide → williamson ether synthesis

Samacheer Kalvi Guru 12th Chemistry Question 14.
Isoprophylbcnzene on air oxidation in the presence of dilute acid gives …………
(a) C6H5COOH
(b) C6H5COCH3
(c) C6H5COC6H5
(d) C6H5 – OH
Answer:
(a) C6H5 – OH (phenol)

11th Chemistry Evaluate Yourself Answers Chapter 11 Question 15.
Assertion: Phenol is more reactive than benzene towards electrophilic substitution reaction
Reason: In the case of phenol. the intermediate arenium ion is more stabilized by resonance.
(a) if both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.
(b) if both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
(c) assertion is true but reason is false
(d) both assertion and reason are false,.
Answer:
(a) if both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Question 16.
HO CH2 CH2 – OH on heating with periodic acid gives ………..
(a) methanoic acid
(b) Glyoxal
(c) methanol
(d) CO2
Answer:
(c) methanol

Question 17.
Which of the following compound can be used as artireeze in automobile radiators?
(a) methanol
(b) ethanol
(c) Neopentyl alcohol
(d) ethan -1, 2-diol
Answer:
(d) ethan -1, 2-diol

Question 18.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-18
is an example of …………..
(a) Wurtz reaction
(b) cyclic reaction
(c) Williamson reaction
(d) Kolbe reactions
Answer:
(c) Kolbe reactions

Question 19.
One mole of an organic compound (A) with the formula C3H8O reacts completely with two moles of HI to form X and Y. When Y is boiled with aqueous alkali it forms Z. Z answers the iodoform test. The compound (A) is ……………
(a) propan – 2 – ol
(b) propan- 1- ol
(c) ethoxy ethane
(d) methoxy ehane
Answer:
(d) methoxy ehane
Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-19

Question 20.
Among the following ethers which one will produce methyl alcohol on treatment with hot HI?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-20
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-21
Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-22

Question 21.
Williamson synthesis of preparing dimethyl ether is a / an /
(a) SN1 reactions
(b) SN2 reaction
(c) electrophilic addition
(d) electrophilic substitution
Answer:
(b) SN2 reaction

Question 22.
On reacting with neutral ferric chloride, phenol gives
(a) red colour
(b) violet colour
(c) dark green colour
(d) no colouration
Answer:
(b) violet colour

II. Answer the following questions

Question 1.
IdentIfy the product (s) is / are formed when 1 – methoxy propane is heated with excess HI. Name the mechanism involved in the reaction
Answer:
1-methoxy propane is heated with excess HI, yields two products named as Methyl iodide and 1- iodo propane.
Step 1:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-23
Step 2.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-24
Step 3:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-25
Step 4:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-26
Overall reaction:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-27
This reaction ivvolves nucleophilic substitution reaction mechanism. (SN1)

Question 2.
Draw the major product formed when 1 – ethoxyprop – 1 – ene is heated with one equivalent of HI
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-28
This reaction follows SN1 mechanism because in this reaction the more stable carbocation is formed that is double bonded carbocation. Therefore, the given molecule reacts with HI to form ethanol and 1- iodo prop – 1 – ene.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-29

Question 3.
Suggest a suitable reagent to prepare secondary alcohol with identical group using Grignard reagent.
Answer:
Acetaldehyde reacts with Grignard reagent to give addition product, which on further undergoes acid hydrolysis to yield secondary alcohol, that is isopropyl alcohol.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-30

Question 4.
What is the major product obtained when two moles of ethyl magnesium bromide is treated with methyl benzoate followed by acid hydrolysis
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-31

Question 5.
Predict the major product, when 2-methyl but – 2 – ene is converted into an alcohol in each of the following methods.

  1. Acid catalysed hydration
  2. Hydroboration
  3. Hydroylation using bayers reagent

Answer:
1. Acid catalysed hydration:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-32

2. Hydroboration.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-33

3. Hydroxylation using bayers reagent:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-34

Question 6.
Arrange the following in the increasing order of their boiling point and give a reason for your ordering

  1. Butan – 2 – ol, Butan – 1 – SI, 2 – methylpropan – 2 – ol
  2. Propan – 1 – ol, propan – 1, 2, 3 – triol, propan – 1, 3 – diol, propan – 2 – ol

Answer:
1. Boiling points increases regularly as the molecular mass increases due to a corresponding increase in their Van der waal’s force of attraction. Among isomeric alcohols 2° – alcohols have lower boiling points than 1° – alcohols due to a corresponding decreases in the extent

of H-bonding because of steric hindrance. Thus the boiling point of Butan – 2 – ol is lower than that of Butan – 1 – ol. Overall increasing order of boiling points is, 2 – methylpropan – 2 – ol < Butan – 2 – ol < Butan – 1 – ol

2. 2°-alcohols have lower boiling points than 1° – alcohols due to a corresponding decrease in the extent of H – bonding because of steric hindrance. Therefore Propan – 1 – ol has higher boiling point than Propan – 2 – ol. Hydrogen group increases, boiling point also increases. Overall increasing order of boiling points is, propan – 2 – ol < Propan – 1 – ol < propan – 1, 3 – diol < propan -1, 2, 3 – triol

Question 7.
Can we use nucelophiles such as NH3,CH3O for the Nucleophilic substitution of alcohols
Answer:
1. Increasing order of nucelophilicity,
NH3 < – OH < CH3O⊖-

2. Higher electron density will increase the nucelophilicity.

3. Negatively charged species are almost always more nucelophiles than neutral species.

4. RO has an alkyl group attached, allowing a greater amount of polarizability. This means oxygen’s lone pairs will be more readily available to reach in RO than in OH. Hence CH3O – is the better nucelophile for the nucleophilic substitution of alcohols. NH3 cannot act as nucelophile for the nucleophilic substitution of alcohols.

Question 8.
Is it possible to oxidise t – butyl alcohol using acidified dichromate to form a carbonyic compound.
Answer:
3° – alcohols do not undergo oxidation reaction under normal condition, but at elevated temperature, under strong oxidising agent cleavage of C – C bond takes place to give a mixture of carboxylic acid.

Yes, it is possible. t – butyl alcohol is readily oxidsing in acidic solution (K2Cr2O7 / H2SO4) to a mixture of a ketone and an acid each containing lesser number of carbon atoms than the original alcohol. The oxidation presumably occur via alkenes formed through dehydration of alcohols under acidic conditions.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-35

Question 9.
What happens when 1 – phenyl ethanol is treated with acidified KMnO4.
Answer:
1 – phenyl ethanol reacts with acidified KMnO4 to give Acetophenone.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-36

Question 10.
Write the mechanism of acid catalysed dehydration of ethanol to give ethene.
Mechanism of acid catlaysed dehydration of ethanol:
Step1:
Protonation of ethanol.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-37

Step 2:
Elimination of water molecule.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-38

Question 11.
How is phenol prepared form

  1. chloro benzene
  2. isopropyl benzene

Answer:
1. From Chioro benzene:
According to Dow’s process, when Chiorobenzene is hydrolysed with 6 – 8% NaOHat 300 bar and 633K in a closed vessel, sodium phcnoxidc is formed which on treatment with dilute HCl gives phenol.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-39

2. For isopropyl benzene:
On passing air to a mixture of cumene (isoprophy benzene) and 5% aqueous sodium carbonate solution, cumene hydro peroxide is formed by oxidation. It is treated with dilute acid to get phenol and acetone.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-40

Question 12.
Explain Kolbe’s reaction
Answer:
Kolbe’s (or) Kolbe’s Schmitt reaction:
In this reaction, phenol is first converted into sodium phenoxide which is more reactive than phenol towards electrophilic substitution reaction with CO2. Treatment of sodium phenoxide with CO2 at 400K, 4 -7 bar pressure followed by acid hydrolysis gives salicylic acid.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-41

Question 13.
Writes the chemical equation for Williamson synthesis of 2 – ethoxy – 2 – methyl pentane starting from ethanol and 2 – methyl pentan – 2 – ol
Answer:
Step 1:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-42

Step 2:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-43

Step 3:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-44
Williamsons synthesis occurs by SN2 – mechanism and primary alkyl halides are more reactive in SN2 reactions. Therefore ethanol is converted into ethyl bromide.

Question 14.
Write the structure of the aldehyde, carboxylic acid and ester that yield 4 – methylpent – 2 – en – 1 – ol.
Answer:
1. Aldehyde yield 4 – methylpent – 2 – 3n – ol is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-45

2. Acid yield 4 – methylpent – 2 – en – 1 – ol is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-46

3. Ester yield 4 – methylpent – 2 0 en – l – ol is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-47

The above shown compounds undergo reduction reaction to yield 4 – methylpent – 2 – en – l – ol.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-48

Question 15.
What is meta merism? Give the structure and IUPAC name of metamers of 2 – methoxy propane
Answer:
Metamerism:
It is a special type of isomerism in which molecules with same formula, same functional group, but different only in the nature of the alkyl group attached to oxygen.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-49
Ethoxy ethane and 1-methoxy propane are metamers of 2-methoxy propane.

Question 16.
How are the following conversions effected

  1. benzylchlorjde to benzvlalcohol
  2. benzvl alcohol to benzoic acid

Answer:
1. Conversion of benzyl chloride into benzyl alcohol:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-50

2. Conversion of benzyl alcohol into benzoic acid:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-51

Question 17.
Complete the following reactions
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-52
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-53

Question 18.
O.44g of a monohydric alcohol when added to methyl magnesium iodide in ether liberates at STP 112 cm3 of methane with PCC the same alcohol form a carbonyl compound that answers silver mirror test. Identify the compound.
Answer:
0.44g of a monohydric alcohol liberates 112 cm3 of methane.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-54
Mass of monohydric alcohol which gives 22400 cm3 of methane = \(\frac{22400 \times 0.44}{112}\) = 88
C5H12O molecular fórmula has mass number 88 and it shows eight possible isomers. But neopentyl alcohol reacts with PCC to form neopentyl aldehyde, which shows positive silver mirror test. Therefore, compound is. neopentyl alcohol (or) 2, 2 – dimethyl propan – l – ol.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-55

Question 19.
Complete the following reactions
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-56
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-57

Question 20.
Phenol is distilled with Zn dust gives (A) followed by friedel – crafts alkylation with propyl chloride to give a compound B, B on oxidation gives (C). Identify A,B and C.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-58

Question 21.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-59
Identify A, B, C, D and write the complete equation.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-60

Question 22.
What will be the product for the following reaction
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-61
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-62

Question 23.
How will you convert acetylen in to n – butyl alcohol.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-63

Question 24.
Predict the product A, B, X and Y in the following sequence of reaction
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-64
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-65

Question 25.
3,3 – dimethylbutan – 2 – ol on treatment with conc. H2SO4 to give tetramethyl ethylene as a major product. Suggest a suitable mechanisms
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-66
According to Saytzeff’s rule the dehydration of 3,3 – dimethylbutan – 2 – ol gives a mixture of alkenes. But the secondary carbocation formed in this reaction undergoes rearrangement to form a more stable tertiary

carbocation which further, undergoes to 13 – elimination leads more stable product, that is 2,3 – dimethyl but – 2 – ene (more yield). According to Saytzeff’s nile, 2, 3 – dimethyl pent- 2 – ene is the major product.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers Evaluate yourself

Question 1.
Classify the following alcohols as 10, 20, and 30 and give their IUPAC Names.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-67
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-68

Question 2.
Write all the possible isomers of an alacohol having the molecular formula C15H12O and their IUPAC names.
Answer:
Eight isomers are possibe for C15H12O. They are,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-69

Question 3.
Suggest a suitable carbonyl compound for the preparation of pent – 2 – en – 1 ol using LiAlH4.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-70

Question 4.
2 – methylpropan – 2 – ene Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-71
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-72

Question 5.
How will you prepare the following using Grignard reagent.

  1. t – butyl alcohol
  2. allyl alcohol

Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-73

Question 6.
Identify the products in the following reactions. Write their IUPAC names and mention the mechanism involved in the reactions.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-100

Answer:
1. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-75
This reaction involves E1 – mechanism.

2. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-76
This reaction ivolves SN2 – mechanims.

3. Step 1:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-77

Step 2:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-78
This reaction involves SN2 Mechanims.

Question 7.
What is the major product obtained when 2,3 – dimethyl pentan – 3 – ol is heated in the presence of H2SO4
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-79
According to Saytzeff’s rule, 2, 3 – dimethyl pent – 2 – ene is the major product.

Question 8.
Which of the following set of reactants will give 1 – methoxy – 4 – nitrobenzene.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-80
Answer:
Step 1:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-81
step 2:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-82
Chemically both sets equally possible. In Set – 1, the Br-atom is activated by electron withdrawing effect of – NO2 group. Therefore nucleophilic attack by CH3ONa followed by elimination of NaBr gives the desired ether.

Step 1:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-83
Step 2:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-84
In set – 2, nucleophilic attack by 4 – nitrosodium phenoxide ion on methyl bromide gives the desired ether.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-85
Since alkyl halides (CH3Br) are more reactive than aryl halides in nucleophilic substitution reactions, therefore set – 2 reactants are preferred.

Question 9.
What happens when m – cresol is treated with acidic solution of sodium dichromate?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-86
When m – cresol is treated with acidic solution of sodium dichromate it gives 4 – hydroxy beazoic acid.

Question 10.
When phenol is treated with propan – 2 – ol in the presence of HF, Friedel – Craft reaction takes place. Identify the products.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-87

Question 11.
Given the IUPAC name for the following ethers and classify them as simple or mixed.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-88
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-89

Question 12.
1. Which of the following reaction will give 1 – methoxy – 4 – nitrobenzene.

  1. 4 – nitro – 1 – bromobenzene + sodium methoxide.
  2. 4 – nitrosodium phenoxide + bromomethane

Answer:
1. Set – 1:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-90
2. set – 2:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-91
Chemically both sets equally possible. In Set – 1, the Br – atom is activated by electron withdrawing effect of – NO2 group. Therefore nucleophilic attack by CH3ONa followed by elimination of NaBr gives the desired ether.
Step 1:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-92

Step 2:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-93
In set – 2, nucleophilic attack by 4 – nitrosodium phenoxide ion on methyl bromide gives the desired ether.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-94
Since alkyl halides (CH3Br) are more reactive than aryl halides in nucleophilic substitution reactions, therefore set – 2 reactants are preferred.

Question 13.
Arrange the following compounds in the increasing order of their acid strength. propan – 1 – ol, 2, 4, 6 – trinitroptienol, 3 – nitrophenol, 3,5 – dinitrophenol, phenol, 4 – methyiphenol.
Answer:
Phenols are stronger acids than alcohols because the phenoxide ion left after the removal of proton is stabilized by resonance while the alkoxide ion left after the removal of a proton from alcohol is not stabilized. Thus propan – 1 – ol is much weaker acid than any phenol.

Thus propan- 1 – ol is a much weaker acid than any phenol. We know that electron donating groups decrease the acidic character and stronger is the electron donating group, weaker is the phenol.

Compare to propan – 1 – ol, 4 – methyl phenol is stronger acidic character. But comparing phenol and 4-methyl phenol, phenol is stronger acidic. Since electron withdrawing groups increase the acidic character of phenols and the effect is more pronounced at the para position than at the meta position.

Therefore 4 – nitro phenol is a stronger acid than 3 – nitro phenol. Further as the number of electron withdrawing groups increases the acidic strength further increases. Therefore 2, 4, 6 – trinitro phenol is a stronger acid than 3, 5 – dintiro phenol. It may be noted here that although the two nitro groups in 3, 5 – dinitro phenol are at m – position with respect to OH group,

their combined effect is however greater than one nitro group at p – position. Therefore 3, 5 – dinitro phenol is a stronger acid than 4-nitro phenol. Thus, the overall increasing order of acid strength is. Propan – 1 – 01 < 4 – methyl phenol < phenol < 3 – nitrophenol < 3, 5 – dinitro phenol < 2, 4, 6 – trinitro phenol.

Question 14.
1 mole of HI is allowed to react with t – butyl methylether. Identify the product and write down the mechanism of the reaction.
Answer:
Step 1:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-95

Step 2
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-96

Step 3:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-97
Overall reaction:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-98

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers Additional Questions

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers 1 Mark Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best answer.

Question 1.
Which one of the following is a trihydric alcohol?
(a) Glycol
(b) Ethanol
(c) Glycerol
(d) Sorbitol
Answer:
(c) Glycerol

Question 2.
Identify the monohydric unsaturated alcohol.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-101
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-102

Question 3.
Which one of the following is named as sorbital?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-103
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-104

Question 4.
Which one of the following is a primary alcohol?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-105
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-106

Question 5.
Which of the following is a dihydric alcohol?
(a) Ethenol
(b) Ethanol ]
(c) Ethane – 1, 2 – diol
(d) Propan – 2 – ol
Answer:
(c) Ethane – 1, 2 – diol

Question 6.
Which one of the following is an example of secondary (2°) alcohol?
(a) Propan – 2 – ol
(b) Phenyl methanol
(c) Ethenol
(d) 2 – methyl – propan – 2 – ol
Answer:
(a) Propan – 2 – ol

Question 7.
Which one of the following is a tertiary alcohol?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-107
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-199
Question 8.
Which of the following is a primary alcohol?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-108
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-109

Question 9.
Which one of the following find application in proper functioning of our eyes?
(a) Cholesterol
(b) Retinol
(c) Phenol
(d) Ethanol
Answer:
(b) Retinol

Question 10.
Which is the storage of vitamin – A?
(a) Retinol
(b) Benzyl alcohol
(c) Phenol
(d) Ascorbic acid
Answer:
(a) Retinol

Question 11.
The important component in our cell membrane is ………….
(a) Retinol
(b) Phenol
(c) Cholesterol
(d) Methanol
Answer:
(c) Cholesterol

Question 12.
Which acts as an additive to petrol?
(a) Glycerol
(b) Ethanol
(c) Phenol
(d) Methanol
Answer:
(b) Ethanol

Question 13.
Which one of the following vitamin is stored in Retinol?
(a) Vitamin – B12
(b) Vitamin – A
(c) Vitamin – C
(a) Vitamin – D
Answer:
(b) Vitamin – A

Question 14.
Which alcohol is used as skin cleanser for injection?
(a) Methanol
(b) Ethanol
(c) 1 -propanol
(d) 2-propanol
Answer:
(d) 2-propanol

Question 15.
Which one of the following is used as an industrial solvent?
(a) Methanol
(b) Benzyl alcohol
(c) Phenol
(d) Cholesterol
Answer:
(a) Methanol

Question 16.
2 – methyl but – 3 – en – 2 – ol belongs to which type of alcohol?
(a) 3° alcohol
(b) 2° alcohol
(c) 1° alcohol
(d) Aromatic alcohol
Answer:
(a) 3° alcohol

Question 17.
The IUPAC name of
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-110
(a) 1 – methyl – 2 – propanol
(b) 2 – methyl – p ropan – 2 – ol
(c) Tertibutyl alcohol
(d) 2 – propanol
Answer:
(b) 2 – methyl – p ropan – 2 – ol

Question 18.
The TUPAC name of CH2 = CH – CH2OH is …………
(a) Allyl alcohol
(b) Propenc – 2 – ol
(c) Prop – 2 – en – 1 – oI
(d) Isopropyl alcohol
Answer:
(c) Prop – 2 – en – 1 – oI

Question 19.
In methanol, – OH group attached to carbon is ………..
(a) sp hybridised atom
(b) sp3 hybridised atom
(c) sp2 hybridised atom
(d) dsp2 hybridised atom
Answer:
(c) sp2 hybridised atom

Question 20.
Which one of the following is C – O – H bond angle in methanol?
(a) 109.5°
(b) 104°
(c) 90°
(d) 108.9°
Answer:
(d) 108.9°

Question 21.
Primaiy alkyl halides undergoes substitution by ……….
(a) SN1 reaction
(b) SNi reaction
(c) SN2 reaction
(d) SN reaction
Answer:
(c) SN2 reaction

Question 22.
What is the product formed when propene is hydrolysed in the presence of mineral acid?
(a) Propan – 1 – ol
(b) Propan – 2 – ol
(c) Iso butyl alcohol
(d) 2 – mcthyl – propan – 2 – ol
Answer:
(b) Propan – 2 – ol

Question 23.
The product formed when phenyl magnesium bromide treated with methanal and hydrolysed is ………..
(a) Phenyl methanal
(b) Phenol
(c) Phenyl methanol
(d) Benzyl benzoate
Answer:
(c) Phenyl methanol

Question 24.
To get Butan – 2 – ol, Ethyl magnesium bromide is treated with followed by hydrolysis.
(a) HCHO
(b) CH3COCH3
(c) CO2
(d) CH3CHO
Answer:
(d) CH3CHO

Question 25.
Which one of the following is formed when Butyl magnesium bromide is treated with propanone followed by hydrolysis?
(a) Tertiary butyl alcohol
(b) Isopropyl alcohol
(c) 2 – methyl hexan – 2 – ol
(d) Propan – 1 -ol
Answer:
(c) 2 – methyl hexan – 2 – ol

Question 26.
Which one of the tbllowing is used to get propan – 2 – ol by the reaction with CH3MgBr?
(a) Ethanol
(b) Ethanal
(c) Ethyl inethanoate
(d) Propanone
Answer:
(c) Ethyl inethanoate

Question 27.
Crotanaldehyde on reaction with LiAlH4 and water produces
(a) Ethanol
(b) Propan – 2 – ol
(c) Methanol
(d) But – 2 – en – 1 – ol
Answer:
(d) But – 2 – en – 1 – ol

Question 28.
Which one of the following is used as a catalyst in the conversion of Bcnzoic acid to Benzyl alcohol?
(a) Ni
(b) LiAIH4 / H2O
(c) Sn / HCI
(d) Zn / NaOH
Answer:
(b) LiAIH4 / H2O

Question 29.
What is the product formed when acetone is treated with LiA1H4 and 1120?
(a) Isobutyl alcohol
(b) n – butyl alcohol
(c) Propan – 2 – ol
(d) Propan – 1 – ol
Answer:
(c) Propan – 2 – ol

Question 30.
Which one of the following is formed when ethene reacts with Baeyer’s reagent?
(a) Ethane
(b) Ethylene glycol
(c) Propane – 1, 2 – diol
(d) Glycerol
Answer:
(b) Ethylene glycol

Question 31.
Which one of the following is named as Baeyer’s reagent?
(a) acidified K2Cr2O7
(b) acidified KMnO4
(c) Cold dilute alkaline KMnO4
(d) LiAlH4
Answer:
(c) Cold dilute alkaline KMnO4

Question 32.
The alkaline hydrolysis of fats to give glycerol is known as …………
(a) Esterification
(b) Hydroboration
(c) Hydration
(d) Saponification
Answer:
(d) Saponification

Question 33.
Which one of the following alcohol reacts immediately with Lucas reagent?
(a) Primaiy alcohol
(b) Tertiary alcohol
(c) Phenol
(d) Secondary alcohol
Answer:
(b) Tertiary alcohol

Question 34.
Which one of the following is called Lucas reagent?
(a) Conc. HCl + Anhydrous ZnCl2
(b) Conc. HCl + Anhydrous A1CI3
(c) LiAIH4 + H2O
(d) Cold dilute alkaline KMnO4
Answer:
(a) Conc. HCl + Anhydrous ZnCl2

Question 35.
Which alcohol gives red colour in Victor Meyer’s test?
(a) 2° alcohol
(b) 3° alcohol
(c) Phenol
(d) 1° alcohol
Answer:
(d) 1° alcohol

Question 36.
Which colour is given by secondary alcohol in Victor Meyer’s test?
(a) Red
(b) Green
(c) Blue
(d) Yellow
Answer:
(c) Blue

Question 37.
Which mechanism is followed in the reaction of 2 – methyl – 2 – propanol with HBr?
(a) E1 mechanism
(b) E2 mechanism
(c) SN2 mechanism
(d) SN1 mechanism
Answer:
(d) SN1 mechanism

Question 38.
Which mechanism is followed in the conversion of ethanol to bromoethane by HBr?
(a) SN1 mechanism
(b) SN2 mechanism
(c) E1 mechanism
(d) E2 mechanism
Answer:
(c) E1 mechanism

Question 39.
Which one of the following is used as a catalyst in the reaction of methanol with thionyl chloride?
(a) Pyridine
(b) pyrrole
(c) THF
(d) Nickel
Answer:
(a) Pyridine

Question 40.
The mechanism of the reaction of ethanol with PCl3 is ……………..
(a) SN1
(b) SN2
(c) E2
(d) E1
Answer:
(b) SN2

Question 41.
Which one of the following reagent is used in the conversion of Ethanol to ethene?
(a) Zn + Hg / H2O
(b) LiAlH4
(c) acidified K2Cr2O7
(d) Conc. H2SO4
Answer:
(d) Conc. H2SO4

Question 42.
Primary alcohol undergo dehydration by ………
(a) E1 mechanism
(b) E2 mechanism
(c) SN1 mechanism
(d) SN2 mechanism
Answer:
(b) E2 mechanism

Question 43.
Tertiary alcohols undergo dehydration by ……….
(a) SN1 mechanism
(b) E2 mechanism
(c) E1 mechanism
(d) SN2 mechanism
Answer:
(c) E1 mechanism

Question 44.
Which one of the following is the correct order of relative reactivities of alcohols in the dehydration reaction?
(a) 1° < 2° < 3°
(b) 2° < 1° < 3°
(c) 3° < 2° < 1°
(d) 3° < 1° < 2°
Answer:
(a) 1° < 2° < 3°

Question 45.
Which of the following is the product formed when 3,3 – dimethyl – 2 – butanol reacts with conc.H2SO4?
(a) 2, 3 – dirnethyl but – 1 – ene
(b) 2,3 – dimethyl but – 2 – ene
(c) 3, 3 – dimethyl but – 1 – ene
(d) all the above
Answer:
(d) all the above

Question 46.
The oxidising agent used to prepare aldehyde (or) ketone from alcohol, the reagent used is …………..
(a) acidified Na2Cr2O7
(b) alkaline KMnO4
(c) Pyridinium chlorochromate
(d) conc. H2SO4
Answer:
(c) Pyridinium chlorochromate

Question 47.
The product formed when propan – 2 – ol is treated with dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) and oxalyl chloride followed by the addition of Et3N is ……….
(a) Oxalyl chloride
(b) Propanal
(c) Ethanoic aicd
(d) Propanone
Answer:
(d) Propanone

Question 48.
Which reaction is used to convert alcohol to ketone / aldehyde in the presence of DMSO?
(a) Lucas test
(b) Swern oxidation
(c) Biological oxidation
(d) Kolbe’s reaction
Answer:
(b) Swern oxidation

Question 49.
Which product is formed when propan- 1 – ol is oxidised by pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC)?
(a) Propanal
(b) Propanone
(c) Propane
(d) Propene
Answer:
(a) Propanal

Question 50.
Which one of the enzyme is produced in liver to detoxify the alcohol?
(a) Diastase
(b) Zymase
(c) Invertase
(d) Dehydrogenase alcohol
Answer:
(d) Dehydrogenase alcohol

Question 51.
What isADH and NAD?
(a) Alcohol dehydrogenase and nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide
(b) Acid dehydration and Nitrogen addition
(c) Alcohol dehydration and Nicotine addition
(d) Adeninc hydrogenase and Nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide
Answer:
(a) Alcohol dehydrogenase and nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide

Question 52.
What is the main reaction take place when 2 – methyl propan – 2 – ol reacts with Cu at 573 K?
(a) Dehydrogenation
(b) Oxidation
(c) Dehydration
(d) Hydrogenation
Answer:
(c) Dehydration

Question 53.
Name the product formed when tertiary butyl alcohol is treated with Cu at 573 K?
(a) 2 – methyl prop – 1 – ene
(b) 2 – methyl prop – 2 – ene
(c) propene
(d) 1 – butene
Answer:
(a) 2 – methyl prop – 1 – ene

Question 54.
Which one of the following product is formed when propan – 2 – ol is treated with Cu at 573 K?
(a) Propanal
(b) Propanone
(c) Propan – 1 – ol
(d) Propane
Answer:
(b) Propanone

Question 55.
What is the name of the reaction between ethanol and ethanoic acid?
(a) Esterification
(b) Saponification
(c) Ethenfication
(d) Hydroxylation
Answer:
(a) Esterification

Question 56.
Which one of the following is formed when ethan – 1, 2 – diol is treated with PI3?
(a) Ethane
(b) Ethyne
(c) Ethene
(d) Ethanol
Answer:
(c) Ethene

Question 57.
Which reagent is used to convert ethylene glycol to ethylene?
(a) HI
(b) I2
(c) PI3
(d) Conc. H2 SO4
Answer:
(c) PI3

Question 58.
What is the product formed when ethylene glycol is heated at 773 K?
(a) Ethanal
(b) Ethene
(c) Ethane
(d) Oxirane
Answer:
(d) Oxirane

Question 59.
Which reagent is used to convert ethan – 1, 2 – diol into Ethanal?
(a) Anhydrous ZnCI2
(b) Dilute. H2SO4
(c) Either (a) or (b)
(d) Conc. H2SO4
Answer:
(c) Either (a) or (b)

Question 60.
Name the product formed when ethan- 1, 2-diol is treated with anhydrous ZnCl2.
(a) Ethanol
(b) Ethene
(c) Ethane
(d) Ethanal
Answer:
(d) Ethanal

Question 61.
Which one of the following is formed when ethane – 1, 2 – diol is treated with Conc. H2 SO4?
(a) 1, 4 – dioxane
(b) Ethanal
(c) Ethanoic acid
(d) Ethene
Answer:
(a) 1, 4 – dioxane

Question 62.
Which one of the following is formed when ethylene glycol is treated with periodic acid?
(a) Methanal
(b) Methanol
(c) Ethanol
(d) Ethanal
Answer:
(a) Methanal

Question 63.
Identify the product formed when glycerol is treated with nitric acid and conc. H2SO4?
(a) Nitroglycerine
(b) Glyceryl triacetate
(c) Prop – 2 – enal
(d) Glyceric acid
Answer:
(a) Nitroglycerine

Question 64.
What will be the product formed when propan – 1, 2, 3 – triol is treated with KHSO4?
(a) Nitroglycerine
(b) TNG
(c) Prop – 2 – enal
(d) Allyl alcohol
Answer:
(a) Nitroglycerine

Question 65.
Oxidation of glycerol with dil.HNO3 gives ………
(a) Meso oxalic acid
(b) Glyceric acid and tartronic acid
(c) Glycerose
(d) Glyceraldehyde and dihydroxy acetone
Answer:
(b) Glyceric acid and tartronic acid

Question 66.
Oxidation of glycerol with Fenton reagent gives ………..
(a) Glyceraldehyde + Dihydroxy acetone
(b) Glyceric acid + Tartronic acid
(c) Meso oxalic acid
(d) Oxalic acid
Answer:
(a) Glyceraldehyde + Dihydroxy acetone

Question 67.
Which one of the following product is formed when glycerol is oxidised with acidified KMnO4?
(a) Meso oxalic acid
(b) Oxalic acid
(c) Formic acid
(d) Glyceric acid
Answer:
(b) Oxalic acid

Question 68.
Which one of the following is used as a solvent for paints, varnishes and gum?
(a) Ethanol
(b) Methanol
(c) Methanal
(d) Ethanal
Answer:
(b) Methanol

Question 69.
Which one of the following is used as fuel for aeroplane?
(a) Methanol + Ethanol
(b) Ethanol + Petrol
(c) Ethanol + Propanol
(d) Butanol + Methanol
Answer:
(b) Ethanol + Petrol

Question 70.
Which one of the following is used as beverage as well as preservative for biological specimens?
(a) Ethanol
(b) Methanol
(c) Phenol
(d) Benzyl alcohol
Answer:
(a) Ethanol

Question 71.
Which one of the following is used as an anti-freezer in automobile radiator?
(a) Glycerol
(b) Phenol
(c) Benzyl alcohol
(d) Ethylene glycol
Answer:
(d) Ethylene glycol

Question 72.
Which one of the following is used as a sweetening agent in confectionery and beverages?
(a) Glycerol
(b) Phenol
(c) Benzyl alcohol
(d) Ethylene glycol
Answer:
(a) Glycerol

Question 73.
Which one of the following is used in the manufacture of cosmetics and transparent soaps?
(a) Methanol
(b) Ethanol
(c) Glycerol
(d) Phenol
Answer:
(c) Glycerol

Question 74.
Which one of the following is used in the manufacture of explosive dynamite and cordite by mixing it with clay?
(a) Glycol
(b) Glycerol
(c) Ethanol
(d) Benzaldehyde
Answer:
(b) Glycerol

Question 75.
Which alcohols is used in making printing inks and stamp pad ink?
(a) Glycol
(b) Ethanol
(c) Glycerol
(d) Phenol
Answer:
(c) Glycerol

Question 76.
Except which alcohol, other alcohols are weaker acid than water?
(a) Ethanol
(b) Phenol
(c) Methanol
(d) Propanol
Answer:
(c) Methanol

Question 77.
Which one of the following is the correct decreasing order of acidity in alcohol?
(a) 1° alcohol > 2° alcohol > 3° alcohol
(b) 3° alcohol > 2° alcohol> 1° alcohol
(c) 2° alcohol> 1° alcohol > 3° alcohol
(d) 3° alcohol > 1° alcohol > 2° alcohol
Answer:
(a) 1° alcohol > 2° alcohol > 3° alcohol

Question 78.
Which one of the following is more acidic?
(a) Benzyl alcohol
(b) Phenol
(c) Ethanol
(d) Methanol
Answer:
(b) Phenol

Question 79.
The JUPAC name of Phioroglucinol is ………….
(a) 4 – methyl phenol
(b) 1, 4 – dihydroxy benzene
(c) 1, 3, 5 – trihydroxy benzene
(d) 1, 2, 3 – trihydroxy benzene
Answer:
(c) 1, 3, 5 – trihydroxy benzene

Question 80.
The other name of 1 , 2, 3 – trihydroxy benzene is called ……….
(a) Pholoroglucinol
(b) Quinol
(c) Pyrogallol
(d) Hydroxy quinol
Answer:
(c) Pyrogallol

Question 81.
The other name of 3, 5 – dihydroxy toluene is known as …………
(a) Orcinol
(b) Quinol
(c) Pyrogallol
(d) Resorcinol
Answer:
(a) Orcinol

Question 82.
The IUPAC name of Catechol is known as ………..
(a) 1 , 3 – dihydroxy benzene
(b) 1, 2 – dihydroxy benzene
(c) 1, 4 – dihydroxy benzene
(d) 1, 3, 5 – trihydroxy benzene
Answer:
(b) 1, 2 – dihydroxy benzene

Question 83.
The name of
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-111
is …………
(a) Phloroglucinol
(b) pyrogallol
(c) Quinol
(d) Resorcinol
Answer:
(a) Phloroglucinol

Question 84.
The name of
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-112
(a) Pyrogallol
(b) Hydroxy cresol
(c) Orcinol
(d) Phloroglucinol
Answer:
(c) Orcinol

Question 85.
The reaction of chiorobenzene with NaOH is known as ………..
(a) Kolbe’s reaction
(b) Riemcr – Ticmann reaction
(c) Dow’s process
(d) Cumene synthesis
Answer:
(c) Dow’s process

Question 86.
Which one of the product is formed when benzene and propene is heated at 523 K?
(a) Cumene
(b) 2 – ethyl benzene
(c) 2 – propyl benzene
(d) Ethyl enthanoate
Answer:
(a) Cumene

Question 87.
What will be the product formed when phenol is treated with zinc dust?
(a) Cumene
(b) Toluene
(c) Ethyl benzene
(d) Benzene
Answer:
(d) Benzene

Question 88.
The acetylation and benzoylation of phenol are called ……….
(a) Dow’s process
(b) Schotten – Baumann reaction
(c) Reimer – Tiemann reaction
(d) Williamson ether synthesis
Answer:
(b) Schotten – Baumann reaction

Question 89.
Name the product formed when phenol is heated with ammonia in the presence of anhydrous
ZnCl2.
(a) Benzene
(b) Aniline
(c) Anisole
(d) Phenyl acetate
Answer:
(b) Aniline

Question 90.
What will be the product formed when phenol is treated with benzoyl chloride in the presence of a base?
(a) Phenyl acetate
(b) Phenyl cnthanoatc
(c) Phenyl benzoate
(d) Benzyl acetate
Answer:
(c) Phenyl benzoate

Question 91.
Which one of the following is formed when phenol istreated with acidified K2Cr2O7?
(a) Benzoic acid
(b) Phenyl amine
(c) Phenyl acetate
(d) 1, 4 – benzo quinone
Answer:
(d) 1, 4 – benzo quinone

Question 92.
Hydrogenation of phenol in the presence of Nickel gives ………
(a) cyclo hexane
(b) cyclo hexanol
(c) benzene
(d) cumene
Answer:
(b) cyclo hexanol

Question 93.
Which one of the following is formed when phenol reacts with a mixture of Conc. HNO3 and Conc.H2SO4?
(a) Ortho nitro phenol
(b) Para nitro phenol
(c) 1, 2 – dinitro phenol
(d) 2, 4 , 6 – trinitro phenol
Answer:
(d) 2, 4 , 6 – trinitro phenol

Question 94.
What will be the product formed when phenol reacts with bromine water?
(a) 0 – bromo phenol
(b) P – bromo phenol
(c) 1, 3, 5 – tri bromo phenol
(d) 2, 4, 6 – tri bromo phenol
Answer:
(d) 2, 4, 6 – tri bromo phenol

Question 95.
The conversion reaction of phenol of salicylic acid is known as
(a) Schottan – Baumann reaction
(b) Riemer – Ticmann reaction
(c) Kolbe’s Schmitt reaction
(d) Williamson’s synthesis
Answer:
(c) Kolbe’s Schmitt reaction

Question 96.
The reagent used for the conversion of phenol into salicylaldehyde is ………..
(a) CHCI3 / NaOH
(b) I2 / KOH
(c) Zn
(d) Br2 / CCl4
Answer:
(a) CHCI3 / NaOH

Question 97.
What is the name of the reaction of phenol with chloroform and aqueous alkali?
(a) Kolbe’s reaction
(b) Cumene synthesis
(c) Rlemer – Tiemann reaction
(d) Schottan – Baumann reaction
Answer:
(c) Rlemer – Tiemann reaction

Question 98.
Which one of the following is formed when phenol is treated with chloroform and sodium hydroxide.
(a) Chiorobenzene
(b) Salicylaldehyde
(c) Salicylic acid
(d) Aniline
Answer:
(b) Salicylaldehyde

Question 99.
What are the reagents required to prepare phenolphthalein?
(a) Phenol + Phthalic acid
(b) Phenol + Benzene
(c) Phenol + Phthalic anhydride
(d) Phenol + Aniline
Answer:
(c) Phenol + Phthalic anhydride

Question 100.
Which one of the following is formed when Phenol reacts with benzene diazonium chloride?
(a) P – hyclroxy diazo phenol
(b) P – hydroxy azo benzene
(c) O – hydroxy benzene
(d) O – hydroxy azo benzene
Answer:
(b) P – hydroxy azo benzene

Question 101.
Which reagent gives purple colouration with phenol?
(a) Anhydrous AlCl3
(b) Anhydrous ZnCl2
(c) Neutral FeCI3
(d) HCI + ZnCI2
Answer:
(c) Neutral FeCI3

Question 102.
Bakelite is formed when phenol reacts with ………..
(a) Methanol
(b) Methanal
(c) Ethanal
(d) Ethanol
Answer:
(b) Methanal

Question 103.
Which one of the following is used as an antiseptic – carbolic lotion and carbolic soaps?
(a) Benzyl alcohol
(b) Methanol
(c) Glycol
(d) Phenol
Answer:
(d) Phenol

Question 104.
The product formed when formaldehyde reacts with phenol is ……..
(a) Bakelite
(b) Phenolphthalein
(c) Azodye
(d) Aniline
Answer:
(a) Bakelite

Question 105.
Which one of the following is a simple ether?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-114
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-115

Question 106.
Which one of the following is an example for mixed ether?
(a) Methoxy methane
(b) Phenoxy benzene
(c) Methoxy benzene
(d) Ethoxy ethane
Answer:
(c) Methoxy benzene

Question 107.
The IUPAC name of
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-113
(a) 1 – methoxyl isopropyl ethane
(b) 2 – methoxy – 2 – methyl propane
(c) 2, 2 – dimethyl 2- methoxy ethane
(d) Methoxy tertiary butane
Answer:
(b) 2 – methoxy – 2 – methyl propane

Question 108.
The IUPAC name of C6H5 – O – C6H5 is ……..
(a) Diphenyl ether
(b) Phenoxy methane
(c) Phenoxy benzene
(d) Ethoxy benzene
Answer:
(c) Phenoxy benzene

Question 109.
Which one of the following is not a simple ether?
(a) C6H5 – O – CH2 – CH3
(b) CH3 – O – CH3
(c) C6H5 – O – C6H5
(d) C2H5 – O – C2H5
Answer:
(a) C6H5 – O – CH2 – CH3

Question 110.
What is the name of the reaction when ethanol is treated with Conc.H2SO4 at 413 K?
(a) Intermolecular dehydration
(b) Intra – molecular dehydration
(c) Dehydrogenation
(d) Dehydro halogenation
Answer:
(a) Intermolecular dehydration

Question 111.
Identify the product formed when ethanol is treated with Conc.H2SO4 at 413 K?
(a) Ethene
(b) Ethane
(c) 2 – butanol
(d) Diethyl ether
Answer:
(d) Diethyl ether

Question 112.
The reaction of sodium methoxide with ethyl bromide follows
(a) SN1 mechanism
(b) SN2 mechanism
(c) E1 reaction
(d) E2 reaction
Answer:
(b) SN2 mechanism

Question 113.
The product formed when tertiary butyl bromide and sodium methode are react together is ……….
(a) 2 – methyl – 2 – methoxy propane
(b) ethoxy ethane
(c) 2 – methyl – prop – 1 – ene
(d) 2 – methyl but – 1 – ene
Answer:
(c) 2 – methyl – prop – 1 – ene

Question 114.
Identify the product formed when diazomethane reacts with Ethanol in the presence of HBF4?
(a) Methoxy ethane
(b) Ethoxy ethane
(c) Diethyl ether
(d) Ethyl isopropyl ether
Answer:
(a) Methoxy ethane

Question 115.
What arc the products formed when methoxy ethanc is treated with hydroiodic acid?
(a) Phenol + iodomethane
(b) Todomethane + Ethanol
(c) lodoethane + Methanol
(d) lodobenzene + Methane
Answer:
(b) Todomethane + Ethanol

Question 116.
What are the products formed when methoxy benzene is treated with HI?
(a) C6H5OH + CH4
(b) CH3I + C6H6
(c) C6H5 OH + CH3I
(d) C2H5I + C6H6
Answer:
(c) C6H5 OH + CH3I

Question 117.
The mechanism involved in Williamson’s synthesis is …………
(a) E1
(b) E2
(c) SN2
(d) SN1
Answer:
(c) SN2

Question 118.
When diethyl ether is exposed to excess oxygen, the reaction taken place is …………
(a) reduction
(b) hydrogenation
(c) dehydrogenation
(d) auto oxidation
Answer:
(d) auto oxidation

Question 119.
Which one of the following is formed when Diethyl ether is treated with dil.H2SO4?
(a) CH3CH2HSO4
(b) CH3 – CH2OH
(c) CH2 = CH2
(d) CH3 – CH3
Answer:
(b) CH3 – CH2OH

Question 120.
Which one of the following is formed when diethyl ether reacts with Cl2 in the presence of light?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-307
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-308

Question 121.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-116
In the above reaction A and B are
(a) CH3 CH2 OH + CH3 – CH2 Cl
(b) CH3 – CH2Cl + CH3 COOH
(c) CH3 COOH + CH3 COOCH3
(d) CH3 – CH2CI + CH3COOCH2CH3
Answer:
(d) CH3 – CH2CI + CH3COOCH2CH3

Question 122.
Anisole undergoes bromination with Br2 in acetic acid in the absence of catalyst, the major product formed is ………..
(a) O – bromoan isole
(b) P – bromoan isole
(c) Benzyl bromide
(d) Bromo benzene
Answer:
(b) P – bromoan isole

Question 123.
Anisole reacts with methyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous AICI3 and CS2 to give ……..
(a) 2 – methoxy toluene
(b) 4 – methoxy toluene
(c) either (a) or (b)
(d) both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(d) both (a) and (b)

Question 124.
Which one of the following is used as a surgical anesthetic agent in surgery?
(a) Ethanol
(b) Ethoxy ethane
(c) Methoxy ethane
(d) Methoxy propane
Answer:
(b) Ethoxy ethane

Question 125.
Which one of the following is a precursor to the synthesis of perfumes and insecticide pheromones?
(a) Phenol
(b) Benzyl alcohol
(c) Anisole
(d) Diethyl ether
Answer:
(c) Anisole

Question 126.
Among the alkenes which one produces tertiary butyl alcohol on acid hydration?
(a) (CH3)2C CH2
(b) CH3 – CH = CH – CH3
(c) CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2
(d) CH3 – CH = CH2
Answer:
(a) (CH3)2C CH2

Question 127.
An ether is more volatile than an alcohol having the same molecular formula. This is due to
(a) dipolar character of ethers
(b) alcohols having resonance structures
(c) inter molecular hydrogen bonding in ethers
(d) inter molecular hydrogen bonding in alcohols
Answer:
(d) inter molecular hydrogen bonding in alcohols

Question 128.
An organic compound A containing C, H and O has a pleasant odour. On boiling A with Conc.H2SO4, a colourless gas is produced which decolourises bromine water and alkaline KMnO4. The organic liquid A is ………..
(a) C2H5COOCH3
(b) C2HOH
(c) C2H5CI
(d) C2H6
Answer:
(b) C2HOH

Question 129.
Chloroethane reacts with X to form diethyl ether. What is X?
(a) NaOH
(b) H2SO4
(c) C2H5ONa
(d) C2H5Cl
Answer:
(c) C2H5ONa

Question 130.
In the following sequence of reactions,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-117
the compound D is ……….
(a) Butanal
(b) n-butyl alcohol
(c) propan – 1 – ol
(d) Propanal
Answer:
(c) propan – 1 – ol

Question 131.
Propan – 1 – ol and Propan – 2 – ol can be chemically distinguished by which reagent?
(a) PCI5
(b) Reduction
(c) Oxidation with K2 Cr207
(d) Ozonolysis
Answer:
(c) Oxidation with K2 Cr207

Question 132.
Phenol can be distinguished from ethanol by the following reagents except
(a) Sodium
(b) NaOH / I2
(c) Neutral FeCI3
(d) Br2 / H2O
Answer:
(a) Sodium

Question 133.
in cold countries, ethylene glycol is added to water in the radiators to …………
(a) bring down the specific heat of water
(b) lower the viscosity
(c) reduce the viscosity
(d) make water a better lubricant
Answer:
(a) bring down the specific heat of water
(i.e.) lowering down the freezing point of water.

Question 134.
Main constituent of dynamite is ………..
(a) nitro benzene
(b) nitro glycerine
(c) Picric acid
(d) TNT
Answer:
(b) nitro glycerine

Question 135.
Diethyl ether finds use in medicine as …………
(a) a pain killer
(b) a hypnotic
(c) an antiseptic
(d) an anaesthetic
Answer:
(d) an anaesthetic

Question 136.
Benzene diazonium chloride on reaction with phenol in weakly basic medium gives
(a) Diphenyl ether
(b) P – hydroxy azo benzene
(c) Chlorobenzene
(d) Benzene
Answer:
(b) P – hydroxy azo benzene

Question 137.
The alcohol that produces turbidity immediately with ZnCl2 + Conc.HCl at room temperature is ………..
(a) Rutan – 1- ol
(b) Butan – 2- ol
(c) 2 – methyl – propan – 1 – ol
(d) 2 – methyl – propan – 2 – ol
Answer:
(d) 2 – methyl – propan – 2 – ol

Question 138.
Propanone is the product obtained by dehydrogenation of …………
(a) Propan – 2 – ol
(b) Propan – 1 – ol
(c) Propanal
(d) n – propyl alcohol
Answer:
(a) Propan – 2 – ol

Question 139.
Which of the following statement is correct?
(a) Phenol is less acidic than ethanol
(b) Phenol is more acidic than ethanol
(c) Phenol is more acidic than carboxylic acid
(d) Phenol is less acidic than carboxylic acid
Answer:
(b) Phenol is more acidic than ethanol

Question 140.
The reaction of ethylene glycol with Pl3 gives ………..
(a) CH2 = CHI
(b) ICH2 – CH2I
(c) CH2 = CH22
(d) CH = CH
Answer:
(a) CH2 = CHI

Question 141.
During dehydration of alcohols to alkenes by heating with Conc. H2SO4 ,the initiation step is ………..
(a) protonatlon of alcohol
(b) formation of carbocation
(c) elimination of water
(d) formation of carbanion
Answer:
(a) protonatlon of alcohol

Question 142.
Sodium phenoxide reacts with CO2 at 400 K and 4 – 7 bar pressure to give ………
(a) Sodium salicylate
(b) Salicylaldehyde
(c) Cate chol
(d) Pyrogallol
Answer:
(a) Sodium salicylate

Question 143.
The reaction of C2 H5OH with Cone. H2 SO4 does not give ………..
(a) Ethylene
(b) Diethyl ether
(c) Acetylene
(d) Ethyl hydrogen sulphate
Answer:
(c) Acetylene

Question 144.
Which of the following gives ketone on oxidation?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-118
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-119

Question 145.
Phenol is treated with Br2 /H2O and shaken well. The white precipitate formed during the process is …………
(a) m – bromo phenol
(b) 2,4 – dibromo phenol
(c) 2, 4, 6 – tribromo phenol
(d) 1, 2 – dibromo benzene
Answer:
(c) 2, 4, 6 – tribromo phenol

Question 146.
Which compound has the highest boiling point?
(a) Acetone
(b) Diethyl ether
(c) Methanol
(d) Ethanol
Answer:
(d) Ethanol

Question 147.
When phenol reacts with NH3 in the presence of ZnCl2 at 300°C, it gives ………..
(a) 1° amine
(b) 2° amine
(c) 3° amine
(d) Both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(a) 1° amine

Question 148.
Azo dyes are prepared from …………
(a) Aniline + Phenol
(b) Phenol + Phthalic anhydride
(c) Phenol + Benzene diazonium chloride
(d) Aniline + Phthalic anhydride
Answer:
(c) Phenol + Benzene diazonium chloride

Question 149.
A compound that easily undergoes bromination is ………….
(a) Phenol
(b) Toluene
(c) Benzene
(d) Diethyl ether
Answer:
(a) Phenol

Question 150.
When glycerol is treated with P2O5 (or) KHSO4 the product formed is ……….
(a) CH2 = CH – CH3
(b) CH2 = CH – CH2OH
(c) CH2 = CH – CHO
(d) CH2 = C = CH2
Answer:
(c) CH2 = CH – CHO

Question 151.
The ether that undergoes electrophilic substitution reactions is ………….
(a) CH3 – O – C2H5
(b) C6H5 – O – CH3
(c) C2H5 – O – C2H5
(d) CH3 – O – CH3
Answer:
(b) C6H5 – O – CH3

Question 152.
With anhydrous ZnCl2, ethylene glycol gives …………
(a) Formaldehyde
(b) Acetylene
(c) Acetaldehyde
(d) Dioxan
Answer:
(c) Acetaldehyde

Question 153.
Fats on alkaline hydrolysis give …………
(a) Oil + Soap
(b) Soap + Glycol
(c) Soap + Ester
(d) Soap + Glycerol
Answer:
(d) Soap + Glycerol

Question 154.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-120
B. in this reaction A and B are respectively
(a) Alkene, Alkyne
(b) Alkanal, Alkene
(c) Alkyne, Alkanal
(d) Alkyne, Alkene
Answer:
(b) Alkanal, Alkene

Question 155.
Oxygen atom in ether is …………
(a) very active
(b) replacable
(c) comparatively inert
(d) less active
Answer:
(c) comparatively inert

Question 156.
Chlorination of toluene in the presence of light and heat followed by treatment with aqueous NaOH gives ………….
(a) O – cresol
(b) P – cresol
(c) Phioroglucinol
(d) Benzyl alcohol
Answer:
(c) Phioroglucinol

Question 157.
Primary alcohols can be obtained from the reaction of RMgX with …………
(a) CO2
(b) HCHO
(c) CH3CHO
(d) H2O
Answer:
(b) HCHO

Question 158.
The dehydration of alcohol is an example of ………….
(a) Bimolecular elimination reaction
(b) Nucleophilic substitution reaction
(c) Unimolecular elimination reaction
(d) internal substitution reaction
Answer:
(c) Unimolecular elimination reaction

Question 159.
Ethanol is converted into Ethoxy ethane ………….
(a) by heating with cone. H2SO4 at 443 K
(b) by heating with conc. H2SO4 at 413 K
(c) by heating with excess oxygen
(d) by heating with hydrogen
Answer:
(b) by heating with conc. H2SO4 at 413 K

Question 160.
Which of the following is not the product of dehydration of
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-121
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-122
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-123

II. Fill in the blanks

  1. Cholesteryl alcohol commonly known as …………. is an important component in our ………….
  2. …………. the storage form of vitamin A, finds application in proper functioning of our eyes.
  3. Methanol s used as an …………. solvent.
  4. Isopropyl alcohol is used as …………. for injection.
  5. CH2CHOH is called as ………….
  6. An example of hexahydric alcohol is ………….
  7. The IUPAC name of glycerol is ………….
  8. The TUPAC name of Neopentyl alcohol is ………….
  9. The TUPAC name of CH2 CH – CHOH is ………….
  10. In methanol, the – OH group attached to …………. hybridised carbon atom.
  11. The bond angle C – OH in methanol is ………….
  12. alkyl halides undergo substitution by SN2 reaction whereas …………. and …………. alkyl halides undergo substitution by SN1 reaction.
  13. Addition of H2O to an unsymmetric alkene in the process of sulphuric acid follows ………….
  14. Nucleophilic addition of Grignard reagent to aldehydes/ketones take place in the presence …………. followed by acid hydrolysis gives .
  15. With RMgx …………., …………. gives l°alcohol.
  16. Butyl Magnesium bromide reacts with propanone to give ………….
  17. …………. is used to prepare a secondary alcohol with identical group.
  18. Hydroboration yields an …………. product.
  19. …………. is the best reagent to prepare unsaturated alcohol by reduction reaction of carbonyl compound.
  20. …………. occurs in natural fats and in long chain fatty acids in form of triglycerides.
  21. The alkaline hydrolysis of fats gives glycerol and the reaction is known as ………….
  22. In Lucas test …………. alcohol do not react at room temperature.
  23. In Victor Meyer’s test no colouration will be observed in case of ………….
  24. Alkyl halide formation from primary alcohol follows …………. mechanism.
  25. Alkyl halide formation from tertiary alcohol follows …………. mechanism.
  26. The reaction between methanol and thionyl chloride in the presence of pyridine follows…………. mechanism.
  27. …………. alcohols undergo dehydration by E2 mechanism whereas alcohols undergo dehydration by E1 mechanism.
  28. To stop the oxidation reaction of alcohol at aldehyde / ketone stage …………. is used as an oxidising agent.
  29.  In …………. oxidation dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) is used as an oxidising agent.
  30. The fermentation of food consumed by an animal produces …………..
  31. The detoxify the alcohol, the liver produces an enzyme called ………….
  32. …………. present in the animals act as an oxidising agent and …………. catalyses the oxidation of toxic alcohol into non-toxic aldehydes.
  33. Ethylene glycol, when heated to 773 K, it forms ………….
  34. The reagent used to convert ethane 1, 2 -diol to ethanal is ………….
  35. When Ethane – 1, 2 -diol is treated with conc.H2S04, it forms ………….
  36. The intermediate product formed when ethylene glycol is treated with periodic acid is ………….
  37. The final product formed when glycol reacts with periodic acid is ………….
  38. The IUPAC name of Acrolein (or) CH2 = CH – CHO is ………….
  39. Oxidation of glycerol with dilute nitric acid gives …………. and ………….
  40. Oxidation of glycerol with bismuth nitrate gives ………….
  41. Oxidation of glycerol with Fenton’s reagent gives ………….
  42. LTA is known as ………….
  43. Oxidation of glycerol with acidified KMnO4 gives ………….
  44. FeSO4 + H2O2 is called ………….
  45. …………. is used as a substitute for petrol under the name and used as fuel for aeroplane.
  46. …………. is used as an anti-freezer in automobile radiators.
  47. …………. is used as a sweetening agent in confectionery and beverages.
  48. …………. is used in the manufacture of transparent soap, printing ink and stamp pad ink.
  49. Glycerol is used in the manufacture of explosives like and by mixing with ………….
  50. Except …………. all other alcohols are weaker acid than water.
  51. The electron withdrawing groups such as – NO2, – Cl enhances the acidic nature of phenol especially when they are present at …………. positions.
  52. The LUPAC name of hydroxy quinol is ………….
  53. The IUPAC name of orcinol is ………….
  54. The other name of 1, 2, 3 – trihydroxy benzene is ………….
  55. The reaction of chioro benzene with aqueous NaOH to give phenol is known as ………….
  56. The product formed when benzene diazonium chloride is boiled with hot water is ………….
  57. The IUPAC name of curnene is ………….
  58. Phenol is converted to benzene on heating with ………….
  59. The acetylation and benzoylation of phenol are called ………….
  60. The reagent used in the conversion of phenol to 1, 4 – benzo quinone is ………….
  61. When phenol is treated with Conc.HNO3 and Conc.H2SO4, the product formed is ………….
  62. Phenol reacts with bromine water to give a precipitate of ………….
  63. The conversion reaction of phenol to salicylic acid is known as ………….
  64. The conversion reaction of phenol into salicylaldehyde is known as ………….
  65. The product formed when phenol is treated with phthalic anhydride in the presence of Conc.H2SO4 is ………….
  66. …………. dye is Ibmied when phenol couples with benzene diazonium chloride in an alkalin
    solution.
  67. Phenol gives …………. colouration with neutral FeCI3.
  68. Phenol formaldehyde is known as ………….
  69. The IUPAC name of tertiary butyl methyL ether is known as ………….
  70. C6H5O – CH2 – CH3 is known as ………….
  71. The mechanism take place when alkyl halide is treated with alcohol solution of sodiunalkoxide is ………….
  72. The dipole moment of diethyl ether is ………….
  73. The reaction take place when ethers are exposed to oxygen is ………….
  74. …………. is used as a surgical anesthetic agent in surgery.
  75. …………. is used as refrigerant.

Answer:

  1. cholesteroL, cell membrane
  2. Retinol
  3. industrial
  4. skin cleanser
  5. vinyl alcohol (or) ethenol
  6. Sorbitol
  7. propan – 1, 2, 3 – tnol,
  8.  2, 2 – ditnethyl propan – 1 – ol
  9. prop – 2 – en – 1 – ol
  10. sp3
  11. 108.9°
  12. 1°, 2°, 3°
  13. Markownikoff’s rule
  14. dry ether, alcohol
  15. formaldehyde, HCHO
  16. 2-methyl hexan – 2 – ol
  17. Formate ester
  18. Anti-Markownikoft’s
  19. LiAlH4
  20. Glycerol
  21. Saoinufucatuib
  22. Primary
  23. Tertiary alcohol
  24. SN2
  25. SN1
  26. SN2
  27. Pnmary, Tertiary
  28. pyridinium chlorochromate
  29. Swer
  30. alcohol
  31. alcohol dehydrogenase ALH
  32. NAD,ADH
  33. epoxide (or) 1,2-epoxy ethane (or) oxirane
  34. dil.H2SO (or) anhydrous ZnCI2
  35. 1,4 – dioxane
  36. cyclic periodate ester
  37. formaldehyde
  38. prop – 2 – enal
  39. glycenc acid, Tartronic acid
  40. Meso oxalic acid
  41. glycerose (or) a mixture of glyceraldehyde and dihydroxy acetone
  42. Lead tetra acetate
  43. Oxalic acid
  44. 44. Fenton’s reagent
  45. Ethanol, Power alcohol
  46. Ethylene glycol
  47. Glycerol
  48. Glycerol
  49. dynamite, cordite, china clay
  50. Methanol
  51. ortho and para
  52. 1, 2, 4 – trihydroxy benzene
  53. 3, 5 – dihydroxy toluene
  54. Pyrogallol
  55. Dows process
  56. Phenol
  57. 2 – phenyl propane
  58. Zinc dust
  59. Schotten-Baumann reaction
  60. acidified K2Cr2O7
  61. 2,4, 6 – trinitro phenol (or) Picric acid
  62. white, 2,4, 6-tribromo phenol
  63. Kolbe’s Schmitt reaction
  64. Riemer-Tiemann Reaction
  65. Phenol phthalein
  66. P-hydroxy azo benzene (or) Red orange dye
  67. Purple
  68. Bakelite
  69. 2-methoxy – 2 – methyl propane
  70. Phenatole (or) Ethoxy benzene
  71. SN2
  72. 1.18 D
  73. auto oxidation
  74. Diethyl ether
  75. Diethyl ether

III. Match the following Colum – I with Column – II ysubg tge cide guveb below.

Question 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-124
Answer:
(a) 3 4 1 2

Question 2.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-125
Answer:
(a) 2 4 1 3

Question 3.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-126
Answer:
(c) 4 3 2 1

Question 4.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-127
Answer:
(a) 3 1 4 2

Question 5.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-128
Answer:
(b) 4 3 1 2

Question 6.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-129
Answer:
(a) 3 1 4 2

Question 7.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-200
Answer:
(a) 3 1 4 2

Question 8.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-130
Answer:
(a) 2 3 4 1

Question 9.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-201
Answer:
(a) 3 4 1 2

Question 10.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-132
Answer:
(a) 2 3 4 1

Question 11.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-133
Answer:
(a) 3 1 4 2

Question 12.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-134
Answer:
(a) 2 3 4 1

Question 13.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-135
Answer:
(a) 2 3 4 1

Question 14.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-136
Answer:
(a) 4 1 2 3

Question 15.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-137
Answer:
(a) 3 1 4 2

Question 16.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-138
Answer:
(a) 4 1 2 3

Question 17.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-140
Answer:
(a) 4 3 1 2

IV. Assertion and reasons.

Question 1.
Assertion(A): P – nitro phenol is having lower pKa value than phenol.
Reason (R): The electron with drawing group – NO2 at para position enhances the acidic nature.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b)BothAand Rare wrong
(c) A is wrong but R is correct
(d) A is correct but R is wrong
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 2.
Assertion(A): Alcohols cannot be used as solvent for Grignard reagent.
Reason (R): Alcohols are decomposed by Grignard reagents to give alkane.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) A is correct but R is wrong
(c) A is wrong but R is correct
(d) Both A and R are correct but R is not correct explanation of A.
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 3.
Assertion(A): Phenols are soluble in alcohols.
Reason (R): Phenols are soluble in alcohol due to the formation of inter molecular hydrogen bonding.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are wrong .
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 4.
Assertion(A): Phenol is insoluble in NaHCO3 solution but acetic acid is soluble.
Reason (R): Phenols are weakly acidic and hence they dissolve only in strong base and insoluble in weak base like NaHCO3. But acetic acid is a stronger acid than phenol and so it is soluble in weak base NaHCO3.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and are correct
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 5.
Assertion(A): Glycol is more viscous than ethanol.
Reason (R): Glycol contains two hydroxyl groups and the inter molecular hydrogen bonding is made much stronger resulting in a polymeric structure. This leads to high viscosity than ethanol.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) Both A and R are wrong
(d) A is correct but R is wrong
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 6.
Assertion(A): Ethanol is a weaker acid than Phenol.
Reason (R): Sodium ethoxidc may be prepared by the reaction of ethanol with sodium metal but phenol reacts with NaOH.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R ¡s the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R ¡s the correct explanation of A

Question 7.
Assertion(A): Both alcohol and ether have higher boiling point.
Reason (R): Both are having intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are wrong
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(b) Both A and R are wrong

Question 8.
Assertion(A): Bond angle in ethers is slightly less than the tetra hedral angle.
Reason (R): There is a repulsion between the two bulkier R groups.
(a) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and arc wrong
(c) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(d) A is correct but R is wrong
Answer:
(c) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 9.
Assertion(A): P-nitro phenol is a stronger acid than o – nitro phenol.
Reason (R): Intra molecular hydrogen bonding in o – nitro phenol make it as a weaker acid.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and are wrong
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 10.
Assertion(A): Phenol is more reactive towards electrophilic substitution reaction.
Reason (R): In the case of phenol, the intermediate carbo cations is more resonance stabilized.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and are wrong
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 11.
Assertion(A): Phenol forms 2, 4, 6 – tribromo phenol on treatment with Br2 in CS2 at 273 K.
Reason (R): Bromine polarizes in CS2.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and are incorrect
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(b) Both A and are incorrect

Question 12.
Assertion(A): Phenol is more acidic than ethanol.
Reason (R): Phenoxide ion is more stable than ethoxide due to resonance.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 13.
Assertion(A): Boiling point of ethanol is higher in comparison to methoxy methane.
Reason (R): Ethanol is associated with inter molecular hydroxide bonding whereas in methoxy methane, inter molecular hydrogen bonding is not present.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) Both A and R are not correct
(d) A is correct but R is wrong
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 14.
Assertion(A): (CH3)3 C – O – CH3 on reaction with HI gives CH3OH and (CH3)3C – I as the main products and not (CH3)3 C – OH and CH3I.
Reason (R): (CH3)3 C + (Tertiary carbo cation) is more stable and reacts with HI to form (CH3)3 C – I as main product.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and are wrong
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 15.
Assertion(A): The bond angle (C – O – H) in methanol is reduced to 108.9° from the regular tetra hedral bond angle of 109.5°.
Reason (R): In methanol, two lone pairs of electrons are present in oxygen atom and due to lone pair – lone pair repulsion, the bond angle is reduced.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 16.
Assertion(A): LiAlH4 is the best reagent to prepare unsaturated alcohols from carbonyl compounds.
Reason (R): LiAlH4 does not reduce the carbon – carbon double bond present in the carbonyl carbon compound.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 17.
Assertion(A): Primary alcohols are more acidic than tertiary alcohol.
Reason (R): Alkyl groups (electron releasing group) increases the electron density on oxygen and decreases the polar nature of – OH bond. Hence it results in the decrease in acidity.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are not correct
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 18.
Assertion(A): P – cresol is less acidic than phenol.
Reason (R): Alkyl substituted phenols show a decreased acidity due to the electron releasing + I effect of alkyl group.
(a) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(c) Both A and R are wrong
(d) A is correct but R is wrong
Answer:
(b) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 19.
Assertion(A): O – nitro phenol is slightly soluble in water whereas P – nitro phenol is more soluble in water.
Reason (R): O – nitro phenol has intra molecular hydrogen bonding whereas P – nitro phenol has inter molecular hydrogen bonding.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and are wrong
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wiong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Question 20.
Assertion(A): Inter molecular dehydration of alcohol is not a suitable method of prepare mixed ethers.
Reason (R): When a mixture of two different alcohols are used, mixture of different ethers are formed and they are difficult to separate.
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is correct but R is wrong
(d) A is wrong but R is correct
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers 2 Mark Questions and Answers

V. Answer the following

Question 1.
Write the molecular formula and IUPAC name of the following compounds.

  1. Vinyl alcohol
  2. Sorbitol

Answer:
1. Vinyl alcohol
CH2 = CHOH
IUPAC name: Ethenol

2. Sorbitol
HO – CH2 – (CHOH)4 – CH2OH
IUPAC name : Hexan – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 – hexol

Question 2.
Write the structural formula of the following compounds.

  1. Prop – 2 – en – 1 – ol
  2. Prop – 3 – en – 1 – ol

Answer:
1. Prop – 2 – en – 1 – ol : CH2 = CH – CH2OH

2. Prop – 3 – en – 1 – oI :
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-141

Question 3.
Write the structural formula of the following compound.

  1. Phenyl methanol
  2. 2 – methyl – but – 3 – en – 2 – ol

Answer:
1. Phenyl methanol : C6H5 – CH2OH

2. 2 – methyl – but – 3 – en – 2 – ol :
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-142

Question 4.
Write the possible isomers for the formula

  1. C2H6O
  2. C3H8O

Answer:
1. C2H6O
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-143

2. C3H8O
(a) CH3 CH2 – CH2 OH : Propan – 1 – ol

(b) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-144
Propan – 1 – ol

(a) and (b) – Position isomerism
(a) and (c) – Functional isomerism

Question 5.
Explain about the structure of methanol.
Answer:
1. In methanol, one of the sp3 hybridised orbital of oxygen linearly overlap with the sp3 hybridised orbital of carbon to form a C – O, a bond and another sp3 hybridised orbitai linearly overlap with 1s orbital of hydrogen atom to form a O – H a bond.

2. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-145

3. The remaining two sp3 hybridised orbitais of oxygen are occupied by two lone pairs of electrons. Due to the lone pair – lone pair repulsion, the C – O – H bond angle in methanol is reduced to 108.9° from the regular tetrahedral bond angle of 109.5°.

Question 6.
Convert phenyl magnesium bromide to phenyl methanol (or) How would you prepare phenyl methanol from Grignard reagent?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-146

Question 7.
How will you prepare Butan-2-ol from ethanal? (or) Convert Ethyl Magnesium bromide into 2 – Butanol (or) Starting from acetaldehyde, how would you obtain butan – 2 – ol?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-147

Question 8.
Convert propanone into 2 – methyl – propan – 2 – ol.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-148

Question 9.
Starting from butyl magnesium bromide, how would you obtain 2 – methyl bexan – 2 – ol?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-149

Question 10.
What happens when methyl magnesium bromide reacts with ethl methanoate followed by acid hydrolysis?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-150

Question 11.
LiAlH4 is a best reagent to prepare unsaturated alcohol. Prove it.
Answer:
LiAIH4(Lithium Aluminium Hydride) does not reduce the carbon – carbon double bond present in the carbonyl compound and hence it is the best reagent to prepare unsaturated alcohol.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-151

Question 12.
Convert acetone into propan – 2 – ol.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-152

Question 13.
How would you get Benzyl alcohol from Benzoic acid.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-153

Question 14.
Starting from ethyl ethanoate, how would you prepare ethanol?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-154

Question 15.
How will you prepare 4 – alkyl – 4 – hydroxy butanoic acid?
Answer:
When two or more functional groups are present in a molecule a less vigorous sodium borohydride is used as a reducing agent to reduce the more reactive group. For example, if a compound contains both carbonyl and carboxyl group, NaBH4 reduces the carbonyl group.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-155

Question 16.
What is saponification? Explain with equation.
Answer:
The alkaline hydrolysis of fats gives glycerol and soap then the reaction is known as saponification.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-156

Question 17.
What happens when thionyl chloride is treated with methanol?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-157
The above reaction follows SN2 mechanism in the presence of pyridine.

Question 18.
Answer:
1. In Swern oxidation method, dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) is used as the oxidising agent and it converts alcohols to ketones / aldehydes.

2. When propan – 2 – ol is treated with DMSO and oxalyl chloride followed by the addition of triethylamine, it produces Propanone.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-158

Question 19.
Explain biological oxidation with an example.
Answer:
Biological oxidation is the fermentation of the food consumed by an animal produces alcohol. To detoxify the alcohol, the liver produces an enzyme called alcohol dehydrogenase (ADH). Nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide (NAD) present in the animals acts as a oxidising agent and ADH catalyses the oxidation of toxic alcohols into non-toxic aldehyde.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-159

Question 20.
What is esterificatloin? Explain with equation.
Answer:
Alcohols react with carboxylic acids in the presence of an acid to give esters. This reaction is known as Esterification.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-160

Question 21.
How would you convert ethylene glycol into ethene?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-161

Question 22.
Explain the action of conc.HNO3 and conc.H2SO4 with ethan – 1, 2 – diol.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-162

Question 23.
What happens when ethylene glycol is treated with periodic acid?
Answer:
Ethylene glycol on treatment with periodic acid gives formaldehyde. This reaction is selective for vicinal 1, 2 – diols and it proceeds through a cyclic periodate ester intermediate.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-163

Question 24.
How is glycerol reacts with fuming nitric acid? (or) How would you convert glycerol into nitroglycerine?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-164

Question 25.
What happens when conc.H2SO4 or KHSO4 is heated with glycerol?
Answer:
Dehydration:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-165

Question 26.
Mention the uses of methanol.
Answer:

  1. Methanol is used as a solvent for paints, varnishes, shellac, gums, cement, etc.
  2. Methanol is used in the manufacture of dyes, drugs, perfumes and formaldehyde.

Question 27.
What are the uses of ethylene glycol?
Answer:

  1. Ethylene glycol is used as an antifreeze in automobile radiator
  2. Its dinitrate is used as an explosive with DNG.

Question 28.
Write a note about acidity of aliphatic alcohols.
Answer:
1. According to Bronsted theory, an acid is defined as a proton donor and the acid strength is the tendency to give up a proton. Alcohols are similarly acidic when compared with water. Except methanol, all other alcohols are weaker acid than water. The Ka value for water is 1.8 x 10-16 where as for alcohols the Ka value in the order 10-18 to 10-16.

2. 2C2H5 – OH + 2Na → 2C2H5ONa + H2
This reaction explains the acidic nature of alcohol as it liberates H2 gas with Na metal.

Question 29.
Alcohol can act as Bronsted base. Prove this statement.
Answer:
Alcohols can also act as a Bronsted bases. It is due to the presence of unshared electron pairs on oxygen which make them to accept proton. So proton acceptor are Bronsted bases. i.e., alcohols are Bronsted bases.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-166

Question 30.
What are cresols? Give examples.
Answer:
Methyl Phenols are called cresols.
They are
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-167

Question 31.
How is phenol obtained from benzene suiphonic acid?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-168

Question 32.
How is Aniline converted into Phenol?
Answer:
Aniline is diazotized with nitrous acid (NaNO2 + HCI ) at 273 – 278K to give benzene diazonium chloride which on further treatment with hot water in the presence of mineral acid gives phenol.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-169

Question 33.
How will you convert phenol into benzene?
Answer:
Phenol is converted to benzene on heating with Zinc dust.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-170

Question 34.
What happens when phenol is heated with NH3?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-171

Question 35.
What happens when phenol is heated with acidified K2Cr2O7?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-172

Question 36.
How is phenol treated with Nickel?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-173

Question 37.
O – nitro phenol is slightly soluble ¡n water where as P-nitro phenol is more soluble. Cive reason.
Answer:
O-nitro phenol is slightly soluble in water and more volatile due to intra molecular hydrogen bonding, whereas P-nitro phenol is more soluble in water and less volatile due to intermolecular hydrogen bonding.

Question 38.
Explain Reimer Tiemann reaction.
Answer:
On treating phenol with CHCl3 / NaOH, a – CHO group is introduced at ortho position. This reaction proceeds through the formation of substituted benzal chloride intermediate.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-174

Question 39.
How is phenolphthalein prepared from phenol?
Answer:
On heating phenol with phthalic anhydride in presence of con.H2SO4, phenolphthalein is obtained,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-175

Question 40.
What is Coupling reaction? Give equation.
Answer:
Phenol couples with benzene diazonium chloride in an alkaline solution to form p-hydroxy azobenzene(a red orange dye).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-176

Question 41.
Write a note about the structure of ethereal oxygen.
Answer:
The structure of ethereal oxygen which is attached to two alkyl groups is similar to the structure of – OH group of alcohol. The oxygen atom is sp3 hybridized. Two sp3 hybridized orbitals of oxygen linearly overlap with two sp3 hybrid orbitais of the carbon which are directly attached to the oxygen forming two
C – O ‘σ’ bonds.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-177
The C – O – C bond angle is slightly greater than the tetrahedral bond angle due to the repulsive interaction between the two bulkier alkyl groups.

Question 42.
Write the structure and common name of

  1. Ethoxy benzene
  2. Phenoxy benzene

Answer:
1. C6H5 – O – CH2 – CH3 : Ethoxy benzene (or) Phenetole (or) Ethyl phenyl ether

2. C6H5 – O – C6H5 : Phenoxy benzene (or) Diphenyl ether (or) Phenyl ether

Question 43.
What happens when ethanol reacts with conc. H2SO4 Sulphuric acid at 413 K?
Answer:
When ethanol reacts with con.H2SO4 at 413 K, inter molecular dehydration take place and diethyl ether is formed as product.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-178

Question 44.
Explain the action of diazomethane with ethanol.
Answer:
Methyl ethers can be prepared when ethanol is treated with diazomethane in presence of fluoro boric acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-179

Question 45.
Ether are miscible with water. Justify this statement.
Answer:
1. Oxygen of ether can also form Hydrogen bond with water and hence they are miscible with water.

2. Ethers dissolve wide range of polar and non-polar substances.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-180

Question 46.
Ether bottle should not be kept open. Why?
Answer:
1. When ether bottle is kept open, they are exposed to atmospheric oxygen and slowly oxidised to form hydroperoxides and dialkyl peroxides. These are explosive in nature. Such a spontaneous oxidation by atmospheric oxygen is called autooxidation.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-181

Question 47.
Explain the action of hydrogen iodide with anisole (or) methoxy benzene. –
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-182

Question 48.
What are the uses of anisole?
Answer:

  1. Anisole is a precursor to the synthesis of perfumes and insecticide pheromones,
  2. It is used as a pharmaceutical agent.

Question 49.
Alcohols are comparatively more soluble in water than hydrocarbons of comparable molecular masses. Explain this fact.
Answer:
Alcohols can form H-bond with water molecules and break the H-bond already existing between the water molecules. Therefore, they are soluble in water.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-183
On the other hand hydrocarbons do not have the ability to form H-bond with water molecules. Hence they are insoluble in water.

Question 50.
Explain why is ortho nitrophenol more acidic than ortho methoxyphenol?
Answer:
Ortho nitrophenol is more acidic than ortho methoxyphenol because nitro group is an electron withdrawing and it will increase +ve charge on the oxygen atom to make it more acidic whereas – OCH3 group is an electron releasing group and it will decrease +ve charge on the oxygen atom, thus making it less acidic and hence the O – H bond will not break easily.

Question 51.
Give reason for the higher boiling point of ethanol in comparison to methoxymethane.
Answer:
Ethanol undergoes intermolecular H-bonding due to the presence of a hydrogen atom attached to the electronegative oxygen atom. As a result, ethanol exists as associated molecules.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-184
Consequently, a large amount of energy is required to break these hydrogen bonds. Therefore, the boiling point of ethanol is higher than that of methoxymethane which does not form H-bonds.

Question 52.
What happens when phenol is treated with ¡ce cold bromine dissolved in CS2?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-186

Question 53.
What happens when phenol is treated with excess of nitrating mixture? (Give equation only).
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-186

Question 54.
Describe the mechanism by which the hydroxyl group attached to an aromatic ring is more acidic than the hydroxyl group attached to an alkyl group. How does the presence of nitro group in phenol affects its acidic character?
Answer:
1. The reaction of phenol with aqueous sodium hydroxide solution indicates that phenol is a stronger acid than alcohols in water.

2. Because phenoxide ion formed is stabilised by resonance whereas alkoxide ion formed is destabilised by positive inductive effect of alkyl group.

3. Presence of electron withdrawing group such as nitro group enhances the acidic strength of phenol. lt is due to the effective delocalisation of the negative charge in phenoxide ion.

Question 55.
Give two reactions that show the acidic nature of phenol. Compare the acidity of phenol with that of ethanol.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-187

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers 3 Mark Questions and Answers

VI. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Give one example for each of the following with their structure and IUPAC name.

  1. 1° alcohol
  2. 2° alcohol
  3. 3° alcohol

Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-188

Question 2.
Write the structure of the following compounds.

  1. Phenyl methanol
  2. 1 – Phenyl ethanol
  3. 2 – Phenyl propan – 2 – ol

Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-189

Question 3.
Write the structures and IUPAC names of the following compounds.

  1. Tertiary butyl alcohol
  2. Neopentyl alcohol
  3. Isobutyl alcohol

Answer:
1. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-190
2 – methyl propan – 2 – ol (Tertiary butyl alcohol)

2. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-191
2, 2 – dimethyl propan – 1 – ol (Neopentyl alcohol)

3. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-192
2 – methyl propan – 1- ol (Isobutyl alcohol)

Question 4.
Draw the structures and write the IUPAC name of the following compounds.

  1. Benzyl alcohol
  2. Allyl alcohol
  3. Cyclohexyl alcohol

Answer:
1. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-193
Phenyl methanol (Benzyl alcohol)

2. CH2 = CH – CH2OH  Prop – 2 – en – 1 – ol (Allyl alcohol)

3. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-194
Cyclo hexanol (Cyclohexyl alcohol)

Question 5.
Describe Lucas test used to distinguish Primary, Secondary and Tertiary alcohols.
Answer:
When alcohols are treated with Lucas agent (conc. HCI + anhydrous ZnCl2) at room temperature, tertiary alcohols react immediately to form a turbidity due to the formation of alkyl chloride which is insoluble in the medium. Secondary alcohols react within 10 minutes to form a turbidity of alkyl chloride where primary alcohols do not react at room temperature.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-195

Question 6.
Explain the mechanism of the reaction of alkyl halide formation from primary alcohol.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-196

Question 7.
Explain SN1 mechanism of Tertiary alcohols reaction with HBr.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-197

Question 8.
Explain the mechanism involved in the reaction of phosphorous trichloride with Ethanol. SN2 reaction of Ethanol with PCl3
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-198

Question 9.
Describe Saytzeff’s rule with example.
Answer:
1. During intramolecular dehydration, if there is a possibility to form a carbon – carbon double bond at different locations, the preferred location is the one that gives the more (highly) substituted alkene i.e., the stable alkene.

2. For example, the dehydration of 3, 3 – dimethyl – 2 – butanol gives a mixture of alkenes. The secondary carbocation formed in this reaction undergoes rearrangement to form a more stable tertiary carbocation.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-199

Question 10.
Explain the following reactions.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-202
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-203

Question 11.
Explain about catalytic dehydrogenation of 10, 20 and 30 alcohols
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-204

Question 12.
Describe about the oxidation reaction of ethylene glycol with dilute nitric acid.
Answer:
When dilute nitric acid (or) alkaline KMnO4 is used as the oxidizing agent, the following products are formed.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-205

Question 13.
Explain about the oxidation reaction of Glycerol with different oxidising reagents.
Answer:

  1. Oxidation of glycerol with dii. FINO3 gives glyceric acid and tartronic acid.
  2. Oxidation of glycerol with Conc. HNO3 gives mainly glyceric acid.
  3. Oxidation of glycerol with bismuth nitrate gives as meso oxalic acid.
  4. Oxidation of glycerol with Br2 /H2O (or) NaOBr (or) Fenton reagent (FeSO4 + H2O2)
  5. gives a mixture of glyceraldehyde and dihydroxy acetone(glycerose).
  6. On oxidation with HIO4 or Lead tetra acetate (LTA) it gives formaldehyde and formic acid.
  7. Acidified KMnO4 oxidises glycerol into oxalicacid.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-206

Question 14.
What are the uses of ethanol.
Answer:

  1. Ethanol is used as an important beverage.
  2. It is also used in the preparation of
    • Paints and varnishes
    • Organic compounds like ether, chloroform, iodoform, etc.,
    • Dyes, transparent soaps.
  3. As a substitute for petrol under the name power alcohol used as fuel for aeroplane.
  4. It is used as a preservative for biological specimens.

Question 15.
Mention the uses of Glycerol.
Answer:

  1. Glycerol is used as a sweetening agent in confectionery and beverages.
  2. It is used in the manufacture of cosmetics and transparent soaps.
  3. It is used in making printing inks and stamp pad ink and lubricant for watches and clocks.
  4. It is used in the manufacture of explosive like dynamite and cordite by mixing it with china clay.

Question 16.
Compare the acidity of 1°, 2° and 3° alcohols.
Answer:
1. The acidic nature of the alcohol is due to the polar nature of O – H bond. When an electron withdrawing -I groups such as – Cl, – F etc… is attached to the carbon bearing the OH group, it withdraws the electron density towards itself and thereby facilitating the proton donation.

2. In contrast, the electron releasing group such as alkyl group increases the electron density on oxygen and decreases the polar nature of 0 – H bond, I lence it results in the decrease in acidity.

3. On moving from primary to secondary and tertiary alcohols, the number of alkyl groups which attached to the carbon bearing -OH group increases, which results in the following order of acidity.
1°alcohol > 2° alcohol > 3° >alcohol

For example
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-207

Question 17.
What are dihydric phenols? Give three examples.
Answer:
When benzene ring has 2 – OH groups, it is called Dihydric phenol.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-208

Question 18.
What are Trihydric phenols. Give example.
Answer:
When 3 – OH groups are present in benzene ring, it is called trihydric phenol.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-209

Question 19.
Write the possible isomers for the formula C7H8O with their names C7H8O
Answer:
1. C6H5 – CH2OH : Benzyl alcohol

2. C6H5 – O – CH3 : Anisole

3. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-210

4. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-211

5. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-212

Question 20.
Explain about the bromination of phenol.
Answer:
1. Phenol reacts with bromine water to give a white precipitate of 2, 4, 6 – tri bromo phenol.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-213

2. When phenol reacts with Br2 in the presence of CS2 or CCl4 at 278K. a mixture of ortho and para bromo phenols are formed.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-214

Question 21.
Differentiate phenols from alcohol.
Answer:
Test to differentiate alcohols and phenols:
1. Phenol react with benzene diazonium chloride to form a red orange dye, but ethanol has no reaction with it.

2. Phenol gives purple colouration with neutral feme chloride solution, alcohols do not give such coloration with FeCI3.

3. Phenol reacts with NaOH to give sodium phenoxide. Ethyl alcohol does not react with NaOH

Question 22.
What are the uses of phenol?
Answer:

  1. About half of world production of phenol is used for making phenol formaldehyde resin. (Bakel ite).
  2. Phenol is a starting material for the preparation of
    • drugs such as phenacetin, Salol, aspirin, etc.
    • phenolphthalein indicator.
    • explosive like picric acid.
  3. It is used as an antiseptic – carbolic lotion and carbolic soaps.

Question 23.
Write the structure formula and IUPAC name of the following.

  1. n – heptyl phenyl ether
  2. Isopentyl phenyl ether
  3. Dimethyl glycolate

Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-215

Question 24.
ExplaIn about the mechanism of intermolecular dehydration of ethanol with conc.H2SO4 at 413 K.
Answer:
When ethanol reacts with conc.H2SO4 at 413 K, inter molecular dehydration takes place and the product formed is Ethoxy ethane.
Mechanism:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-216

Question 25.
Explain about the mechanism involved in Williamson’s synthesis.
Answer:
When an alkyl halide is heated with an alcoholic solution of sodium alkoxide, the corresponding ether is formed. This reaction involves SN2 mechanism.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-217
Mechanism:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-218

Question 26.
Explain the mechanism involved in the reaction between Tertiary alkyl halide and primary alkoxide with eample.
Answer:
When tertiary alkyl halide reacts with primary alkoxide, elimination dominates and succeeds over substitution to form an alkene.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-219

Question 27.
Explain about the reaction mechanism of methoxy ethane with HI.
Answer:
Ethers can undergo nucleophilic substitútion reactions with HI.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-220

Ethers having primary alkyl group undergo SN2 reaction whereas tertiary alkyl ether undergo SN1 reaction. Protonation of ether is followed by the attack of halide ion. The halide ion preferentially attacks the less sterically hindered of the two alkyl groups which are attached etherial oxygen.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-221

Question 28.
What are the uses of diethyl ether.
Answer:

  1. Diethyl ether is used as a surgical anesthetic agent in surgery.
  2. It is a good solvent for organic reactions and extraction.
  3. It is used as a volatile starting fluid for diesel and gasoline engine.
  4. It is used as a refrigerant.

Question 29.
Classify the following as primary secondary and tertiary alcohols.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-222
Answer:
Primary alcohols:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-223

Secondary alcohols:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-224

Tertiary alcohols:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-225

Question 30.
Name the following compounds according to IUPAC system.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-226
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-227
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-228

Question 31.
Show how are the following alcohols prepared by the reaction of a suitable Grignard reagent on methanal?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-229
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-230

Question 32.
You are given benzene, conc H2SO4 and NaOH. Write the equations for the preparation of phenol using these reagents.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-231

Question 33.
How will you convert ethanol to acetone ?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-232

Question 34.
How are the following conversions carried out?

  1. Phenol to Toluene
  2. Ethanol to 1, 1 – dichloroethane.

Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-233

Question 35.
How are the following conversions carried out ? (Write the reactions and conditions in each case):

  1. Ethanol to 2 – propanol
  2. Phenol to Acetophenone

Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-234

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers 5 Mark Questions and Answers

II. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Explain Victor Meyer’s test used to distinguish 1°, 2° and 3° alcohols.
Answer:
Victor Meyer’s test :
This test is based on the behaviour of nitro alkanes formed by the three types of alcohols with nitrous acid and it consists of the following steps.

  1. Alcohols are converted into alkyl iodide by treating with I2/P.
  2. Alkyl iodides so formed is then treated with AgNO2 to form nitro alkane.
  3. Nitro alkanes are finally treated with HNO2 (mixture of NaNO2/HCl) and the resultant solution is made alkaline with KOH.

Result:

  1. Primary alcohol gives red colour
  2. Secondary alcohol gives blue colour.
  3. No colouration will be observed in tertiary alcohol.

1° alcohol:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-235

2°alcohol:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-236

3°alcohol:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-237

Question 2.
Write the possible isomers for the formula C4H10O, write their IUPAC names and structures.
Answer:
C4H10O – 7 Isomers
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-238

Question 3.
Explain about mechanism involved in the dehydration of tertiary alcohols.
Answer:
Tertiary alcohols undergo dehydration by E1 mechanism. It involves the formation of a carbocation.
Step 1:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-239

Step 2:
Dissociation of oxonium ion to form a carbocation
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-240

Step 3:
Deprotonation of carbocation to form an alkene
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-241

Question 4.
Explain about the various dehydration reactions of ethylene glycol.
Answer:
Ethylene glycol undergoes dehydration reaction under different conditions to form different products.
1. When ethylene glycol is heated to 773K, it forms epoxides.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-242

2. When heated with dilute sulphuric acid (or) anhydrous ZnCl2 under pressure in a sealed tube, it gives acetaldehyde.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-243

3. When distilled with Conc. H2SO4, glycol forms 1, 4 – dioxane
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-244

Question 5.
Explain the following reactions.

  1. Schotten-Baumann reaction
  2. Kolbe’s reaction
  3. Reimer – Tiemann reaction

Answer:
1. Schotten – Baumann reaction:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-245

2. Kolbe’s reaction:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-246

3. Reimer – Tiemann reaction.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-247

Question 6.
Describe the following electrophilic substitution reaction using phenol.

  1. Nitrosation
  2. Nitration
  3. Sulphonation

Answer:
1. Nitrosation:
Phenol can be readily nitrosoated at low temperature with nitrous acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-248

2. Nitration:
Phenol can be nitrated using 20% nitric acid at room temperature, a mixture of ortho and para nitro phenols are formed.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-249

3. Phenol when treated with Conc.HNO3 and Conc.H2SO4, picric acid is formed.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-250

4. Sulphonation:
Phenol when reacts with Conc.H2SO4 at 280K, o – phenol suiphonic acid is formed as major product. But when the reaction is carried out at 313K, the major product is p – phenol suiphonic acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-251

Question 7.
What happens when diethyl ether reacts with following reagents.

  1. excess O2
  2. Cl2 / light
  3. PCI5
  4. dil.H2SO4 / H2O
  5. CH2COCI /Anhydrous ZnCI2.

Answer:
Auto – oxidation:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-252

Question 8.
Explain the aromatic electrophilic substitution reactions of anisole with equations. Aromatic electrophilic substitution reactions:
Answer:
1. Halogenation:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-253

2. Nitration.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-254

3. Friedel Craft’s alkylation.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-256

4. Friedel Craft’s acylation.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-255

Question 9.
Starting from phenol, how would you prepare the following compounds.

  1. Benzene
  2. Aniline
  3. Anisole
  4. 1, 4, benzoqulnone
  5. Cyclohexanol

Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-257

Question 10.
A compound ‘A’ with molecular formula C4H10O is unreactive towards sodium metal. it does not add Bromine water and does not react with NaHSO3 solution. On refluxing ‘A’ with excess of HI, it gives ‘B’ which reacts with aqueous NaOH to form ‘C’. ‘C’ can be converted into ‘B’ by reacting with red P and I3. ‘C, on treating with conc. H2SO4 forms ‘D’. ‘D’ decolounses bromine water. Identify A to D and write the reactions involved.
Answer:

‘A’ is not an alcohol therefore it does not react with sodium metal. ‘A’ is also not an aldehyde or a ketone as it does not react with NaHSO3. ‘A’ is not an unsaturated hydrocarbon as it does not add Br2 (aq). So, it is likely to be a ether.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-258

Question 11.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C2H6O on reaction with conc.H2SO4 at 443 K gives an unsaturated hydrocarbon (B). (B) on reaction with Baeyer’s reagent produces (C) of molecular formula C2H6O2. (C) on reaction with anhydrous ZnCI2 produces (D) of molecular formula C2H4O. (D) reduces Tollen’s reagent. Identify A, B, C and D and explain the reactions involved.
Answer:
1. An organic compound (A) reacts with Conc.H2SO4 at 443 K produces ethene by intermolecular dehydration. So, (A) is ethanol – CH3CH2OH.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-259

2. Ethene on reaction with Baeyer’s reagent (cold, dilute alkaline KMnO4) produces ethylene glycol as product (C).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-260

3. Ethylene glycol on reaction with anhydrous ZnCI2 dehydration and tautomerisation take place to give actaldehyde as product (D).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-261

Question 12.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C2H6O liberates H2 gas with metallic sodium and gives (B). (B) on reaction with methyl bromide produces (C) of molecular formula C3H8O. (C) on reaction with excess III produces (D) and (E). Identify A, B, C, D and E and explain the reactions involved.
Answer:
1. An organic compound (A) reacts with Na metal and liberates H2 gas means it must be an alcohol. From the molecular formula it is identified as ethanol – CH3 – CH2OH (A).

2. Ethanol on reaction with Na metal to produce sodium ethoxide as (B) with liberation of H2 gas.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-262

3. Sodium ethoxide on reaction methyl bromide undergo Williamson’s synthesis to produce methoxy ethane as (C).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-263

4. Methoxy ethane on reaction with excess HI will give Ethyl iodide and Methyl iodide as (D) and (E).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-264

Question 13.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula CH4O on mild oxidation gives (B) of formula CH2O that reduces tollen’s reagent. (B) on reaction with methyl magnesium bromide followed by acid hydrolysis will give (C) of molecular formula C2H6O which liberates H2 gas with metallic sodium. Identify A, B, C and explain the reactions involved.
Answer:
1. (A) is identified from the molecular formula as methanol (CH3OH).

2. CH3OH – methanol on mild oxidation will give formaldehyde as (B). Aldehydes reduce Tollen’s reagent to silver mirror. So, (B) is HCHO (methanal)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-265

3. Formaldehyde reacts with CH3MgBr, followed by acid hydrolysis produces primary alcohol and (C) is identified from the formula as CH3 – CH2OH – Ethanol. Ethanol liberates H2 gas with metallic sodium.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-266

Question 14.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C2H6O reacts with metallic Na and liberates H2 gas. (A) on mild oxidation with Cu at 573 K gives (B) of molecular formula C2H4O. (B) on reaction with methyl magnesium bromide followed by acid hydrolysis gives (C) of molecular formula C3H5O. (C) gives Blue colour in Victor Meyer’s test. (C) on mild oxidation with Cu at 573 K gives (D) of formula C3H6O. identify A, B, C, D and
explain the reactions.
Answer:
1. An organic compound (A) reacts with Na metal and liberates H2 gas means it must be alcohol. From the molecular formula it is identified as Ethanol (CH3 – CH2OH).

2. Ethanol on oxidation with Cu at 573 K undergoes catalytic dehydrogenation and produces Acetaldehyde as product (B).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-267

3. Acetaldehyde on reaction with CH3MgBr followed by hydrolysis will give Isopropyl alcohol as (C).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-268

4. Propan – 2 – ol is secondary alcohol and so it gives blue colour in Victor Meyer’s test. (C) on reaction with Cu at 573 K will give Propanone as (D).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-269

Question 15.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C3H8O gives blue colour in Victor Meyer’s test. (A) on reaction with Cu at 573 K gives (B) which further reacts with Methyl magnesium bromide followed by acid hydrolysis yields (C) of molecular formula C4H10O. (C) on reaction with Cu at 573 K gives (D) of formula C4H8. Identify A, B, C, D and explain the reactions involved.
Answer:
1. An organic compound gives blue colour in Victor Meyer’s test means it must be a secondary alcohol. From the formula, it is identified as
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-270 Propan – 2- ol (A)

2. Propan – 2 – ol on reaction with Cu at 573 K gives Propanone as (B).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-271

3. Propanone on treatment with CH3MgBr followed by acid hydrolysis will yield Tertiary butyl alcohol (CH3)3C – OH as (C).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-272

4. Tertiary butyl alcohol on reaction with copper at 573 K undergoes dehydration reaction to
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-273

Question 16.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C3H6 on reaction with Conc. H2SO4 and H2O gives ClH5O as (B) as a MarkownikoWs product. (B) on oxidation with Cu at 573 K gives (C) of formula C3H6O. (C) on reaction with CH3MgBr followed by acid hydrolysis yields (D) as C4H10O which will not give any colour in Victor Meyer’s test. Identify A, B, C, D and explain the reactions involved.
Answer:
1. An organic compound (A) is identified from the molecular formula as CH3 – CH = CH2 propene.

2. Propene on hydrolysis in acid medium, Markownikoff’s rule is followed and the product formed is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-274 Propan – 2- ol as (B)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-275

3. Propan – 2 – ol on reaction with Cu at 573 K undergoes dehydrogenation reaction to produce Propanone as (C).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-276

4. Propanone on reaction with CH3MgBr followed by acid hydrolysis gives tertiary butyl alcohol (D). It will not give any colouration in Victor Meyer’s test.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-277

Question 17.
An aromatic compound (A) of molecular formula C6H5Cl on reaction with aqueous NaOH gives (B) of formula C6H60 that give violet colouration with neutral FeCI3. (B) on reaction with ammonia in presence of anhydrous ZnCI2 gives (C) of formula C6H7N. Identify A, B, C and explain the reactions.
Answer:
1. An aromatic compound (A) of molecular formula C6H5Cl is identified as chioro benzene.

2. Chioro benzene on reaction with aqueous NaOH produces phenol as (B).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-278

3. Phenol gives violet colour with neutral FeCI3. Phenol on treated with NH3 in the presence of anhydrous ZnCl2 gives Aniline as (C).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-279

Question 18.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C6H6O gives white precipitate with bromine water. (A) on reaction with NaOH gives (B). (B) reacts with methyl iodide in presence of dry ether gives (C) of molecular formula C7H8O which will not liberate H2 gas with metallic Na. (C) on reaction with acetvl chloride gives (D) and (E) of formula which are position isomers. Identify A, B, C, D & E and explain the reaction.
Answer:
1. An organic compound gives white precipitate with bromine water means it must be a phenol. From the molecular formula it is identified as C6H5OH.

2. Phenol on reaction with NaOH gives (B) as sodium phenoxide C6H5ONa.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-280

3. Sodium phenoxide on reaction with methyl iodide in the pressure of dry ether undergo Williamsons synthesis and gives Anisole as (C).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-281

4. Anisole on reaction with acetyl chloride undergoes Fnedel Craft’s acetylation and yield O – methoxy acetophenone and p-methoxy acetophenone as (D) and (E).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-282
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-283

Question 19.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C6H5CI on reaction with aqueous NaOH gives (B) of formula C6H6O. (B) on reaction with NaOH gives (C) of formula C6H5ONa. (C) on treatment with CO2, followed by acid hydrolysis yield (D) of formula C7H6O3 an aromatic hydroxy acid. Identify A, B, C, D and explain the reactions involved.
Answer:

  1. (A) is identified from the formula as C6H5CI – Chloro benzene.
  2. Chloro benzene on treatment with aqueous NaOH yeilds C6H5OH – phenol as (B).
  3. Phenol on reaction with NaOH produces sodium phenoxide C6H5ONa as (C).
  4. Sodium phenoxide on reaction with CO2, followed acid hydrolysis, Kolbe’s reaction takes place to give Salicylic acid as (D).

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-284

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-285

Question 20.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C6HN2Cl on boiling with hot water gives (B) of molecular formula C6H6O. (B) on reaction with Zinc dust gives (C) a simplest aromatic hydrocarbon. (C) on reaction with methyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous AICI2 gives (D) of molecular formula C7H8. Identify A, B, C, D and explain the reaction.
Answer:
1. (A) is identified from the formula as Benzene diazonium chloride – C6H5N2Cl.

2. Benzene diazonium chloride when boiled with hot water produces phenol as (B).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-286

3. Phenol on reaction with Zinc dust gives Benzene as (C) which is simplest aromatic hydrocarbon.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-287

4. Benzene on treatment with (C) methyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3, Friedel Crafts reaction take place and the product formed is Toluene as (D).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-288

Question 21.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C6H6O gives violet colour with neutral FeCI3. (A) reacts benzene diazoniurn chloride in basic medium to give (B) as an azo dye. (A) reacts with acidified K2Cr2O7 gives (C) of formula C6H4O2. (A) on reaction with H2 in the presence of nickel gives (D) of formula C6H12O. Identify A, B, C, D and explain the reaction involved.
Answer:
1. (A) of molecular formula C6H6O gives violet colour with neutral FeCI3 means it must be Phenol – C6H5OH.

2. Phenol couples with benzene diazonium chloride in the presence of basic medium to produce p-hydroxy azo benzene, a red orange dye as (B).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-289

3. Phenol on reaction with acidified K2Cr2O7 undergoes oxidation reaction to give 1, 4 – benzo quinone as (C).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-290

4. Phenol on reaction with H2, in the presence of Nickel gives cyclohexanol as (D).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-291
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-292

Question 22.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C6H6 reacts with propylene in the presence of H3PO4 at 532 K gives (B) of formula C9H12 . (B)on air oxidation gives C9H12O2 as (C). (C) on acidification with H2SO4 gives (D) of formula C6H6O and (E) of formula C3H6O. Identify A, B, C, D and E and explain the reactions.
Answer:
1. (A) is identified as benzene from the molecular formula.

2. Benzene reacts with propylene in the presence of H3PO4 gives cumene as (B).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-293

3. Cumene on air oxidation produces cumene hydroperoxide as (C).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-294

4. Cumene hydroperoxide on treatement with H2SO4 yield phenol as (D) and acetone as (E).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-295
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-296

Question 23.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C2H6O reacts P/I2 gives (B) which on further reaction with silver nitrite gives (C) of formula C2H5NO2. (C) on treatment with nitrous acid yield (D) of formula C2H4N2O3. (D) on reaction with KOH give red color product (E). Identify A, B, C, D and E. From the final product (E) red colour product, it is identified these reactions are the reactions of primary alcohols in Victor Meyer’s test.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-297

Question 24.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C3HO on reaction P/I2 gives C3H7I as (B). (B) on reaction with AgNO2 produces (C) with formula C3H7NO2. (C) on reaction with nitrous acid gives (D) of molecular formula C3H6N2O3. (D) on reaction with KOH produces blue colour. Identify A, B. C, D and explain the reaction.
Answer:
From the final colour blue, this reaction are considered as reactions of secondary alcohol in Victory Meyer’s. (A) is identified as Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-298 2 – propanol.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-299

Question 25.
An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C4H10O gives no colouration in Victor Meyer’s test. (A) on reaction with P / I2 gives (B) of formula C4H9I. (B) on treatment with nitrous acid gives (C) of formula C3H9NO2. (C) does not react with KOH. Identify A, B, C and explain.
Answer:
C4H10O gives no colouration in Victor Meyer’s test means it must be tertiary alcohol. So (A) is tertiary butyl alcohol. The reactions involved are,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-300

Common Errors

  1. Writing IUPAC names may be difficult and students may get confused.
  2. Primary, Secondary and Tertiary alcohols functional groups may get confused. Phenol, aromatic alcohols are differenet.
  3. Benzene ring should be drawn properly.
  4. Skeleton carbon chain may be a problem to students.

Rectifications

1. Parent hydrocarbon – longest carbon chain. Lowest number of the carbon having functional group. Arrangement of substitutents in alphabetical order. Alcohol – Name should end in the word ol.

2. Primary alcohol – CHI2OH, Secondary alcohol > CHOH, Tertiary alcohol > COH – OH gp/ directly attached to benzene ring is
Phenol Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-301
It is not aromatic alcohol
– OH gp/ is attached to the side chain of the benzene ring is an aromatic alcohol.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-302
Benzyl alcohol

3. Altemat double bond along with regular hexagon is ben zeane.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-303 Benzene (C6H6) If you draw the above structure without double bonds, it is cyclo hexane.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-304 Cyclohexane (C6H12)

4. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-305
CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CH3
n-heptane
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers-306
CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH = CH2
Pent – 1 – ene

Hope you love the Samacheer Kalvi 12th Chemistry Chapter Wise Material. Clearly understand the deep concept of Chemistry learning with the help of Tamilnadu State Board 12th Chemistry Chapter 11 Hydroxy Compounds and Ethers Questions and AnswersPDF. Refer your friends to and bookmark our website for instant updates. Also, keep in touch with us using the comment section.